NIT196 Volume II

GOA STATE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT
CORPORATION LIMITED
7th Floor, ‘EDC House’, Dr. Atmaram Borkar Road, Panaji, Goa
Tel :(0832)-6645769 to 6645773, Fax:(0832)-2226256
Email – email@gsidcltd.com Website – http://www.gsidcltd.com
TENDER DOCUMENT
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME – II
“CONSTRUCTION OF KALABHAVAN AT SANCOALE,-BALANCE WORK & ANCILLIARY WORKS”
PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONSULTANT

M/S STRUCTWEL DESIGNERS & CONSULTANTS PVT. LTD
STRUCTWEL, Plot NO – 15, Sector 24,
Off Sion-Panvel Highway, Turbhe,
Navi Mumbai – 400705,
Phone – (022) 2784 1010 (7 Lines)
Fax – 91-22-2784 1007
GOA STATE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION LIMITED
“Construction of Kala Bhavan at Sancoale-Balance Work & Ancilliary Works” - 2nd Call
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER NO. 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER NO. 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section A - Dismantling and Demolition work
Section B – Site Clearing and Grubbing
Section C – Earthwork & Metal packing and Subsurface Drainage
Section D – Concrete: Plain & Reinforced
Section E – Form Work
Section F – Reinforcement
Section G – Structural Steel work
Section H – Masonry Works
Section I – Plastering & Pointing works
Section J – White washing, colour washing, Distempering, Painting
Section K - Flooring
Section L – Carpentry, Joinery, Aluminium Doors & Windows
Section M – Roof, side cladding.
Section N – Water proofing
Section O – Plumbing, Drainage, Water supply (Sanitation)
Section P – Road work, Soil stabilization, WBM Road, Bituminous Road &
Block Paving
Section Q -Electrical works
Section R - Fire fighting works
Section S- HVAC works
Section T – Theater & Stage & Stage Equipment.
Section U- CCTV Surveillance System
Section V- Audio Video System
CHAPTER NO 3 LIST OF APPROVED MAKES /BRANDS AND MANUFACTURERS
BIDDER Page 2 of 305 EMPLOYER

CHAPTER 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

The specifications contained herein are general in nature and as such only the specifications relating to execution
of work shall hold good. The contractor shall bear in mind the instructions given in the Tender Documents while
referring these specifications.
1.1.1 Abbreviations :
In the Technical Specifications as well as the Schedule of Quantities, the following abbreviations have been used.
The abbreviation - Shall mean
Cum/Cu.M - Cubic Meters

Sqm/Sq.M - Square Meters
Rmtr/Rmt/Rm - Running Meters
Nos/Each - For Each
Qtl - Quintal
1.1.2 Terminology :
The terms - Shall mean
Approval or approved - Approval by the Consultant/Client
As directed - As directed by the Consultant/Client
1.1.3 Rates :
The bidders/contractors should visit the site before bidding/quoting rates.The rates quoted, shall be for
all the works shown on drawings and covered under the battery limit for individual item, irrespective of fact
whether they are specifically mentioned or otherwise.
The rates quoted shall be inclusive of all works whether specified or otherwise and which is required for
satisfactory execution of the Item. The rates quoted will be inclusive of all including any material( except
for materials already procured for the project on site), Machine Parts, accessories required for making
the work complete or making the machine/system completely operational, testing and
commissioning. In case of doubt it should be got clarified before quoting/bidding.
In case there are any details of construction or requirement of materials, which have not been reflected to in the
specifications, detailed description of items, the Schedule of Quantities, or on the drawings, but which are useful
or essential in true completion of the work, then the same shall be deemed to have been included in the
rate/s quoted by the contractor.
Any claim from contractors on any or all of the above will not be entertained.
Site Clearance :
Before starting the work, the site shall be cleared of all shrubs, grass and other vegetation including large and
small bushes, all tree stumps, removal of roots, cutting and disposal of trees up to 300mm girth etc. (The girth
shall be measured at a height of 1.5 metres above GL). The site if found uneven, up to a height difference of
1.00m, shall be levelled to a plain topography.
The contractor shall make himself familiar with the local rules and regulations pertaining to land clearance
environmental aspects including special requirements of forest areas, wherever applicable and the work shall be
carried out in strict accordance therewith.

Specific Instructions :
The contractor should take all kind of approval way before procuring of any kind of material. All the documents
required, such as technical data sheet, shade cards, brand names, samples etc. for approval should be produce
during approvals. The items approved should be preserved by the contractor till the handing over of the
project.
The contractor shall independently survey the entire plot/ project and ascertain the dimensions and levels of the
plot/ internal elements etc. and submit and take approval from the Consultant before commencement of actual
setting.
The contractor shall maintain and provide on the site at all times, high precision surveying instruments like
Dumpy level, theodolite (one or two second theodolite) and total station and carry out the survey of entire plot
and setting out of works, building lines & levels, etc., with the help of high precision instruments only.
The contractor shall provide at his own cost all labour, pegs, strings and other materials as may be required for
line out and setting out the work.
All levels referred to in connection with these works shall be based on local Benchmarks. The contractor shall
protect and preserve all Benchmarks used in setting out the works till the Consultant directs its removal.
The contractor shall be responsible for the accurate setting out of the works in relation to original points, lines
and levels of reference given by the Consultant. The checking of any line or level by the Consultant shall not in
any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy thereof.
If, at any time during the execution of the works, any error appears in the position, levels, dimensions or
alignment of any part of the works on being required so to do by the Consultant, the contractor shall at his own
cost rectify such error to the satisfaction of the Consultant.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the particular specifications for various items of work.
The Contractor shall carefully acquaint himself with the general specifications, co-ordinate the same with any
other specifications forming a part of the Contract Document and determine his contractual obligations for
the execution of various items of work in accordance with good engineering practice.
1.2 Reference to the Standard Codes of Practice :

1 All Standards, tentative specifications, Specifications, Codes of practice referred to shall be the latest editions
including all applicable official amendments and revisions. The contractor shall make available at his own cost,
at site all relevant Indian Standard Codes of practice as applicable
2 In case of discrepancy between standards, Codes of practice, tentative specifications, specification referred to
and this specification, this specification shall govern.
1.3 Contractor to provide :
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at site throughout the period of works the following at his own cost
and without extra charge, the cost being held to be included in the Contract Rates :
1 All labour, materials, plant, equipment and temporary works required to complete and maintain the
works to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2 Lighting for night work, and also whenever and where ever required by the Engineer.
3 Temporary fences, guards, lights and protective work necessary for protection of workmen,
supervisors, engineers or any other persons permitted access to the site.
4 All equipment, instruments and labour required by the Engineer for measurement of the Works.
5 A testing room of not less than 20 m2 equipped with the following, and labour and materials required
for carrying out tests therein:
1 Set of standard sieves for testing, grading of sand and a 75 micron sieve for testing silt content.
2 Sieves with opening respectively of 4.75 mm, 10 mm, 20 mm and 30mm for testing grading
of aggregates.
3 Balance, capacity up to 10 kg, reading to 5 gm.
4 Electric Thermostat controlled oven and pans for drying of sand and aggregates.
5 Glass measuring flasks of ½, 1, and 2 litre capacity.
6 Flask for determining moisture content of sand.
7 Slump cone with rod for slump test.
8 Minimum 24 steel moulds for 150 mm x 150 mm concrete test cubes. It may be necessary to
provide more steel cube moulds depending upon concreting programme.
9 Vibrator with 25mm dia needle for compaction of concrete in test cubes and also vibrating table
(if required).
10 Work benches, shelves, desks, sinks and any other furniture and lighting as required by the
Engineer.
11 Where concrete cube testing facilities from recognized institute near the site are not available
or if the size of the project is large enough or if directed by the Engineer, the contractor should
provide at site concrete cube testing machine at his cost.
6 If specified in the Bill of Quantities, Contractor shall provide automatic weigh-batching plant of suitable
capacity. Contractor shall also provide platform type of weighing machines of a capacity not less than
200 Kg.
Any of equipment not specifically mentioned above which can reasonably be held necessary for
the completion and maintenance of the works to the satisfaction of the Engineer should be
provided at no extra cost.
1.4 Dimensions :

1 Figured dimensions on drawings shall supersede measurements by scale and drawings to a large scale
shall take precedence over those to a smaller scale. Special dimensions or directions in the
specifications shall supersede all others. All dimensions shall be checked on site prior to execution.
2 The dimensions where stated do not allow for waste, laps, joints, etc. but the Contractor shall provide at
his own cost sufficient labour and materials to cover such waste, laps, joints, etc.
3 The levels, measurements and other information concerning the existing site as shown on the drawings
are believed to be correct, but the Contractor should verify them for himself and also examine the nature
of the ground as no claim or allowance whatsoever will be entertained on account of any errors or
omissions in the levels or the description of the ground levels or strata turning out different from what
was expected or shown on the drawings.
1.5 Setting out of Works :
The Contractor shall set out the Works indicated in the Conditions of Contract. The Contractor shall provide
suitable stones with flat tops and build the same in concrete for temporary bench marks. All the pegs for
setting out the Works and fixing the levels required for the execution thereof shall, if desired by the Engineer,
likewise be built in masonry at such places and in such a manner as the Engineer may direct. The Contractor
shall carefully protect and preserve all bench marks and other marks used in setting out the works.
1.6 Materials :
1 Quality :
The materials used in this project should be compatible with old system wherever old system is to be
retained or the same should be brought to the notice of the consultant / client before / during the pre
bid. All materials used in the works shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified
herein, obtained from sources and suppliers approved by the Engineer and shall comply strictly with the
tests prescribed hereafter, or where tests are not laid down in the specifications, with the requirements
of the latest issues of the relevant Indian Standards.
2 Sampling and Testing :

All materials used in the works shall be subjected to inspection and test in addition to test certificates.
Samples of all materials proposed to be employed in the permanent works shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval before they are brought to the site.
Samples provided to the Engineer for their retention are to be labelled in boxes suitable for storage.
Materials or workmanship not corresponding in character and quality with approved samples will be
rejected by the Engineer.
Samples required for approval and testing must be supplied sufficiently in advance to allow for testing
and approval, due allowance being made for the fact that if the first samples are rejected further samples
may be required. Delay to the works arising from the late submission of samples will not be acceptable
as a reason for delay in completion of the works.
Materials shall be tested before leaving the manufacturer’s premises, quarry or resource, wherever
possible. Materials shall also be tested on the site and they may be rejected if not found suitable or in
accordance with the specification, notwithstanding the results of the tests at the manufacturer’s works
or elsewhere or test certificates or any approval given earlier.
The contractor will bear all expenses for sampling and testing, whether at the manufacturer’s premises
at source, at site or at any testing laboratory or institution as directed by the Engineer. No extra
payment shall be made on this account.
3 Despatch of materials :
Materials shall not be dispatched from the manufacturer’s works to the site without written authority
from the Engineer.
4 Test certificates :
All manufacturer’s certificates of test, proof sheets, etc showing that the materials have been tested in
accordance with the requirement of this specification and of the appropriate Indian Standard are to be
supplied free of charge on request to the Engineer.
5 Rejection :
Any materials that have not been found to conform to the specifications will be rejected forthwith and
shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own cost.
6 The Engineer shall have power to cause the Contractors to purchase and use such materials from any
particular source, as may in his opinion be necessary for the proper execution of the work.
1.7 Storing of Materials at site :
All materials used in the works shall be stored on racks, supports, in bins, under cover etc as appropriate to
prevent deterioration or damage from any cause whatsoever to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
The storage of materials shall be in accordance with IS 4082 “Recommendation on stacking and storage or
construction materials on site” and as per IS 7969 “Safety code for handling and storage of building materials”.
The materials shall be stored in a proper manner at places at site approved by the Engineer. Should the place
where material is stored by the Contractor be required by the Employer for any other purpose, the Contractor
shall forthwith remove the material from that place at his own cost and clear the place for the use of the
Employer.
1.8 Water :
1 Water from approved source :

Clean fresh water only shall be used for the works. The water shall be free from any deleterious matter
in solution or in suspension and be obtained from an approved source. The quality of water shall conform
to IS 456.
2 Storage :
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for storing water, if necessary, in drums or tanks or
cisterns, to the approval of the Engineer. Care shall be exercised to see that water is not contaminated
in any way.

1.9 Workmanship :
1 All works shall be true to level, plumb and square and the corners, edges and arises in all cases shall
be unbroken and neat.
2 Any work not to the satisfaction of the Engineer or his representative will be rejected and the same shall
be rectified, or removed and replaced with work of the required standard of workmanship at no extra
cost.
1.10 Loading Tests :
1 The Engineer shall during the progress of the works or the period of maintenance, instruct the Contractor
that a loading test or tests be made on the works or any part thereof if, in his opinion, such a test or
tests be deemed necessary for one or more of the reasons herein below specified :
1 The site made concrete test cubes failing to attain the specified strength;
2 The shuttering for concrete works being prematurely removed;
3 Overloading during construction of the Works or part thereof;
4 Concrete improperly cured;
5 If any portion of the work is carried out without prior approval in writing of the Engineer or his
representative to proceed with such work;
6 If Concrete is honey combed or damaged or in the opinion of the Engineer particularly weak in
where weakened concrete will affect the ability of the structure to carry design loads;
7 Any other circumstances attributed to alleged negligence on the part of the Contractor which, in
the opinion of the Engineer, results in the Works or any part thereof being of less than the
expected strength;
8 Any reason other than the foregoing.
9 If the loading tests be instructed to be made solely or in part for the reasons I.10.1.1 to 7 the
tests shall be made at the Contractor’s own cost whether the results of such tests be satisfactory
or otherwise. If the tests be instructed to be made for the reasons I.11.1.8 herein before
specified, the Contractor shall make the tests and shall be reimbursed for all costs relating
thereto irrespective of the result of the tests.
10 All the loading tests will be carried out strictly in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer. Load testing will generally follow the procedure set out in Indian Standard Codes of
Practice, but the Engineer is not bound to follow the Indian Standard Codes of Practice and in
his absolute discretion may issue instructions differing from the procedure set out in the Indian
Standard Codes of Practice.
11 If in the opinion of the Engineer, the result of the loading tests is not satisfactory the Engineer
shall instruct that such parts of the works as he specifies shall be taken down or cut out and
reconstructed to comply with the specifications, or other remedial measures shall be taken to
make Works secure to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall take down, or cut
out and reconstruct the defective work or shall take the remedial measures instructed at his
own cost.
CHAPTER 2 : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION – A
DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION WORK

Contractor shall have to submit detailed step by step Method Statement indicating procedure of demolition, what
machinery to be used where, machinery / equipment list and its number, technical staff, mechanic for repair the
machinery, Location of dumping the debris, Occupational health and safety
GENERAL:
Contractors shall take all precautions to see that the demolition is done in such a sequence and manner as to prevent all
avoidable damage to unusable and any damage to nearby property or injury to life. To this effect the Contractor may be
required to erect suitable barricades and scaffoldings around and for the works as directed for which no claims for extra
payment will be allowed.
The contractor shall prepare an inventory of all the items/ materials before starting of actual execution or immediately
after commencement of the work along with the Engineer In-charge.
A register shall be opened by the contractor on the work site to show a day-to-day account of the turn out of salvaged
materials including for steel reinforcement . This register should also show whether dismantled material is properly
stacked or wasted. It shall be signed by the representative of the contractor and by the Engineer on site.
The required work shall be dismantled carefully, and the materials removed without causing damage to the serviceable
materials, and the part of the structure to be retained, and any properties or structure nearby. Any damage to nearby
property or structure shall be made good by the contractor without extra claims. The contractor shall be responsible for
any injury to the workers or the public. Removal of overlaying adjacent materials if required for dismantling of the any
required work shall be included in the item.
Before demolishing any part of the structure, the contractor shall provide supports and struts to the existing structure /
as and when directed by the Consultants. All struts and support shall not be removed by the Contractor until written
permission is obtained from the architect or structural engineer. No extra claims for such skirting or supports shall be
paid for, it shall be included in the tender under respective items for demolishing. All scaffolding will be in steel and will
have rubber ends, so as to not damage any part of the structure.
All the materials obtained after dismentaling/ demolition shall be the property of the owner. Serviceable materials shall
be stacked neatly in such a manner as to avoid deterioration and in place directed by the Consultant within a distance of
100 m. Different categories of materials shall be stacked separately. Materials which are to be reused, shall be numbered
before dismantling, carefully dismantled to avoid any damages and stacked in an order which facilitates the re-use.
Unless otherwise provided, excavated materials shall be used in back filling the excavation made in removing the structure,
in leveling ground or otherwise disposed off, as directed free of cost. Serviceable materials may be issued to the contractor
for use in the new work or elsewhere at the rates and as per conditions provided in the tender. No material shall be
disposed off/ moved outside the boundry by the contractor without the specific instruction of the
Consultants/client.
Serviceable materials may be issued to the contractor for use in the new work or elsewhere at the rates and as per
conditions provided in the tender.
No material shall be disposed off by the contractor without the specific instructions of the Consultants.
Extent and Methods of Demolition:

Demolish, remove for salvage, or remove and reinstall as applicable, all, or parts of, as indicated: site work interfering
with new construction, masonry, concrete, walls and partitions, floor and roof construction, roofing, parapet construction,
doors, frames, finish hardware, plaster, gypsum board, acoustical ceilings, suspension systems, furring, lathing, finished,
cabinetry, ventilation items, plumbing fixtures, mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, lighting, and other materials
and items as necessary to do the Work under this Contract and, in addition, where removal is indicated.
1. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations.
2. Proceed systematically.
3. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections.
4. Also demolish or remove walls and partitions in small sections whatever the materials of construction/
5. Remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, or framing.
6. Where necessary to avoid collapse, install temporary struts, bracing, or shoring; leave in place until new Work provides
adequate bracing and support.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by suitable methods. Do not allow to free-fall.
8. Doors: Completely remove indicated existing doors; deliver to Owner or repair, rework, refinish, and reinstall as
indicated.
9. Plaster: Remove only sufficient plaster, lathing, support systems, and other materials and items as is necessary to
permit the Work under this Contract.
10 Floors:
a. Where existing equipment, cabinets, lockers, etc., having concrete curbs or bases are removed, also
remove the concrete curbs and bases to a depth not less than 1/4 inch below the top of the adjacent
concrete left in place.
b. When removing existing walls and partitions resting on the structural slab, also remove traces of mortar
and other materials to expose structural slab beneath the location of partition or wall.
c. Except where Contract documents permit leaving existing flooring in place completely remove existing
finish flooring from locations where new finished are scheduled. Leave top of exposed substrate
completely free from materials.
d. Except where otherwise indicated, completely remove existing ceramic tile from locations where new
finishes are scheduled. Leave top of exposed substrate completely free from materials that would
interfere with bond or patching, topping, or finish material and not less than ¼ inch below adjacent
concrete left in place.
e. Also remove toppings where necessary to install structural unit covered bases and other products. In
such cases, remove topping sufficiently to properly accommodate new and reused products.
f. In addition to other removal of existing topping, also remove such amounts of topping as is necessary
to allow finishing of floor surfaces level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in each 6 feet.
g. When partly removing existing topping and when removing existing floor finished, completely remove
loose materials and damaged substrate materials.
h. Completely remove existing carpet from areas to receive new floor finishes. Also remove carpet
cushions and all traces of adhesives.
i. Where Contract requires removing existing concrete slabs, also remove reinforcement. When filling
openings with concrete, prepare slab edges as shown. Leave 6 inches of reinforcement exposed when
filling openings with concrete.
j. Remove existing wood floors completely.
11. Ceilings:
Where existing ceilings have been removed, whether under this Contract or earlier, existing hangers and hanger
attachments may have been left in place. Do not remove such hangers or attachments unless so indicated Where
new acoustical panel or gypsum board ceilings are scheduled, remove existing plaster and acoustical ceilings.
Where existing hangers and hanger attachments adequate and suitable for support of the new ceilings, leave
them in place and use for new ceilings. Reuse is subject to Architect's acceptance but Contractor shall assume
sole acceptance, but Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for reuse and for later failure resulting there
from.
12. Walls:
a. Where indicated, remove existing wall finished and prepare surfaces to receive indicated new finishes. Leave
nothing that will affect new finish. Where substrates will be exposed in the completed Work, remove every
trace of old finish except paint.
b. Remove supports for existing finishes removed under this Contract or earlier.
13. Other Materials and Items: Remove where shown to be removed or where removal is necessary to permit Work
under this Contract. Remove such items and materials only to extent necessary of miscellaneous items and
materials, refer to the specifications sections where such item or material is specified.
Pollution Controls:
Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit airborne dust and dirt to lowest
practical level. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations.
1. Sprinkling is subject to Owner's approval. Cease immediately upon Owner's approval. Cease
immediately upon Owner's objection. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable
conditions such as flooding, or pollution.
2. Clean adjacent facilities to remain of dust, dirt, and debris due to demolition operations: comply with
applicable requirements of governing authorities. Except where new Work is to occur, return adjacent
areas to condition existing before start of Work.
Satisfactorily and promptly repair damage to existing materials and equipment to remain, or provide new equal
approved products at no additional cost.
Remove carefully and protect items indicated to be reused. Store carefully in a safe location until reinstalled.
Assume responsibility for safe storage and handling.
Remove carefully and protect materials and items to remain Owner's property. Move and sore in a space in the
building designated by Owner.
F. Cutting and Drilling:

1. Cut and drill existing construction to permit the Work under this Contract. Include cutting holes and
other openings for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical Work.
2. Cut by hand or with small power tools when possible. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required, with
minimum disturbance of adjacent work. Cut round holes in concrete using core drills. Cut square and
rectangular holes by line drilling and using chipping hammers to remove material between drill holes.
Do not use large air hammers.
3. Do not operate air compressors inside building.
4. Do not drill or cut structural supporting elements without specific approval in each case, unless the
element is shown on structural/architectural drawings to be drilled or cut. Do not cut existing concrete
slab reinforcement.
5. Cover openings temporarily when not in use, and patch as soon as work is installed.
Following points shall form inherent the part of offer
1) Insurance
Demolition Contractor should arrange suitable insurance before commencement of work and the copy shall be issued to
the Employer.

2) Services
The demolition contractor shall be responsible for arranging disconnection of all water, and electricity service prior to work
commencing.
The demolition contractor shall give at least forty-eight hours notice of intention to remove, disconnect drain in or under
the building to be demolished.
At least twenty four hours notice must be given before making good the surface of the ground disturbed by the removal
or sealing of any sewer or drain under this section.
3) Hoardings and Scaffolding
Suitable hoarding may be required to be erected to enclose the site during demolition and
Scaffold erected along the frontage abutting the road (up to 4-5 mt high) and residential building (up to second floor roof
of the residential building) and other such places as may be required.
When required by notice any variation must be sanctioned in writing by the PMC prior to commencement of demolition
works.
4) Dangerous Practices
Overloading of any part of the building by debris or materials should be avoided.
5) Fire Risk
All precautions should be taken to prevent the risk of fire or explosion caused by gas or
vapour. Oxygen, acetylene and liquefied petroleum gas containers should be handled with care and stored and used away
from source of heat.
6) Open drain crossing the Site
Protective measures are to be taken to protect open drain from damage. Any demolition, debris must be removed to the
satisfaction of the PMC
The demolition contractor shall give at least forty-eight hours notice of intention to remove, disconnect drain in or under
the building to be demolished.
At least twenty four hours notice must be given before making good the surface of the ground disturbed by the removal
of drain under this section
7) Explosives
Use of explosive shall not be allowed.
8) Safety
A person carrying on demolition operations should make sure that any building which is
Partly demolished (and the site thereof) is so far as is reasonably practicable, properly
Secured or closed against entry at all times when demolition operations are not in progress and that the building or
structure is left in a safe condition at the close of each days work.
(If this clause is not complied with, action may be taken by PMC as per the Contract clause)
9) Dust
The demolition works should be periodically sprayed with water to reduce the amount of dust and the contractor shall
take all reasonable steps to prevent any nuisance occurring.
10) Noise
Noise should be minimized as far as possible by the fitting and use of devices wherever practicable. The stated hours of
working and use of equipment may also be determined and got approved
11) Fire and Smoke
No burning will be permitted on site
12) Storage
Gas cylinders and similar containers, whether empty, in use, or spare, should be stored in a safe place since if they
become involved in a fire any resulting explosion may cause injury to persons and damage property.
13) Maintenance of Access
Regard should be had to the need to maintain convenient and safe access to the adjacent properties. Accessible public
road should be maintain clean and tidy by regular brooming and cleaning by water
14) Demolition Ball
The use of the demolition ball is prohibited.
15) Notice of Commencement
Twenty four hours notice of actual commencement or re-commencement should be given to PMC.
16) Completion of Work and Site Treatment
On completion of demolition, the site shall be cleared, levelled (fenced when necessary)
to the satisfaction of PMC
17) Trees;
Existing trees shall be protected as per the instruction.
18) Working Hours: Working hours shall be 8.00 am to 6 pm. However, working hours shall be approved considering
site constraint. The Contractor shall ensure that noise is not generated outside approved working hours.
19) Foundation
Where grubbing out foundations or reducing to new levels adjacent to existing buildings not being demolished, care must
be taken to ensure that the support to the remaining foundations or land is not disturbed.
20) Operatives and Supervisor
All operatives engaged in demolition and supervision should be technically competent and adequately trained and familiar
with the guidance and Code of Practice for demolition and their responsibilities under the Health and Safety at Work Act
1974.
21) Site Plan
Site Plan and internal drawings showing location and the extent of work of demolition shall be provided. Work shall be
carried out in accordance with the drawings. Methodology for demolition/ core cutting/ drilling etc. is to be submitted by
the contractor for demolition of all the items before execution without any extra cost.
22) Disposal
Rate quoted by the contractor cover handling, transportation and disposal of entire debris generated by demolition work.
All debris removed and drive out from the Site premises shall be the property of the Contractor.
3) Joinery & Fixtures: The Contractor shall stack in proper order at indicated area, all joinery, fixtures and useable
material removed from the buildings to be demolished. The rate quoted for demolition shall cover this work and no
separate payment shall be made for such work.

SECTION – B
SITE CLEARING AND GRUBBING
1 Uprooting and leveling
Bush clearance shall comprise uprooting of vegetation grass, brushwood shrubs, stumps, and trees. The roots of the trees
and saplings shall be removed to a depth 60cm below ground level or 30cm below the formation level. All holes and
hollows so formed due to removing of roots shall be filled up with earth rammed and leveled. Trees, posts, poles, stumps,
other minor structures etc. within or adjacent to the Site which are not required to disturb during jungle clearance shall
be properly protected by the Contractor at his own cost. Nothing extra shall be payable. Site cleaning and uprooting of
trees etc. shall be for area of construction up to 25mts. Beyond the external edge of the building to ensure prevention of
any growth of up-rooted vegetation.
2 Stacking / Disposal
All useful material obtained from the Site cleaning and grubbing operation shall be stacked in the manner as directed by
Engineer. This material shall be property of the Employer. All useless material shall be disposed at a place indicated by
Engineer.

SECTION – C
EARTHWORK , METAL PACKING , SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE & EARTHWORK IN FILLING
A.1. Excavation for all works and of materials required for filling shall be to the exact width, length and depth shown
on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. If excavation is carried out to greater width, length, depth than
required, the Contractor shall make good, at his own cost, the extra depth by sound masonry or concrete filling
and extra length or width filled in by well consolidated earth or if the Engineer thinks it necessary for the stability
of the work, by masonry or concrete as he may direct.
A.2. Excavation material required for filling shall be stacked or dumped where indicated by the Engineer. Excavated
material not required for filling and any surplus material shall be removed and spread on the site anywhere within
the premises and as directed by the Engineer or carted away from the site as directed by the Engineer. Dumping
of this surplus material shall be in an orderly manner and according to the levels/grades as indicated by the
Engineer. The cost of such removal and spreading shall be borne by the Contractor and held to be included in
the Contract Rates.
A.3. The Contractor shall, at the contract rates make provision for all shoring, pumping, dredging, bailing out or
draining water whether subsoil or rain or other water and the excavation shall be kept free of water while the
masonry work or concrete work is in progress and until the Engineer considers the work well set (Refer IS:3764
Safety Code for Excavation Work). The sides of trenches shall be kept vertical and the bottom horizontal and
shall be run level throughout or properly stepped as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall erect and maintain during progress of works temporary fences around dangerous
excavations.
A.4. Excavation in ordinary soil means excavation in ordinary hard soil including stiff heavy clay, hard shale, or
compact soil or any material, which can be removed by the ordinary application of spades, shovels, picks and
pick axes. This shall also include removal of isolated boulders each having a volume not more than 0.50 cum.
A.5. Excavation in soft rock includes limestone, sandstone, laterite, etc. or other rock which can be KJquarried or by
mechanical equipment like JCB, Poclain, or compressed air equipment like breaker, etc. This shall also include
excavation of tarred pavements, masonry work and rock boulders each having a volume of not more than 0.75
cum.
A.6. Excavation in hard rock includes any rock bound in ledges or masses in its original form or cement concrete,
excavation of which in the opinion of the Engineer requires the use of compressed air, equipment, chiseling
sledge hammer and blasting or any other method. Blasting shall be carried out through authorized agencies and
all statutory laws, regulations shall be observed.
A.7. Excavation in marshy soil include soils like soft clays and peats excavated below the original ground level of
marshes and swamps and soils excavated from other areas requiring continuous pumping or bailing out of water.
A.8. In case of any difficulty concerning the interpretation of Clauses A4, A5, A6 and A7 above, the Engineer shall
decide whether the excavation in a particular material is in ordinary soil, soft rock or hard rock and his decision
in this matter shall be final and binding on the Contractor and without appeal. Merely the use of higher category
equipment on explosive in excavation will not be considered as a reason for higher classification unless same are
clearly necessary in the opinion of the Engineer.
A.9. The foundation trenches shall be inspected and passed by the Engineer before concrete or masonry work is
commenced and the Contractor shall hold an order in writing to this effect, otherwise the Contractor shall be
liable to have this work removed for inspection.
A.10. The earth for backfilling in foundation and plinth shall be got approved by the Engineer. In the foundation the
backfilling shall be done in layers not more than 200mm thick and shall be thoroughly watered and consolidated
by approved method.
A.11. The backfilling in plinth and other places which are required for leveling shall be done in layers not more than
300 mm thick except minimum of top three layers shall be done in layers not more than 150 mm thick. Each
layer shall be watered and thoroughly consolidated by power driven roller/pan vibrator/vibratory roller of
approved capacity. The process shall be repeated till the required level is achieved. After the backfilling is
completed the surface shall be uniformly dressed and leveled.

For large area or for deep filling or instructed by Engineer, the degree of compaction for filling will be measured
as follows:
Top layer of filling 98% modified Proctor Dry density at OMC

Lower two layers below top layer 95% modified Proctor Dry density at OMC
Below above mentioned three layers 90% modified Proctor Dry density at OMC
A.12. Backfilling for subsurface drains (Filter drains) :
Backfilling materials for subsurface drains shall conform to one of the following grades as specified:
Sieve Percent by weight passing the sieve

Designation Class I Class II Class III
50mm – – 100
40mm – – 95 - 100
25mm – 100 –
20mm – 90 – 100 50 - 100
10mm 100 40 – 100 15 – 55
4.75mm 90 – 100 25 – 40 0 – 25
2.36mm 80 – 100 18 – 33 0–5
1.18mm 50 – 95 – –
600 micron 30 – 75 5 – 15 –
300 micron 10 – 30 0–7 –
150 micron 0 – 10 – –
75 micron 0–3 0–3 0–3
The filter material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 200mm
A.13. Metal Packing :
Unless otherwise specified, stones for metal packing shall consist of crushed or broken stone. It shall be hard,
durable and free from disintegrated particles, excessive dust and other objectionable matter.
Grading of aggregates shall conform to one of the grading given in the following tables:
Grading Size Sieve design- % by weight Remarks

No range nation (IS:460) in Passing the sieve
mm
1 90mm 100mm 100 Suitable
to 40mm 80mm 65-85 for 100mm
63mm 25–60 consolidated
40mm 0–15 thickness
20mm 0–5
to 40mm 63mm 90-100 for 75mm
20mm 0–5
to 20mm 50mm 95-100 or 65mm
10mm 0–5
Screening to fill the voids shall consist of same material as coarse aggregates and shall conform to the grading
given below:

Classification Size of screening Sieve designation % by weight Passing the sieve

A 12.5mm 12.5mm 100
10.0mm 90–100
4.75mm 10–30
150 micron 0–8
B 10.0mm 10.00mm 100
4.75mm 85–100
150 micron 10–30
The metal packing shall be done in layers not more than 100mm compacted thickness. For 150mm compacted
thickness, it shall be done in two layers each of 75mm compacted thickness.
After laying, each layer shall be compacted thoroughly either by rollers or small vibratory roller, as specified or
by other equivalent method approved by the Engineer. Slight sprinkling of water shall be done at the time of
rolling.
After rolling has been completed, screening shall be applied uniformly and gradually to fill the interstices and the
surface shall be dry rolled. In no case shall the screenings be dumped in a heap on the rolled surfaces. Rolling
shall be accompanied with brooming.
After application of screening and rolling, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water and rolled. If
necessary additional screenings applied to fill the voids if any. Rolling shall be continued until the coarse
aggregates are well bonded. Care shall be taken that the base or subgrade does not get damaged due to addition
of excessive quantities of water during the construction.
A.14. Measurements:
Measurements of excavation shall be solid measurements or actual volume of the materials prior to its removal.
Measurements shall be of the exact length, width as indicated in the drawings and depth, measured vertically
according to the Engineer's drawing or his instruction.
The measurement for backfilling shall be based on actual difference of levels before filling and after leveling.
The rate for metal packing shall be based on final compacted thickness and shall include all labour, materials and
the cost of rolling with road roller or other equivalent method to obtain full compaction, application of screening,
watering etc. complete.
II-EARTHWORK IN FILLING
A.15. Earthwork filling:
Filling shall be carried out with approved material as described below.
A.16. Materials:
A.17. Available Earth:
To the extent available, selected surplus spoils from excavated materials shall be used as fill material. The
Consultant shall approve the available earth to be used in filling. However if the available earth is to be used as
backfill material, then the same shall be free from clods, salts, sulphates, roots, organic & other foreign material.
All clods of earth shall be broken or removed. In case of excavated rock boulder smaller than 150mm size the
same shall be mixed with properly graded fine material consisting of murrum or earth to fill up the voids and the
mixture shall be used for filling. In case of excavated rock boulders larger than 150mm size the same shall be
broken into size ranging from 150mm to 300mm and shall be stacked at place specified by Engineer on site.
Clayey, saturated, loose, sandy and fine soils shall not be used in the filling works.
A.18. New Earth:

The source of the earth shall be subject to prior approval of Consultant. The approved area, from where the fill
material is to be procured, shall be cleared of all bushes, roots, plants, rubbish etc. The topsoil containing salts,
sulphates and other foreign material shall be removed as directed. The materials so removed shall be burnt or
disposed off as directed by Consultant. The Contractor shall make necessary access roads to those areas &
maintain the same, if such access road does not exist, at his cost. The contractor shall pay any and all duties,
taxes or royalties etc., for availing of the area as a source for the earth. The contractor shall arrange for
transporting the earth so approved, to the site of work at his own cost.
The new earth brought to the site of work shall be gravelly murrum and satisfy the Consultant. If the Consultant
rejects any new earth, then Contractor shall remove the same forthwith from the site at no extra cost to the
owner. Surplus fill material shall be disposed off by uniform spreading within or away from the site as instructed
by the Consultant. In case of excavated rock boulder smaller than 150mm size the same shall be mixed with
properly graded fine material consisting of murrum or earth to fill up the voids and the mixture shall be used for
filling. In case of excavated rock boulders larger than 150mm size the same shall be broken into size ranging
from 150mm to 300mm and shall be stacked at place specified by Engineer on site.
A.19. Filling for Land development with earth:
Supplying and filling approved earth / hard soil obtained from contractor's identified source inclusive of obtaining
all requisites statutory approvals, with all lifts and leads, transporting to site, spreading, grading the earth / hard
soil in layers not exceeding 250 mm thick loose layers, breaking clods and compacting including watering each
layer to bring it upto optimum moisture content followed by rolling with 10 MT power mechanical vibratory roller
to attain dry field density not less than 95 % of maximum dry density ( Proctor test). Refer detailed specifications
enclosed. The cost of the Tests and determination of settlement of natural ground measure by approved gauges
and methodology shall be borne by the Contractor.)
 No earth filling activity shall commence until surface water discharges and the streams, if any, have been
properly intercepted or otherwise dealt with as directed by Consultant.
 The Contractor shall carry out the contour / block survey of the site before setting out the works. These shall
be jointly recorded and approved by the Consultant.
 The original ground shall be compacted to the satisfaction of the Consultant, using mechanical compaction
machines (Earth Compactors) or manually with the help of wooden or MS compacting mallets (Minimum 25
KGs weight).
 Filling with the available / new earth, as specified/instructed, shall be carried out as indicated in the drawings
and as directed by Consultant. If no compaction is specified for, the fill may be deposited to the full height
in one operation and leveled.
 If the fill has to be compacted, it shall be placed in layers not exceeding 300 mm loose and leveled uniformly,
watered and compacted before the next layer is deposited. The filling shall be compacted with mechanical
earth compactors or wooden/MS compacting mallets (Minimum 25 Kgs weight).
 When filling reaches the finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water, as directed by the Consultant,
for at least 24 hours, allowed to dry and then the surface again compacted as specified above to avoid
settlement at a later stage. The filled surface shall withstand light excavation by picks and/or settlement by
loading of weights.
 The finished level of the filling shall be trimmed to the level/slope specified. The entire process shall be done
to the Consultant’s satisfaction.
A.20. Filling for Land development with earth and compaction with DRR/PRR:
 Where specified in the item description in the bill of quantities, that the compaction of the earth fill be carried
out by means of 8/10 vibratory rollers, then DRR/PRR/Vibratory rollers shall invariably be used.
 No earth filling shall commence until surface water discharges and the streams, if any, have been properly
intercepted or otherwise dealt with, as directed by the Consultant.
 The samples of original ground and the proposed fill material, shall be collected for determining the Optimum
Moisture Content (OMC) and Proctor’s Density (field density). The original ground shall be first compacted
to 95% Proctor density, by minimum 6 passes. The field test after this process shall be obtained.
 The Consultant’s instructions regarding the agency/laboratory to conduct such tests shall be followed.
 The available / new earth shall then be spread in layers of not more than 250 mm loose and leveled. The
rolling may commence as soon as the earth filling is leveled. After a minimum of 2 passes, the area shall be
flooded with water to assist compaction. A minimum of 24 hours shall be let to pass and then the rolling
shall re-commence.
 The filled earth shall be subjected to field Density (Proctor’s Density) tests to determine the actual Proctor’s
Density as compared to the Proctor’s Density specified in the Bill of Quantities. A minimum of 1 test per 100

Sqm. in each layer shall be conducted unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant. The Consultant’s
instructions with regards to the locations and number of tests shall be obeyed.
 In case the actual field density is less than that as specified in the BOQ, then the Consultant may instruct to
remove and replace the filled earth entirely/part or alternatively permit re-rolling over the same areas after
sufficient watering has been done. The fill shall be considered as incomplete if the desired compaction as
mentioned in the BOQ, has not been obtained.
 Contractor shall protect the earth fill from being washed away by rain or damage in any other way. Should
any slip occur, Contractor shall remove the affected material and make good the slip at his own cost.
 The fill shall be carried out to such dimension and levels as indicated on the drawings after the stipulated
level of compaction. The finished level of the filling shall be trimmed to the level/slope specified. The entire
process shall be done to the Consultant’s satisfaction.
A.21. Mode of Measurement:
Payment for filling in plinth with selected excavated material or new earth shall be made as per
drawings/instructions and paid for under the respective item of work. Payment for this work will be made based
on measurement of actual plinth/dimensions filled. The plinth/ground levels shall be surveyed and block levels
recorded before hand for this purpose. The rate shall include all materials, labour, tools & plant, compaction,
watering and cost of conducting the Proctor’s tests, as required by the Consultant. It shall be measured in Cum.
A.22. Water:
Water shall be clean and fresh and free from impurities, organic or inorganic matter in solution or suspension
that may impair the strength or durability of concrete. Brackish water or water containing any sugar or an excess
of acid, alkali or salt in excess of the permissible value or water from excavation shall not be used. The water
found satisfactory for mixing is also suitable for curing. However, the water used for curing shall not produce any
objectionable stain or unsightly deposit on the concrete surface.
The pH value of water shall not be less than 6.
Tests on Water:
In case of doubt, the suitability of water for making concrete shall be ascertained by the compressive strength
and initial setting time test specified in IS – 456. The sample of water taken for testing shall be typical of the
water, proposed for use in the concrete. The sample shall not receive any treatment before testing. The sample
shall be stored in a clean container previously rinsed out with similar water.
The rates quoted, shall be for all the works shown on drawings and described in Schedule of Quantities, and
covered under the battery limit for individual item for entire quantity (inclusive of total deviations during
execution) required for the successful completion of the Project, irrespective of fact whether they are specifically
mentioned or otherwise. Quantities given in Schedule of Quantity are indicative in nature.
The rates quoted shall be inclusive of all works whether specified or otherwise and which is required for
satisfactory execution of the Item. In case of doubt it should be got clarified before quoting.
In case there are any details of construction or requirement of materials, which have not been reflected to in the
specifications, detailed description of items, the Schedule of Quantities, or on the drawings, but which are useful
or essential in true completion of the work, then the same shall be deemed to have been included in the rate/s
quoted by the contractor.
Any claim from contractors on any or all of the above will not be entertained.
Site Clearance:
Before starting the work, the site shall be cleared of all shrubs, grass and other vegetation including large and
small bushes, all tree stumps, removal of roots, cutting and disposal of trees up to 300mm girth etc. (The girth
shall be measured at a height of 1.5 metres above GL). The site if found uneven, up to a height difference of
1.00m, shall be levelled to a plain topography.
The contractor shall make himself familiar with the local rules and regulations pertaining to land clearance
environmental aspects including special requirements of forest areas, wherever applicable and the work shall be
carried out in strict accordance therewith.
Specific Instructions:
The contractor shall independently survey the entire plot and ascertain the dimensions and levels of the plot and
submit and take approval from the Consultant before commencement of actual setting at Contractor’s own cost.
The contractor shall maintain and provide on the site at all times, high precision surveying instruments like

Dumpy level, theodolite (one or two second theodolite) and total station and carry out the survey of entire plot
and setting out of works, building lines & levels, etc., with the help of high precision instruments only.
The contractor shall provide at his own cost all labour, pegs, strings and other materials as may be required for
line out and setting out the work.
All levels referred to in connection with these works shall be based on local Benchmarks. The contractor shall
protect and preserve all Benchmarks used in setting out the works till the Consultant directs its removal.
The contractor shall be responsible for the accurate setting out of the works in relation to original points, lines
and levels of reference given by the Consultant. The checking of any line or level by the Consultant shall not in
any way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for the accuracy thereof.
If, at any time during the execution of the works, any error appears in the position, levels, dimensions or
alignment of any part of the works on being required so to do by the Consultant, the contractor shall at his own
cost rectify such error to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
1. Treatment of Column pits, Wall, trenches, flooring, walls or ceilings covered with acoustic material (brush
applied), Basement excavations. Foundations, basements etc. may either be fully enveloped by the chemical
barrier or the treatment may start 500 mm below ground level. The bottom surface and sides of excavation (up
to a height of 300 mm ) for column pits, wall, trenches and basements shall be treated with chemicals at the
rate of 5 liters / M2 of surface area. Backfills around columns, walls etc. shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 liters
/ M2 of the vertical surface. Chemical treatment shall be done in stages following the compaction of earth in
layers. The treatment shall be carried out after the ramming operation is done by rodding the earth at 150 mm
centres close to the wall surface and spraying the chemicals in the specified dose.
2. Treatment of Soil Surrounding Pipes , Waste and Conduits Holes 50 mm to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both
ways shall be made with crowbars on the surface of compacted plinth fill. Chemical emulsion at the rate of 5
liters / M2 of surface shall be applied prior to laying soling or sub-grade. Special care shall be taken to maintain
continuity of the chemical barrier at the junction of vertical and horizontal surfaces.
3. Treatment of Soil Surrounding Pipes , Waste and Conduits Special care shall be taken at the points where pipes
and conduits enter the building and the soil shall be treated for a distance of 150 mm and a depth of 75 mm at
the point where they enter the building.

SECTION - D
CONCRETE : PLAIN & REINFORCED
1 Cement :
The Cement used shall be any of the following with the prior approval of the Engineer :
1 Ordinary Portland Cement IS:269

2 Rapid hardening Portland Cement IS:8041
3 Portland Slag Cement IS:455
4 Portland Pozzolana IS:1489
5 High Strength Ordinary Cement (Grade 53) IS:8112
6 Hydrophobic Cement IS:8043
7 Ordinary Portland Cement IS:12269
8 High Sulphate resisting Cement IS:4027-1980
Use :
Cement shall be used in the order in which it is received. Cement in bags in storage for more than 3 months shall
be retested before use.
Testing :
A sample taken once for every 1000 bags shall be tested. Tests shall be carried out for fineness, initial and final
setting time, and compressive strength (IS: 4031) and the results approved by the Engineer before use of the
cement in permanent works. Samples shall be taken immediately on receipt of cement at site. The methods
and procedure of sampling shall be in accordance with IS:3535. The Engineer may specify other forms of
sampling and tests including chemical analysis, (IS:4032) if in his opinion the cement is of doubtful quality; the
costs of such additional tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
2 Fine Aggregates (Sand) :
1 It shall be river or pit sand conforming to IS:383, obtained from sources approved by the Engineer. If
permitted by the Engineer, crushed stone sand produced from stones, suitable for concrete aggregates,
and manufactured in special sand producing crushers such as impactors, hammer mills and processed
through stone on stone, vertical shaft crushers such as Barmac / Svedala for particle shaping and
excess fines removed by suitable dust extractors. The particle shape shall be nearly cubical. If crushed
stone sand contains high percentage of fines, the sand will be separated in two fractions viz. 0 -
2.36 mm and 2.36 - 4.75 mm size. These two fractions will be suitably blended to obtain desired
grading of sand. In case of crushed stone sand the fines i.e. (-) 0.15 mm shall be less than 5 %.
The crushed stone sand shall be tested for flow time and voids as per ASTM 1252, and if found suitable shall
only will be used.
The sand shall not contain silt more than a total of 2% by weight and shale, clay, silt and other structurally
weak particles a total of 5%.
If considered by the Engineer as necessary, the sand shall be washed in screw type mechanical washers in
potable water to remove silt, clay and chlorides. This shall be done at least one day before using it in concrete.

The washed sand shall be stored on a sloping concrete platform and in such a manner as to avoid
contamination. Such sand washing, storing, etc. shall be at the Contractor’s cost.
2 If grading of fine aggregates can be improved by mixing two sands, the Engineer may at his discretion specify
such mixing, and may permit the use of crushed sand as one of the two sands forming the mixture. The
provision of two types of sand and their mixing in the specified proportions shall be at the Contractor's cost.
3 The sand shall be screened on 4.75 mm size screen to eliminate over size particles. The cost of screening is
deemed to be included in Contractor’s rates.
4 The aggregate shall e subjected to tests in accordance with IS 2386 as may be ordered by the Engineer.
3 Coarse Aggregates :
1 Coarse aggregates for the Works shall be river gravel or crushed stone conforming to IS:383, obtained from
sources approved by the Engineer.
Aggregates shall be properly screened and if necessary washed clean before use.
2 Coarse aggregates containing flat or flaky pieces or mica shall be rejected.
3 Coarse aggregates shall be supplied in the following sizes :
Nominal size Maximum size Minimum size
10mm 12mm 5mm
0mm 25mm 10mm
40mm 40mm 20mm
80mm 80mm 40mm
4 The grading of coarse aggregate shall be such that not more than 5% shall be larger than the maximum size
and not more than 10% shall be smaller than the smallest size. Between these sizes the coarse aggregate
shall be well graded.
5 The aggregates shall be subjected to tests in accordance with
IS 2386 as may be ordered by the Engineer.
6 Aggregate shall be stored in such a way as to prevent segregation of sizes and avoid contamination with
fines.
4 Mixers and Vibrators :
1 If specified in the schedule of items, for all structural concreting work the Contractor shall provide
automatic weigh-batching plant of suitable capacity. The plant used shall conform to IS:4925.
2 The Contractor shall provide concrete mixers (IS:1791 - Batch type concrete mixers, IS:2439 - Roller
Pan Mixer) and vibrators (IS:2505 - Concrete Vibrators Immersion Type, IS:2506 - Screed board
concrete vibrators, IS:4656 - Form Vibrators for Concrete) supplied by recognized manufacturers.
5 Grade of Concrete :
The concrete is designated as follows : Concrete M 30 (for example)

The letter M refers to the mix

The number 30 represents the characteristic compressive strength of 15cm cubes at 28 days in MPa (Mega
Pascals : 1 MPa : 10 kg/cm2 approximately). M 30 concrete thus has a characteristic strength of 300 kg/cm2.
6 Minimum Cement Content :
For all structural concrete work, minimum cement content shall not be less than 320 kg/m3 of concrete for
durability considerations.
7 Trial mixes :
1 The Contractor is entirely responsible for the design of the concrete mixes. The design is however to
be approved by the Engineer at least 4 weeks before commencing any concreting in the Works, the
Contractor shall make trial mixes using samples of coarse aggregates, sand, water and cement, typical
of those to be used in the Works, and which have been tested in an approved laboratory. A clean dry
mixer shall be used and the first batch discarded.
2 The required average strengths of different grades of concrete at 28 days for which the mixes shall be
designed are specified below:
TABLE 1
Grades Characteristic Target mean f’cm

of strength (f’ck) at 28 strength (Mpa) (MPa)
Concrete days (Mpa) at 7 days at
28 days
M 15 15 18 24
M 20 20 21 29
M 25 25 23 34
M 30 30 26 39
M 35 35 31 44
M 40 40 36 49
M 45 45 40 54
The mixes are designed to yield mean strengths (f'cm) greater than the corresponding specified
characteristic strengths (f'ck) as indicated in Table 1. The difference between f'cm and f'ck is called the
`Current Margin'. The value of the current margin has been set at 9 MPa for all grades of concrete. The
concrete mixes shall be designed on the basis of required strength, desired workability, the maximum
size of aggregate and also upon the various grades of cements as specified in IS: 10262-1982, Clause
3.1.1. Accordingly the required cement content shall be ascertained. The contractor may be allowed to
use either approved plasticizers or increased cement content to achieve the required strengths at his
own cost.
3 For each grade a total of 18 cubes shall be made. Of these 18 cubes made not more than 6 may be
made on any day and further, of the 6 cubes made in one day not more than 2 cubes may be made
from any single batch. 9 of these cubes, each representing a different batch of concrete shall be tested
at the age of 7 days and the remaining 9 cubes shall be tested at the age of 28 days. The making of
the cubes, their curing, storing, transporting and testing shall be in accordance with Indian Standards
IS: 516. The test shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by the Engineer.

4 If the average strength of the concrete cubes falls below the required strength fresh preliminary mixes
for that grade shall be made as before, until the trial mixes yield cubes of compressive strength at 28
days greater than the required average strength at that age.
5 Whenever there is a significant change in the quality of any of the ingredients for concrete, the Engineer
may at his discretion order the carrying out of fresh trial mixes. All costs for trial mixes and tests shall
be to the Contractor's account and held to be included in the contract rates.
6 Before commencing the Works the Contractors shall submit to the Engineer, for approval full details of
all preliminary trial mixes and tests.
7 When the proportions of a concrete mix have been approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall not
vary the quality or source of the materials or the mix without the written approval of the Engineer.
8 Concrete Cube Tests : As per IS 456: 2000
9 Permeability Test : DELETED
10 Acceptability criteria : As per IS 456: 2000
Permeability Test :
The concrete shall pass the permeability test if it is properly compacted and is not considered permeable when
tested as per IS 3085:1965, and the water penetration in the broken core is less than 25mm. No extra payment
shall be made for this test and cost of the same will be included in his rate for concrete work.
11 Mix Design :
It is the complete responsibility of the Contractor to design the concrete mixes by approved standard methods
and to produce the required concrete conforming to the specifications and the strength requirements approved
by the Engineer. It is expected that the Contractor will have competent staff to carry out this work.
12 Failure to meet Specified Requirements :
1 If from the cube test results it appears that some portion of the Works has not attained the required
strength, the Engineer may order that portion of the structure be subjected to further testing of any
kind whatsoever as desired by the Engineer, including, if so desired by him, full load testing of the
suspected as well as adjacent portions; of the structure as specified in the Conditions of Contract. Such
testing shall be at the Contractor's cost. The Engineer may also reject the work and order its demolition
and reconstruction at the Contractor's cost.
2 If the strength of concrete in any portion of the structure is lower than the required strength, but is
considered nevertheless adequate by the Engineer so that demolition is not necessary, the Contractor
shall be paid a lower rate for such lower strength concrete as determined by the Engineer.
13 Site Testing :

As frequently as the Engineer may require, testing shall be carried out in the field for:
1 Moisture content, absorption and density of sand and aggregates
2 Silt content of sand
3 Grading of sand and aggregates
4 Slump test of concrete
4 Concrete cube test
6 Permeability test for concrete as per IS:3085-1965
7 Density and pH value of Plasticiser
The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times, until the Works are completed, equipment and staff
required for carrying out these tests. The Contractor shall grant the Engineer or his representative full access to
this laboratory at all times and shall produce on demand complete records of all tests carried out on site.
Before concreting commences on any section of the Works the Contractor shall obtain approval of the Engineer
or his representative as regards the form and reinforcement conforming with the drawings. He shall also indicate
to the Engineer in writing and obtain his approval for positions of construction joints. The Engineer or his
representative's approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations to comply with the provisions
of this specification or contract.
14 Admixtures :
Approved admixtures and air entraining agents may be permitted by the Engineer at his discretion provided that
the strength requirements are not affected by their use. Any cement saving due to their use will be to the benefit
of the Contractor. The admixture will not be paid for separately.
15 Volume Batching with Weight Control :
Where volume batching with weight control is specified by the Engineer, all measurements of coarse aggregates
and water shall be by volume and of cement by the bag, controlled by regular periodic weighings. In order to
ensure correct proportioning the following precautions shall be taken :
1 The Contractor shall maintain at site a suitable number of platform balances similar to the balances used
for weighing luggage at railway platforms, capable of weighing up to 200 kg to the nearest 100 grams;
the balance shall be used for weighing cement bags and occasional boxes of sand and coarse aggregate
as specified below.
2 The Contractor shall provide the mixer operator with standard measures for measuring the water to be
used in the mix.
3 The quantity of water to be added to the mix shall be approved by the Engineer or his representative
and may be adjusted by them as frequently as necessary in order to allow for the moisture content of
the sand or coarse aggregate and workability desired. On no account shall the Contractor allow more
water to be added to the mix than that specified by the Engineer or his representative. Concrete
containing water in excess of that specified shall be rejected and not allowed for use in the Works.
4 Sand and coarse aggregates shall be measured by volume. The size of measuring boxes or the depth
to which they are filled or both shall be adjusted to obtain the correct weight of each material specified
by the Engineer for that mix.

5 Every fifth or tenth measuring box of sand or of coarse aggregate shall be weighed on the balance to
ensure that filling of boxes is being uniformly done. Adjustment shall be made from time to time in the
amount of each box filled to take into account variations in moisture content and consequent bulking of
sand.
6 More frequent weighing of boxes, particularly of sand if found to vary considerably in moisture content
and bulking, may be required by the Engineer and shall be done by the Contractor without additional
cost.
16 Weigh Batching :
All structural concrete shall be weigh batched. All concrete ingredients except shall be batched by weight using
a weigh batcher of an approved make (IS: 2722 - Portable swing weigh batchers for concrete). Batching shall
be to an accuracy of not less than 1/2 kg and the batcher shall be tested for accuracy of calibration before
commencement of the Works and at least once a week thereafter or more frequently if so required by the
Engineer.
17 Water shall be batched by weight or by volume measures as approved by the Engineer. The method of batching
shall be such as will ensure an accuracy to 0.5 litres or better.
18 Placing temperatures :DELETED
19 Transporting, placing, compacting and curing :
Transporting, placing, compacting and curing of concrete shall be in accordance with IS: 456.
1 Transporting :
The mix after discharging from the mixer shall be transported by wheel barrows, buckets, pimps etc. without
causing segregation and loss of cement slurry and without altering its desired properties with regard to water
cement ratio, slump, air content, cohesion and homogeneity. It should be ensured that the concrete is moved
to its final destination before it attains an initial set.
2 Placing :
The height of any single lift of concrete shall not exceed 1.5m for walls or 3.0m for columns. The thickness of
horizontal layers shall not exceed 300mm. High velocity discharge of concrete causing segregation of mix shall
be avoided. The concrete shall be placed in the forms gently and not dropped from a height exceeding 1.5m
except in columns where the maximum allowed will be 2.0m. Each layer of concrete shall be compacted fully
before the succeeding layer is placed and separate batches shall follow each other so closely that the succeeding
layer shall be placed and fully compacted before the layer immediately below has taken initial set. The method
of placing shall also be such as to prevent segregation.
Concreting of any portion or section of the work shall be carried out in one continuous operation and no
interruption of concreting work will be allowed without approval of the Engineer.
3 Compaction :
Internal (needle) and surface (screed board) vibrators of approved make shall be used for compaction of
concrete.

Internal vibrators shall be used for compaction of concrete in foundations, columns, buttresses arch
section etc. For sections such as slabs, the concrete shall be compacted by surface type vibrators.
Depending on the thickness of layer to be compacted, 25 mm, 40 mm, and 60 mm dia internal vibrators
will be used. The concrete shall be compacted by use of appropriate diameter vibrator by holding the
vibrator in position until:
i) Air bubbles cease to come to surface.

ii) Resumption of steady frequency of vibrator after the initial short period of drop in the
frequency, when the vibrator is first inserted.
iii) The tone of the vibrated concrete becomes uniform.
iv) Flattened, glistening surface, with coarse aggregates particles blended into it appears on the
surface.
After the compaction is completed, the vibrator should be withdrawn slowly from the concrete
so that concrete can flow in to the space previously occupied by the vibrator. To avoid
segregation during vibration the vibrator shall not be dragged through the concrete nor used
to spread the concrete. The vibrator shall be made to penetrate, into the layer of fresh concrete
below if any for a depth of about 150mm. The vibrator shall be made to operate at a regular
pattern of spacing. The effective radii of action will overlap approximately half a radius to
ensure complete compaction.
v) To secure even and dense surfaces free from aggregate pockets, vibration shall be
supplemented by tamping or rodding by hand in the corners of forms and along the form
surfaces while the concrete is plastic.
vi) A sufficient number of spare vibrators shall be kept readily accessible to the place of deposition
of concrete to assure adequate vibration in case of breakdown of those in use.
vii) Form vibrators whenever used shall be clamped to the sides of formwork and shall not be fixed
more than 450 mm above the base of the new formwork and concrete shall be filled not higher
than 230mm above the vibrator. The formwork must be made specially strong and watertight
where this type of vibrator is used.
Care must be taken to guard against over vibration especially where the workability of the
concrete mix is high since this will encourage segregation of the concrete.
viii) Plain concrete in foundations shall be placed in direct contact with the bottom of the excavation,
the concrete being deposited in such a manner as not to be fixed with the earth. Plain concrete
also shall be vibrated to achieve full compaction.
4 Concrete placed below the ground shall be protected from falling earth during and after placing. Concrete
placed in ground containing deleterious substances shall be kept free from contact with such ground
and with water draining there from during placing and for a period of seven days or as otherwise
instructed thereafter. Approved means shall be taken to protect immature concrete from damage by
debris, excessive loading, abrasion, vibrations, deleterious ground water, mixing with earth or other
materials, and other influences that may impair the strength and durability of the concrete.

20 Construction Joints: DELETED
21 Cracks :
If cracks, which in the opinion of the Engineer may be detrimental to the strength of the construction, develop
in concrete construction, the Contractor at his own expense shall test the slab or other construction as specified
in Special Conditions. If under such test loads the cracks develop further, the Contractor shall dismantle the
construction, carry away the debris, replace the construction and carry out all consequential work thereto.
If any cracks develop in the concrete construction, which in the opinion of the Engineer, are not detrimental to
the stability of the construction, the Contractor at his own expense shall grout the cracks with neat cement grout
and also at his own expense and risk shall make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer all other building works
such as plaster, moulding, surface finish of floors, roofs, ceilings, etc. which in the opinion of the Engineer have
suffered damage either in appearance or stability owing to such cracks. The Engineer's decision as to the extent
of the liability of the Contractor in the above matter shall be final and binding.
22 Defective Concrete :
Should any concrete be found honeycombed or in any way defective, such concrete shall on the instruction of
the Engineer be cut out by the Contractor and made good at his own expense.
23 Exposed Faces, Holes and Fixtures :
On no account shall concrete surfaces be patched or covered up or damaged concrete rectified or replaced until
the Engineer or his representative has inspected the works and issued written instructions for rectification.
Failure to observe this procedure will render that portion of the works liable to rejection; in which case it will be
treated as rejection which has failed to meet specified strength requirements and dealt with according to Clause
B.11.
Holes for foundation or other bolts or for any other purposes shall be moulded, and steel angles, holdfasts or
other fixtures shall be embedded, according to the drawing or as instructed by the Engineer.
24 Finishes :
Unless otherwise instructed the face of exposed concrete placed against formwork shall be rubbed down
immediately on removal of the formwork to remove irregularities. The face of concrete for which formwork is
not provided other than slabs shall be smoothed with a float to give a finish equal to that of the rubbed down
face, where formwork is provided. The top face of a slab which is not intended to be covered with other materials
shall be levelled and floated to a smooth finish at the levels or falls shown on the drawings or as directed. The
floating shall be done so as not to bring an excess of mortar to the surface of the concrete. The top face of a
slab intended to be surfaced with other material shall be left with a spaded finish. Faces of concrete intended to
be plastered shall be roughened by approved means to form of a key.
25 Concrete for flooring on grade :
Concrete for flooring on grade shall be over well packed stone metalling or on earth as specified with or without
reinforcement, placed in alternate bays not exceeding more than 6m x 6m or as specified including hacking the
joints or adjacent bays. The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.4. The stiff mix shall be thoroughly vibrated
and finished to receive the floor finish.
26 Other applicable codes of practice for in-situ reinforced construction :
All other requirements not covered by the above clauses shall be governed by relevant clauses of IS 456, IS
3370, IS 2571 and other relevant standards as may be applicable.
27 Grouting of base plates & bolt holes :
i Mixing :
Dry grout should be mixed in a mechanical mixer: the conventional 200/400-litre capacity concrete mixer can
be used to mix four bags of dry grout; alternatively, paddle type mortar mixers can be used. The quantity of
grout to be mixed at one time should not exceed that amount which can be placed in approximately 10 to 15
minutes.
ii Batching :
Batching of grout by fraction of a bag is not allowed. The quantity of mixing water should be the minimum
commensurate with workability, compaction, and filling of the grout in all corners and crevices. Mixing should be
done for a minimum of three minutes to obtain a fluid grout of uniform consistency.
iii Cleaning and preparation of the surface :

The base concrete should be clean and strong, and its surface should be properly hacked; all dust should be
removed suction or compressed air. The surface should be thoroughly wetted with water for several hours.
Before the grout is poured, all free water should be removed and the flat surfaces coated with a thin cement
slurry.
iv Restraint :
Heavy back-up blocks of timber or concrete should be fixed on all sided of the base plate to prevent escape of
the grout, when poured through the openings provided in the base plate. Adequate restraint must be ensured on
all the sides for a period of 7 days to obtain effective expansion and shrinkage compensation.
v Curing :
The grout should not dry out where external restraint is provided in the form of form-work, the top opening and
all stray openings should be covered with wet sack for at least 7 days.
vi Placing and compaction :

The grout should be placed quickly and continuously either through the holes in the base plates or from one side
only to ensure complete filling without entrapment of air. Grout should be properly spread and compacted by
rodding. Excessive vibration should be avoided.
Below the bed plates the grout should be compacted using long pieces of doubled-over flexible steel strapping or
chains. The forward and backward movement of the strap or chain will assist in the flow of the grout into place.
Steps must be taken to keep the grout in full contact with the underside of the bed plate until the grout sets;
maintaining a small head of fresh grout in the forms.
vii Shrinkage Compensated Grout:

Shrinkage compensated grout of Associated Cement Companies Limited or any other approved manufacturer
should be used. The batching shall be as per the manufacturer's specifications, other procedures being as above.

28 Precast Concrete :DELETED
30 Ready Mix Concrete and Pumping :
1 Ready-mixed concrete may be manufactured in a central automatic weigh Batching plant and
transported to the job in agitating transit mixers.
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be limited to one-third of the smallest inside
diameter of the hose or pipe used for pumping. Provision shall be made for elimination of
over-sized particles by screening or by careful selection of aggregates. To obtain proper
gradation it may be necessary to combine and blend certain fractional sizes of aggregates.
Uniformity of gradation throughout the entire job shall be maintained.
The quantity of coarse aggregate shall be such that the concrete can be pumped, compacted
and finished without difficulty.
2 Fine aggregates :
The gradation of fine aggregate shall be such that 15 to 30 percent should pass the 0.30 mm
screen and 5 to 10 percent should pass 0.15 mm screen so as to obtain a pumpable concrete.
Sands which are deficient in either of these two sizes should be blended with selected finer
sands to produce these desired percentages. With this gradation, sands having a fineness
modulus between 2.4 and 2.8 are generally satisfactory. However, for uniformity, the fineness
modulus of the sand should not vary more than 0.2 from the average value used in
proportioning.
3 Water, Admixtures and slump :

The amount of water required for proper concrete consistency shall take into account the rate
of mixing, length of haul, time of unloading, and ambient temperature conditions.
Additions of water to compensate for slump loss should not be resorted to nor should the design
maximum water-cement ratio be exceeded. Additional dose of be retarder be used to compensate the
loss of slump at contractor’s cost. Retempering water shall not be allowed to be added to mixed batches
to obtain desired slump.
4 Transportation :
The method of transportation used should efficiently deliver the concrete to the point of
placement without significantly altering its desired properties with regard to water-cement ratio,
slump, and homogeneity.
The revolving-drum truck bodies of approved make shall be used for transporting the concrete. The
number of revolutions at mixing speed, during transportation, and prior to discharge shall be
specified and agreed upon. Reliable counters shall be used on revolving-drum truck units. Standard
mixer uniformity tests, conforming to ASTM standards C 94-69 “Standard Specifications for Ready Mix
Concrete”, shall be carried out to determine whether mixing is being accomplished satisfactorily.
5 Pumping of concrete :

Only approved pumping equipment, in good working condition, shall be used for pumping of
concrete. Concrete shall be pumped through a combination of rigid pipe and heavy-duty flexible
hose of approved size and make. The couplings used to connect both rigid and flexible pipe
sections shall be adequate in strength to withstand handling loads during erection of pipe
system, misalignment, and poor support along the lines. They should be nominally rated for
at least 3.5 MPa pressure and greater for rising runs over 30 m. Couplings should be
designed to allow replacement of any section without moving other pipe sections, and should
provide full cross section with no construction or crevices to disrupt the smooth flow of
concrete.
All necessary accessories such as curved sections of rigid pipe, swivel joints and rotary
distributors, pin and gate valves to prevent backflow in the pipe line, switch valves to direct
the flow into another pipe line, connection devices to fill forms from the bottom up, extra
strong couplings for vertical runs, transitions for connecting different sizes of pipe, air vents
for downhill pumping, clean-out equipment etc, shall be provided as and where required.
Suitable power controlled booms or specialized crane shall be used for supporting the pipe
line.
6 Field control :
Sampling at both truck discharge and point of final placement shall be employed to determine
if any changes in the slump and other significant mix characteristics occur. However, for
determining strength of concrete, cubes shall be taken from the placement end of line.
7 Planning :
Proper planning of concrete supply, pump locations, line layout, placing sequence, and the entire
pumping operation shall be made and got approved. The pump should be as near the placing
area as practicable, and the entire surrounding area shall have adequate bearing strength to
support concrete delivery pipes. Lines from pump to the placing area should be laid out with
a minimum of bends. For large placing areas , alternate lines should be installed for rapid
connection when required. Standby power and pumping equipment should be provided to
replace initial equipment, should breakdown occur.
The placing rate should be estimated so that concrete can be ordered at an appropriate delivery
rate.
As a final check, the pump should be started and operated without concrete to be certain
that all moving parts are operating properly. A grout mortar should be pumped in to the lines
to provide lubrication for the concrete, but this mortar shall not be used in the placement.
When the form is nearly full, and there is enough concrete in the line to complete the
placement, the pump shall be stopped and a go-devil inserted and shall be forced through the
line by water under pressure to clean it out. The go-devil should be stopped at a safe distance
from the end of the line so that the water in the line will not spill into the placement area.
At the end of placing operation, the line shall be cleaned in the reverse direction.
31 Measurement :
Concrete, formwork and reinforcement shall be paid separately unless otherwise specified.
The volume of concrete measured shall include that occupied by:
1 Reinforcement and other metal sections.
2 Cast in components each less than 0.01 m3 in volume.

3 Rebates fillets or internal splays each less than 0.005 m2 in cross sectional area.
4 Pockets and holes not exceeding 0.01 m3 in volume.
5 For M-10 / M-15 (P.C.C/ Plum concrete) concrete or shuttering for lintels, sills, stiffners, patlis, copings, C.C
gutters, concrete drain covers casted in small sizes (with or without reinforcement),curb stone etc. no
payment shall be made for any shuttering used.
6 For concrete for flooring on grade or for roadwork no payment shall be made for any shuttering used. Stone
metalling however shall be paid separately.
7 Rates for precast concrete shall include demoulding, handling, storing, transporting and erecting at site,
including all clamping, bracing that may be required during erection including erection equipment.

SECTION – E
FORM WORK
1 Definition :
The term "Formwork" or "Shuttering" shall include all forms, moulds, sheeting, shuttering planks, walers, poles,
posts, shores, struts and strutting, ties, uprights, wallings, steel rods, bolts, wedges and all other temporary
supports to the concrete during the process of setting.
2 Materials :
1 All facing formwork to come in contact with concrete in different elements of the structure shall be of such
material and size as specified on drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
2 Timber facing formwork to come in contact with concrete for "Exposed Concrete Surfaces" shall consist of
lap-jointed or tongue and grooved planks as directed by the Engineer and no joint shall permit leakage of
mortar at all from cast-in-situ concrete.
3 The materials for other backing and supporting formwork and their sizes shall be selected by the
Contractor and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3 Design :
The formwork shall be designed and constructed so that the concrete can be properly placed and thoroughly
compacted to obtain the required shape, position and level subject to specified tolerances. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to obtain the results required by the Engineer, whether or not some of the work is sub-
contracted. Approval of the proposed formwork by the Engineer will not diminish the Contractor's responsibility
for the satisfactory performance of the formwork, nor for the safety and co-ordination of all operations.
4 Formwork for Exposed Concrete Surfaces :
The facing formwork, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, or specifically approved by the Engineer in writing,
shall generally be made with materials not less than the thickness mentioned below for different elements of the
structure :
1 Plain slab soffits, and sides of beams, girders, joists and ribs and side of walls, fins, parapets, pardis,
sun-breakers, etc shall be made with :
a Steel plates not less than 3mm thick of specified sizes stiffened with a suitable structural
framework, fabricated true to plane with a tolerance of +/- 2mm within the plate,
b Timber planks of 20mm actual thickness and of specified surface finish, width and reasonable
length,
c Plywood plates not less than 12mm thick (IS:4990 - Specification for Plywood for Concrete
Shuttering Work) or 3mm thick with a 20mm timber plank backing, of specified sizes stiffened with
a suitable timber framework.

2 Bottoms of beams, girders and ribs, sides of columns shall be made with :
a Steel plates not less than 5mm thick of specified sizes stiffened with a suitable structural
framework, fabricated true to plane with a tolerance of +/- 2mm within the plate,
b Timber planks of 35mm actual thickness and of specified surface finish, width and reasonable
length,
c Plywood plates not less than 12mm thick, of specified sizes stiffened with a suitable timber
framework.
5 Erection of Formwork :
The following shall apply to all formwork :
1 To avoid delay and unnecessary rejection of the Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for
the design of forms and the type of material used before fabricating the forms. (ref. ACI 347 Formwork
for Concrete or equivalent I.S. Code).
2 All shutter planks and plates shall be adequately backed to the satisfaction of the Engineer by a sufficient
number and size of walers or framework to ensure rigidity during concreting. All shutters shall be
adequately strutted, braced and propped to the satisfaction of the Engineer to prevent deflection under
deadweight of concrete and superimposed live load of workmen, materials and plant, and to withstand
vibration. No joints in props shall be allowed.
3 Vertical props shall be supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken where the props can be
gently lowered vertically during removal of the formwork. Props for an upper story shall be placed
directly over those in the storey immediately below, and the lowest props shall bear on a sufficiently
strong area. Care shall be taken that all formwork is set plumb and true to line and level or camber or
better where required and as specified by the Engineer.
4 Provision shall be made for adjustment of supporting struts where necessary. When reinforcement
passes through the formwork care should be taken to ensure close fitting joints against the steel bars
so as to avoid loss of fines during the compaction of concrete.
5 If the formwork is held together by bolts or wires, these shall be so fixed that no iron will be exposed
on surfaces against which concrete is to be laid. In any case wires shall not be used with exposed
concrete formwork. The Engineer may at his discretion allow the Contractor to use tie-bolts running
through the concrete and the Contractor shall decide the location and size of such tie-bolts in
consultation with the Engineer. Holes left in the concrete by these tie-bolts shall be filled as specified by
the Engineer at no extra cost.
6 Provision shall be made in the shuttering for beams, columns, and walls for a port hole of convenient
size so that all extraneous materials that may be collected could be removed just prior to concreting.
7 Formwork shall be so arranged as to permit removal of forms without jarring the concrete. Wedges,
clamps and bolts shall be used wherever practicable instead of nails.
The formwork for beams and slabs shall be so erected so that forms on the sides of the beams and the
soffit of slabs can be removed without disturbing the beam bottoms or props under beams.
8 Surfaces of forms in contact with concrete shall be oiled with a mould oil of approved quality or clean
diesel oil. If required by the Engineer the contractor shall execute different parts of the work with
different mould oils to enable the Engineer to select the most suitable. The use of oil which results in
blemishes of the surface of the concrete shall not be allowed. Oil shall be applied before reinforcement
has been placed and care shall be taken that no oil comes in contact with the reinforcement while it is
being placed in position. The formwork shall be kept thoroughly wet during concreting and the whole
time that it is left in place.
9 Immediately before concreting is commenced, the formwork shall be carefully examined to ensure the
following :
a Removal of all dirt, shavings, sawdust and other refuse by brushing and washing.
b The tightness of joints between panels of sheathing and between these and any hardened core.
c The correct location of tie bars, bracing and spacers, and especially connections of bracing.
d That all wedges are secured and firm in position.
e That provision is made for traffic on formwork not to bear directly on reinforcing steel.
10 The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval for dimensional accuracies of the work and for the
general arrangement of propping and bracing. (IS:3696 - Safety Code of Scaffolds and Ladders,
IS:4014 Steel Tubular Scaffolding I & II) It is imperative that for scaffolding heights of 3.6m and above
timber posts or steel scaffolding be used with adequate bracings at several levels in each perpendicular
direction connecting each prop. In addition to this diagonal bracing should be provided in elevation
ideally at 45 degrees on between 30 and 60 degree. Bracings with bamboos will not be permitted. When
timber posts are used the bracings shall consist of minimum 25mm thick wooden planks fixed to each
post with at least two nails. The contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of propping,
and for keeping the wedges and other locking arrangements undisturbed through the decentering
period. (IS 8989 safety code for erection of concrete framed structures)
11 Formwork shall be continuously watched during the process of concreting. If during concreting any
weakness develops and formwork shows any distress the work shall be stopped and remedial action
taken.
6 Exposed Concrete Work :
Exposed concrete surfaces shall be smooth and even, originally as stripped without any finishing or rendering.
Where directed by the Engineer, the surface shall be rubbed with carborundum stone immediately on striking
the forms. The Contractor shall exercise special care and supervision of formwork and concreting to ensure that
the cast members are made true to their sizes, shapes and positions and to produce the
surface patterns desired. No honeycombing shall be allowed. Honeycombed parts of the concrete shall be
removed by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer and fresh concrete placed without extra cost, as instructed
by the Engineer. All materials, sizes and layouts of formwork including the locations for their joints shall have
are prior approval of the Engineer or the Architect.
7 Camber :

Forms and false work shall be generally cambered as indicated in the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
However, for beams up to 5m span and slabs up to 4m span camber is not normally required to be provided.
8 Tolerances :
In accordance with IS:456.
9 Age of Concrete at Removal of Formwork :
In accordance with IS:456.
The Engineer may vary the periods specified in IS:456 if he considers it necessary. Immediately after the forms
are removed, they shall be cleaned with a jet of water and a soft brush.
10 Stripping of Formwork :
Formwork shall be removed carefully without jarring the concrete, and curing of the concrete shall be commenced
immediately. Concrete surfaces to be exposed shall, where required by the Engineer, be rubbed down with
carborundum stone to obtain a smooth and even finish. Where the concrete requires plastering or other finish
later the concrete surface shall be immediately hacked lightly all over as directed by the Engineer. No extra
charge will be allowed to the Contractor for such work on concrete surfaces after removal of forms.
11 Repropping :
For multistoried buildings the floors may need repropping to support the loads of the upper floors under
construction. The extent of such repropping shall be as directed by the Engineer (this does not normally exceed
one fourth of the props provided above). Such repropping shall not be paid for separately and the cost of such
repropping shall be deemed to have been included in the rates.
12 Reuse of Forms :
The Contractor shall not be permitted reuse of timber facing formwork brought new on the works more than 5
times for exposed concrete formwork and 8 times for ordinary formwork. 5 or 8 uses shall be permitted only if
forms are properly cared for, stored and repaired after each use. The Engineer may in his absolute discretion
order rejection of any forms he considers unfit for use for a particular item, and order removal from the site of
any forms he considers unfit for use in the Works. Used forms brought on the site will be allowed proportionately
fewer uses as decided by the Engineer. Use of different quality boards or the use of old and new boards in the
same formwork shall not be allowed.
13 Hacking-Out :
Immediately after removal of forms, the concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be roughened with a bush-
hammer or with chisel and hammer as directed by the Engineer to make the surfaces sufficiently coarse and
rough to provide a key for plaster.
14 Formwork for Prestressed Concrete : DELETED
15 Measurements :

1 Where formwork is paid for separately, measurements shall be of the area of finally exposed surface
requiring shuttering including curves, angles, splays, mitres, bevels, etc. for which no special rate shall
be allowed. The rates shall be inclusive of all work connected with provision of formwork, its erection
and removal and treatment of the concrete surface immediately after removal of the formwork.
2 No extra payment shall be made for holes to be made in formwork for inserting electrical conduits,
hooks for fans, for plumbing work.
3 Where boxes or pockets are required to be formed in the concrete, they will be paid for separately at
the Contract Rates, but in measuring the area of concrete surfaces shuttered, no deduction will be made
for openings up to 0.4m2. For voids larger than 0.4m2 the surface of formwork forming the voids shall
be paid at rates of formwork set out in the Schedule and the area of voids deducted from the face area
of shuttering.
4 No deductions shall be made from formwork of main beams where the secondary beam intersects it.
Formwork to secondary beams shall be measured up to sides of the main beams. No deduction shall
be made from the formwork to stanchion or column casings at intersections of beam.
5 No payment shall be made for temporary formwork used in concreting, nor for formwork required for
joints or bulkheads, in floors, or elsewhere, whether such joints are to be covered later with concrete or
mastic or other material.

SECTION - F
REINFORCEMENT
1 Steel :
Steel used in the works shall be either rounds conforming to IS:432, hot rolled deformed bars conforming to
IS:1139, Cold twisted bars conforming to IS:1566-1977, or rolled steel made from structural steel conforming
to IS:226. Any other steel specified for reinforcement shall conform in every respect to the latest relevant Indian
Standard Specifications and shall be of tested quality under the ISI Certification Scheme.
All reinforcement work shall be executed in conformity with the drawings supplied and instructions given by the
Engineer and shall generally be carried out in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard Specifications
(IS:2502). The steel grade shall be TMT Fe 500 however Fe 500 D shall be allowed to use at no extra cost.
a) The contractor shall produce TMT bars of Fe 415 / Fe500/ fe550 grade from primary producers such as SAIL
or TISCO or RINL as approved by ministry of steel
In case of non-availability of steel from primary producers such as SAIL / TISCO/ RINL, the NIT approving
authority may permit secondary producers of TMT reinforcement bars provided the secondary producers
satisfy the following conditions:
i) The secondary producers must have valid BIS license to produce HSD bars conforming to IS 1786:
2008. In addition to BIS license, the secondary producer must have valid license from either of the firms
Tempcore , Thermex ,Evcon Turbo & Turbo Quench to produce TMT bars and shall conform to the
specifications as laid by Tempcore , Thermex ,Evcon Turbo & Turbo Quench AS the case may be.
ii) THE TMT bars produced from primary producers shall conform to manufacturers specifications.
iii) TMT bars produced either from primary producers ,the specifications shall meet the provisions of IS
1786 : 2008 pertaining to Fe 415 D or Fe 500D or Fe 550D grade of steel as specified in the tender .
b) MILD STEEL (Fe 250): SAIL / TISCO / RINL /Goa Ispat or main product and secondary product having
valid BIS license
C.1. Inspection & Testing:

Samples shall be taken and got tested by the Engineer as per the provisions in this regard in relevant BIS codes.
The test results of the steel arranged and tested by the contractor shall conform to the specifications as
mentioned below.
i) The TMT bars procured from secondary producers shall conform to the specifications as laid by
Tempcore,
Thermex, Evcon Turbo & Quench as the case may be.
ii) TMT bars procured either from primary producers or secondary producers, the specifications shall meet
the provisions of IS 1786 : 2008 pertaining to Fe 415D or FE 500D or Fe 550D grade of steel as specified
in the tender. In case the test results does not conform to the above mentioned specifications, the said
steel shall Stand rejected, and it shall be removed from the site of work by the Contractor at his cost
within a week time or written orders from the Engineer to do so.
C.2. Lapping & Welding:

a) As far as possible bars of the maximum length available shall be used. Laps shown on drawings or otherwise
specified by the Engineer will be based on the use by the Contractor of bars of maximum length. In case the
Contractor wishes to use shorter bars, laps shall be provided at the Contractor's cost in the manner and at
the locations approved by the Engineer.
b) Welding of HYSD/TMT bars is not permitted..
C.3. Spacing, Supporting and Cleaning:

a) All reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the positions shown on the drawings.
b) The Contractor shall provide approved types of supports as specified on the drawings for maintaining the
top bars of the slab in position during concreting. All cover blocks shall be of precast concrete (not sand
cement mortar) and of the same strength as that of the surrounding concrete and properly compacted. They
shall be circular in shape and not square.
c) Bars must be cleaned before concreting commences of all scale, rust or partially set concrete which may
have been deposited there during placing of previous lift of concrete.
d) The bars shall be cleaned with dry gunny bags if they are coated lightly with rust or other impurities. On no
account shall the bars be oiled or painted nor shall mould oil used on the formwork be allowed to come in
contact with the bars. Cement wash to bars shall not be permitted.
e) The reinforcement shall be tied using 18 swg G.I. binding wire PVC coated.
C.4. Welding:
a) Wherever specified all welding shall be carried in accordance with IS:2571. Only qualified welders shall be
permitted to carry out such welding.
b) For cold twisted reinforcement welding operations must be controlled to prevent a supply of large amounts
of heat larger than that can be dissipated. The extreme non twisted end portion shall be cut off before
welding. Electrodes with rutile coating should be used.
c) The welding procedure shall be approved by the Engineer and tests shall be made to prove the soundness
of the welded connection.
C.5. Measurements:
a) The weight of steel to be paid for at the contract rates shall be the weight of bars as mentioned on the
drawings or as instructed by the Engineer including stirrups, ties, spacer bars, chairs and any other steel
works specified as reinforcement but excluding binding wire and cover blocks. Laps as specified on the
drawings shall be paid for. Laps required because of the contractor's use of shorter bars will not be paid for.
b) The weight of any stirrup, tie bar shall be computed from the dimensions given on the drawings or bending
schedules. The weight in kg/metre shall be taken as 0.785 kg/metre per 100mm2 of cross section. The
rate shall take into account the rolling margin.
C.6. General:
a) Contractor to Provide :
The Contractor will provide all materials and equipment required to complete the works in every respect,
whether such materials are required as part of the permanent structures or temporary for fabrication or
erection or maintenance including specifically structural steel plates, flats, bars, welding rods, rivets, bolts
and nuts, paint, welding sets in the shop and at site, all workshop facilities, derricks, cranes, pulley blocks,
wire ropes, hemp or manila ropes, winches, erection cleats and temporary braces or supports and all other
materials required to deliver the Works complete in every respect.
All labour required for fabrication and erection for any cleaning, making good, rectifying, hauling, painting
and for any other ancillary work required to complete fabrication and erection.
b) The Contractor shall observe all safety requirements for erection of structural steelwork as covered in
IS:7205.
C.7. Drawings:
a) The Engineer will supply to the Contractor profile drawings showing sizes of all structural members and
typical connection details.
b) Should there be any discrepancy in the drawings the Contractor is to refer the matter to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall further provide a drawing showing the accurate setting out to line and level of all the anchor
bolts intended for the work in sufficient time for their inclusion in the work so as to maintain the building
programme.
c) The Contractor is to prepare all the necessary fabrication shop drawings and these shall be submitted to the
Engineer in duplicate and be approved by him before fabrication is commenced. All such drawings shall show
the dimensions of all parts, method of construction, welding and bolting. A further set of all approved
fabrication drawings shall be supplied by the Contractor for use of the Engineer as required.
Approval by the Engineer of drawings or any other particulars submitted by the Contractor shall not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility for any discrepancies, errors or omissions therein. The Contractor shall
at his own expense supply such additional copies of his working drawings as are required for the use of the
interested parties.
SECTION – G
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS & STAINLESS STEEL WORKS

1 General :
1 Contractor to Provide :
The Contractor will provide all materials and equipment required to complete the works in every respect,
whether such materials are required as part of the permanent structures or temporary for fabrication
or erection or maintenance including specifically structural steel plates, flats, bars, welding rods, rivets,
bolts and nuts, paint, welding sets in the shop and at site, all workshop facilities, derricks, cranes, pulley
blocks, wire ropes, hemp or manila ropes, winches, erection cleats and temporary braces or supports
and all other materials required to deliver the Works complete in every respect.
All labour required for fabrication and erection for any cleaning, making good, rectifying, hauling,
painting and for any other ancillary work required to complete fabrication and erection.
2 The Contractor shall observe all safety requirements for erection of structural steelwork as covered in
IS:7205.
2 Drawings :
1 The contractor will prepare and submit the shop drawings for approval from the engineer however the
Engineer will supply to the Contractor basic profile drawings.
2 Should there be any discrepancy in the drawings the Contractor is to refer the matter to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall further provide a drawing showing the accurate setting out to line and level of all
the anchor bolts intended for the work in sufficient time for their inclusion in the work so as to maintain
the building programme.
3 The Contractor is to prepare all the necessary fabrication shop drawings and these shall be submitted
to the Engineer in duplicate and be approved by him before fabrication is commenced. All such drawings
shall show the dimensions of all parts, method of construction, welding and bolting. A further set of all
approved fabrication drawings shall be supplied by the Contractor for use of the Engineer as required.
4 Approval by the Engineer of drawings or any other particulars submitted by the Contractor shall not
relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for any discrepancies, errors or omissions therein. The
Contractor shall at his own expense supply such additional copies of his working drawings as are required
for the use of the interested parties.
3 Material :
1 Structural Steel : All structural steel shall be of tested quality and shall conform to one of the following
standards:
IS:226 structural steel (Standard Quality)

IS:2062 Structural steel (Fusion welding quality)
IS:961 High Tensile Structural Steel (Ordinary)
The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer copies of the manufacturers certificate that the steel brought
to the site for incorporation in the works is of a quality fully complying with the specification. If required
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for testing of the steel samples as per IS:1608 - 1599.

2 Welding Electrodes : Welding electrodes used for the works shall conform to IS:814/latest and shall be
supplied by manufacturer approved by the Engineer and shall be of the grade approved by the Engineer.
All Electrodes shall be kept under dry conditions. Any electrode which has part of its flux coating broken
away or is damaged shall be rejected.
3 Bolts and Nuts : Bolts and nuts used for the works shall unless otherwise specified be black bolts and
nuts supplied by manufacturer approved by the Engineer and shall conform to IS:1367.
4 For all other material required for the works, the approval of the Engineer shall be obtained by the
Contractor prior to the use of the material in the works.
4 Workmanship and Fabrication :
1 For all the works, workmanship shall be of first class quality, throughout, in conformity with IS:800-latest,
and true to line, level and dimension as shown in the drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
2 All parts assembled for bolting shall be in close contract over the whole surface and all bearing stiffeners
shall bear tightly at top and bottom without being drawn or caulked. The component parts shall be so
assembled that they are neither twisted not otherwise damaged as specified cambers if any shall be
provided. Drilling done during assembling shall not distort the metal or enlarge holes. The butting
surfaces at all joints shall be so cut and milled so as to butt in close contact throughout the finished
joints.
3 Hand flame cutting will not be permitted.
4 Punching of holes will not be permitted.
5 All welding for the works shall be carried out by first class welders and shall be in accordance with
IS:816, IS:819, IS:1024, IS:1261, IS:1323 and IS:9595. The Engineer may at his discretion order
periodic tests of the welder and/or of the welds produced by them. All such tests, shall be carried out
by the Contractor at his cost.
3 As much work as possible shall be welded in shops. The pieces shall be manipulated to ensure down
hand welding for all shop joints as far as possible. All parts to be welded shall be arranged so as to fit
properly on assembly. After assembly and before the general welding is to commence the parts are to
be tack welded with small fillet or butt welds as the case may be. The tack welding must be strong
enough to hold the parts together but small enough to be covered by the general welding. The welding
procedure shall be so arranged that the distortion and shrinkage stresses are reduce to a minimum.
7 All joints required in structure to facilitate transport or erection shall be shown on the drawings or as
specified by the Engineer. Should the Contractor need to provide joints in locations other than those
specified by the Engineer he shall submit his proposals and obtain the prior sanction of the Engineer for
such joints. The lengths of structural shall be the maximum normally available in the market jointing
of shorter length in order to make up lengths required shall not be permitted.
8 Each piece of steel work shall be marked distinctly before delivery, indicating the position and direction
in which it is to be fixed. Three copies of a complete marking plan are to be supplied to the Engineer
before erection commences.
9 In the case of welded fabrication any distortion remaining in the member after welding operations are
completed shall be rectified by and/or at the expense of the Contractor to the approval of the Engineer.
10 All members of trusses and lattice girders shall be straight throughout their length, unless shown
otherwise on the drawings, and shall be accurately set to the lines shown on the drawings. Sheared
edges of gussets or other members to be straightened and dressed where necessary.
11 Templates and jigs used throughout the work shall be all steel. In cases where actual materials have
been used as templates for drilling similar pieces, the Engineer shall decide whether they are fit to be
used as parts of the finished structure.
5 Testing of Welds :
Crane Girders :
Butt welds in top flanges and webs - 100% radiographic testing (IS:2595) of first six welds and 10% thereafter.
Welding of stiffeners, cover plates to flanges, etc. - Ultrasonic testing (IS:4260) of 1 in 5 positions initially,
decreased to 1 in 10 position if failures are less than 1 in 10.
Column, Roof elements, Bracing :

Butt welds - Radiographic testing of 5% of welds.
Fillet welds - Ultrasonic testing of 1 in 20 positions decreased to 1 in 50 if failures are less than 1 in 10.
6 Protection of Steel Works (IS:8629) :
1 Sand blasting where specified shall be carried out in accordance with IS:1477.
2 Painting work shall be carried out in accordance with IS:8629 (Parts I to III).
3 The steel work, prior to delivery, shall be cleaned form scale, rust, dirt and grease etc., but means of
chipping, scraping and wire brushing using skilled operators as described in the painting systems below.
The cleaning shall proceed each day over the extent of surfaces which can be painted on that day.
4 Site weld locations shall be left free from paint within 50mm of the weld position, and contact surfaces
in connection using High Strength Friction Grip Bolts shall not be painted. Immediately after completion
of erection all damaged paint shall be scraped off and made good to the approval of the Engineer.
The Steelwork specialist shall also clean down and apply one coat of primer to all site bolts, site bolted
connections and site weld locations and the paint work generally shall be left in sound condition for any
subsequent painting.
5 All paints and primers shall be of best quality conforming to the relevant Indian Standards and shall be
procured directly from the manufacturers. All paint to be used shall be stored under cover in such
conditions as will preserve it from extreme of temperature and the paint shall be used and applied
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

6 The painting systems to be used shall be as under :
I PAINTING SYSTEM NO : I : Zinc phosphate primer with synthetic enamel

finish
System for application on : Structures in the interior parts of the country.
Service conditions under which painting : 1. Inland characteristics with neither coastal
system shall be used effects nor chlorine pollutants
: 2. No chlorine industries like petrochemicals,

fertilizers, H2S04, etc.
Surface preparation : Manual cleaning to Swedish Std. St-2 by using

mechanical tools and wire brushes
Coating System Specification D.F.T in Colour

Micron
Primer - Coat 1 High build synthetic medium pigmented 50 grey
with zinc Phosphate primer
Primer – Coat 2 – do – 50 grey
Finish – Coat 1 High glass synthetic enamel 25–30 as per shade
card
Finish – Coat 2 – do – 25–30 – do –
TOTAL COATS - 2 TOTAL 150 min
Minimum Expected Life Of The System : 4 Years
II PAINTING SYSTEM NO : II : Epoxy primer with chlorinated rubber finish
System for application on : Structures in the coastal areas.
Service conditions under

i. which painting Highly saline atmosphere
ii.:
system shall be used
iii. High humidity, Average
iv. beyond 60%
Surface preparation : Sandblasting to Swedish Std Sa 2 1/2 or
manual cleaning to Swedish Std St-2.

Micron
Primer - Coat 1 Epoxy Resin & Zinc Phosphate 25 brown
Finish – Coat 1 High build Chlorinated Rubber medium 75 grey

with Micaceous Iron Oxide
Finish – Coat 2 Plastic Chlorinated Rubber medium 25 as per shade

suitably pigmented card
Finish – Coat 3 – do – 25 –do–
TOTAL COATS – 4 TOTAL 150 min
III PAINTING SYSTEM NO: III : Ethyl silicate primer with epoxy finish
System for application on : Structures in the coastal cum heavy industrial

pollution areas
Service conditions under which painting : 1. Highly saline atmosphere

system shall be used
2. Highly polluted atmosphere due to
sulphur/fertilizer or petro chemical
pollutants
Surface preparation : Sandblasting to Swedish Std Sa 2½ or

manual cleaning to Swedish Std St–2.

Micron
Primer - Coat 1 Ethyl Silicate with Metallic Zinc (high 75 green
build)
Intermediate Coat Epoxy resin pigmented with MIO (high 100 grey
build)
Finish – Coat 1 Pigmented epoxy resin with suitable 65 as per shade
curing agent (high build) card
Finish – Coat 2 – do – 65 –do–
IVa PAINTING SYSTEM NO: IV a : Antisaline metallic primer with bitumen

finish
System for application on : Chequered plates, walkways and
staircases (outside the buildings) for
interior parts of the country
Service conditions under : 1. Inland characteristics with which

painting system neither coastal
effects nor shall be used chlorine
pollutants.
: 2. No chlorine industries like petro
chemicals, fertilisers, H2S04, etc.
Surface preparation : Manual cleaning to Swedish Std St-2
by using mechanical tools and wire
brushes.

Micron
Primer - Coat 1 Antisaline metallic primer (bituminous 25 Metallic
medium with leafing aluminium) aluminium
Primer – Coat 2 – do – 25 – do –
Finish – Coat 1 Reinforced Bituminous Composition (high 100 black

build)
Finish – Coat 2 – do – 100 black
IVb PAINTING SYSTEM NO: IV b : Zinc phosphate primer with synthetic

enamel finish
System for application on : Chequered plates, walkways and
staircases for interior parts of the
country, but for areas where colour
coding would be required.
Service conditions under which painting system : 1. Inland characteristics with neither
shall be used coastal effects nor chlorine
pollutants
: 2. No chlorine industries like petro

chemicals, fertilisers, H2S04, etc.
Surface preparation : Manual cleaning to Swedish Std St-2

by using mechanical tools and wire
brushes.
Coating System Specification D.F.T in Micron Colour

Primer - Coat 1 Synthetic medium pigmented with 50 grey
Zinc Phosphate (high build)
Primer – Coat 2 – do – 50 grey

Intermediate Coat Chlorinated Rubber Medium with 75 grey
Micaceous Iron Oxide (high build)
Finish – Coat 1 Hi Gloss Synthetic Enamel 25–30 as per shade
card
Finish – Coat 2 – do – 25–30 – do –
Va PAINTING SYSTEM NO Va : Epoxy primer with coal tar finish
System for application on : Chequered plates, walkways and staircases (outside

the buildings) for coastal and heavy industrial areas.
Service conditions under which : 1. Highly saline atmosphere
painting system shall be used
: Highly polluted atmosphere due to sulphur/fertilizer or
petro chemical pollutants
Surface preparation : Manual cleaning to Swedish Std St-2.

Primer - Coat 1 Epoxy Resin with Zinc Phosphate 25 brown
Intermediate Coat Epoxy resin with Coal Tar blend (high 150 black
build)
Finish – Coat 1 – do – 150 black
Vb PAINTING SYSTEM NO Vb : Epoxy primer with synthetic enamel
System for application on : Chequered plates, walkways and staircases for

coastal and heavy industrial areas but areas where
colour coding would be required.
Service conditions under which painting system : 1. Highly saline atmosphere
shall be used
: 2. Highly polluted atmosphere due to
sulphur/fertilizer or petro chemical pollutants
Surface preparation : Manual cleaning to Swedish Std St-2.

Primer - Coat 1 Epoxy Resin with Zinc Phosphate 25 brown
Intermediate Coat Epoxy resin pigmented with MIO (high 100 grey
build)
Finish – Coat 1 Epoxy resin suitably pigmented 25–30 as per shade
card
Finish – Coat 2 – do – 25–30 –do –
Finish – Coat 3 Hi Gloss synthetic enamel 25–30 –do –
7 In addition the following specification shall apply to the shop painting of contact and inaccessible surfaces:
a) Surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned from scale, rust, dirt, grease etc.
b) Surfaces which are to be brought permanently into close contact or made inaccessible either in the shops
or upon erection shall, after cleaning, be given two coats of Red Lead Priming Paint. The surfaces shall be
brought into contact while the paint is still wet.

c) Contract surfaces in connection using High Strength Friction Grip bolts shall not be painted or oiled and
shall be free from dirt, loosed scale, burrs, pits and any other defects which would prevent the solid seating of
the parts and would interfere with the development of friction between them.
d) All enclosed surfaces of box members shall be completely sealed by oiling or by coating with an approved
bitumen paint and all such members and tubes shall have their ends closed by suitable plates welded in position.
8 The Contractor shall take all precautions to prevent dust and dirt coming in contact with freshly painted surfaces
or with surface being painted. The second coat of paint shall only be applied when the first coat has dried.
7 Erection & Site Work :
1 The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the alignment and level of foundation and correctness
of foundation bolt centres, well in advance of starting erection work, and shall be responsible for any
consequences for non-compliance thereof. Discrepancies if any shall immediately be brought to the
notice of the Engineer for his advice.
2 During erection the rough handling of fabricated materials such as bending, straining or pounding with
sledges shall be avoided. Any damage to the structure during transportation or erection shall be
immediately rectified by the Contractor at his own cost. The straightening of bend edges of plates,
angles and other sections shall be done by methods which will not cause fracture. Following the
completion of the straightening, the surface of the member shall carefully be inspected for damage and
got approved by the Engineer before further use.
3 The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately positioning, leveling and plumbing of all steelwork
and placing of every part of the structure in accordance with the approved drawings and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. All stanchion base, beam and girder bearings etc. shall be securely
supported on suitable steel packs. All reference and datum points shall be fixed near the work site for
facilitating the erection work.
4 All equipment used by the Contractor shall be sufficient for the purpose and for the erection of the
steel work, in the time specified in the contract. Any lifting or erecting machinery shall be to the approval
of the Engineer and shall be removed from the site if he considers such appliances dangerous or
unsuitable for their functions. The approval of the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibilities for the loads to which the erection equipment shall be called upon to carry. Adequate
arrangement shall be made to resist wind loads and lateral forces arising at the time of erection.
5 The Contractor is entirely responsible for the stability of the structure during erection and shall arrange
that sufficient tack bolts, braces or guy ropes are used to ensure that work will remain rigid until final
bolting, rivetting or welding is completed. The Contractor shall supply and fix, without extra charge,
any temporary bracing which may be necessary.
6 All steelwork shall be erected in the exact position as shown on the drawings. All vertical members
shall be truly vertical throughout and all horizontal members truly horizontal, fabrication being such
that all parts can be accurately assembled and erected. No permanent bolting, welding or grouting
shall be done until proper alignment has been obtained.

7 At stanchion splices and at other positions where concrete cover to the steel is liable to be restricted,
bolts will be placed with their heads on the outside of the members.
8 All field assembly bolting and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop
fabrication excepting such as manifestly apply to shop conditions only. Where steel has been delivered
painted the paint shall be removed before field welding for a distance of at least 50mm on either side
of the joints. The number of washers on permanent bolts shall not be more than two for the nut and
one for the bolt head.
8 Rectification of damaged materials :
Any error in shop work which prevents the proper assembly and lifting up of the parts by moderate use of drift
pins or reaming or cutting shall be immediately reported to the Engineer and his approval of the method of
rectification obtained in writing. Wrongly fabricated material whose erection in the field necessitates extra work
shall be the responsibility of the contractor. The entire costs of such operation including the replacement of
defective members, if required, shall be borne by the contractor.
9 Inspection :
1 The contractor shall inform the Engineer of the progress in fabrication and as to when individual pieces
are ready for inspection. All gauge templates necessary to satisfy the Engineer shall be supplied by the
contractor. The Engineer may at his discretion check the results obtained at the contractor's works by
independent tests and should the material so tested be found unsatisfactory, the cost of such tests
shall be borne by the contractor.
10 Grouting of steel bases :
1 Before grouting of stanchion bases, the contractor shall take the following action :
a Inform the Engineer.

b Clean all holes, openings, recesses and the top of foundations of all dirt, mud, water, oil or
other extraneous matter.
c A frame shall be placed in position around the base plate with a provision for placing or injecting
grout.
d The contractor shall provide screed bars or mild steel flats and fix them in mortar.
e Holes shall be provided on the stanchion bases for escape of air.
2 Grouting of steel beams, steel stanchions, bases and bearings and encasement of steelwork will be
carried out by the contractor after the steelwork has been finally aligned and leveled and approval of
the Engineer obtained.
3 The bolt sleeves shall be grouted as a separate operation using neat cement grout of a creamy
consistency, which shall be poured in so as to completely fill the holes. "Non-shrink" cements, additives
of approved makes shall be used for all grouting operations.
4 The space between the top of the foundations and the underside of the base plate shall be completely
filled with a mix 1:2 cement sand mortar and finished flush with edge of the base plate, either :
a Mixed as a stiff mortar well rammed into place from all sides.

b Mixed as thickly as possible consistent with fluidity and poured under a suitable head and
tamped until the space has been properly filled.
11 Holding down and Anchor bolts :
1 The holding down and anchor bolts should conform to the requirements laid down in IS:624 or as
directed by the Engineer.
2 Installation : Individual bolts in groups of holding down bolts shall be positioned accurately within a
tolerance of + 6mm. The bolts shall be set vertically to a tolerance of not more than 1 in 250.
3 During the casting of concrete the contractor shall ensure that space between the bolt and sleeves is
kept clean after removal of shuttering. The contractor shall provide and fix timber plugs to maintain
this space in a clean condition. The projecting threads of bolts shall be protected by approved wrapping
materials.
4 Grouting of bolt tubes shall be carried out after the steelwork or equipment have been aligned, plumbed
and leveled.
12 Tolerances :
1 All tolerances shall be in accordance with IS:7215 unless otherwise specified.

2 The maximum deviation for line and level shall be + 3.0mm for any part of the structure including for
location of column centres.
3 The maximum deviation from plumb for columns shall be + 3.0mm in 10.0m height subject to a
maximum of +6.0mm in a total height of 30.0m.
4 The deviation at the centre of the upper chord member from vertical plan running through the centre of
the bottom chord shall not be more than 1/1500 of span but in no case more than 10.0mm. The lateral
displacement of top chord at centre of span form vertical plane running through centre of supports shall
not be more than 1/250 of the depth of truss but in no case more than 20.0mm.
5 The crane rails shall not deviate from the true location by more than + 2.0mm.
13 Mode of measurement :
1 The pricing must include for all rolling margins, extras for length and size, allowance for waste, complete
fabrication, delivery and erection, and caulking the gap between base plate and foundation, and primer
coats of paints as specified. The final coats of paints, however, will be measured and paid separately
on the basis of tonnage fabricated and erected.
2 Any temporary strutting, tieing or anchor bolts, black bolts, fasteners, welding required to withstand
the stresses of erection and carrying of plant are to be included in the price.
3 The payment for the steelwork will be for the weight of the steelwork actually erected, i.e. plates, rolled
sections, shear connections, cleats, splice plates.
Dimensions of the steelwork will be taken on site or from the actual shop working drawings as preferred
by the Engineer. In calculating the weights of gusset plates, payment will be made for the least
enclosing parallelogram or triangle. For structural sections the weight will be calculated on lengths
actually used with no deduction for splay cut or mitred end. In case of imported sections, the weights
chargeable shall be the weight according to the relative standards of the country of origin. Full weight

of the bolts and nuts will be paid for as per Indian Standard Codes weights without any deduction for
shanks, etc. No account shall be taken of the weight of weld in calculating the weight of steelwork.
Erection packing plates bedded in mortar and wedges shall not be measured but shall be included in the
rates. No deduction shall be made for openings less than 0.1m2 in area measured in plane for bolt
holes. The weight of sheet steel, plate, strips and rolled sections shall be taken from relevant Indian
Standards.
4 Unless otherwise specified, foundation and anchor bolt assemblies shall be measured separately
including nuts and washers.
I.1. I.1 STAINLESS STEEL RAILING FOR STAIRCASES
Type : SS 304 grade – BRUSHED FINISH
Size of Pipes, sheets and plates : As per drawing.
 Manufactured conditions should be are as follows:

A - Annealed
H - Hardened and tempered at a relative low temperature.
T – Hardened and tempered at a relative high temperature.
S – Stain hardened relatively high cold work.
B – Relatively severe cold work.
The specification covers stainless and head resisting steel pipes, rods and sheet.
 Chemical Compositions Stainless Steels:

Alloy C Mn P S Si Cr Ni
304 0.08 2.00 0.045 0.030 0.75 -1.00 18.00 – 20.00 8.002 – 10.50
 Mechanical Properties of Stainless Steel Pipes:
a. Type – 316
b. UNS Designation – S30400
c. Condition – Annealed
d. Tensile Strength Mpa. – Annealed
e. % Proof Strength Mpa. – 205
f. Elongation % in50 MM – 40
g. Hardness Brinell – 150,
h. ASTM Specification – A240
i. Rust Proof and Non Magnetic.
j. Polished outside.
MATERIALS
1. Material shall be of best-approved quality obtaining and they shall comply with the respective ASTM
specification.
2. If necessary samples of all materials shall be accompanied by the manufactures test certificate or by a
recognized test laboratory by venders own cost.
3. The vender shall submit samples of material before supply for our verification from the original raw
materials.
MODE OF MEASUREMENT – measurement and payment shall be made as per running meter of the length of
railing wherever not specified.

SECTION – H
MASONRY WORK
BRICKWORK :
1 Bricks:
1 All bricks used on the works shall be burnt clay building bricks of first class quality having minimum
crushing strength of 35 kg/cm2 and shall conform to IS:1077 latest. The size required for the works is
225x115x70mm. All bricks shall be uniform in quality and size. The bricks shall be got tested as per
IS:3495 latest at the contractor's cost.
2 Bricks shall be unloaded by hand and carefully stacked and all broken bricks shall be removed from site.
2 All bricks shall be subject to inspection on the site and shall be to the approval of the Engineer who may
reject such consignments as are considered by him to be inferior to the quality specified.
2. Fly Ash Bricks
1. Eco friendly bricks made from fly ash, stone dust and cement.
2. The sizes available 230 X 110 X 80mm, 225 X 150 X 80mm & 200 X 95 X 95mm.
3. The minimum strength 5.5N/mm2.
4. Water absorption 8-13%.
5. Density 1800 – 1900 Kg/m3
2 Mortar:
1 All mortar shall be prepared in accordance with IS: 2250 latest. The sand used shall conform to IS:2116
latest and the water shall conform to relevant clauses of Section B (Concrete) of this specification. Re
stamping of set mortar will not be permitted.
2 Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities, the cement mortar proportion shall be as
follows:
(i) 115 mm thk brickwork 1:4
(ii) 230 mm thk brickwork 1:6
(i) 230 mm thk fly ash brick blocks in CM 1:4
3 Construction:
1 All masonry work shall comply with the requirements of IS:2212 latest. It shall be of English bond. All
closure bricks, etc necessary to comply with the requirements of the bond specified or to break joints
effectively shall be procured by the Contractor and used for the work.
2 Ordinarily there shall be four courses per 0.3m height or in other words, the horizontal bed joints shall
be on average 10mm thick, and the vertical joints 6mm wide. The mortar shall be worked up to all joints
and no hollow space shall be left in any portion of the work. All joints shall be laid truly horizontal and
all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. Masonry work shall be raised in a uniform manner so that no
one portion is being raised more than 1.0m above another portion at one time.

3 For half brick walls (115mm thk) which exceed 2.0m in height, a reinforced concrete band 75mm thick
(concrete band M-15/10) shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 1.5m. The reinforcement in these
bands shall consist of 2 No 6mm mild steel / tor steel rounder's with 6mm binders spaced at 150mm
centers and with the hoop iron 25mm x 1.6mm or equivalent reinforcement at every third courses
embedded in the cement mortar. Such band shall also be provided at the free edge of all masonry work
including window sills and top of free standing walls. This work will not be paid separately.
4 All bricks / fly ash brick blocks shall be thoroughly soaked by keeping them under water for at least 12
hours before use; the practice of dipping bricks in water just before use will not be allowed. All necessary
water cisterns for this purpose shall be constructed or tubs brought by the contractor to the satisfaction
of the Engineer to ensure proper soaking of bricks.
5 No bats or broken bricks are to be used otherwise than as closures. No under burnt or over burnt bricks
shall be used.
4 Fixtures:
Fixtures, plugs, frames for doors and windows, etc shall be placed in position while laying the course and not
later by removing bricks/blocks already laid.
5 Scaffolding :
Scaffolding consisting of timber ballies, bamboos or steel tubular scaffolding adequately braced to resist all
construction loads shall be provided as required by the working stages. Any holes made in the walls for tying
the scaffolding shall be made good by filling solidly with M-10/10 grade concrete.
6 Watering :
The brickwork shall be kept wet for a period of at least 14 days after laying. The mortar shall not be allowed to
dry at any time. For block work the walls shall not be allowed to become excessively wet.
7 Joints :
1 All unfinished work shall be raked back in courses, unless otherwise directed. When new work is to be
joined to unfinished work, the surface of the unfinished work shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted.
2 The finished work shall be true in line and level. All uneven irregular and disturbed brickwork shall be
pulled down and rebuilt with fresh brickwork at the contractor's expense.
3 Joints in brickwork shall be well raked out. Raking out of each day's work shall be done on the same
day.
4 Masonry work shall not be raised by more than 8 single courses per day.
8 Tolerances :
The permissible tolerance in brickwork shall be as follows

TOLERANCES
1 Deviation from position

shown on plan of any
brickwork more than one
storey in height 10mm
2 Deviation from vertical
within a storey 5mm per 3m height
3 Deviation from vertical in
total height of building 10mm
4 Relative displacement between
load bearing walls in
adjacent storey's intended
to be in vertical alignment 5mm
5 Deviation from line in
plan up to 12.0m 5mm
In any length over 12.0m 10mm total
6 Deviation of bed joint
from horizontal
In any length up to 12.0m 5mm
In any length over 12.0m 10mm total
LATERITE MASONRY & SOLING
9 The Late rite / Stone for the works except where otherwise described shall be of the best quality procurable
complying with IS:1805 latest. No stone with flaws, or traversed with seams of perishable materials or quarry
faced, or otherwise in any way defective shall be allowed to be used and the Engineer may reject and refuse to
permit the use of any stone which, in his opinion, is unfit for the work.
10 Stone masonry, wherever required, shall conform to the requirements of IS:1597 latest and shall be composed
generally of large stone weighing about 25 kgs. The face stones to be squared on all joints and beds shall be
hammered and chisel dressed, true and square for at least 75mm back from the face, and the joints for at least
40mm (IS:1127 latest and IS:1129). The face of the stone is to be hammer dressed and "bushing" shall not
project more than 40mm. The stone shall be clean flat bedded properly selected for their places and carefully
laid with a suitable proportion of smaller stones and chips to fill up the interstices. The mortar including the
constituents shall conform to the requirements of IS:2250 latest and IS:1625 latest.
11 The whole masonry shall be hand set and solidly bedded in and surrounded with mortar on every side except the
face. There shall be no hollows or dry portions in work nor pinning in the face and no joint shall be more than
10mm. The face stone shall be flat bedded, shall tail back and be bound well into the body of the wall and shall
not be of a height greater than either the breadth on face or length of the tail. Through stones covering the
whole width or thickness of the walls, or 600mm long where the walls are thicker than 600mm, shall be inserted
at every 1000mm measured horizontally and vertically. The rate for stone masonry shall include the extra cost
of the through stones. The faces of the walls shall be strictly straight. The masonry shall be shaded from the
sun, and kept wet for not less than 14 days after completion.
12 All fixtures, plugs, frames shall be placed securely as the work proceeds and not after completion of the masonry.
Iron holdfasts shall be given a coating of bitumen to avoid rusting.
13 Scaffolding as described in clause F.17 above shall be provided as required.
LATERITE STONE MASONRY
B.1. General:
Laterite stone should be compact in texture. It may be molted with streaks of brown, red and yellow colors.
It should not contain white clay or lithomarge or an appreciable number of deep sinusitis. Blocks should be
obtained from a good ferruginous variety of laterite which hardens on exposure after it is quarried. Density of
laterite stone should not be less than 2.5 gm/cm3 and moisture absorption should not exceed 12 percent.
B.2. Size of Stone Blocks:
Minimum height of blocks should be 19 cm, actual that is 20 cm nominal with normal joint thickness of 10mm.
Breadth of blocks should be equal to height and length should be equal to twice the height.
B.3. Dressing of Stones:

Stones should be dressed soon after quarrying into regular rectangular blocks so that all faces are free from
waviness and edges are straight and square. Blocks may be cut to size whether manually or by machine, but for
good quality work it is desirable to use machine cut blocks. Stones blocks after dressing should be exposed to
atmosphere for a period of 3 months before use in masonry. This stone on exposure changes its nature and
improves in compressive strength.
B.4. Laying of Stones:
The laterite blocks are properly dressed and thoroughly soaked before use and are laid in masonry in regular
horizontal courses, breaking bond of vertical joints in every course to the extent of at least half the height of
blocks. When a masonry element is thicker than breadth of blocks, these should be laid as headers and stretchers
similar to English bond of brickwork. All joints should be completely filled with mortar. Normally all courses should
be of same height. Not more than five layers shall be laid in a day. The masonry work shall be true to plumb and
line and shall have even surface and thickness throughout. All masonry work shall be watered for one week.
B.5. Joints:
The mortar shall be of 1: 5 proportions for foundation works and of 1: 4 proportions for superstructure works.
Thickness of joints in good quality work should not exceed 10mm. Faces may be plastered, pointed or finished
flush depending on architectural effect to be achieved. When surface is to be plastered or painted, joints should
be raked while the mortar is green to a depth of 10mm and 15mm respectively.
B.6. Measurements:
The quoted rate shall cover supply of all materials, tools, scaffolding, plant, labour, all other incidental work
required to complete the work in accordance with the above specification. All masonry work 230mm and above,
shall be measured and be paid on a volume basis (m3). All other masonry work shall be measured and paid on
an area basis (m2). Deductions shall be made for all openings and lintels occupying any thickness of walls.
B.7. EXPOSED LATERITE MASONRY WORK

These stones shall be specially hard variety. The samples shall be approved by the Engineer. All the stones shall
be of similar surface texture and colour and of the recommended sizes. Masonry shall be constructed in 1:4
cement mortar and shall have recessed pointing finished in 1:3 cement mortar. The stones hall have true and
sharp shape in the facing part. The masonry shall be perfectly in plumb and level. The stones shall be soaked in
water before construction and masonry work shall be watered for one week.
SECTION-I
PLASTERING AND POINTING
1 General :
All plaster work shall comply to IS-1661 (Application of cement and cement lime plaster finishes). The cement
shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS:269. The lime shall conform to IS-712 (Building limes). The

sand shall conform to IS-1542 (sand for plaster). The sand shall not contain any particle larger than 3mm and
shall be washed before use.
2 Preparation Of Surfaces :
1 Concrete surfaces shall be roughened by wire brushing, hacking, or bush hammering or chiseling. If
the Engineer is not satisfied with the roughening achieved by these methods he may order other
methods such as washing with acid etc.
2 Loose layers of dust etc. on surfaces to be plastered shall be washed. The surface shall be cleaned to
remove oil, paint or any other material that might interfere with satisfactory bond and saturated with
water so as to be damp when the plaster is applied.
3 To avoid cracks at the junction of concrete with brickwork the plaster shall be reinforced at such junctions
by fixing GI Expanded Metal Mesh.
GI expanded metal of approximate size 20mm x 50mm consisting of 2.4mm width and 1.25mm thick
strands, weighing approximately 2.35 kg/ sq.m. shall be laid over the joints, formed between concrete
and masonry work, after one coat of plaster dash. The metal should be equally distributed on either side
of joints and fixed with the help of
GI 3.14 mm U nails with GI washers at 80mm c/c on each sides. Overlapping of atleast 75mm is allowed
in the joints of expanded metal. All the expanded metal shall be laid within the thickness of final plaster.
GI expanded metal shall be measured and paid on square metre basis which includes all cost of materials
and scaffolding. The cost of plaster dash is included in plastering.
3 Slaking Lime :
1 All impurities, ashes or pieces improperly burnt shall be screened or picked out and then slaked not less
than one week nor more than two weeks before use. The slaked lime shall be screened through IS 240
sieve for mortars used for first coat or through IS:120 sieve for mortars used in subsequent coats. The
slaked lime shall be stored in a weather proof shed with a impervious floor (IS:712). The lime shall be
used when fresh. The lime shall be kept wet for at least six days in a water tank (or drums) before
using.
4 Neeru:
"Run" lime shall be allowed to mellow for at least 10 days in a tank or drums. The surplus water on top shall be
allowed to run off and the top layer of lime formed into putty shall be skimmed off and well mixed with sand and
jute in the proportion of 4 cu.m of lime putty to 1 cu.m of fine washed sand (passing sieve No 25) and fine
chopped jute at the rate of 5 kgs per every cubic metre of mortar, and the mixture properly ground to a paste.
5 Proportioning :
1 The materials used in the preparation of plaster may be measured either by volume using gauge boxes
or by weight. The mix proportion of lime, unless otherwise stated generally refers to the volume of
putty.
2 Cement and Sand Plaster :
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the required proportions to
obtain a uniform color. Water shall then be added to get the

required consistency for the plaster.
3 Cement-lime-plaster :
Lime putty and sand shall be mixed dry in the required
proportions and kept protected from drying out till the time of use. The required quantity of cement
shall then be added and the whole mass thoroughly mixed. Water shall be added if necessary but only
to the minimum extent required to give a working consistency for the plaster.
4 Mixing shall be done mechanically in "Mortar Mill". If hand mixing is allowed by the Engineer, mixing
shall be carried out on a clean, water tight platform protected from sun and rain.
6 Application:
1 Patches of plaster 150mm x 150mm shall be placed about 3m apart as gauge to ensure even plastering.
The mortar shall be firmly applied in a thickness slightly more than the required thickness and well
pressed into the joints, rubbed and leveled with a flat wooden rule to required thickness.
2 All plastering shall be made good up to metal or wooden frames, skirtings and around pipes or fittings.
3 For internal plastering, scaffolding shall be erected independent of walls. No members of scaffolding
shall be allowed to be housed in the walls being treated with plaster. Scaffolding for external plaster
shall also be supported independent of walls as far as possible to avoid patchy appearance.
7 Wetting & Curing :
Surfaces to be plastered shall be profusely watered well in advance before plastering so as to keep the surface
damp. Plastered surfaces shall be kept thoroughly wet by sprinkling water for at least 7days as directed by the
Engineer.
Surface with craziness or cracks shall be rejected and the contractor shall dismantle such plaster forthwith and
apply plaster all over again.
8 Type of Plaster :
1 Neeru finished plaster :

Lime gauged plaster of the proportion 1 cement to 2 lime to 9 sand or cement mortar as specified shall
be applied to surfaces to be plastered to a uniform thickness of 18mm and shall be trowelled to a fair
and uniform surface without any depressions. Neeru shall then be applied to a uniform thickness of
3mm and thoroughly trowelled. This trowelling process shall continue the succeeding day also to get a
smooth surface. The plastered wall shall be kept thoroughly wet by sprinkling water for 7 days when
plaster starts drying. One coat of lime wash shall be given on all neeru finished surfaces after 10 days
to prevent hair cracks.
2 Sand faced plaster :

The sand faced plaster shall be applied in two coats. The first coat (base coat) shall be of proportion
1:4 and approximately 15mm thick. The base coat shall be trowelled hard so as to ensure a permanent
bond. The surface of the base shall be thoroughly combed so that 3mm deep grooves at 12mm apart
are formed when the mortar is in the plastic stage. The base coat shall be cured for at least two days.
The second coat shall be applied with the mortar of same proportion but 6mm thickness. The mortar
shall contain sand with slightly larger proportion of coarse material. The surface shall be finished with a
wooden float, and trowelled to get a uniform surface.
A sponge dipped in cement water shall be used with a circular motion to get the sandy appearance.

3 Cement & Sand Plaster Smooth Finished :
The cement mortar of the proportions 1 cement to 4 sand shall be applied on all the walls brick or
concrete surfaces specified to a uniform thickness of about 12mm and shall be trowelled smooth using
a wooden float. Use of dry cement to obtain smooth finish will trowelling shall not be permitted. Care
should be taken to ensure that the plastered surface does not dry out too quickly and also it is not over
trowelled, in order to avoid craze cracks.
4 Rough cast Cement Plaster :

The joints shall be raked out as for plaster. The cement shall be
thoroughly mixed dry with sand and gravel to pass through a 6mm mesh but not through 2mm in the
proportion of one part of cement, two parts of sand and one part gravel. Water shall be gradually added
to make the mixture homogenous. No more mixture shall be prepared than can be used within half an
hour. The mixture shall be dashed against the surface to a thickness of 20mm and finished in level.
5 Pebble Dash Cement Plaster :

This shall be same as rough cast cement plaster but gravel shall be replaced with round pebbles to pass
through 12mm mesh and the thickness of plaster shall be 25mm.
9 Pointing :
The joints of the masonry either brick or stone to be flat pointed shall be raked to a depth of about 20mm while
the mortar in the joint is still fresh and the joints shall be kept well wetted till the pointing is done. The mortar
for the pointing shall consist of one part cement and two parts sand and shall be applied to wetted joints
uniformly. The joints of the pointed work shall be regular and uniform in breadth. The edges of the pointing
shall be cut off parallel so as to leave well defined lines about 200mm apart. The pointing shall be kept well
wetted for five days after the pointing is done.
10 Measurement :
The quoted rates shall include the preparation of surfaces, erection and dismantling of scaffolding, materials,
labour, curing, all tools and equipment required to complete the plaster work in all respects.
The plastered and pointed surfaces shall be measured and paid on an area basis (m2) for the area actually
plastered in accordance with IS:1200. No separate payment shall be made for coving and finishing around
skirting, door and window frames.

SECTION – J
WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING, DISTEMPERING, PAINTING
1 White Washing and Colour Washing :
1 White washing and colour washing shall in general comply with IS:6278 latest. Only freshly burnt fat lime of
good quality from unburnt stone and other foreign matter shall be used, slaking shall be done at site with an
excess of water and the lime allowed to remain under water for two days. The mixture of lime and water shall
then be drawn off, placed in a suitable receptacle and clean fresh water added to bring it to the consistency of
thin cream. The wash so prepared shall be strained through a coarse cloth or fine sieve and mixed with gum
water. The quantity of gum to be used shall be at the rate of 2 Kg/m3.
2 The surface to be white or colour washed shall be thoroughly broomed down so as to remove all dust and holes
if any shall be stuffed with materials similar to the surface.
3 Three coats of white wash shall be applied with proper fibre brushes. Each coat must be allowed to dry and will
be subject to inspection before the next coat is applied.
4 The colour wash shall be prepared by adding a solution of water and lime fast pigment boiled if directed to the
lime wash prepared as above which shall be done gradually and stirred until the required tint is obtained.
5 For all colour wash, a sample must first be applied, allowed to dry and approved by the Engineer before the work
proceeds. Even colour must be obtained. Three coats are to be given. Patchy or streaky work will be rejected
and will be re-executed at the contractor's expense.
2 Distempering or Painting with Oil Bound Water Paints etc :
1 Distemper, washable, shall comply with IS:427 or 428 latest. Ready mixed washable distemper of an approved
brand shall be used. Preparation of distemper from ingredients by the Contractor shall not be allowed. The tint
of distemper shall be as directed by the Engineer and a sample application of it shall be made by the contractor
if so desired.
2 The surface shall be cleaned and all cracks, holes, irregularities etc shall be repaired to get a smooth and even
surface. It shall be completely dry and dust-free before commencement of distempering.
3 Waterproof Cement based Paints IS-5410 :
1 The waterproof cement paint shall be of an approved manufacturer such as Snowcem, Oricem or Super Snowcem,
or other equivalent and approved and shall be brought to the site in original airtight containers with seal intact.
2. Preparatory work :
Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned free from dirt, dust, etc by
brushing and washing down with clean water. Any grease, oil paint, varnishes and oil bound washable distemper
shall be removed by means of an approved paint remover.
3 Mixing and application :

The dry cement paint shall be thoroughly mixed with clean fresh water so as to produce a paint of required
consistency which for normal work shall be of ordinary paints. In mixing and application,the contractor shall
conform to manufacturer's instructions.

Paint for application by brush shall be strained through a paint strainer and paint for spraying shall be twice
strained.
The paint shall be kept stirred during use and no paint which has been mixed for a period longer than one hour
shall be used.
The paint to surface other than rough cast may be applied by means of brushes or spraying with low pressure pot
sprayer. Spraying, however, may only be carried out if the Engineer approves. The paint applied to roughcast
surface shall be by means of spraying.
Absorbent surface shall be thoroughly dampened so as to give even suction. In dry weather freshly painted
surfaces shall be kept damp for at least 2 days and protected from the sun.
When more than one coat is ordered, subsequent coats shall not be applied until the preceding coat has
thoroughly hardened and is approved.
4 Painting :
Oil Paint, Synthetic Enamel, Acrylic, Plastic Emulsion etc. shall confirm to IS codes of practice and paints of
approved manufacturer only shall be used and shall be applied as per specifications of the manufacturer. Paints
appropriate for the surface to be painted shall be used.
1 Painting Plastered Surface IS:2395 :
a) Primer Coat :
For plastered surfaces to be painted, the same shall be rubbed down with a dry brush to remove
loosely adhering matter. One coat of cement for other approved primer shall then be applied to
the surface. After 24 hours a second coat of primer shall be applied. All cracks in the surface shall
be filled with approved putty. Any uneven surface shall be made good by applying approved putty.
b) Final Coat :
The paint shall be constantly stirred and thinned by appropriate thinning agent. It shall be applied
uniformly on the surface. The second coat may be applied within three hours of the first coat.
2 Painting old surface :
A surface previously treated with paint or oil bound distemper shall be cleaned properly and rubbed
down with sand paper to ensure proper adhesion. No priming coat would be necessary.
Where lime and certain type of dry distemper have been used, the surface shall be washed down with
water to remove all traces of alkali. The surface must be allowed to dry for at least 24 hours.
Final cost of paint specified shall then be applied as specified under painting for new plaster work.
3 Painting woodwork :
a) Preparation of surface :

The surface shall be rubbed smooth with sand paper, first with coarse grade and then with medium
grade. When finished no scratches from the coarse paper should be seen.
b) Knotting :
Before priming, all the knots in the woodwork shall be filled with an application of two coats of an
approved substance through which the resin cannot exude.
c) Primer Coat :
Primer coat shall be the ready mixed prime coat of approved make and shall be applied to
the specifications of the manufacturers.
d) Final Coats :
After priming, all small holes, cracks, open joints, etc shall be closed with approved putty consisting
of pure whiting mixed with linseed oil to a proper consistency and white lead for hardening. Putty
should not be used before application of priming coat.
After applying priming coats the surface shall be lightly rubbed down smooth with sand paper and the subsequent
coats of paint of the specified shade and finish approved by the Engineer, shall be applied. It shall be spread as
smoothly as possible with approved brush by means of crossing at right angles to the grains and then laying off
with the brush in the direction of the grain over the crossing. The final coat shall be very carefully crossed and
laid off so that no brush marks are visible. Each coat of paint shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and shall be
lightly rubbed down before the application of the next coat. Each coat shall be got approved before the application
of the next. The finished surface shall be free from any hair marks, ridges, puddles and other defects.
Unless otherwise specified, three coats of paint exclusive of primer coat shall be applied for all timber work.
If the final coat is not approved, an extra coat of paint shall be applied at no extra cost so as to get the specified
finish.
4 Painting Old Woodwork :

The surface shall be cleaned down and rubbed with sand paper or with pumice. All holes and uneven
surfaces shall be filled with putty. Two coats of under coating of paint shall be applied, each coat being
sand papered before the application of the next coat. The surfaces shall be smooth and dry before
applying the final coats.
5 Polishing & Varnishing Woodwork :
French Polishing :
French spirit shall be of an approved make conforming to IS:348. It has to be prepared at site, the
polish shall be made by dissolving 0.7kg
base shellac in 4.5 litres of methylated spirit without heating. To
obtain required shade pigment may be added and mixed.
Surface shall be cleaned. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sandpaper and well dusted.
Knots if visible, shall be covered with a preparation of red lead and glue. Resinous or loose knots end
gaps shall be filled with seasoned and timber pieces and made level with rest of the surface. Holes and
indentations of surface shall be filled with putty made of whiting and linseed oil. Surface shall be given
a coat of filler made of 2.25 Kg of whiting in 1.5 litre of methylated spirit. When it dries, surface shall
be rubbed down perfectly smooth with sandpaper and wiped clean.
Piece of clean, fine cotton cloth and cotton wool made into shape of pad shall be used to apply polish.
The pad shall be moistened with polished and rubbed hard on the surface applying the polish sparingly
but uniformity and completely over the entire surface. It shall be allowed to dry and another coat of
applied in the same way. To give finishing coat, the pad shall be covered with a fresh piece of clean
fine cotton cloth, slightly damped with methylated spirit and rubbed lightly and quickly with a circular
motion, till the furnished surface attains uniform texture and high gloss.
Wax Polishing :
Wax polishing shall either be prepared at site or obtained readymade from market. Polish made at the
site shall be prepared from a mixture of 2:1.5:1:1/2 by weight. The bees wax and the boiled linseed oil
shall be heated over the slow fire. When the wax is completed dissolved, the mixture shall be cooled till
be it is just warm, and turpentine oil and varnish added to it in the required proportions and the entire
mixture is well stirred. Surface shall be prepared as described under 'French Polishing' except than the
final rubbing shall be done with sand paper which has been slightly moistened with linseed oil.
Mixture or polish shall be applied evenly, with a clean cloth pad in such a way that no blank patches are
left and rubbed continuously for half an hour. When the surface is quite is quite dry a second coat shall
be applied in the same manner and rubbed continuously for an hour or until the surface is dry. Final
coat shall then applied and rubbed for two hours or more if necessary until surface has assumed a
uniform gloss and is quite dry showing no sign of stickiness when touched. Gloss of the polished depends
on the amount of rubbing. Therefore, rubbing must be continuous and with uniform pressure and
frequent change in direction.
Varnishing :
Surface shall be prepared as described above. After preparation of surface, two coats of clean boiled
linseed oil shall be applied at sufficient intervals of time. After the linseed oil has dried two coats of
varnish obtained from approved manufacturer shall be applied without any extra cost.
5 Mode Of Measurement & Payment :
The quoted rate for painting shall include the cost of preparing and cleaning the surface as specified, preparing
sample of paints for approval, scaffolding, wherever required, tools and machinery, etc. and after painting has
been completed, cleaning the floor surface of all dirt, paint, etc. It shall also include the cost of putty, primer
coat, preparation of surface after application of each coat and final coats.
Where painted surfaces are to be paid separately, they shall be paid in square metres and the measurement
shall conform to IS:1200 (Part XV) latest.
SECTION – K
FLOORING
1. Stamped Concrete Flooring :

This item shall consist of all work associated with furnishing and installing concrete stamped surfaces in
accordance with these specifications, as detailed on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. This shall include all
labor, materials, testing, submittals, tools, and equipment necessary to saw cut, excavate, prepare the base and
install the stamped concrete surface to the lines and grades shown on the plans including any incidentals thereto.
The work in this section includes preparation work and placing, stamping and coloring concrete. The Contractor
shall coordinate items of other trades to be furnished and set in place. Such locations of their work as in all or in
part embedded, built-in, attached to, or supported by the work shall be executed by them in ample time that
progress of the work is not delayed. Any cutting or patching made necessary to
comply with this injunction shall be done at the Contractor expenses. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
proper installation of all accessories embedded in the concrete and for the provision of holes, sleeves, openings,
etc., necessary to the execution of the work of the trades. The Contractor shall furnish one 4'x4'x4" sample of
each concrete finish at the job site for approval ofthe Engineer and haul them away after approval. Approved
samples shall be standards for finishes in
stamped concrete work. The pattern shall be running bond or shall match existing median where applicable.
2. Vacuum Dewatered Flooring
This specification defines the material, mixing, placing, curing, and constructional and other performance requirements
for VACUUM DEWATERING CONCRETE SYSTEM for concrete floor slab. Any other special requirements shown or noted
on the drawings and directed by the Engineer shall govern over the provision of this specification.Actual work shall be
Carrie out in accordance with this specification and in consultation with specialized firm undertaking the job to suit
specific requirement at site such as rise and fall of the floor slab, providing dowels for pedestals etc.In case of conflict
between clauses mentioned in this specification and those in any Indian Standard, this specification shall grown.
MATERIAL:
All materials of construction like cement, aggregate, sand, water etc.
GRADE OF CONCRETE:
Minimum grade of concrete used shall be M15 conforming to IS-456. Only Design Mix Concrete shall be used. For other
details like proportioning, batching, mixing, placing, curing etc.
WATER-CEMENT RATIO:
Water-cement ratio unto 0.65 shall be allowed to obtain better slump & workability. Actual ratio shall be decided with
approval of the Engineer. Only measured quantity of water shall be used in the mix.
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT:
All works covered by this specification shall be carried out by an experienced agency having sufficient expertise in
vacuum dewatering concrete system. Only skilled and experienced operators shall be employed for the purpose. Prior
approval of the agency shall be obtained from the Engineer before starting the work. All the equipment shall be of
approved and proven types and suitable for the work involved.
CONCRETE LAYING:
Concrete laying pattern shall be decided in consultation with the Engineer and with his approval. The maximum width of
a slab strip shall not generally exceed 4 meters and minimum number of construction joints shall be used. Alternate
slab strips shall be sequentially laid. Any damage to the already finished top surface shall be avoided. At construction
joints no overflow of mortal or slurry on the already hardened surface shall be allowed while concreting the intermediate
slab strip. Such construction joints shall be marked with a thread in a straight line while the concrete is still green.
Continuity of reinforcement shall be maintained while laying concrete in slab strips. Edges at expansion joints shall be
protected and proper arrangement of shear-transfer shall be provided standards.
3. Mastic Asphalt Flooring :

Unless otherwise specified, the thickness of mastic asphalt shall be 25mm.
1 Materials :
The following materials shall be used.
a) Bitumen, should conform to the following requirements :
Characteristic Requirements Method of (Ref. to Indian

Standard)
Softening point 65-115 °C IS: 1205-1958
Penetration at 25 °C 3-20 mm IS: 1203-1958
Ductility at 25 °C 0-5 mm IS: 1208-1958
Loss on heating percent (max) 0.05-0.10 IS: 1212-1958
Solubility in CS2 percent (min) 99 IS: 1216-1958
Mexphalte 10/20 or Esso Paving Asphalt 10/20 or similar grade bitumen is suitable for the work.
b) Fine Aggregate : This should consist of naturally occurring limestone rock containing not less than 80%
calcium carbonate content, and finely ground to the following grading :
Passing through IS Sieve 75 micron 45 to 55 per cent by weight.

Passing through IS Sieve 212 micron and retained on IS Sieve 75 micron 10 to 30 per cent by weight.
Passing through IS Sieve 600 micron and retained on IS Sieve 212 micron 10 to 30 percent by weight.
Passing through IS Sieve 2.36 mm 5 to 20 per cent by weight and retained on IS Sieve 600 micron.
c) Coarse Aggregate : This should consist of crushed siliceous stone (igneous stone or sand-stone), containing
not more than 15 per cent by weight of constituents soluble in hydrochloric acid, and graded as follows:
Passing though 10 mm mesh - 100 percent by weight.
Retained on IS Sieve 2.36 mm - 95 percent by weight.
2 Proportion of Mixing :
The percentage by weight of the different ingredients shall be:
Kg/m2
Bitumen 11% 7.6
Fine Aggregate 54% 37
Coarse Aggregate 35% 24
The fine aggregate shall be heated to a temperature of 170 to 205 °C and then the required amount of bitumen
heated 180 °C shall be added to it. They shall be mixed and cooked for five to six hours, mixing thoroughly with
rotating paddles during the cooking process. The temperature at no time shall exceed 205 °C. After the mastic
has been cooked for three to four hours, the requisite percentage of coarse aggregate shall be added and
thoroughly incorporated during the manufacturing process. In the alternative, mastic composed only of bitumen
and fine aggregate may be cooked and formed into 25 Kg blocks, and remelted at site and incorporated with
coarse aggregate.

3 Laying :
The mastic should be as hot as possible (within limits of 175 °C and 200 °C) to be able to hand float it with case.
The mastic making plant should be so sited that the distance over which the hot molten mastic has to be carried,
is as short as possible.
To prevent the molten material from sticking to the carrying pans, they may be sprinkled inside with a minimum
quantity of inert inorganic material, such as limestone dust. Cement, ashes, oil or slaked lime powder shall not
be used for the purpose.
Prior to laying the 25mm thick mastic composition on the floor, loose or broken portions of the existing surface
should preferably be removed, and voids and depressions should be filled with mastic composition. If the existing
surface is not likely to firmly adhere to the mastic composition, better bond between the mastic layer and the
existing flooring may be obtained by the application of Mexphalte 10/20 or bitumen of similar grade, heated to
about 175 °C and spread at the rate of 0.5 kg/m2.
Mastic asphalt should be laid in bays (made out with wooden battens 25mm deep) generally in one coat. It
should be spread by means of hand tools to the specified thickness, gauges being used in conjunction with
straight edge and level to ensure accuracy. Any 'blows' which occur, should be stabbed and the area affected
carefully made good whilst the mastic is still hot.
The surface should be rolled with approved roller or by other approved means and/or floated to a uniform level
with the help of steel floats (warmed up prior to use) to a finish free from roughness, depressions and
imperfection due to insufficient working or unsuitable compounding. In floors which are likely to have water spilt
on them, a cross fall of not less than 1 in 100 shall be provided towards the outlets.
Junctions between bays should be even and neat. Where skirtings are specified they should be in accordance
with details supplied by the Consultants. In such cases, the floor surface be set back from the walls and partitions
at a suitable distance by means of gauges, to allow a neat junction to be formed at the base of skirting or cover.
Flooring shall not be subjected to traffic until the mastic asphalt has cooled to the temperature of the surrounding
atmosphere.
4 Maintenance and Repairs :

On the finished surface, concrete or mortar shall not be mixed directly. Oil, paint and distemper droppings shall
be avoided. The floor shall also be protected from solvent chemicals, hot surfaces and open fires.
It may be necessary to cut into existing mastic asphalt flooring. Considerable damage may result from an
attempt to cut away an affected area with a hammer and a chisel or to soften it with a blow lamp. The correct
method is to place hot asphalt around and over the area concerned, and after this has had a sufficient softening
effect, the area shall be carefully cut away.
When multiple-coat work is being restored or made good, the edge along the perimeter of the area shall be cut
back not less than 75mm to half the total thickness of asphalt, to form a lapped joint.
2 Grano M-35/10 and Indian Patent Stone Topping M-25/10 laid separately or cast as Monolith finish integral with
base concrete :
1 Preparing base :

The base course, either PCC or RCC slabs shall be brushed with a stiff bristles broom removing all the laitance.
The brooming should expose some of the aggregates and roughen the surface adequately to provide a mechanical
bond for the topping. The base shall be cleared if any deposition i.e. grease, oil, paint, etc. on its surface which
would interfere with the bond and thoroughly cleaned of loose particles and dust with water by scrubbing with a
stiff brush. Foreign substances not removed by scrubbing shall be chipped off. After the base is chipped clean,
it shall be saturated with water overnight. If specified proprietary brand adhesive solution of approved make
shall be applied as per manufacturer's specification to the old concrete surface so as to ensure proper bond
between old concrete surface and new in-situ topping.
2 Materials for Grano :

a) Cement or fine aggregate used shall be as specified under 'Concrete' Section.
b) Coarse aggregate shall consist of 10mm single size crushed rock of Granite, or basalt or trap or quartzite
and shall conform to IS:383 (latest) and IS:2386 (latest).
3 Mix proportion :
The proportion by weight shall be 1 part of cement to 3 parts of total aggregate for M-35/10 grano floor. For M-
25/10 IPS the proportion by weight shall be 1 part of cement to 4 parts of total aggregates. Sand content shall
be 40% - 45% of total aggregate. The mix should be weigh batched. Water cement ratio should not exceed
0.45 in both cases.
The size of panels for casting shall be as per drawing. Thickness of grano for monolithic finish shall be 20mm
and for the bonded finish on hardener concrete base shall be 40mm thick. Glass strips, or aluminium or steel
strips as specified shall be used along the edges of the joints. The depth of the strip shall be 2mm more than
the thickness of the topping and shall be ground after topping has set and cured. These strips shall be fixed to
the base by a suitable mortar bedding or by other approved methods.
For monolithic finish, the topping shall be laid within 2 hours of concreting operation i.e. before the concrete has
set. The number of skilled and experienced masons to be employed shall depend on the number and size of
panels approved by the Engineer.
The finish shall be laid in one or two courses according to the thickness required. Immediately after spreading
it shall be compacted by ramming or other approved method.
Immediately after compacting, trowelling shall be done to obtain a level surface. Back trowelling should be done
at least twice at an interval of 1.1/2 hours each till a hard, dense and abrasion resistant surface is obtained.
The topping shall be cured continuously for 14 days.
4 Surface treatment :
Sodium Silicate Solution shall contain 30% of silica and 9% soda. The first application shall be by spraying over
the floor with a mix of 1 part sodium silicate solution with 4 parts of water. The solution shall be spread evenly
with a mop or soft brush and wiping off any excess. The floor shall be allowed to dry for 24 hours. If the floor
is strongly absorbent, a second application shall be given as per the method above, after washing the floor with
water and after it has dried.
3 Ironite Topping :

This shall be laid for a thickness of 12mm (1/2”) between 1 and 3 hours after laying the base concrete. The
proportion used shall be one part of the Ironite, 5 parts of cement and 10 parts of stone chips 6mm onwards.
Any other materials like “Rockite” or “Improved Rockite” equipment or superior in performance may be used
after tests are carried out to prove that these are as satisfactory as the ironite topping. The method of laying
these toppings shall be as per specifications of the manufacturer.
4 Tiling Work:
5 Skirting :
The skirting shall be of the same materials as that of the floor tiles and shall be of the exact size specified. It
shall be fixed to the wall with cement mortar 1:6 bedding. Grinding and polishing shall be carried out by hand
using carborundum of appropriate quality.
6 Glazed Tile Flooring and Dado :
Glazed tiles shall be of approved make, size and shade as stated in the Schedule of Quantities and Rates and
shall conform to IS:777 latest. No cracked, chipped or warped tiles shall be used in the works.
Preparation of surface :
All masonry faces shall be cleaned thoroughly by removing dirt, loose mortar, efflorescence etc. The concrete
surfaces shall be brushed to remove all laitance and roughened to provide a bond for the bedding.
Fixing tiles :
The masonry and concrete faces shall be given a coat of cement plaster 12mm thick (in proportion 1:4). The
surface of the plaster shall be scarified with wire brush for getting a good bond between the tiles and the bedding.
The tiles shall be soaked in clean water for about half an hour before using. The back of the tile shall be buttered
with 1:2 plastic cement mortar to a thickness slightly in excess of the finished thickness required and the tile
pressed to the wall and tapped back in position. Alternatively a rich fatty mortar shall be applied on the bedding
and the tile pressed into it, care being taken to ensure that the keys of the tile are buttered up with mortar.
Joints shall be uniform, even, straight and as thin as possible in any case not more than 3.00 mm. Surfaces of
tiles have been fixed the joints shall be cleaned of grey cement and
refilled with cement paste of the same shade as that of the tiles. The tiled surface shall be left wet for a period
of 7 days.
Glazed rounded corner convex or concave shall be provided where specified and no extra will be paid for the
same.
After the completion of the work the surface shall be cleaned of all stains, etc.
8 Ceramic Tile Flooring :
Ceramic tile paving in terraces and other areas where called for shall be of non-slip ceramic tiles. Spartek or
other make approved by the Architect. The tiles shall be of approved colour, size and shape and shall be laid to

the pattern approved by the Architect. The tiles shall be of approved colour, size and shape and shall be laid to
the pattern approved by the Architect. The tiles shall be of uniform colour, true to size and shape and free from
cracks, twists, uneven edges, crazing and other defects. The tiles shall be generally of size 200x200 mm unless
otherwise called for.
The tiles shall be laid over a bed of 20 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 (1 Cement : 3 coarse sand) and levelled to
a true surface. The surface of the bedding mortar shall be left rough to provide bond for the tiles. A floting coat
of thick cement slurry shall be laid over the screed to proper levels and the tiles set over the same firmly to
correct line and levels.
The joints shall be filled and finished neat with cement paste pigmented to the shade of the tile. The joints shall
be finished neat as directed and shall be straight, regular and uniform.
On completion, the surface shall be washed with water, rubbed with fine saw dust and left clean.
The finished floor surface shall be true to required levels.
Protection of Walls and Adjoining Works :

The Contractor shall make at his own cost, all necessary arrangement and take requisite precautions to ensure
that walls and other adjoining works remain protected from any damage(s), not only from his own workers/sub-
contractor but also from that of other agencies working in co-ordination at the site of work.
9 Glass mosaic tiles :DELETED
10 Beer Bottle Finish :
This finish is provided on the outer face of the precast wall panels. Used 650 ml to 750 ml bottles of the opaque
variety (used empty beer bottles) shall be permitted. The bottles shall be split vertically into half by running a
hot filament around the centre of the bottle and then immediately immersed in cold water. Split concrete mould
shall be used for correct alignment of the filament. Any other method of splitting the bottles shall be permitted
after approval. Excepting the bottles in the uppermost and lowermost rows, all other bottles shall have their
bottom removed in the same manner as above. These bottles shall be laid in a straight line with their cuts face
down and with the neck of the lower bottle inserted into the base of the bottle above. A series of such lines of
bottles shall be laid on freshly laid 10 mm thick cement mortar bedding. The surface of the bottles and the
grooves between the lines of the bottles shall be cleaned thoroughly using dilute hydrochloric acid before erection
of the wall panels. The above process shall be carried out immediately after casting the wall panels.
11 Tandur, Shahabad, Kotah Stone :
The stone slab shall be from approved quarry and shall be of sizes specified. The edges shall either be machine
cut or hand cut as specified. When the stone tiles are machine cut, the corner angles shall be checked before
laying and if not found correct, the edges shall be chiselled so as to obtain correct angle between the edges. The
hand cut edges shall be smooth and even, and dressing of stone shall be for at least half the thickness of the
tile.
The colour of the stone shall be uniform.
The method of preparation of base and laying shall be in accordance with IS:1443 and shall in general be the
same as applicable to terrazo tiles. The top surface shall be polished with grinding machine with carborundum
such that there shall not be any scratches on the surface.
12 Specification for Bottle Finish :
This finish is provided on the outer face of the precast wall panels. Used 650ml to 750ml bottles of the opaque
variety (used empty beer bottles) shall be permitted. The bottles shall be split vertically into half by running a
hot filament around the centre of the bottle and then immediately immersed in cold water. Split concrete mould
shall be used for correct alignment of the filament. Any other method of splitting the bottles shall be permitted
after approval. Excepting the bottles in the uppermost and lowermost rows, all other bottles shall have their
bottom removed in the same manner as above. These bottles shall be laid in a straight line with their cuts face
down and with the neck of the lower bottle inserted into the base of the bottle above. A series of such lines of
bottles shall be laid side by side with a clear gap of 6mm. The bottles shall be laid on freshly laid 10mm thick
cement mortar bedding. The surface of the bottles and the grooves between the lines of the bottles shall be
cleaned thoroughly using dilute hydrochloric acid before erection of the wall panels. The above process shall be
carried out immediately after casting the wall panel.
13 Marble/Granite/Slate Flooring :
Stone slabs for flooring, in layers skirting, Dado, treads, risers, etc. shall be selected quality
MARBLE/GRANITE/SLATE SLABS/TILES slabs from an approved quarry and of thickness, finish and colour as
approved by the Architect. The intent is to use best selected quality White Marble or JAISALMER YELLOW Marble
slabs and Granite/Slate/Slabs/Tiles in appropriate pattern. Stone slabs shall be hard sound, dense, homogenous
in texture, free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws.
Granite Stone slab and tiles shall be of approved colour and shade and from an approved source from South
India.
For polished stone flooring the slabs shall have the top (exposed) face machine polished before being brought to
site. Edges of stone shall be Machine cut on all sides to a minimum depth of 15 mm so that a straight edge laid
along the side of the stone shall be fully in contact with it. The edges of stone slab for counters stair treads,
risers and steps shall also be machine cut and polished to full depth and chamfered or rounded as instructed by
the Architect.
The thickness of the stone slabs shall be 20 mm to 25 mm for flooring work. For stair risers the thickness of
slabs shall be 40 mm thick uniformly. Before starting the work, the contractor shall get samples of slabs approved
by the Architect. Tiles shall be of sizes and thickness as called for in the Drawing / Documents.
Mortar :
The slabs shall be laid over a bedding of cement mortar 1:6 (1 Cement : 6 clean coarse sand) of thickness 20
mm to 30 mm to make up an overall thickness as called for.
Laying :
The RCC slabs or sub-grade concrete over which the slabs are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped.
The cement mortar shall be spread over a small area to an average thickness of 20 to 30 mm. The slab, washed
clean, shall be laid on the mortar pressed, tapped with a wooden mallet, and brought to required level. It shall
then be removed and laid aside. The top of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows.

The mortar is then consistency shall be spread over the same at the rate of 1 bag per 10 sqm area. The edges
of the slab already laid shall be buttered with slurry of cement and pigment to match the shade of slabs. The
slab to be laid shall then be placed back in position, pressed and properly bedded in level with adjoining slab
with as fine a joint as possible. Other slabs are also laid in similar manner to correct levels with fine joints. The
surplus slurry on the surface shall be cleaned off. Slabs which are fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall enter
under the skirting or dado as shown on the details. The junction between floor and wall finish shall be finished
neatly as directed. The flooring shall be cured for minimum seven days. Any slight unevenness at the meeting
of the slabs shall be cured for at least 10 days.
Grinding :
The grinding and polishing shall be commenced about seven days after the slabs are laid. The surface shall be
carborundum stone grade 60. The surface shall then be washed clean and joints grouted with a grout of cement
and appropriate pigment mixed in suitable proportion to match the shade of stone. It shall then be allowed to
dry for 4 hours and wet, cured for 7 days. The grinding and grouting operation shall be repeated using
carorundum stone grade 80 and 120 till a smooth finished surface is obtained.
After thoroughly cleaning the surface, grouting and curing as described earlier, the final grinding shall be carried
out using carborundum stone grade 320. The surface shall again be washed clean, dusted over with Oxalic acid
at 32 gms., per sqm sprinkled with water, rubbed hard with cotton waste and wiped clean the following day.
Where use of machine for grinding is not feasible rubbing and polishing shall be done by hand in the same manner
as described above.
Final Polish :
When all constructional and finishing work namely painting, joinery work, electrical, plumbing work etc. are
completed and just before the area is occupied, the floor shall be worked clean with dilute oxalic acid solution
and dried. Non-slip wax polish shall then be applied with soft linen on the clean and dry surface and polishing
machine fitted with felt or hessian bobs shall be run over the surface, clean saw dust shall then be spread over
the surface, polishing machine again applied, mopping up surplus wax and leaving glossy surface. Care shall be
taken that the floor is not left slippery and that ordinary wax is not used under any circumstances. The finished
surface shall be true to level and lines. The joints shall be as find as possible and the surface to finish approved
by the Architect.
15 Inlays In Marble/Granite/Slate or Stone Flooring :
Stone slab for inlays in flooring shall be selected quality from an approved quarry and of thickness, finish and
colour as approved by the Engineer / Architect.
Specifications for Marble/Granite/Slate flooring shall be applicable for inlays also.
The size of the stone shall be as per drawing, the width of the strip may be as low as 40 mm. The stone shall
be cut to any odd shaped size to suite the architectural pattern.
Before laying and fixing the stones on the mortar bed, they shall be assembled dry on the floor to ensure the
correctness of the pattern and to obtain approval from Engineer/Architect.
16 Vertical Cladding In Marble/Slate/Granite Stone or Tiles :
Vertical Cladding includes the work on internal walls, external walls, isolated RCC columns, etc. Cladding stones
or tiles shall be selected quality from an approved quarry and of thickness, finish and colour as approved by the
Engineer/Architect.
The edges of exposed right angle corner joints of cladding stones/tiles shall be finished to suit corner angles, and
a groove of 6 mm wide shall be cut, the corner edges polished as per detail.
Sufficient numbers of groove, 3 mm wide and 1 mm to 2 mm deep, shall be made on the back of cladding
stone/tiles for proper bonding with mortar or tile adhesive paste.
Wherever specified, chamfers shall be made in the stone.
The joints shall be cut square to the face and shall be at right angles to each other.
Mortar Backing :
Sand for mortar shall be clean river sand without any salt content.
The thickness of mortar backing specified is nominal and may vary depending upon the thickness of cladding
material used.
Scaffolding :
Scaffolding for all cladding work shall be of self supporting type. Holes will not be allowed to be made in the
masonry or RCC work for anchoring the scaffolding.
Contractor shall apply evenly tile adhesive of approved manufacturers on the back of the tile without leaving any
gap for fixing tile to the prepared surface. The thickness of such paste shall be 3 mm to 4 mm and special
precaution should be taken when this thickness exceeds while using for tiles for varying thickness. The Contractor
shall ensure that the tile adhesive used shall not leach and leave patches of stain on the finished surface of tiles.
Adhesive paste, prepared as per manufacturer’s specification shall be used within the time limit specified and in
no case it shall exceed 15 minutes. If more time is lapsed, fresh paste should be prepared and used. The cost
of tile adhesives shall be included in the rate for cladding and no extra payment will be made for extra thickness
of tile adhesive.
Clamps :
Cladding stones shall additionally be held in position by means of stainless steel/gun metal clamps as specified.
The clamps, anchored into the backing masonry/RCC walls or columns in adequate manner, shall be inserted in
holes or grooves drilled in cladding stone slabs at specified position and the holes or grooves grouted with
appropriate mortar. The number and position of metal clamps shall be as shown in drawing and in any case it
shall not be less than two per stone slab. The size of the stainless steel clamps shall be 20mm wide, 1.5 mm to
2 mm thick and length to suit the detailing. Stainless steel (or other approved material) Anchor fasteners shall
be 3.4mm to 3.5mm dia and 35 mm long. Contractor shall obtain prior approval from Engineer/ Architect for
use of alternative proven method of fixing stone slabs.
Care shall be taken to protect adjoining works including walls and other elements from staining or damage by
cement slurry. Any gaps by which slurry can escape shall be temporarily but properly sealed and slurry removed
without staining adjoining work.
Expansion joints as per drawing shall be provided in all cladding work. Spacing of joints both horizontally and

vertically shall be between 3 to 4 metres.
The face shall be finished as specified or directed after filling the joints with white cement and matching pigment.
The surface shall be protected from sun and rain and shall be cured for 10 days.
17 China Mosaic Work : DELETED
18 Marble mosaic/Terrazzo in-situ work in flooring, Dado, Skirting etc :
The terrazzo/mosaic finish shall be laid on an under layer of thickness as specified in the respective items. In
addition to the under layer, unless otherwise specified, a cushioning layer of lime mortar or lime concrete with
brick bat aggregate of specified proportion shall also be provided to the specified thickness.
The topping shall consist of layer of marble shapes of selected sizes, colour and design approved by consultants,
mixed with cement with desired shade of pigment.
For lighter shade mosaic/terrazzo white cement shall be used and for neutral shade, grey cement shall be used.
The proportion of terrazzo mix shall be three parts of cement and one part of marble powder mix the proportion
of marble aggregate by volume shall be 1.5 parts unless otherwise specified.
The topping shall be mixed and laid in panels as described in IS:2114 and as per decorative designs prepared by
consultants. The dividing strips for panels shall be Aluminium or as specified in the schedule of quantities. It
shall be polished as specified in IS:2114.
Broken Mosaic Flooring :

Broken mosaic finish shall be laid on an under layer of thickness as specified in the item.
Pieces of mosaic tiles shall be obtained from broken marble mosaic tiles of approved shade conforming to
IS:1257. The size of pieces shall be suitable to obtain the desired pattern of flooring as shown on the drawings
or as approved by consultant.
Broken pieces shall be thoroughly wetted before fixing them. Ordinary or coloured cement grout shall be spread
on the bedding. Mosaic tile pieces shall be fixed piece by piece to the desired pattern. The flooring shall be laid
to correct level and slopes and compacted by straight screed tamper. The grout shall cream up to the surface.
The junction of the flooring and the wall shall be rounded and the flooring shall be extended along the wall to
about 15cm (6"). After the day's work, the surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be
cleaned off. The following shall be cured for 7 days and then polished with a machine as stipulated in IS:1443.
Broken China Mosaic :

Broken china mosaic flooring shall be exactly as per broken mosaic tile flooring except that the broken pieces
shall be of china of approved colour and manufacture. The floor shall not be polished.
Marble flooring :
Marble slabs shall be of the best Indian marble of white or other approved colour as specified in the item. They
shall be hard, dense, uniform and homogeneous in texture. They shall have even crystalling grain and free from
defects and cracks. The surface shall be machine polished to and even and perfectly plain surface and edges
machine cut true to square. The rear face shall be rough enough to provide a key for the mortar.

No slab shall be thinner than the specified thickness at its thinnest part. The size of the slabs shall be as specified
in the respective items.
The slabs shall be laid as described under mosaic tiles flooring in every respect.
Marble in Facia or Dado :

Marble slabs of approved shade, variety size and thickness as specified in the item shall be used. They shall be
selected quality, dense, uniform and homogeneous in texture and free from cracks or other structural defects.
The exposed face shall have no --- or unsightly stains and defects. They shall have uniform milky white or
coloured8red shade or patterns of colours approved by Engineer. Samples shall be got approved by the Engineer
before ordering the slabs. The surface shall be fine polished and sides machine cut, true to square.
When a single course of marble slab is to be fixed as in dado etc the slabs shall be fixed as described below
Mortar pads of 1:2 cm of uniform width shall be struck on to the wall at close intervals and the marble slabs,
shall be pressed on them firmly. The remaining cavities, if any shall then be filled with thin grout of cement
mortar of the same proportion. The sound coming on gently tapping of the slab will indicate if there are hollows.
When the hollow cannot be filled with grout and the finished slab continues to give a hollow sound on tapping,
the slab shall be removed and reset.
For facia work where more than one course is required, the marble slabs shall be fixed in the same way as
described above except that the horizontal joints of the slabs, adjacent slabs shall be held together by a wrought
iron/copper pin passing through the hole drilled into the slabs. In addition, wrought iron/copper holdfasts/dowels
shall be provided to anchor the slab to the wall. The holdfast shall be countersunk into the joints of the slab and
it shall be located about a metre apart subject to a minimum of one for each slab for each horizontal joint. The
facing shall be fixed truly in plumb and in shall be as directed by Engineer. The surface shall be protected from
sun and rain and cured for ten days and shall be finally polished.
The rate shall include erecting and removing double scaffolding equipment etc.
Polished or tool finished Granite/Malad/Sand stone :
The facia stone/slab shall conform to the specification under 'Material' and it shall be erected as shown on the
drawing or as directed by Engineer.
The stone or stone shall be of size as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The expose faces
full beds and joints shall be dressed/finished as directed. The joints shall be cut square to the face and shall be
at right angles to each other or as directed.
The facing shall be fixed in cement mortar truly in plumb and in perfect plane straight or curved as shown on the
drawing, the bed being fully flushed with mortar. The joints, shall not exceed 1mm to 1.5 mm for machine
polished/fine tooled/close punched and chisel dressed work. The stones shall break joints for about half the
height of the course. Courses shall be shown on the drawing or as directed. The gap between the facing stone
and the wall shall be filled either with 1:2:4 concrete or 1:2 cement mortar. Wrought iron/copper pins and
holdfasts shall be used wherever directed. Lead caulking shall be used for fixing holdfasts. The surface shall be
protected from sun and rain and cured for ten days.
The face shall be finished as specified or directed after filling the joints with matching shade cement/cement
mortar of 1:1 proportion mixed with approved waterproofing material.
The rate shall include double scaffolding.
Vitrum tiles :
Tiles of colours and design as shown on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer shall be used fixed and
finished strictly as per manufacturer's specifications and as directed. The rate shall be inclusive of double
scaffolding equipment etc.
Stilan tiles or other heavy duty tiles :

Heavy duty flooring tiles shall be laid strictly according to manufacturer's specifications and machine polished as
directed.
Cast iron grid tile flooring :

The tiles shall be manufactured from cast iron conforming to IS:210. The tiles shall be of the design as shown
in the drawings and of standard dimensions 20cm or 30cm x 30cm as specified in the description of the item.
Variation in weight to the extent of 5% on either side shall be permissible. The ribs of tiles shall be tapering
down with the thicker end at top so that the cementing materials filling the hollows between them is held fast
and prevented from getting loose on the top. The top surface of the tiles shall be ground smooth, while the sides
of the hollows shall be left rough.
The subgrade concrete or RCC slab on which the grid tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped.
The bedding for the grid tiles shall consist of one part of cement and two parts for stone grit 6mm and down
grade laid to 25mm thickness tapped and corrected to proper levels. The bedding concrete shall be laid each
time over such an area as would accommodate 8 to 10 tiles. The grid tiles shall be laid one by one, pressed into
the bedding and tapped with a wooden mallet so that the mortar works up into the hollows of the grid tiles
about 5mm and the top face of the tiles is at the correct finished level and plane. The flooring is cured for ten
days and after thoroughly drying with mastic asphalt to obtain a smooth and uniform surface.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING VITRIFIED TILES
Providing and laying 1st quality polished vitrified tiles of (8mm thick 600 x 600 size – which ever is applicable) in
flooring of approved make and shade and free from cracks, warpage, fissures and flakes with straight edges and
perfect corner laid at right angle as per design and pattern over a bedding of cement mortar of 30mm thick CM
1:5 finishing the joints neatly with white cement mixed with matching colour pigment and finish in all respect and
all material and labour complete.
19 Mode of measurement and payment :
Mastic Asphalt Flooring: The rate quoted shall be based on final compacted thickness and shall include all labour,
materials and the cost of rolling with approved roller or other equivalent method to obtain full compaction, surface
preparation of concrete base and application of bitumen primer etc complete. It shall be measured and paid on
square metre basis.
Grano flooring: The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all materials including shuttering if any, permanent edge
supports of specified quality, finishing and curing and cleaning the entire surface of all matter and dirt.
It shall be measured and paid per square metre basis for the specified thickness.
Terrazo tiles, marble mosaic tiles, glass mosaic tiles, cement tiles, insitu mosaic flooring, marble, kotah stone

granite, stone or tiles, glazed or ceramic tile flooring etc.:
The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all materials, laying, bedding and finishing materials, cutting the tiles,
polishing by grinding machine, curing and cleaning etc. complete.
It shall be measured and paid on square metre basis. The area measured shall be exclusive of area of inlay if
any. When the range of size of stone or tile is specified, the rate shall be inclusive of cutting stone or tiles and
any odd shaped specified and or using smaller size of stones or tiles.
Skirting shall be measured and paid on running metre basis or if specified on square metre basis.
For treads and risers these shall be measured and paid per number of specified size and thickness or, is specified,
on square metre basis.
Beer Bottle Finish:
The rate quoted shall be inclusive of the cost of used beer bottles, cutting the bottles into two valves, cutting the
bottom of the bottles, etc by using electrical heating element, bedding material, laying fixing, cleaning etc. use
of self supporting scaffolding for vertical elements.
It shall be measured and paid per square metre basis. Length (or height) is measured from the top of the top
most bottle to the bottom of bottom most bottle and width is measured between edge of the bottle at two
extreme ends of the panel.
Inlays in Marble/Granite/Slate/Stones or Tiles :

The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all materials and using varieties of stones/tiles in a pattern as per drawing,
cutting the tiles, bedding, finishing materials, using of white cement with pigment to suit colour of tiles, polishing
by grinding machine curing and cleaning etc.
Vertical Cladding in Marble/Granite/Slate/Stones or Tiles, Glazed Ceramic Tile, etc. :

The rate quoted shall be inclusive of all materials, cutting the stones/tiles, making grooves, and using various
types of stone/tiles in a pattern as per drawing, bedding and finishing materials, approved bonding agents,
approved chemical tile adhesive pastes, stainless steel clamps and bolts, self supporting scaffolding, providing
expansion joints with approved grade silicone sealants etc. The rate shall also include for cladding on any vertical
surface including isolated columns.
China Mosaic For Flooring and For Wall Finish :

The rate shall be inclusive of all materials, breaking and mixing assorted coloured glazed tiles, bedding materials
using waterproofing admixture pointing the joints with white cement etc and shall be measured and paid per
square metre basis.
The rates for China mosaic finishes on wall shall, in addition to the above, be inclusive of self supporting
scaffolding, approved chemical bonding agent etc.
F.1. KOTA STONE SKIRTING
They shall be laid against a bedding of cement mortar 1:3 to the full height to a true plane, level and plumb. The
workmanship shall be similar to flooring.
The skirting shall be laid projected beyond the finished plastered surfaces as directed.
The continuous horizontal grooves at the top of shirting shall be provided if specified in the drawing or as directed
by the Engineer- In- charge. No extra will be paid for grooves.
The skirting surfaces shall be re-polished with hand to satisfaction of the Engineer- In- charge.
The skirting shall be cured for 7days.
Mode of measurement is per running meter for height of 100 mm
Same shall be applicable for vitrified tile skirting 100 mm high, except carefull cutting in line shall be followed
for tile.
F.2. KOTA STONE SILLS AND COPING/ PARAPET TOPS AND COUNTER TOPS
The stones shall be cut to the required size as approved by the Engineer-In-charge. The stones shall have to be
machine cut and double machine polished wherever specified. The edges to be pointer shall be true to line and
dressed to the required depth all around.
All the exposed edges shall be neatly polished to give neat appearance.
These items shall be laid on a bedding of 20 mm thick cement mortar 1:4 to a true plane, level or slopes all as
per relevant drawings.
The workmanship shall be similar to Kota stone flooring described above. The sills and copings should project
beyond the finished plastered surface as show in drawing.
Continuous horizontal grooves wherever specified shall be provide as per drawing and quoted rate include for
the same.
The surface shall be re polished with hand to entire satisfaction of the Engineering-In-charge. The entire work
shall be curd for 7 days.
Mode of measurement is per square meter for the effective dimension of kota stone. [ part embedded inside the
walls will not be considered for payment ].
Same shall be applicable for granite cills and jambs except full length single piece granite shall be used upto
1800 mm for all applicable cills and jambs.
F.3. GRANITE KITCHEN PLATFORM
Providing and constructing cat's eye Granite Platform about 0.80 m wide and about 1.0 m high including cadappa
verticals (Both side polish) and Cadappa base, Granite Top & Fascia, Stainless Steel Sink of single Bowl and with
Drainboard [ size mentioned in water supply and drainage boq ] including polishing, cutting, etc. complete all as
per drawing and as directed.
1) Materials & Wokmansip :
The relevant specifications of item shall be followed except that the cooking platform shall be constructed
by providing granite stone of 25 mm to 20mm thickness on black kadapa stone of 35 mm to 40 mm thickness.
The top granite stone shall be provided in single piece upto 2.4 M in length and specified width. All the
exposed edges of stone shall be machine cut. Stainless steel sink to conform to specifications mentioned in
PH BOQ.
2) Mode of measurement & Payment :
The relevant specification F16 of BOQ shall be followed.
The rate include providing machine cut edges on exposed faces of kadappah as well as granite stone.
The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter.
F.4. GRANITE WHB COUNTER
Providing and fixing mirror Polished machine cut granite slab of 19 mm thick of approved make, colour, texture,
cut into required shape, laid over kadappa supports with cement mortar(1:4) around hand wash basin .Bull
nosing to exposed sides, with granite fascia 75 mm to 100 mm wide / high, with edge chamfer and edge polish,
complete as per working drawing and instruction from Architect. Item includes making & finishing hole for fixing
wash basin.

1) Materials & Workmansip :
The relevant specifications of item shall be followed. The top granite stone shall be provided in single piece
in length and specified width. All the exposed edges of stone shall be machine cut and edge polished
The rate include providing machine cut edges and polishing including making chamfer wherever mentioned
on exposed faces of granite stone.
The rate shall be for a unit of one square meter.
The rate in inclusive of making hole of required size and shape as required for fixing the counter basin as
well as all the supporting system including brackets etc.
F.5. GRANITE DOOR FRAMES
Providing and fixing mirror Polished machine cut granite slab of 19 mm thick of approved make, colour, texture,
cut into required shape, IN TWO LAYERS [1 with 250 mm wide on which 2 layer of 150 mm pasted with araldite
or equivalent adhesive ] with cement mortar(1:4).edge polish and corner chamfer of 3 mm size as nosing to
exposed sides, complete as per working drawing and instruction from Architect. Item includes making , cutting,
fixing and finishing as complete frame to receive wooden or any other door shutter.
1) Materials & Workmansip:
The relevant specifications of item shall be followed. The granite stone shall be provided in single piece in
length and specified width. All the exposed edges of stone shall be machine cut and edge polished
The rate include providing machine cut edges and polishing including making chamfer wherever mentioned
on exposed faces of granite stone.
The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter.
The rate in inclusive of making & fixing of required size and shape as required . the clear dimensions shall
be considered for mode of measurement. Concealed or hidden in the floor will not be considered for
measurements.
F.6. VINY FLOORING–
Heavy duty vinyl in strip form/ roll form minimum 2 mm thk with a high-tech 100% PVC patterned photographic
print film layer encapsulated between a heavy duty clear PVC wear layer and vinyl backing.
INSTALLATION
Sub-floor must be clean, dry smooth, and level. It needs to be free from dust, grease, oil and other impurities.
Material should be placed at room temperature 24 hours prior to installation.
SPECIFICATION
Wear Layer: 0.2 ~ 1.0 mm
Overall Thickness: 2.0 ~ 3.0
TEST PERFORMACE
Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM-E 648 or Class 1
0.45mm watts/ cm2 or Greater
Smoke Generation: ASTM-D 662 < 450

Flame Spread Rating: ASTM-E 84 < 75
Slip Resistance: ASTM-D 2047
Dimentional Stability: ASTM-F 1303-97 + 0.3%
Wear Layer Resistance: 23000 cycle to complete wear though when tested by Means of Taber Abrader with H18
wheels and 1000 gram load.
Recommended adhesive
Water based adhesives like- Arobond 44 of Colourbond Mktg. / VC 31 of Pidilite Ind. Rubber based adhesives or
any other solvent based adhesives are not to be used with Armstrong tiles. Any complaint on account of using
such adhesives will not be entertained by the company.
Installation
Installation shall be carried out according to manufacturer’s recommendations Special care should be taken to
ensure the subfloor is level, clean, dry and hard. The recommended adhesive should be used to ensure
satisfactory installation.
MODE OF MEASUREMENT – on plan in square meters.
FOR HEAVY WEIGHT SECTION RUBBER TILES, SME TRATMENT SHALL BE USED AS MENTIONED ABOVE
WITH SAME MODE OF MEASUREMENT.
SECTION – L
CARPENTRY, JOINERY, ALUMINIUM DOORS & WINDOWS
1 Teakwood work :
Timber used for joinery shall be of good approved quality or 2nd Class Teak wood unless otherwise specified
(Ref.IS:4021) and shall be well seasoned (IS:1141) cut square, free from excess wane, from sapwood dead knot
or other (Ref.IS:3364).
All timber for carpentry, joinery, rough frame work, backings, grounds, fixing strips and the like shall be treated
with an approved wood preservative (Ref.IS:401) and the Contractor shall strictly observe the manufacturer's
instructions for using this material. The maximum permissible moisture content in timber shall be in accordance
with IS:287-latest.
All workmanship shall be of the best quality (IS:6534) Scantlings and boardings shall be accurately sawn and
shall be of uniform width and thickness throughout. All carpenter's work shall be left with a sawn surface except
where otherwise specified. Work shall be framed together and securely fixed in the best possible manner and
with properly made joints. All brads, nails, screws, plugs, pins, etc. to be provided as necessary and as directed
and approved.
Timber of approved quality is to be purchased at the commencement of the contract for further seasoning on
the site. The preparation of timber is to commence simultaneously with the beginning of the work generally and
to proceed continuously until all the wood work is prepared and stacked on or near the site. All the timber of
large scantlings is to be sawn immediately on arrival at site to allow for any shrinkage that may take place. All
timber brought to site shall be given anti-termite treatment.
Joints in various members forming any timber frame shall be provided only as shown in the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Two millimetres will be allowed for each wrought face of the sizes specified except

when described as finished in which case they shall hold to the full dimensions specified.
All work is to be properly tenoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, braded, etc. to the satisfaction of the Engineer
and all properly glued with best quality glue.
All joinery shall be finished off in a proper manner, planed and sand papered as required (IS:2338).
Use of nails shall not be permitted. Fixing of members shall be done by using screws or round brads, heads of
which shall be properly punched in ends of timbers built into walls shall have air space lest between themselves
and the walls.
All exposed faces of woodwork shall be sand papered once before erection for approval of the Engineer. No
colour or other preservatives shall be applied without prior approval of the Engineer.
Frames for doors and windows will be provided with Mild Steel holdfasts made of 40mm x 3mm thick flats 200mm
long and fixed into jambs M-15/10 P.C.C. 1200mm high frames with 6 Nos and frames above 2000mm with 8
Nos holdfasts. Each holdfast will be fixed to the frame with 3 Nos 50mm GI screws.
For fixing timber frames to concrete, rawl plugs and screws of 16 gauge shall be used wherever specified. Rawl
plugs and screws of gauge 16 shall also be used for fixing rawl rough grounds, framing, hangers, hat hooks,
curtain rails etc. Unless otherwise specified, screws used for the work shall be galvanised.
All timber surfaces coming into contact with masonry or concrete shall be given two coats of wood preservative
or solignum approved by the Engineer.
Panelled and glazed shutters, styles and rails shall be as shown in the drawing, moulded and mortised together
(Ref IS:1003). The shutters shall be square and free from twist.
All glazing is to be of sheet glass of selected quality and approved by the Engineer. It shall be clear and free
from defects. It shall be cut to the required size and fixed to frame either with spring clips, with approved
quality, or with teakwood beading as per details.
The Engineer may order any timber frame to be put together on the ground and submitted to suitable tests to his
satisfaction before being placed in position. The cost of any such test shall be borne by the Contractor.
All surfaces of timber resting on or bedded in masonry or concrete shall be well coated with coal tar.
All fixing holes shall be pelleted and concealed from view.
35mm thick flush type block board (IS:2202) shall be manufactured from selected timber well seasoned and
shall be of solid particle board core construction with 25mm thick teak wood lipping all around the edge. The
stiles and rails shall be of one piece or alternatively, two or more pieces glued together. The thickness of the
cross band shall not be less than 3mm and the thickness of the facing shall be of best quality commercial ply
thickness not less than 1.5mm. Where veneer finish, or formica finishes or any other type is specified they shall
be glued separately. All the plywood shall be glued under pressure. Glue used shall be phenol formaldehyde
resins.
Fixtures :

All doors and windows shall be provided with best quality fixtures as specified in the drawing. Samples of all
fittings shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, hinges, tower bolts, aldrops,
handles, baby latches, etc. shall be of best quality brass oxidised of specified size. Mortise lock, hydraulic closer
and other fixtures shall be of approved make. All the fittings shall be fixed with brass screws.
Painting :
Painting shall be carried out only after the joinery has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. The surface
preparation and applying of primer coats of paint and final coats of paint shall be carried out as per specifications
for painting. Unless otherwise specified a minimum of 2 coats of primer paint and 3 coats of final paint to be
applied.
Where polishing or varnishing is specified, the surface to be varnished or polished shall be protected from
contamination such as inadvertent painting and surface damage. The polishing or varnishing shall be according
to the specifications for varnishing or polishing under the section Painting.
2 Steel Door Frame (IS:4351) :
Unless otherwise specified or standard profile from commercial mild steel sheets of 1.25mm thickness. The
profile shall be such as to suit the door shutter specified. Each frame shall consist of hinge jamb, lock jamb,
head and base ties 25mm x 1.25mm thick or of specified angle threshold. The whole frame shall be of welded
connection or rigidly fixed together by mechanical means. MS holdfasts shall be same as specified for wooden
door frames. Necessary adjustable lock strike plate to make provision for locks or latches.
Unless otherwise specified, the frame shall be given a phosphate treatment after surface preparation and
followed by two coats of paint which shall be baked after applying.
Where hot dip galvanising is specified the same shall be carried out as per IS:1477.
The frames shall be delivered and stored at site without any distortion or damage. They shall be erected with
temporary struts to keep them in correct position and plumb. After each course of masonry is built, the gap
between masonry and frame shall be filled with 1: 4 cement mortar. The holdfast shall be embedded in concrete
mix M-15/10. The temporary strut shall not removed till masonry has set.
3 Steel Windows and Doors (IS:1361) :
All steel windows shall be obtained from approved manufacturer and the steel section used shall conform to
IS:7452. Coupling members for composite windows shall be fabricated from steel conforming to IS:226.
The fabrication of frames shall be of best workmanship. The joints shall be welded and ground properly without
leaving any cavity. Intersection of Tee section for glazing shall be tenoned and gap shall be closed by hydraulic
pressure.
Necessary holes required for fixing coupling sashes, glazing clips, etc. shall be provided.
All necessary MS holdfasts required for embedding shall be fixed to frame. Wherever steel frame is to be fixed
to concrete members, necessary holes shall be made for fixing with screws.

Bottom hung, top hung and side hung shutters shall be provided with standardised steel hinges and/or side
arms (which when shutter is closed is invisible).
Centre hung shutters shall be mounted on a pair of brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of inner and outer
cup and capable of remaining open in any direction. The frame shall be provided with bronze spring catch.
The handles and pegstays shall be heavy duty and shall be brass oxidised.
Unless otherwise specified, the frames shall be finished with hot dip galvanising. Where specified painting shall
be done in accordance with the specifications for painting.
The frames shall be erected in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The frame shall be aligned and kept
plumb by suitable supporting arrangement. As the masonry is being constructed the holdfasts are embedded in
concrete mix 15/10. Where required for fixing with concrete member, rawl plug and GI screws shall be used.
The joints between the steel frame and masonry work, after being finished with plaster shall be finished with
approved bitumen mastic.
Glass panes, unless otherwise specified shall be of 4mm thickness and shall be free from flaws, specks and
bubbles. It shall have properly squared corners and straight edges, and shall be fixed to frame with glazing pins
and approved putty.
4 Aluminium Windows and Doors (IS:1948 & IS:1949) :
Aluminium alloy shall conform to IS:733 and IS:285. The Contractor shall submit the sample of section he is
proposing to use for the frame, for approval. He shall also indicate the weight of section per one metre length.
He shall also submit for approval the sample of hinges, handles, pegstays or any other item that may require
the approval of the Engineer.
The glass panes, unless otherwise specified, shall be of 4mm thickness for windows and 5.5mm thickness for
doors and shall be free from flaws, specks and bubbles. They shall have properly squared corners and straight
edges. Fixing to frames shall be done with approved glazing pins and approved quality rubber beading.
Frames consisting of extruded hollow tube sections or other profiles shall be square and flat, the corners of the
frame being fabricated to a true right angle. The hinges shall be either of projection type, or friction hinges.
Necessary coupling of approved shape shall be provided for composite windows. All holes required for fixing
frame, for fixing glazing shall be provided. Only brass screws shall be used for fixing the frame to concrete
members.
Vertical and horizontal members shall be of adequate rigidity to resist lateral forces. Design calculation shall be
submitted for deflection of members.
All the fixtures for centre hung shutters, top and bottom hung shutters, or side hung shutters shall be got
approved before they are used. The fixtures used should be such that it should be possible to open the shutter
to any angle.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminium doors shall be provided with floor springs of approved quality and make.

All aluminium members shall be supplied in either matt or polished finish including anodising them by
electrochemical process to an approved colour and to a thickness of average 0.25mm. The frame shall be
protected with a layer of clear transparent lacquer based methacrylates or cellulose butyrate. The coating shall
be removed after installation is completed and after completing finishing work in the adjoining area.
The erection of frame shall be same as detailed under steel windows. Where aluminium frames come in contact
with steel members, they shall be separated by either a 3mm thick rubber gasket for full width of aluminium
member or any other approved film so as to avoid metallic corrosion.
5 Rolling Shutters (IS:6248) :
Rolling shutters shall be as per the size to suit the dimensions of the openings shown in the drawing. Unless
otherwise specified, they shall be fabricated out of 18 G thick mild steel laths of convex corrugation with rolling
centre either 75mm or 65mm and with minimum 12mm corrugation depth. The laths shall be interlocked by
alternate end clips.
The side guides shall either be of rolled section or one piece pressed construction and shall be of size 25mm
wide, 75mm deep, thickness shall not be less than 3mm.
The shutter shall be provided with bottom lock plate 3mm thick and reinforced by an angle iron stiffener at the
bottom and MS flat at the top.
The suspension shaft shall be of adequate design and unless otherwise specified shall be formed from 8 guage
seamless tube, 60mm O.D. with suitable flange coupling.
The springs shall be of approved high tensile steel flat or coil spring hardened and tempered. These shall be
fitted inside the fabricated housing.
The ball bearings shall be double self aligning ball bearings fitted inside CI housing fixed on side brackets holding
the suspension brackets at either ends.
The suspension of the shutter shall be bolted on specially fabricated cages formed from MS flats and plates all
arc welded.
The hood cover shall be made of 20 gauge MS sheets with necessary stiffeners and framework.
The locking arrangement shall consist of hoop and stable on the bottom plate, lockable from both the sides.
Unless otherwise specified, for overall area of rolling shutters upto 5 m2 pull and push type hand operated
shutters shall be provided, for area from 5 m2 to 10 m2 pull and push type with ball bearings shall be provided
and for area larger than 10 m2, mechanically operated gear type and/or electrically operated shutters shall be
provided.
The shutters, hood covers, etc. shall be carried out according to manufacturer's specifications. While fixing to
concrete members, only shell anchors shall be used. Chiselling of concrete for fixing bolts will not be allowed.
6 Fibre Glass Reinforcement Polyester (FRP) Doors :

FRP Door Frames :
Supplying FRP frame of section 125mm x 65mm champhered type with provision to fix FRP shutters. FRP
thickness to be 2.0 mm plus with extra reinforcement on sides and edges. The core of frame to be polyol foam/
with wooden styles embedded for taking hinges, fixtures etc. the side facing masonry to be only covered in FRP.
The whole section to be totally waterproof, resistant to mild, acids, alkalies. Colour/painting as per direction of
Engineer. Frames shall be measured in linear metre.
FRP Door Shutter :

Supplying FRP moulded shutters 35mm thick, in panel, design as approved. FRP thickness to be 2.0 mm with
extra reinforcements on sides and edges. The core of the shutter to be polyol foam done insitu with wooden
styles embedded for taking hinges, fixtures etc. both sides of shutters to be finished in gel-coat. Shutters to have
recess for hinges. The whole shutter to be totally water proof resistant to mild acids, alkalies. Colour/ painting
as per direction of Engineer.
Shutters shall be paid on actual dimension of shutters in square metre.
7 Mode Of Payment and Measurement :
Wooden Doors and Windows :

The rate quoted shall include the cost of all frames, shutters, glass panes, if any, and all necessary fixtures,
wooden preservatives, fixing them in position and embedding the holdfasts in concrete and/or fixing the frames
to concrete members with rawl plugs, screws, surface preparation, either applying specified number of coats of
approved paint or polishing complete, and shall be paid on square metre basis.
For measurement of doors, the width shall be overall width of the frame measured prior to plastering, and height
shall be measured from finished floor level to the top of topmost frame prior to plastering.
For measurement of windows, the width and the height shall be overall frame size measured prior to plastering.
Where only door shutters are to be paid separately as in the case of partition walls, they shall be paid on actual
dimension of shutters.
Woodwork other than Doors, Shutters :
Unless otherwise specified, the woodwork shall be measured in cubic metre basis. The length, breadth and depth
of the member shall be measured after planing.
Steel Doors and Windows :

The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricating and fixing in position frames, putty, glass panes,
all necessary fixtures, applying paints as specified, embedding hold fasts in concrete or fixing to concrete
members rawl plugs and GI screws etc. complete and shall be paid on square metre basis.
For measurement for windows, the width and height shall be the overall dimension measured prior to plastering.
For doors, the width shall be the overall width prior to plastering and the height shall be from finished floor to
the top of top frame measured prior to plastering.
Aluminium Doors and Windows :

The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricating and fixing in position frames, glass panes, rubber
beading, all fixtures including floor springs, hinges, etc anodising, applying protective cover, embedding the
holdfast in concrete and/or fixing the frames to concrete members with rawl plugs and brass screws and where
necessary the cost of rubber gasket (3mm thick) barrier between aluminium member and steel member etc
complete.
Measurement shall be same as described for steel doors and windows.
Rolling Shutters :
The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricated, fixing in position with shell anchors, or rawl plugs,
bolts, all necessary fixtures including surface preparation and applying paint as specified and shall be paid on
square metre basis.
For measurement the basis shall be overall dimension of the rolling shutter.
8 Curtain Walling :
1 Materials :
a) Aluminium alloy for framing system shall conform to IS 1285. The Mechanical properties of
aluminium alloy shall have properties that of design Number 64430 Table 2 of IS 1285 Samples of
aluminium sections shall be tested in an approved laboratories for mechanical properties.
Anodising of aluminium sections shall be as per ID 7018 and

IS 1868. Average thickness of anodising shall be 0.020 mm and shall be either Matt or polished
finish. The anodised members shall be protected during the installations of frames as per IS 1948.
b) The silicone sealant shall be of approved grade and make. The sample of Silicon sealant shall
be tested for confirmation of the quality as specified by the Silicone manufacturer.
c) The EPDM Neoprene rubber gasket, where used, shall be of approved
d) grade and make. The sample of the gasket shall be tested for confirmation of the quality as
specified by the manufacturer.
2 Curtain Walling System
Framing system :
The framing system, shall be of structurally and mechanically engineered design technology whereby
the frames shall be prefabricated in the curtain waller's factory in modular units equivalent in size to
one full floor in height and one full window module in width. Horizontal frames shall be of corresponding
width and shall span in length between vertical faces. The perimeter of the frames shall be coupled
together at sides and ends of horizontal panels, and toes and sides of vertical panels to provide, a
structurally integrated air and waterproof movement joint on all four sides of each panel.
Structural Glazing System :
The glazing system shall be of professionally engineered ‘Structural Glazing technology whereby each
glass panel shall be manufactured in the glass factory in full completed modular units of precise size to
fit into each modular unitised framing panel with pattern as designated.
The thickness and strengthening method of each pane of glass shall be engineered to accord with the
manufacturers highest recommendation for each application.

The manufacture of each pane of glass shall be to the manufacturer’s highest recommendations.
Quantities and sizes shall be established by the curtain waller and shall provide for spares to cover
construction breakage and future maintenance. Openable window shall be provided as per the drawing
with required hardware and shall conform the under mentioned standard.
Each pane of glass shall be factory bonded with structural silicone to the frame.
On site glazing shall be limited to constructional closure panels.
All bonded glass shall be held statically in position without strain for a Period of not less than 14 days
as recommended by the silicone manufacture.
The entire system shall allow for expansion and contraction and building
movements and shall be self draining at each horizontal panel joint.
Fixing of Panels to Structure :

Each panel, shall be factory prefabricated, preglazed and factory cured, and then installed on site.
Each panel shall have engineered corrosion proof fixing brackets bolted to the side frames, and bolted
to the building structure.
Installation of Frames :
Each panel shall generally be installed from within the building.
Soffit panels shall be delivered from within building and installed from an external scaffold or from a
mobile scaffold.
Smoke Seals :
Provide corrosion proof smoke seals of flexible design and construction between the building structure
and the curtain walling to ensure a complete smoke seal of cavity spaces.
3 Design Responsibilities :
The curtain waller shall be responsible for the quality and efficiency of the design and application of the
curtain wall technology required. The design shall be based on the schematic drawings of Architects
including design analysis, preparation of detail shop drawings complete.
It is mandatory that the system be aesthetically pleasing and structurally sound and that the system
has been pretested in an appropriate manner to international curtain walling standards in an accredited
overseas laboratory.
4 Aesthetic Design Features :

Vision panels, and spandrel panels and soffit panels shall be of high performance class selected and
manufactured to provide matching external appearance during the day. All framing shall be neatly and
accurately formed and be of neat even thickness.
The junction between unitised panels shall be true to line.
All heat strengthened tempered glass shall have roller lines in a constant direction at all times.
Opening lites shall be extremely frameless in the main facades.
5 Design Loading :
The curtain walling shall be designated to with stand the following forces without failure:
a) Wind loading’s as per IS 875
b) Earthquake Forces as per IS 1893 with important factor 1.0.
c) Building movement - 10 mm maximum.
6 Curtain Walling performance Criteria
a) Deflection - shall be limited to 1/20th of the span of the member.

b) No distortion - Composition of curtain walling member shall be adequate to fully resist distortion.
c) Movement-The curtain walling system shall be capable of accommodating all stress and movements that
are likely to occur during the normal life of the cuts in wall.
d) Long term movements - Following long term movements shall be taken into account while detailing the
curtain wall.
i) Shortening of the frames - 0.6mm for three storied structure to 2.0mm for10 stories structure.
ii) Racking of structure - Nil
iii) Differential deflection - 3mm
7 Building Construction Tolerances :
Before the fabrication of curtain wall, the contractor shall take the actual
measurements of building and carryout necessary correction in the shop drawing.
8 Prototype Test Results :
The sub-contractor shall submit full representative test results to an approved international standard such as
Australian Standards A.S. 2047 or other equivalent.
The results shall include :

i) Deflection test +ve and -ve
ii) Air-infiltration tests
iii) Water penetration tests.
9 Building Clearances
The following clearances have been incorporated into the building design.
a) Vertical cladding Nominal 150mm from outside of cladding to outside of structure.

b) Horizontal cladding (soffits) minimum. 230 mm from outside of cladding to any part of the structure.
10 Buildings Maintenance Unit (B.M.U.)
The curtain waller shall be responsible to provide an internationally accredited building maintenance system for
the cleaning of the curtain walling located at Terrace Floor Level. However it shall not be required for cleaning of
the sections of curtain walling beneath the cantilever sections of the building. Such sections shall be accessed
for cleaning as follows :
Soffit - Grid opening lites in the outer wall.
Vertical walling - Vid special scaffolding to be supplied by the building owner.
The Contractor shall ensure that certain feasible methods of cleaning system is provided and brought out at the
time of tendering.
Mode of Payment and Measurement

Wooden Doors and Windows :

The rate quoted shall include the cost of all frames, shutters, glass panes, if any, and all necessary fixtures,
wooden preservatives, fixing them in position and embedding the holdfasts in concrete and/or fixing the frames
to concrete members with rawl plugs, screws, surface preparation, either applying specified number of coats of
approved paint or polishing complete, and shall be paid on square metre basis.
For measurement of doors, the width shall be overall width of the frame measured prior to plastering, and height
shall be measured from finished floor level to the top of topmost frame prior to plastering.
For measurement of windows, the width and the height shall be overall frame size measured prior to plastering.
Where only door shutters are to be paid separately as in the case of partition walls, they shall be paid on actual
dimension of shutters.
For Woodwork other than Doors, Shutters :

Unless otherwise specified, the woodwork shall be measured in cubic metre basis. The length, breadth and depth
of the member shall be measured after planing.
Steel Doors & Windows :

The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricating and fixing in position frames, putty, glass panes,
all necessary fixtures, applying paints as specified, embedding holdfasts in concrete or fixing to concrete members
with rawl plugs and GI screws etc. complete and shall be paid on square metre basis.
For measurement for windows, the width and height shall be the overall dimension measured prior to plastering.
For doors, the width shall be the overall width prior to plastering and the height shall be from finished floor to
the top of top frame measured prior to plastering.
Aluminium Doors & Windows & Curtain walling :

Method 1 :
Measurement on area basis. The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricating and fixing in position
frames, glass panes, rubber beading, all fixtures including floor springs, hinges, etc anodising, applying protective
cover, embedding the holdfast in concrete and/or fixing the frames to concrete members with rawl plugs and
brass screws and where necessary the cost of rubber gasket (3mm thick) barrier between aluminium member
and steel member etc complete. Sealing joint between all Civil work and Aluminium frame with neutral grade
Silicone Sealant etc.
Measurement shall be same as described for steel doors and windows.
Method 2 : Where specified, in this method aluminium sections shall be measured and paid on the basis of actual weight
used in the work which shall include the weight of aluminium fixtures such as hinges, handles, floor springs,
including anodising, applying protective cover, fixing materials, charges etc.
The rate for the glass shall include the cost of all non-aluminium fixtures, such as neoprene gasket, Nylon rollers,
anti rattling pieces, Silicone sealants between frame and civil work etc., and the actual area of glass used in the
work shall be measured and paid.
Rolling Shutters :
The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricated, fixing in position with shell anchors, or rawl plugs,
bolts, all necessary fixtures including surface preparation and applying paint as specified and shall be paid on
square metre basis.
For measurement the basis shall be overall dimension of the rolling shutter.
10 U-PVC (un-plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride ) windows & doors.:DELETED
SECTION – M
ROOF AND SIDE CLADDING
4 Colour Coated Profiled Sheets :
1 Colour Coated Profiled sheets shall have base material of either High
tensile cold rolled steel with Galvalium coating or Ordinary tensile cold rolled steel with Galvanized coating. High
tensile cold rolled steel shall confirm to AS 1397 (minimum yield strength 550 Mpa) and coating shall confirm to
AZ150 (150 gm/m2 zinc- aluminium alloy coating, total of both sides). Ordinary tensile cold rolled steel with
Glavanized coating shall confirm to IS:513 & IS:277 (minimum yield strength 240 Mpa and min 175 gms/m2
zinc coating, total of both sides).
2 Finished paint coating for sheets shall be any one of following as specified in the items.
a) Silicon polyester coating
b) Polyester Coating
c) Plain Galvalium or Galvanized finish
3 The sheets shall be fixed on the steel purlins by roofing screws of Buildex make or equivalent, mechanically
galvanized, colour matched nylon head in either self drilled holes or predrilled holes at crest of the sheets.
The spacing of screws shall be as per manufacturer’s specifications. The side laps are sealed by stitching
bolts.
4 All precautions with regard to storing, handling and laying as stipulated in clause L.3 above shall be
considered applicable to Colour Coated sheets.
5 Measurement :
The quoted rates for each item of work covered by this specification shall include providing of all materials, tools
tackle plant, scaffolding as required labour, and all other work necessary to complete the job as per this
specification.
The sheets shall be measured and paid per unit (m2) flat area, covered in the plans of the sheets. Special
accessories such as gutters, north light curves, ridge pieces etc. shall be measure and paid per unit length (m).
No separate payment will be made for laps of sheets and accessories, bolts nuts, washers, white washing, adjustable
bolts and supports for gutters and other fixtures. These are assumed to be included in the quoted rates.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR ACOUSTICAL INTERIORS :
1. General

1.1. The work under the contract shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule of items of work, the
particular specifications drawings forming part of this tender document, and the general conditions and other
provisions of the tender.
1.2. The system shall be designed in accordance with the appropriate IS, BS, DIN or
IEC recommendations.
2. Functional Requirements
To provide an acoustical treatment that will fulfill the following design criteria:
a) Provide the desired reverberation time as given below.
b) Provide sound isolation of over 40dB.
c) Provide a background noise level following the NC35 curve. The main source of background noise is the HVAC system
and leaking of noise from outside.For this, the contractor shall follow the design provided to a dot, and will not have
the freedom or flexibility to substitute specified items for sub-standard equivalents.
3. Proposed Design Acoustics
The design provides to achieve the following acoustical parameters in the auditorium:
1) To achieve a background noise level of NC35 noise criteria, with the HVAC units on.Lower background noise level
helps provide a clearer sound during a performance at a lower sound level from source.
2) Accurate control of the RT, or reverberation time for all frequencies of sound, that is, the time taken for the source
sound to die down by 60dB.
3) The design eliminates late reflection of sound and keeps the auditorium free from flutter echoes, so that there is a
smooth decay of sound.
4) On the other hand, the design encourages early reflection of sound, where the reflected
sound reaches the listener in less than 40 milliseconds, thereby enhancing the original
and making it sound fuller and richer.
5) The design provides for a target RT60 level of 1.2-1.5 seconds, when the auditorium is
2/3 full.
4. Design Guidelines
While offering specific treatment in acoustics, the following act as guidelines:

4.1. All paneling on side and rear walls above a height of 2.1m above floor level designed to provide a high NRC of 0.85
or higher
4.2. Reflective paneling on side walls up to a 2.1m height to create desired early reflection of sound.
4.3. Acoustical treatment on side walls of stage area and stage ceiling, to prevent formation of undesirable echo from
stage monitor speakers, and in the case of direct sound from musicians on stage.
4.4. All fabric being used as cladding material to have a fire-retardant coating. The certification of the same to be
provided by Contractor.
4.5. All minimum air-gaps of paneling/ ceiling from abutting walls/ roof to be provided strictly as per specifications and
drawings.
5. Scope of work
5.1. The contract is for the supply of all necessary materials and labour for the execution of said jobs and the
installation and commissioning of the acoustical treatments. The contract shall include the following:
5.2. All necessary materials and the installation and commissioning of the acoustical treatment as specified complete.
6. Contractor's Responsibility
6.1. It is the intention of the specifications to specify the principal performance and requirements for the acoustical
treatment system.
6.2. It shall be entirely the responsibility of the tenderer to provide an acoustical system which shall meet all the specified
requirements; and to select different components which are adequate in terms of desired Noise Rating and other requisite
acoustical properties, as given in the technical specifications.

6.3. The contractor shall, whenever called upon to do so, submit for the approval of the Engineer data of the technical
properties of the various materials being used. If required to do so by the Engineer, he shall provide laboratory test
reports of the Acoustical properties of any material being used.
7. Completeness of Contract
All special fittings and fixtures needed for appropriate fabrication of the acoustical panels and ceiling etc. not specifically
mentioned but that are usual for the fabrications shall beincluded in the supply without any extra cost to the contract.
1. Departure from Specifications
The work shall be carried out according to specifications. Any deviation from these specifications either on account of
manufacturing practices or for any other reason including the measures for additional efficiency and/or safety of the
equipment shall be clearly stated in a covering letter explaining in detail each and every departure the contractor
proposes to make from the tender giving reasons thereof. Unless specifically mentioned it will be assumed that the
tenderer agrees to supply all equipment and complete the work exactly as specified therein and as shown in the
drawings in its entirety. All deviations shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
9. Descriptive Literature
The tenderer shall supply a complete list with quantities of major items of materials together with detailed descriptive
literature including photographs and performance characteristics pertaining to the materials being used.
10. Inside Temperatures and Humidity
All acoustical treatment should be capable of performing satisfactorily in an ambient temperature of 45 deg C and 80%
humidity.
11. Standards
The materials used in the equipment shall conform to and be supplied in accordance with the latest revision of relevant
IS, BS, DIN or IEC standards or equivalent current at the time of tender. All the work shall also conform to the
requirements of local codes and regulations. Tenderer should justify the particular standard chosen with reference to the
operating context.

SECTION – N
WATERPROOFING
1 Brick-bat Coba :
IS:3068 : Wherever specified this shall consist of 100 parts of broken bricks of the sizes of approximately
20mm to 40mm and 45 parts of lime mortar (1:2) or 1:6 cement mortar, machine mixed. The above
ingredients shall be well mixed and only sufficient water added to make the mixture plastic. The mixture
shall be laid over the concrete surface and shall be well rammed with wooden battens to the required slope.
The surface shall be trowelled smooth so as to bring the mortar to the surface. The surface shall be kept
moist for 7 days.
2 Bitumen felts based waterproofing and damp-proofing :DELETED
3 The waterproofing work shall be carried out by Contractors who have experience in doing waterproofing work
and shall give a guarantee on a stamped paper for good performance of the waterproof treatment for a minimum
of seven years period and shall, at their own cost, rectify the defects, if any, found during the guarantee period.
If approved by the Engineer, insitu fibre glass tissue reinforced bitumen layers equivalent to bitumen felt may
be used.
4 Surface preparation :
Concrete and masonry surface :
Any cracks in the surface (other than hair cracks) shall be cut to V-shape, cleaned and filled with cement mortar
1:2 or with bitumen conforming to IS:702 as directed by the Engineer.
All fungus growth, if any, moss, dust shall be removed by wire brushing.
Masonry drain mouth shall be widened to two and a half times the diameter of the drain and rounded with cement
mortar.
When a pipe passes through RCC slab a cement concrete fillet shall be built around the pipe and waterproofing
taken over the fillet.
In brick parapet walls a chese shall be made in the parapet walls to terminate the bitumen felt. No chase shall
be made in the RCC parapet walls.
5 Bitumen based waterproofing shall consist of either Normal Treatment or Heavy Treatment or extra heavy
treatment as specified.
6 Waterproofing of roof, terraces, bathroom, water tanks etc by cement based waterproofing compounds and by
injection grouting :
Where specified this work shall be carried out by the Contractor who is specialized in carrying out this work. The
Contractor shall give a 10 year guarantee on a stamped paper for good performance of his work and shall
undertake to rectify the work at his own cost if any defects are observed during the guarantee period.
In general the waterproofing shall be carried out as per specification of the specialist but duly approved by the
Engineer.
The roof surface before waterproofing shall be cleaned thoroughly and watered and shall be kept wet at least 12
hours prior to carrying out of waterproofing. If any leakage is observed the source of leakage shall be located
and it shall be treated either by injection grouting or by closing of the crack with application of cement mortar
1:2 after cutting a V-shape groove. The treatment shall be continued till the leakage is stopped.

Brick-bat coba in special waterproof cement mortar shall be laid to required slope, and shall be well compacted.
A 40mm thick I.P.S. type finishing using waterproof admixture shall be provided and finished smooth by extensive
trowelling. A false square shall be provided by pressing string, 3mm dia, on the surface. The top finish shall be
continued upto a minimum of 300mm height in the parapet wall (in the case of bathroom it shall be carried out
upto 1000mm high without fillet). Necessary grooves shall be provided in the walls to terminate the
waterproofing treatment. At the junction of the wall and the floor a round or triangular fillet of size 200mm x
200mm shall be provided. The entire surface shall be cured for minimum 14 days by storing water to a depth of
at least 150mm in the entire area. During this period if any leakage is observed the same shall be rectified. The
slope of waterproofing shall be as specified in the schedule.
7 Underground water tanks and basements:

Waterproofing shall be carried out by either boxing or by injection grouting from inside as specified.
1 Box method:
Boxing shall start immediately after P.C.C. is completed and before the box concrete is laid. It shall
consist of laying rough Shahabad tiles 300 x 300 or other approved size and thickness varying from 12
mm to 20 mm in waterproof cement mortar bedding. The joints between tiles shall be thoroughly
grouted with waterproof cement grout.
The waterproofing course shall be continued without break along the external surface after the vertical
elements are constructed. In case of basement, the source of leakage if any, shall be located and shall
be plugged by injection grouting. In the case of water tanks, the tank shall be filled up with water to
full capacity and kept under observation for at least one week. If any leakage is observed the same
shall be stopped by injection grouting.
2 Injection grouting waterproofing treatment from inside:
Before starting the work, (in the case of water tanks) the tank shall be filled with water and all leakage
points noted shall be grouted by injection grouting. All the construction joints shall be grouted by
injection grouting. The floor shall be treated with 75 mm thick concrete using waterproofing compound
laid to proper slope. The vertical surface shall be given 25 mm thick cement plaster using waterproofing
admixture.
The tank shall be again tested for water-tightness and if any leakages are observed they shall be rectified
by injection grouting.
8 Providing extra thickness of waterproof treatment to the terrace and for filling in the depression in the floor in
the toilet. Brick pieces of quarter half, and three quarter size are laid piece by piece in the form of horizontal
brick masonry in "Cetroof" waterproof mortar made up of cement, sand and "Cetroof" waterproof powder. This
treatment is carried out layer by layer to make up the desired thickness to achieve the slope of 1:120 for terrace
and the same procedure is followed for filling in the depression in the toilets. The treatment is cured for about
seven days.
9 Floor and walls of toilets (bathroom & water closets) kitchen mori, Gallery, fire escape passage/services duct
passages etc items M 1(a), i.e. (i) & (ii)& (h)
Surface method :
The treatment shall be done by "Surface" method. But before the work in the floor and wall is done, all chasing
or cutting in the floor and\or wall shall be done by the plumber. A layer of "Cetroof" plaster about 35 mm.
(1.1\2)thick in the floor area of the depression and about 25 mm (1") thick on the side walls of the depression
upto floor level shall then be laid. The waterproof plaster about 18 mm (3\4") thick shall then be continued on
the walls above the proposed finished floor level upto a height of 600 mm (2 feet) with surface suitable and even

to receive tiles to be laid by the contractor. In shower areas in the bathrooms, the treatment shall be for the full
height of the wall.
The plumber shall then finish all his plumbing work i.e. of laying and fixing of pans, pipes and traps etc. without
and further breaking or disturbing the treatment. The depression shall then be filled with "Cetroof" waterproof
brickbat coba upto the level for putting tiles, the surface being finished even and suitable to receive tiles to be
laid by the contractor.
Roof slab terrace Item M.1(b) surface method :

(A) The new terraces shall be treated with "Surface" method which starts directly over the RCC slab and
includes the brickbat coba to provide the necessary gradient for the easy flow of rain water.
The coba is finally covered with "Cetroof jointless waterproof plaster finished smooth with trowel in
cement colour, with false markings of 300 mm (one foot) squares. The treatment is carried along the
vertical surface of the parapets and other adjoining walls, upto a height of about 300 mm (1 feet) in the
shape of round wata. The average thickness of treatment is about 110 mm (4") the thickness at rain
water outlet points being 75 mm (3") with a slope of 1 in 120.
The surface provided shall be hard and tough suitable for all normal commercial and domestic purposes.
If however, it is desired to cover treatment with decorative tiles, marbles etc then the surface of treatment shall
be finished suitable to receive them.
(B) Due to the location of rain water pipes being far apart and due to the span being wider than 30 ft or 9
metres and the water is required to travel on one side only, then the thickness of the treatment increased
proportionately to maintain the gradient for the easy flow of rain water.
(C) If a Garden and\or lawn is desired to be made over this treatment it can be made suitable for that also
a extra charge. For this it is necessary that the slab shall have a depression of 600 mm (24") in relation
to the adjacent vertical areas i.e. Parapet wall and\or other side wall to accommodate about 150 mm
(6") thickness of waterproofing, 75 mm (3") thickness for filtering material, 225 mm (9") thickness for
earth filling plus 150 mm (6")for free board.
Lift Pit Injection method :

The pit shall be treated from inside with 'Injection' and 'Surface' method which includes the internal plaster
finished smooth with trowel. Injections shall be given to the floor and walls as and where found necessary and
thereafter layer of "Cetroof" waterproof shall be laid on the floor and continued along the side walls to their full
height. The thickness of treatment of the floor shall be about 6.6 mm and on the wall about 25 mm (one inch).
The final surface of the floor and walls shall be finished smooth in cement.
Under ground tank - Injection and surface method :

In the case of new tanks after the plumbing work is completed under normal plaster to the outer surface of the
walls, is provided by the main contractor before back filling. The tank shall be treated from inside with injection
and surface methods which include the internal plaster finished smooth with trowel.
Injection shall be given to the floor and walls as and where found necessary and thereafter a layer of "Cetroof"
waterproof shall be laid on the floor and shall be continued along the inner side of the end i.e. side walls and on
both sides of partition and\or baffle walls upto their full height. This shall take care of both subsoil water leaking
into the tank and the stored water leaking out of the tank.
The thickness of treatment on the floor shall be 65 mm (2.1\2") and on the walls 25 mm (1") it shall be finished
smooth with trowel in cement colour without any further treatment.
It is essential and in the interest of work that the tank should be filled in by the main contractor immediately
after the treatment is completed.

R.C.C Overhead tank Injection surface method :
In case of new tanks after the plumbing and plaster on the outer surface of the walls and floors is provided by
the main contractor the tank shall be treated from inside with "Injection and Surface" method which includes the
internal plaster finished smooth with trowel.
Injection shall be given to the floor and walls as and where found necessary and therefore a layer of "Cetroof"
waterproof shall be continued along the inner side i.e. side walls as on both sides of partition walls upto their full
height.
The thickness of treatment on the floor shall be 50 mm (2") and on the walls 20 mm (3\4"). It will be finished
smooth with trowel in cement colour.
It is essential and in the interest of work that the tank should be filled in by the main contractors immediately
after the treatment is completed.
Service ducts\basement Box method :

The under ground structure shall be treated by "Box Method". The bottom 150 mm (6") PCC shall be laid in a
manner Projecting minimum 150 mm (6") beyond the ends of the R.C.C raft on all four sides. On the P.C.C
waterproof layer, based on cement 75 mm thick (3") shall be laid. After the construction of the R.C.C raft and
wall by the main contractor the said "Cetroof" layer is continued and carried along the outer surface of the walls
upto a height of 300 mm (one foot) above the adjoining ground or apron level. The thickness of the treatment
to the vertical surface shall be 30 to 35 mm (1.1\4" to 1.1\2").
10 Waterproofing with Elastic Crystalline System
8 Koster’s alkaline cement – based crystalline waterproofing
Providing & installing Koster's alkaline cement-based crystalline NB system having Elasticity and self curing
properties to the cleaned surface free of dust, paint curing agents, loose plaster debris etc. The waterproofing
system is then Brush applied in 2 coats on pre- dampened surface including the sunken areas. The coverage is
0.60 kg per sq. meter per coat. for bathrooms the treatment should extend upto the shower spout level in the
shower areas and extend 150 cms from the finished floor level. The waterproofing system shall include treatment
of all Construction joints & pipe insertions with CK NB elastic system having elasticity of 80 %. Testing by
pounding water to be done for 48 hrs. Brick Bat Coba may be applied directly on the NB system and laid to slope
at extra cost.
Mode of measurement and payment :
The rate shall be inclusive of cost of all materials including waterproof admixture, injection grouting, testing the
tank and rectifying the defect and giving the guarantee on stamped paper. It shall be measured and paid on
square metre basis.

SECTION – O
PLUMBING, DRAINAGE, WATER SUPPLY (SANITATION)
1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
All plumbing and sanitary work should be carried out by competent licensed plumber only, and the material and
workmanship shall conform to the following I S Codes and relevant bye-laws of local Municipal Authorities. All
necessary approvals and completion certificates from Municipal. Airport and other regulatory authorities shall
be obtained by the contractor.
IS:1536-1976 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for
water, gas and sewage.
IS:1537-1976 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas
& sewage.
IS:1538-1976 Specification for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas
Parts I - XXIV & sewage.
IS:6163-1978 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes
for water, gas and sewage.
IS:1729-1979 Specification for sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories.
IS:3114-1985 Code of Practice for laying of cast iron pipes.
IS:1879-1975 Parts I-X Specification for malleable cast iron pipe fittings
IS:1230-1979 Specification for cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings
IS:3486-1966 Specification for cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes
IS:3516-1966 Specification for cast iron pipe flanges and flanged fittings for
petroleum industry
IS:3989-1984 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket
soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories
IS:1978-1982 Specification for line pipe
IS:2643-1975 Part I Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening proposes Part I - Basic
profile & dimensions
IS:2643-1975 Part II Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes Part II –
Tolerances
IS:2643-1975 Part III Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes Part III -
Limits of sizes
IS:5603-1970 Specifications for fully automatic elbow joint
IS:5822-1970 Code of Practice for laying of welded steel pipes for water supply
IS:6631-1972 Specification for steel pipes for hydraulic purposes
S:1239-1979 Part I Specification for mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel
fittings Part I - Mild Steel tubes
IS:1239-1982 Part II Specification for mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel
fittings Part I - Mild Steel tubulars and other wrought steel pipe
fittings
IS:6392-1971 Specification for steel pipe flanges

IS:458-1971 Specification for concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement)
IS:783-1985 Code of Practice for laying of concrete pipes
IS:3597-1966 Methods of tests for concrete pipes
IS:4350-1967 Specification for concrete porous pipes for under drainage
IS:784-1978 Specification for prestressed concrete pipes (including fittings)
IS:7322-1985 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete

pipes
IS:1916-1963 Specification for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
IS:7563-1975 Code of Practice for structural design of cut and cover concrete
conduits
IS:1592-1980 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes
IS:9627-1980 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (Light duty)
IS:6530-1972 Code of Practice for laying of asbestos cement pressure pipes
IS:5531-1977 Part I-III Specification for cast iron specials for asbestos cement pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS:4985-1981 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies
IS:7634-1975 Part III Code of Practice for plastics pipe work for potable water supplies
Part III - Laying & jointing of unplasticized PVC pipes
IS:10124-1982 Part I Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies
Part I - General requirements
IS:10124-1983 Part VII Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies
Part VII - Specific requirements for threaded adaptors
IS:3076-1985 Specification for low density polyethylene pipes for potable water
supplies
IS:651-1980 Specification for salt-glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
IS:3006-1979 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and

fittings pipes
IS:4127-1983 Code of Practice for laying of glazed stoneware
IS:1172-1983 Code of Basic requirements for Water Supply, Drainage and

Sanitation
IS:2065-1983 Code of Practice for Water Supply in Buildings
IS:2401-1973 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of

Domestic Water Meters
IS:1742-1983 Code of Practice for Building Drainage
IS:2470-1985 Part I Code of Practice for Installation of Septic Tanks Part I - Design
Criteria and Construction
IS:2470-1985 Part II Code of Practice for Installation of Septic Tanks Part II - Secondary
Treatment and Disposal of Septic Tank Effluent
IS:5329-1969 Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipe Work above ground for buildings
IS:4111-1986 Part I Code of Practice for Ancillary structures in Sewerage System Part I
- Manholes

IS:4111-1985 Part II Code of Practice for Ancillary structures in Sewerage System Part
II - Flushing Tanks
IS:4111-1985 Part III Code of Practice for Ancillary structures in Sewerage System Part
III - Inverted Siphon
IS:2064-1973 Code of Practice for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of

Sanitary Appliances
IS:2527-1984 Code of Practice for Fixing Rainwater Gutters and Down pipes for
Roof Drainage
IS:6924-1973 Code of Practice for the Construction of Refuse Chutes in

Multistoreyed Buildings
IS:12592-1988 Part I Specification for precast concrete manhole covers & frames Part I -
Covers
IS:1726-1974 Part VII Specification for cast iron manhole covers & frames Part VII -
Section I
All fittings and fixtures shall be got tested and approved and stamped by local Municipal Authorities. Formalities
for obtaining approval for the drainage and plumbing work before starting the work and getting Completion
Certificates after the work is satisfactorily completed, shall be done by the Contractor. The Contractor shall
prepare a board on which all approved samples will be mounted and the same shall be displayed at the site office
during the entire period of execution of work. The rates for all the plumbing and sanitary items shall be deemed
to have included the cost for making holes in walls, providing and fixing screws, wooden plugs, cleats where
necessary, cutting floors, chasing in walls & floors (concrete) etc, making good, testing, getting approval and
Completion Certificate etc complete.
The scope of work includes design checks, supply, installation, testing and commissioning, maintenance during
the defects liability period of the Plumbing and drainage works at subject site.
The works shall be carried out in accordance with the specifications and drawings. Any changes to suit the site
conditions or beneficial from the site suitability, shall be allowed, provided the changes are agreed by the
consultants and clients.
The system shall conform to high standards of workmanship and Engineering.
Contactor should study the specifications and drawings carefully, should check the design thoroughly and should
be brought to the attention of the consultants. It is contractor’s responsibility to attain the desired conditions to
the satisfaction of consultant and client.
The drawings are indicative and contractor should prepare proper shop drawings i.e. water supply and drainage
layouts, sectional details, and seek consultant’s approval prior to the commencement of site work.
Contractor should prepare Material data sheets of the equipment and material which will be used at site for the
consultant’s approval. Sample of material should also be provided, if required.
Contractor should offer all the relevant tests during of the system. The equipments / instruments required for
such tests shall be arranged by the contractor. Instruments should be duly calibrated.
Contractor to provide as built drawings and operation and maintenance manuals in 3 sets after the completion
of the project.
Contactor should maintain the system during the defects liability period of Three year. All faulty items should be
replaced / repaired without any charges during this Period.

Unless otherwise specified, all exposed or concealed pipes, GI, CI or lead shall be painted with three coats of
paint of approved quality and colour.
The items for concrete work shall be as per the specifications given in Section B (Concrete - Plain & Reinforced),
Section C (Formwork) and Section D (Reinforcement). The items for brick masonry work shall be as per the
specifications given in Section F (Masonry work) and Section G (Plastering & Pointing).
2 DRAWINGS :
The drawings are design drawings and are generally schematic. They do not show all offsets, T's, Cross, Y's,
junction coupling/flanges etc, which are required for installation in the space provided. The Contractor shall follow
the drawings, as closely as is practicable and install additional bends, elbows, or junctions, etc where required
to suit local site conditions, from actual site measurement taken, subject to approval and without additional cost
to the Owner.
The Engineer reserves the right to make any reasonable change in the location of fittings prior to
fixing. All connections and appurtenances, shown in the various diagrams, shall be included in the finished job.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to coordinate with all other agencies, for proper and adequate
installation clearances.
3 SHOP DRAWINGS
The contract drawings shall serve as guidelines for general layout of the piping and various items of equipment.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed shop drawings of all items, setting drawings,
clearance drawings, etc.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that all deviations from drawings and specifications, shall be
specifically noted on the drawings and brought to the attention of the Architects/Consultants, otherwise approval
shall be automatically voided.
4 TRENCH LINES AND LEVELS
The Contractor shall check, dimension at the building site and establish lines and levels for the work specified.
All inverts, slopes and manhole elevations shall be established by instruments, working from an established
datum point. Elevation markers and lines shall be provided so that slopes and elevations can be checked.
Established grid and area lines shall be used for location of trenches in relation to building and boundaries.
Trenches shall be carried out to the true alignment and to required levels. No refilling will be allowed for the
purpose of making up the bed of trenches, but to make up the same with lean concrete mix 1:3:6.
Use of sight rails, boning rods shall be adopted during the whole process of excavation and laying of the pipes.
Sight rails shall be fixed at suitable intervals which shall not exceed twenty metres before the excavation is
begun. No extra charges will be paid for excess excavation.
Sufficient width shall be provided to the trenches to allow a space of 300mm on either side of the pipe to facilitate
laying of the drains and jointing, subject to a minimum of 900mm.
When the trenches are in deep or bad ground, the sides of the trenches shall be supported with suitable timbering.
All pipes, water mains, or gas mains telephones and cables etc met within the course of excavation, shall be
carefully protected and supported without any extra charges.
5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

Excavation and backfilling shall be carried out conforming to specification for earthwork. Perform all necessary
excavation and backfill required for installation of plumbing work, excavation shall conform to the limits indicated
on the drawings.
6 STONEWARE PIPES, BENDS, JUNCTIONS, JOINTING & TESTING
All stoneware pipes, bends, junctions, gully traps, intercepting traps shall be salt glazed inside and outside and
shall fulfill the conditions of IS:651-1965 and shall be of Perfect Potteries, Kashimira, Burn & Company, Navroji
Vakil, Rajura or approved equivalent make.
Acid resisting stoneware pipes, bends, junctions, gully traps, etc shall be of the approved make or equivalent.
The pipes shall be hard, sound, truly circular in cross section, perfectly straight, free from all flaws and
projections.
Before being laid, the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned specially from the inside. Cracked or chipped pipes shall
not be used on the work.
Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement shall first be placed round the spigot of each pipe and the
spigot then be placed well home into the socket of the pipe previously laid. The pipe shall then be adjusted and
fixed in the correct position and the gasket caulked tightly home so as to fill more than 1/4 of the total depth
(12mm in depth) of the socket.
The remaining space in the socket shall then be tightly and completely filled with cement mortar composed of
one part of cement and one part of sand, and shall be neatly levelled off, outside the socket of the pipe at an
angle of 45 degrees. A wooden caulking tool shall be used for forcing the mortar home into the socket. The
inside of each pipe shall than be carefully wiped with a mop or scraper, sufficiently long to pass two joints from
the end of each pipe and any projecting or extra cement shall be removed to leave the inside of the pipe clean
as the work proceeds. All the joints shall be kept moist either by means of wet hessian bags to protect them
from the sun or wind. All pipes entering manholes shall be set in cement mortar to effect a complete watertight
junction.
All round the pipe, there shall be a joint of cement mortar 12mm thick between it and the bricks. The end of all
pipes shall be properly built in and neatly finished off with cement mortar with the manhole/ancillary structure.
After sufficient interval has been allowed for the joints to set and before filling the trench, the joints of the pipes
and drains shall be proved water tight by filling the pipe with water to a level above the top of the highest pipe
in the length to be tested, closing the ends of the sections and maintaining the water level for a period of one
hour with a waterhead of 2.5m as per IS:4127. The drop in water level is not to be more than 2 litres per cm of
diameter per kilometre during a period of 10 minutes.
All such testings shall be done wholly at the Contractor's expense, inclusive of apparatus, provision of water etc
and the rate covers all the above work including c.c. beddings etc.
Any leakage or excessive sweating from a particular pipe shall be made good by cutting out the pipe and redoing
and retesting the same at the contractor's own cost. Any leakage or excessive sweating from a joint may be
allowed to be rectified by embedding the joint with M15/10 concrete 150mm thick all around and retesting the
same at the contractor's own cost.
The pipes shall be laid to the alignment and gradient shown on the plan. Unless otherwise specified the maximum
permissible slopes to the various diameters of pipes are as follows :
100mm dia pipe ...... 1 in 40

150mm dia pipe ...... 1 in 80
200mm dia pipe ...... 1 in 100
Unless otherwise specified the joints of pipes shall be laid on a bed of plain cement concrete M15/10 and minimum
150mm thick and shall be protected by providing haunching upto half the diameter of the pipes. The width of
the concrete bed for various diameters shall be as follows :
100mm dia pipe ...... 400mm wide

For the remaining length of pipe, a 150mm thick murrum bedding, well compacted, shall be provided.
The backfilling material shall be got approved before the commencement of backfilling in the trenches. All backfill
material shall be free from cinders, ashes, slag, refuse, rubbish, vegetable or organic material. The backfilling
materials shall be packed in an approved manner around and over the pipe and compacted in layers not more
than 300mm thick.
7 CONCRETE HUME PIPE DRAINS, LAYING, JOINTING & TESTING
Cement concrete pipes where called for on the drawings, shall be centrifugally spun reinforced cement concrete
pipes of an approved manufacture. Pipes shall be true, perfectly sound, free from cracks, cylindrical, straight
with a uniform bore throughout. Cracked or warped pipes with uneven texture shall not be used. Pipes shall be
'Hume' pipes or equivalent. These pipes shall conform to IS:458. The number of tests and the number of
samples to be selected at random and the acceptability criteria shall be as per IS:458.
The pipe shall be straight and free from cracks excepting craze cracks. The ends of the pipe shall be square to
their longitudinal axis, so that when placed in a straight line in the trench no opening between ends in contact
shall exceed 3mm from 150mm including and upto 600mm and 6mm in pipes larger than 600mm dia.
The outside and inside surface of the pipes shall be smooth dense and hard, and shall not be coated with cement
wash or other preparation. The pipes shall be free from local dents and bulges greater than 3mm in depth and
extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the thickness of the barrel.
The pipes shall be transported, stacked, handled, laid in trenches in such a manner as to prevent damage to
pipes. The pipes shall be inspected before being laid in trenches. Minor damage may be allowed to be repaired
at site but such repairs shall be carried out only by the pipe manufacturer or under his supervision.
The pipes, before being laid, shall be brushed throughout to remove any soil or stone, that may have accumulated
therein, the inside of the socket and outside of the spigot being carefully cleaned. For small pipes, they should
be tilted up, to remove any accumulations.
Trenches for pipes shall be of sufficient width so as to provide a free working space on each side of pipeline.
The pipes shall then be carefully laid in position to true line and level.
Concrete Pipe shall be jointed as described in IS:783. After setting out the pipes, the collar shall be centred over
the joint and filled in with tarred gasket till sufficient space is left on either side of the collar to receive the mortar.
This space shall then be filled with 1:2 cement mortar (1 cement : 2 washed coarse sand) and caulked by means
of proper tools. All joints shall be finished at an angle of 45 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the pipe on both
sides of the collar. The joint shall be cured for at least 7 days with wet hessian bags.
Testing : Testing of pipes shall be carried out as per IS:783 and any leakage observed in the pipe or joint shall
be made good by the contractor.
Backfilling of trenches shall be carried out in accordance with IS:783 latest. In cases where the foundation
conditions are unusual, the pipe shall be enclosed around in 15cm thick M15/10 cement concrete.
8 SOIL PIPING FROM MANHOLE TO MANHOLE UPTO THE EQUALIZATION TANK
Supply and laying of underground sewerage piping as manufactured by Supreme / Astral in SDR series, The pipes
shall be self socketed and joined with the help of solvent cement, SN 8, SDR 34, stiffness class 8 kN/m2.
The pipe should be properly laid in the trenches. The trench width shall be 600 mm. the trench should be
provided with proper bedding layer which should be free from stones and other such objects.
The piping should be covered with soft sand and back filling to protect the pipe.
Wherever the piping crosses the road, it should be covered with RCC 150 mm thick around the pipe.
CAST IRON PIPES & FITTINGS (CI S/S - CI/DF) TO IS:1536 LA OR A CLASS FOR LAYING, JOINTING
AND TESTING AND FOR APPLICATION IN WATER MAIN - EMBEDDED IN FOUNDATIONS OTHROUGH
BUILDINGS SUCH AS RAIN WATER LINES (WITHIN BUILDING) - OR DRAIN LINES (HORIZONTAL
RUNS IN PLENUM/OR BELOW THE SLAB IN HORIZONTAL POSITION) :
All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be truly cylindrical of the clear internal dia. specified, of a uniform thickness,
smooth and with strong and deep sockets free from flaws, air bubbles, cracks and sand- holes and other defects.
They shall not be brittle but shall allow for ready cutting, chipping and drilling. The fittings shall be of medium
type cast iron conforming to the latest version of IS:1537.
The pipes shall be lowered in the trench by means of suitable pulley blocks, shear legs, chain, ropes, etc. After
lowering the pipes they shall be arranged to coincide the centre line with the centre line of alignment. The pipes
shall be laid in position, socket end of all pipes facing the direction of flow. The spigot shall be carefully centred
in the socket by one or more laps of hemp or spun yarn only being forced into the socket to leave the required
depth for lead. When the spigot is shoved home, the yarning material shall be driven tightly inside base or hub
of the socket. The proper depth of each joint shall be tested before running the lead by passing completely round
it a wooden gauge, notched on to the corrected depth of lead. The pipe shall be carefully packed underneath so
that they shall bear properly through their whole length. The lead shall be rendered thoroughly, fluid at each
joint and shall be filled in one pouring. The lead used shall be pig lead with 99.8% purity and shall conform to
IS:782 latest.
Quantity of lead for joint shall conform to IS:3114 latest and shall be as given below.
Nominal Size Lead/Joint Depth of lead

of Pipe joint
mm Kg mm
80 1.8 45
100 2.2 45
125 2.6 45
150 3.4 50
200 5.0 50
250 6.1 50
300 7.2 55
The joint runner shall fit snugly against face of the socket and the outside of the pipe shall be dammed with the
clay to form a pouring lip to provide for filling the joint flush with the face and top of the socket.
After the joints have been run they must be thoroughly caulked until they are perfectly watertight. Caulking of
joints will be done after a convenient length of pipe has been laid and leaded. The leading ring shall first be
removed and any lead outside the socket shall be removed with a flat chisel and the joint caulked round three
times with caulking tools of increasing thickness and a hammer of 2 to 3 kg weight. Lead joints shall not be
covered till the pipe lines are tested under pressure, but the rest of the pipe lines may be covered to prevent
expansion and contraction due to variation in temperature.
When it is inconvenient to use molten lead for joints, with prior approval they may be made with lead wool
inserted in strings not less than 6mm thick and thoroughly caulked. The quantity of lead wool spun yarn for
different diameter of pipes shall conform to IS:3114 latest.
The lead joints shall be tested to a pressure of 11 kg/cm2 minimum or such head as otherwise specified after
being caulked and should any leakage occur, the leaking joints shall be remade and section retested at
Contractor's own expanse until satisfactory results are obtained.
Water Pressure Mains : Shall conform to IS:1536-1967 Class LA as specified in the schedule. They shall be laid,
jointed, and tested along with the CI Pipes as described in the specification for CI S/S pipes.
Flanged Pressure Mains : Flanged joints to be made by inserting rubber inserts and bolting up evenly on all sides.
A thin fibre of lead wool shall be used in making the joints watertight where facing of the pipes is not true.
The packing used should be of rubber insertion cloth three-ply and of approved thickness between 1.5mm to
3mm. The packing should be of the full diameter of the flange with proper pipe hole and bolt hole neat and even
at both the inner and outer edges.
Where the flange is not fully faced, the packing may be of the dimension of the facing strip only. Its proper
placing should be tested before another pipe is joined on.
After each section of the pipeline has been completed it shall be tested for water tightness before being covered.
This can be done by closing each end by means of a valve of blank flange or plug and filling the pipe with water.
The pressure should then be raised by means of a small hand operated pump till it registers 50% above the
highest working pressure in the section and the test pressure should be ascertained by means of appreciable
gradient, the test should be carried out at the lower end of the section with an air vent at outer end. Any leaking
joints should be made good and the above test reapplied until no further leaks are apparent. CI or MS puddle
pipe/CI air vents with mosquito proof nettings are to be provided as shown in drawings.
9 SOIL, WASTE, RAIN-WATER, VENT AND ANTI-SIPHONAGE PIPES & FITTINGS

All soil, waste and anti-siphonage pipes and fittings used within sunken floor areas or within Plumbing Shafts
vertical run, shall be sand cast iron socket and spigot conforming to IS:1729. All cast iron pipes and fittings shall
be of the best approved Indian make of soil variety preferably of spun quality and hot dipped in Dr Angus Smith
Solution and free from flaws, air bubbles, cracks, sand-holes and other defects truly cylindrical and in uniform
thickness. They shall not be brittle but shall allow for heavy cutting, chipping and drilling, and shall not be less
than 5mm thick and of the diameter mentioned in the schedule of quantities and shall be of the largest length
available and shall be fixed against the wall on special 'U' clamps - 25mm wide, 3mm thick and hot dip galvanised
by means of round-headed flat nail of 75mm long on brick wall. In case of hollow block wall - 50mm x 50mm x
75mm long wooden gutties soaked in solignum, should be first fixed and then flat nails should be based and nails
painted with two coats of paint of approved quality and colour.
Unless otherwise specified, jointing shall be carried out with molten lead. The spigot of the pipe must be forced
well home into its socket and must be entered, so that the joint may be of even thickness all round. At least one
complete lap of clean white hemp spun yarn shall be drawn into the bottom of the socket without being forced
through the joint. As many laps as may be needed to leave the space of not less than 25mm for the lead shall
then be poured into the joint and caulked tight. The joints shall then be run with molten lead in sufficient quantity
so that after being caulked solid, the lead may project 3mm beyond the face of the socket against the outside of
the spigot but must be flush with the outside edge of the socket. Clean outs at the head of CI S/S horizontal
pipes running under the floor shall be of Cast Brass screwed in type. Floor and wall cleanouts shall be of cast
brass screwed type. The connecting pieces shall of GI threaded to suit the clean out with lead caulked joint.
Inspection chambers, gully traps, etc. within the building shall be of approved pattern cast iron with bolts, nuts
to close the cover, all to be fabricated as per actual requirement.
Supports, pedestals, and base for inspection chambers, gully traps and pipes shall be in M-15/20 cement concrete
mix. Pipe sleeves and inserts, etc. through RCC walls either external or internal shall be of CI or MS provided
with water bar flange.
During installation open pipes shall be plugged with wood cut to required shape and shall be maintained free
from dirt.
GI waste pipes and fittings shall be of 'C' class I.T.C. or equivalent with GI unions, tail, piece, reducers and
connections to be provided between joints to either lead or CI pipes.
Unless otherwise specified, the sizes of branch waste pipes for different fittings shall be as follows :
Lavatory Basin - 32mm dia

Urinal - 40mm dia
Sink - 40mm dia
Nahani trap - 50mm dia
Special floor trap - 75mm dia or 100mm as required with
bolted aluminium grating
in 25mm x 25mm MS angle.
W.C. pan connectors shall be to suit the requirements as per drawing, with 40mm vent horn for connection to
the anti-siphonage pipe with pan connector of CI or lead.
Connection to the sewage or storm water collection sumps to be perfectly watertight and as specified in the
drawing.

Rainwater lead flashing shall be of 150 x 100mm or 230 x 150mm with CI dome shape grating and extension
piece.
All rainwater pipes and fittings shall be CI pipe spigot & socket conforming to IS:1230-1979 or equivalent. This
shall apply to pipe outside buildings or within the building or separate shafts.
The floor traps (nahani traps) for toilet blocks shall be cast iron with CP brass grating, bolted down design.
Where toilet slabs are sunk, the floor trap shall be of 100mm x 75mm heavy type CI 'P' trap, with CP brass
grating, bolted down design.
Bathroom CP grating shall be of bolted down design out of heavy cast brass with the chromium plating of the
best approved standard.
Cast iron grating shall be flat with perfect edge of the best quality procurable of the specified width and thickness
and in the available lengths.
Spigotted and socketed 80mm, 100mm & 150mm CI pipes shall be of heavy pattern for the portion below the
floor and embedded and laid over 150mm cement concrete M15/20, the width of the concrete being :
80mm dia - 320mm wide

The pipes shall be laid to a slope and connected to the drain. On no account should lime or lime concrete come
in direct contact with pipe.
10 GI PIPES & FITTINGS
The materials for pipe (galvanised) shall conform to IS:1239 (Part I) and for pipe fitting it shall conform to
IS:1239 (Part II).
Wrought Iron or mild steel pipes shall be galvanised inside and outside treated and fixed in accordance with the
Municipal requirements. The joints shall be distributed in strict conformity with Municipal regulations and in
consultation with Hydraulic Engineer's department. They shall be secured clear of the wall surface by means of
GI clamps at suitable intervals. All control valves, stop cocks, ball valves, bib-cocks shall be of the best approved
quality procurable, heavy cast of drawn brass. All branches shall have individual control arrangement with fullway
(peet) valves, to enable regulation and cut off as required. They shall be of best Indian manufacture, specified
in the Schedule of Quantities and of Municipal tested stampings and bear ISI markings.
Laying & Fixing : Where pipes have to be cut or rethreaded, ends shall be carefully filed out so that no obstruction
to bore is offered. In joining the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed ends of the pipes shall be rubbed
over with white zinc and a few turns of teflon tape wrapped round the screwed end of the pipe which shall then
be screwed home in the socket with a pipe wrench. Care must be taken that all pipes and fittings are kept at all
times free from dust and dirt during fixing.
Adequate numbers of unions shall be provided on all pipes and near each valve, stopcocks, check valves etc. as
directed by engineers.
Internal work : For internal work GI pipes and fittings outside the walls shall be fixed either visible by means of
standard pattern holder bat clamps, keeping the pipes clear of the plastered wall by 12mm for cold water pipe
and 40mm for hot water pipe. Wherever indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Engineer, chasing of
walls shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal or as directed by the Architects. All embedded cold water pipes
are to be covered with bituminous polyethylene wrapping or hessian cloth dipped in bitumen or equivalent

approved by the Hydraulic department of the Municipal Corporation. All embedded hot water pipes are to be
painted with at least three coats of bituminous anti-corrosive paint and coated and wrapped as above and then
wrapped with three ply asbestos fibre, mineral wool, glass wool or premoulded thermocole or equivalent wrapped
tightly round the pipe.
External Work : For external work, GI pipes and fittings shall be laid in trenches. They should be wrapped, with
bituminous polythene wrapping or hessian cloth wrapped in bitumen or equivalent approved by the Engineer.
The width of the trench shall be of minimum width required for working. The pipes laid underground shall not
be less than 600mm from the ground level. The work of excavation and refilling shall be done in accordance
with the general specification for earth work.
Testing : All GI pipes and fittings are to be tested to a pressure of 11 kg per sq cm for 2 hours to ensure that
pipes have proper threads and that proper materials (such as white zinc and hemp) have been used in jointing.
All leaky joints must be made leak proof by tightening or redoing at Contractor's expense. All water fittings and
brass fittings shall be fixed in the pipeline in a workmanlike manner. All joints shall be tested to a pressure of
11 kg/cm2 unless otherwise specified. The defective fittings and the joints shall be repaired, redone and replaced.
Wherever a GI pipe crosses a floor then a CI sleeve with 12mm all round clearance and projecting by 75mm
above and below the floor should be provided. On no account should lime or lime concrete come in direct contact
with CI pipe and fittings.
11 LEAD PIPES
Lead pipes shall be of solid drawn lead, the size mentioned being their internal diameter and shall conform to
the requirements of Indian Standard specification.
The weight for the various bores shall be as follows :
100mm dia 11.4 Kg/m ) For soil, waste, anti-
75mm dia 8.5 " ) siphonage and vent
65mm dia 7.2 " )
50mm dia 6.0 " )
40mm dia 4.5 " )
40mm dia 6.0 " ) For flushing and

32mm dia 4.5 " ) washing pipes
12mm dia 1.5 " )
25mm dia 6.2 " ) Supply and

20mm dia 4.5 " ) Distribution pipes
12mm dia 3.0 " )
The joints between the lead pipes and other fittings shall be made with brass thimbles and tailpiece and joining
shall be with wiped solder joints.
Lead Traps
40mm dia ................ 3.5 kg/piece
50mm dia ................ 4.0 kg/piece
75mm dia ................ 5.0 kg/piece

12 INSPECTION CHAMBERS, MANHOLES, GULLY TRAPS, INTERCEPTING CHAMBERS, DROP CHAMBERS

ETC:
GENERAL : Construction of manholes, inspection chambers shall conform to IS:4111 (Part 1 to IV)
INSPECTION CHAMBERS : Unless otherwise specified, inspection chambers of required depth shall be provided
on all external drains, at all change of direction of the drain and where branch drain meets the main drain. They
shall be of rectangular shape where depth does not exceed 900mm and shall have a clear opening of 900 x
450mm or as specified shall be constructed of 230mm thick brick in 1:5 c.m.
CIRCULAR MANHOLES & DROP MANHOLES : The internal diameter of manhole for different depth shall be as
given below :
a) For Depths above 0.9m and upto 1.65m = 900mm dia

b) For Depths above 1.65m and upto 2.30m = 1200mm dia
c) For Depths above 2.30m and upto 9.0m = 1500mm dia
d) For Depths above 9.0m and upto 14.0m = 1800mm dia
Access shaft shall have a minimum internal dia of 750mm and shall be suitably corbelled to provide easy access
to step irons or ladders with manhole.
In all chambers, a semicircular channel of diameter equal to that of pipe line shall be provided at the bottom to
required slope, above the horizontal diameter the sides shall be extended vertically to the same level as the
growth of the outgoing pipe and the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The branch channel shall also be
similarly constructed and at the junction with main channel and appropriate fall suitably rounded off in
the direction of flow in the main channel shall be given.
For all manholes over 0.8m depth, cast iron rungs conforming to IS:5455 shall be provided. The top rung shall
be 450mm below the manhole cover and the lowest not more than 300mm above the benching. Vertical spacing
to be not more than 300mm. They may be set staggered, if required into two vertical runs which may be 380mm
apart horizontally. Manhole covers and frames shall conform to the requirements of IS:1726 (Part I to VII) -
Specification for cast iron manhole covers & frames or IS:12592-1988 - Part I : Specification for precast concrete
manhole covers and frames, as specified.
Excavation : Excavation shall be true to dimension and levels. The cost of excavation shall include the cost of
shoring, strutting, dewatering etc wherever required.
Bed Concrete : Unless otherwise specified the bed concrete shall be of concrete Mix M15/20.
The thickness of concrete bed shall be as given below :
For depth upto 900mm 150mm

For depth from 900 to 1,650mm 200mm
For depth from 1,650mm to 2,300mm 225mm
For depth beyond 2,300mm 300mm
Brickwork : All brickwork shall be with first class bricks in 1:5 cement mortar, thickness shall be as specified and
in no case shall it be less than 230mm for depth upto 1650mm, 345mm thick for depth below 1650mm and upto

2300mm, 450mm thick for depth below 2300mm and upto 3000mm. Actual thickness of deeper manholes shall
be based on structural requirements.
Benching and Channel : These shall be done in M15/10 concrete trowelled and finished smooth with a coat of
neat cement to obtain a hard impervious finish.
Plaster Works : The inside and the outside surface of brickwork shall be plastered with 20mm thick 1:3 cement
plaster and finished smooth with a coat of neat cement.
Manhole Covers & Frames : Manhole covers shall conform to IS:1726 (Part 1 to 7) or IS:12592-1988 Part I, as
specified. The frames shall be firmly embedded in 100mm thick M20/20 concrete coping on the
manhole/inspection chambers. The manhole cover shall be sealed by means of thick grease.
The top level of the manhole shall be in line with the finished ground level. However, if required and the finished
ground level is not ascertained during construction of the manhole, the contractor shall temporarily fix the
manhole cover till such time the final/paved ground level is established, or temporarily cover the built up manhole
at no extra cost to owner. In case of any damage to the covers due to traffic or any other reasons during the
course of the project or in the maintenance period, attributed to the negligence of the contractor, the same shall
be replaced immediately by the contractor at his own cost. The frame and the cover shall be painted with Black
Bitumen Anticorrosive paint.
Drop Connections : In case the difference in invert levels between main drain and branch line require a drop
more than 600mm, a drop connection shall be provided generally as described below.
Cast iron or stoneware four way junction shall be fixed in position, at right angles to the drop pipe, at the level
where branch pipe enters the manhole provided suitable height of vertical drop pipe terminating into a plain
bend, duly benched into the cement concrete M20/20. Access for cleaning the bend should be provided at
finished ground level. The vertical drop pipe shall be encased in half brick wall all round & plastered externally
with c.m. 1:3.
GULLY TRAP
Gully traps in all waste pipes shall be of best quality 230 x 150mm or 150 x 100mm as indicated and laid on
150mm thick M15/20 cement bedding. They should be enclosed in half brick thick wall with cement mortar and
with cement plaster forming a hopper on top of trap and inspection chamber with full size 230 x 300mm cast
iron frame and cover or open grating 300 x 300mm as required.
There shall be 75mm dia vent pipes at the sewer trap chamber and 75mm ventilating pipe at the manhole at the
head of the drain to be routed as specified in schematic drawing or as directed at site.
Exposed traps for all wash basin and urinal or sinks like bottle or 'P' trap in public areas shall be of chromium
plated cast brass.
Traps installed in floors with cast iron pipe shall be of the same quality and grade of the pipe; the size of outlet
shall correspond to the socket of the pipe receiving it.
MS Grease traps at inlet of Kitchen and/or dish washer area shall be provided. Grease trap to conform to details
given in drawing/schedule. Alternatively a baffle wall type chamber shall be provided after these wastes for

collection of oil and grit, as specified in the drawing. These will generally be provided for large kitchens and
canteens, etc.
An intercepting trap of required size shall be installed in the last inspection chamber prior to connecting with the
public sewer or disposal system. This chamber shall be above 2000mm within the boundary of the property.
Rate : The rate shall be per number and include the cost of excavation, backfilling, disposing of surplus earth
within 500m radius, M15/20 concrete, M20/10 concrete coping, benching, brick masonry, plastering, manhole
cover and frames of specified weight, rung, etc including finishing the junction of pipe in the manhole. For
manholes and inspection chamber the rate will be per number upto specified depth and extra over per additional
metre depth over the specified depth.
13 SANITARY FITTINGS
All sanitary fittings shall be as specified in Schedule of Quantities and approved by the Engineer. The items for
fixtures shall be complete including all accessories, as specified in the item including fixing screws, nuts and bolts
etc. The price should include all taxes, duties, insurance loading and transport charges upto delivery at site.
European Type Water Closet with Low Down Flushing Tank
The water closets shall conform to IS:771 and shall be of the best quality approved by the Engineer. all closets
shall be provided with flushing rims of the same materials and in one piece with the bowls. The closets shall be
strong and firm and shall be such as to have minimum of fouling surface. They shall be made of non-absorbent
materials, with durable glazed finish.
The seat and the cover shall be of best bakelite of approved quality, hinged and fixed to the closet itself. 6 Nos
rubber bushing of approved quality shall be fixed to the bakelite seats.
The flushing cisterns conforming to IS:774 shall be of best quality with chromium plated handles, approved by
the Engineer. The overflow pipes from the cisterns shall discharge into open space provided for the purpose. CP
flush bend, CP angle stop cock, CP connector, etc shall also be provided for the cistern.
Indian Type WC pan with P or S Trap
The pans shall be white glazed made of best non-absorbent materials and of Hindustan Sanitaryware or other
approved make and shall conform to IS:771. 100mm dia P or S Traps shall be with or without vent horn.
The flushing cisterns shall be of approved quality and will conform to IS:774. They shall be fixed to the walls by
means of CI brackets. The cisterns and the brackets shall be painted with three coats of oil paint of approved
quality and colour.
The cisterns shall be provided with pulling chains 32mm lead pipes connecting the cisterns and WC pans and
12mm dia WS feed pipes and overflow pipes with mosquito-proof couplings etc. including stop cocks.
Urinals
Urinals shall conform to IS:771 and shall be of approved make and unless otherwise specified they shall be of
large flat-back type. Automatic cistern conforms to IS:2326 complete with metal siphons, CI Brackets, with

15mm dia spreader with 15mm dia CP brass stop cock and GI inlet connection etc. shall be provided at the
following rate :
5 Litre Capacity one for three Urinals with 25mm dia flush pipe.
5 Litre Capacity one for four Urinals with 32mm dia flush pipe.
Where specified CP cast brass bottle trap shall be fixed with all necessary connections. Approved type of divisional
panel as specified shall be provided between Urinals.
For non-automatic cisterns, 5/10/15 litre capacity cisterns will be provided for a set of one/two/three urinals
respectively or as specified in the schedule of quantities. 100mm dia half round white glazed urinal channel shall
be provided wherever specified separately in schedule of quantities.
Wash Basins
Wash basins shall be of approved make conforming to IS:771 and of the size specified and shall be fixed on a CI
bracket. 32mm dia waste coupling, rubber plug with CP brass ball chain. 15mm dia Bilmat make or other
approved make hot and cold mixer taps as specified, etc. complete shall be provided.
32mm dia CP brass bottle trap with CP pipe to wall along with wall flange etc of approved make shall be provided
for wash basin.
Stainless Steel Sinks
Shall be of approved make and size and thickness. It shall either be set in masonry as specified or fixed on a CI
bracket fixed to wall. Where drain board is specified, the same shall be provided with grooves and a proper slope
to drain the water.
40mm dia CP brass bottle trap with pipe to wall & wall flange shall be provided for each sink.
The Contractor shall get the samples of the fittings approved from the Engineer before ordering the same.
14 ANGERS & SUPPORTS
Where specified proper solid angle iron/channel section, supports for all pipes complete with clamps shall be
provided. Wherever insulations come, wooden guide to support pipe on the angle iron hangers/supports shall
be provided. In general where a bunch of pipes run, as far as possible M S plate inserts are to be provided in
the beams/slabs to facilitate welding of angle iron supports. For attachment in concrete, 'Dash' fasteners or
Anchor plug type inserts or equivalent shall be used. Provide hangers within 3 feet of all changes in direction of
mains and a minimum of three hangers per expansion bend wherever shown in drawing. Provide all additional
structural steel angles, channels or other members not specifically shown but are required for proper support.
Where necessary additional hangers shall be provided to arrest water hammers or hydraulic resonance with
proper rubber paddings.
Space hangers, as noted below, except on all soil pipe which shall have a hanger of multiple fittings, sufficient
hangers shall be provided to maintain proper slope without slagging, in case of angle suspended line, the following
is suggested :
A Pipe Sizes Hanger Rod Dia

20mm through 50mm 10mm
65mm through 125mm 12mm
150mm and over 16mm
B Pipe Sizes Spacing of Supports

12mm to 20mm 1500mm apart
25mm to 40mm 1800mm apart
50mm and above 1800mm apart as per IS
Floor stands, wall brackets of masonry piers, etc. may be provided for all lines running near the floor or near
walls. Pipelines, near concrete or masonry walls may be higher level than pipe. Hanging of any pipe from
another is prohibited.
Hangers
Clevis or sand type hangers shall be provided. Hot water piping is to be provided with suspended supports as
far as possible. Note that strap hangers are not permitted and clamps should be of removable type.
Insulated Hot Water Piping
A 38mm thick timber support for direct support of hot water line is required. Timber supports are to rest on
brackets.
15 VALVES AND PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges shall have not less than 115mm dia 35mm gas threads, brass body, siphon and gauge cock of
10mm size. Dial ranges shall be adequate for the pressure encountered as specified.
Provide valves on branch pipe connection to mains and at connections to equipment where indicated. All valves
are to be located for easy access and are to be full bore of pipe connected together. Support all valves wherever
necessary. Valves are to be as per IS:780 (Class I) for CI Sluice valve and to IS:778 for G M Valves and tested
and approved by Bombay Municipal Corporation.
Valves Schedules
v.Type Size Rating Ends Materials
Water, Oil air, Gate 65mm & 20 kg/cm2 Screwed Bronze

steam (low under
pressure)
Water Gate 75mm & over 20 kg/cm2 Flanged CI body bronze trim
Gas Gate 65mm & 40 kg/cm2 Flanged Bronze/SS spindle

under & trim
Water, Oil air, gas Globe & angle 65mm & 20 kg/cm2 Screwed Bronze
steam (low under
pressure)
Water Globa & angle 65mm & over 20 kg/cm2 Flanged Iron body Bronze
trim.

v.Type Size Rating Ends Materials
Water Horizon-tal & 65mm & 20 kg/cm2 Flanged Bronze.

vertical check under
Water Horizon-tal & 65 mm & 20 kg/cm2 Flanged Iron body Bronze

vertical check over trim.
All globe & check valves shall have working parts suitable for hot and cold water, oil or gas as required. Valves
shall be tagged with permanent label under hand wheel indicating type of duty.
All valves over 150mm dia in equipment rooms located over 2.0 metre above floor shall be provided with chain
wheels with chains extending upto 2.0 metre above floor.
Ball Valve :
The ball valve shall be of high pressure or low pressure class and shall be of sizes as specified.
The nominal size of a ball valve shall be that corresponding to the size of the pipe to which it is fixed. The ball
valve shall be of brass or gun metal as specified, and the float of copper sheet. The minimum thickness of copper
sheet used for making the float shall be 0.45mm for float upto 115mm dia. and 0.55mm for float exceeding
115mm dia. The float shall be spherical in shape. The jointing of the float shall be made by efficiently burnished,
lapped and soldered seam or by brazing. Plastic floats may also be used if specified.
The body of the high pressure ball valve when assembled in working conditions with the float immersed to not
more than half of its volume shall remain closed against a test pressure of 10.5 kg/sq.cm. and low pressure valve
against a test pressure of 3.5 kg/sq.cm.
The ball valve shall generally conform to IS:1703 - 1962. The weight of ball cock and the size of ball be as per
table given below
Both low pressure and high pressure ball valves are designed for use on mains having pressures of 17.5 kg/sq.cm.
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Dia (mm) Total Wt. Total Wt.
H.P. L.P.
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
15 - 524 gms 481 gms
20 - 986 gms 867 gms
25 - 1549 gms 1411 gms
32 - 2120 gms 1873 gms
40 - 2646 gms 2303 gms
50 - 4454 gms 3959 gms
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Cocks
Angle pattern stopcocks of approved manufacture are to be provided at each hot and cold water inlet.
Foot Valves
Provide cast iron body with brass disc and strainers of approved quality, on suction sides of pumps having
negative suction.
Strainers

CI pot strainer with GM mesh screen in perforated brass strainer body of approved manufacture are to be provided
before valves. Provide each strainer with a cock for blowing down. Screening area of strainer shall be minimum
of 5 times more than pipe area with 0.8mm maximum size holes.
Air-Eliminators
Provide air vents, consisting of gate valve, where shown. Each valve outlet shall be piped to nearby drain.
16 CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING AND MAKING GOOD
Cutting, Patching and Repairing required for the proper installation and completion of the work, specified in each
division, including chasing, plastering, masonry work, concrete work, etc., and making good shall be carried out
by the contractor wherever required. Holes which are cut oversize shall be refilled, so that a tight fit is obtained
around the pipe or other object passing through. Any damage to waterproofed location should not be patched
up, without rectification by the waterproofing agency (specialist contractor) to ensure his guarantee.
17 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Keep all pipe and conduit openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent the entrance of foreign matter.
Protect all piping, conduit, fixtures, equipment or apparatus. Any such item damaged prior to final completion
of work shall be restored to its original conditions or replaced at no expense to the Owner.
Accessibility
The installation of valves, thermometers, clean out fittings and other indicating equipment or specifications
requiring frequent reading, adjustments, inspections, repairs, removal or replacement, shall be conveniently and
necessarily located with reference to the finished building.
Thermometers and gauges shall be installed so as to be easily read from the floor.
18 INSERTS & SLEEVES
a) General
Layout work in advance of placing of concrete slabs or construction of walls, furnish and set inserts and
sleeves necessary to complete the work. Cost of cutting or patching made necessary as a result of this
operation shall be at no expense to the Owner. Openings shall be as per Engineers' approval.
b) Pipe Sleeves
1) Wall Sleeves
CI wall sleeves in cold store and black pipe 'A' class to be inside flush with wall on both sides.
Sleeves shall be large enough in diameter to provide 25-30mm clearance around pipe for
insulation. Exterior wall sleeves for cable entry/pipe/earthing strips, etc., shall be cast iron,
flush with wall on both sides. Sleeves shall be large enough to allow caulking from outside lead
wool.

2) Floor Sleeves
Interior floor sleeves for general areas shall be of CI extending 50mm more above finished floor. All pipes passing
through sleeves shall be caulked with asbestos rope and finished with cement mortar. Insulated pipes shall have
insulation butted to floor sleeve and sealed with insulating cement on both sides.
Exception
Chilled water or refrigerated suction piping insulated shall be run continuous through the sleeves and caulked.
Interior floor sleeves for kitchen areas shall be CI steel pipe extending 50mm above finished floor. Caulking shall
be the same for general areas.
Floor on grade sleeves shall be the same as exterior wall sleeves, caulked and made watertight.
19 EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
All equipment shall meet the detailed requirements of the contract documents and it shall be suitable for the
installation shown. The Engineer shall be notified of any shortcomings found during the tendering period.
Equipment not meeting all requirements shall not be acceptable, even though specified by name along with other
manufacturers.
Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, the product of the same manufacture
shall be used. All materials and equipment, new and free from defects and of size, make, type and quality herein
specified or approved by the Architect. All shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
20 CLEANING, OPERATION & TESTS
Plumbing Equipment Fixtures, Piping etc., shall be free of stampings, markings (except those required by codes),
iron cuttings and other foreign materials.
Hot, cold and drinking water systems shall be cleaned thoroughly, filled and flushed with water.
The entire mechanical apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectional noise or vibration.
Water Test
All pipes & fittings and appliances shall be inspected before delivery at site and tested, if required, at
manufacturer's factory.
After laying and jointing, the length to be tested shall be suitably plugged at ends. The pipe shall be slowly and
carefully charged with water, so that all air is expelled from the pipe by providing one 25mm inlet with a stop
cover allowed to stand full of water. The test pressure shall be 11 kg/cm2, (or as specified for different categories
of pipes) applied by means of manually operated test pump (or other approved pump). The pressure shall be
maintained for 2 hours. The pressure drop at the end of the period shall not be less than 0.5 kg/cm2. Pressure
gauges shall be accurate and recalibrated before testing. As leakage observed shall be rectified as directed.
The Contractor shall supply all equipment, labour, and materials required for testing and maintain a test register.
Smoke Test
Fill traps with water, then introduce into system a pungent thick smoke produced by one or more smoke
machines. When smoke appears at stacks on the roof, plug stacks and allow pressure of 25mm water column

to build up in system. Maintain pressure for 15 minutes before inspection starts. The inspection shall be tight
at all joints.
Test all down spouts or rain headers and their branches within the building by water as described for the above
soil, waste and vent system.
21 PAINTING
Equipment
After complete installation and testing all the equipment including mounting frames, etc., equipment shall be
painted with three coats of paint, as per colour code required by the consultants or as directed by the client.
Piping
After all the piping has been installed and tested, the piping shall be given one coat of anti-corrosive paint
followed by two coats of paint as per colour code required by the client or as directed by the consultants.
NOTE: (i) All black pipes to be painted fully; GI pipes shall have 150mm wide band at 1500mm intervals.
(ii) Final coat to be given after one month of running of pipe.
22 EQUIPMENT & PIPING IDENTIFICATION
Pipe Markers
Each piping system shall be provided with a name plate properly clamped or stenciled. Letters are to be 75mm
if 3 metre above the floor and 50mm minimum if below 3 metre height. Name plates on parallel groups of pipes
etc. shall be neatly lined up. Wording of lettering shall correspond to the equipment designations used in piping
legend and shall be as approved. Name plate to be of GI sheets (gauge 20 SWG on 25mm x 25mm angle)
secured on to sheet metal and angle iron to be welded on main pipe. In case of insulated pipe, the 25mm x
25mm angle bracket should be projecting beyond insulation thickness.
Valve Register
To be submitted in six copies along with location and identification number in final drawing to be furnished by
contractor.
23 MODE OF MEASUREMENT
General : All the rates for all the items shall include the cost of material, labour, equipment, tools, etc. testing
the pipes, getting permission and completion certificates from relevant authorities etc. and including all taxes
etc. complete.
All drain pipes shall be measured in linear lengths along the centre line of the drainage line laid. Deductions shall
be made for chambers and fitting lengths etc. The rate shall include all work as specified in the respective items.
Stoneware or cast iron gully traps, bends, junctions, sewer traps, etc shall be measured in numbers as above.
All cast iron spigot and socket or flanged pipes shall be measured in linear lengths along the centre line completed.
No deductions shall be made for fitting lengths. The rate shall include for all types of bends, Y-pieces, clamps,
painting, etc complete, lead caulking or nut and bolt joints, etc., complete as specified in the respective items.
Same rate shall be applicable for pipes of same size and material laid in building at any level or floor.

Cast iron fittings such as spigot and socket fittings, flanged fittings shall be measured in numbers.
The rock cutting shall be measured in m3 of the stacks of excavated rock, the deduction for voids being 40% of
the stack measurement. Only the rock which is removed by chiselling or blasting etc., shall be measured for this
item of work. Boulders shall not be considered as rock. The excavated rock will become the owner's property.
All cast iron pipes, such as soil, waste, vent and rainwater shall be measured in linear lengths along the centre
line, as completed, including length over fittings. The rates shall include all joints and clamps etc. as specified
in the respective items.
Unless otherwise specified plain cement concrete for supports and for bedding etc., shall be measured in cubic
metre of the completed work carried out as per instructions; cutouts of shuttering shall be inclusive of the rate
quoted.
Inspection chambers shall be measured in numbers, complete as specified in the respective items in the schedule
of quantities and specifications for sanitary installation work.
Lead pipes shall be measured in linear length and shall be of weights as per specifications of the respective item
in installation work. The rates shall include making of necessary offsets and bends, etc. The brass fittings with
solder joints shall be paid extra in number.
All sanitary fittings and fixtures shall be measured in numbers and the rate shall include all the work specified in
the respective item.
All GI pipes shall be measured in linear lengths along the centre line of the pipe, including GI fittings. The rate
for pipeline up to and including 65mm dia shall be inclusive of all GI fittings. In the case of pipeline of dia above
65mm, GI fittings will be measured in numbers, after deducting the lengths over fittings from the linear
measurements. The rate in all cases will be inclusive of all work as specified in the respective items.
All peet valves, ball valves, non-return valves, sluice valves, etc., shall be measured in numbers after excluding
them from linear measurement.
The diameters of pipes and fittings mentioned in the specifications are of the inside diameter in all cases, unless
otherwise stated.
In case of fittings of CI, GI or stoneware of unequal bore, the largest bore shall be measured.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR UNPLASTICIZED PVC PIPES
The pipe should be given adequate support at all times. Pipes should be stored on a reasonably flat surface free
from stones and sharp projections so that the pipe is supported throughout its length. In storage , pipe racks
should be avoided. Pipe should not be stacked in large pipes , especially under warm temperature conditions as
the bottom pipes may distort , thus giving rise to difficulty in jointing. Socket and spigot pipes should be stacked
in layers with sockets placed at alternate ends of the stacks to avoid lopsided stacks.
It is recommended not to store pipe inside another pipe
On no account should pipes be stored in a stressed or bent condition or near the sources of heat.
Pipes should not be stacked more than 1.5 m high. Pipes of different sizes and classes should be stacked
separately.
The ends of pipe should be protected from abrasion particularly those specially prepared for jointing either spigot
or socket solvent welded joints or shouldered for use with couplings.

In tropical conditions pipes should be stored in shade. In very cold weather the impact strength of PVC is reduced
making it brittle and more care in handling shall be exercised in wintry condition.
If due to unsatisfactory storage of handling a pipe becomes kinked, the damaged portion should be cut out
completely. Kinking is likely to occur only on very thin walled pipes.
SOLAR WATER HEATER
Solar water Heater with compressed PUF insulated storage tank, inner tank made of SUS 316L grade surgical
steel and strong polyster powder coated rust free metal frame and laminated outer tank, with all fasteners are
made of SUS 304 food grain for rust free and ISI marked. 1.5KW back-up heater with thermostat with high
quality tested and tough / Borosilicate Glass Tubes for a warranty period of 7 years from the date of
commissioning.
Technical specifications :-
Vacuum tube outer diameter 47mm
Vacuum tube inner diameter 37mm
Tube length 1800mm
Tank diameter 480mm
Tank volume 100liters to 250 liters
Temperature 70 degree C to 85 degree C
Tank Insulation PUF 55mm to 80mm(Polyurethane foaming )
Stand frame Aluminum Polyester Powder coated
Method of Welding Seam less and Plasma Welding Technology
Type of fasteners Stainless steel
Type of Grommets Silicon rubbers
Type of circulation Thermo siphon
Electrical Back Up 1.5 KW each (0pional)
Type of inlet feeding Using gravity feeding tank for non pressure low mixing of hot and cold
Water and long life of inner tank.
Piping:
Concealed piping for water supply:
The concealed piping shall be CPVC, SDR-11 confirming to ASTM D 2846 composite.
The pipe rating shall be 28 kg/sq cm at 23o C and 7 kg/sq cm at 65o C.

The runs of the pipe shall be straight and pipes should not run diagonally. Proper elbows, tees at turnings shall
be used.
No joint in the pipeline shall be provided except fittings i.e. elbow tees and nipples etc.
Piping shall be laid along the walls only. No pipe will be laid under the floor.
The chases shall be made good in cement mortar 1: 6.
External piping for water supply:
Cold Water Piping-
All the piping running externally on the external walls and on the roof shall be UPVC , Schedule 80 heavy pressure
pipes, schedule 80, conforming to ASTM - D - 1785. Fittings shall conform to ASTM - D - 2466 for schedule 40
and ASTM - D - 2467 for Schedule 80.
Hot Water Piping-

All the piping running externally on externally wall and on the roof shall be CPVC SDR 11, Schedule 80 heavy
pressure pipes, conforming to ASTM-D-2467 for schedule 80. The pipe rating shall be 28 kg/sqcm at 230C and 7
kg/sq.cm. at 650C.
The pipes shall run straight and not diagonally. Proper bend, elbows, Tees shall be used wherever required.
Pipe cutting should be done in proper way such that joints are properly sealed at the base of the fitting socket.
Proper burr inside and outside should be removed and the end should be chamfered by around 10 - 15o C.
Surface dirt and grease should be removed, if any.
The layer of solvent cement should be applied to the outside of pipe and inside of fittings and the pipe should be
inserted in the fittings till it contacts the socket bottom and then pipe should be turned a bit and hold the fitting
and pipe until the pipe does not back out. Excessive cement from the exterior should be removed.
Piping should be supported properly. For schedule 40 pipes the support spacing shall be 750 mm up to the size
of 32 dia. and 1000 mm for sizes including and above 40 mm dia.
For schedule 80 pipes, the support spacing shall be 750 mm up to the size of 20 mm dia pipes and 1000 mm for
the pipes above and including 25 mm dia.
Vertical piping shall be done with bat clamps ensuring that the distance of minimum 20 mm is left between the
pipes and the wall.
Horizontal pipes should be supported on concrete pedestals of 200 x 100 x 200mm high in size with semicircular
top and at distance as specified above.
Insulation for hot water piping:
Supply, fixing of 9 mm thick closed cell Nitrile rubber foam insulation in tubular form as manufactured by
Armaflex. The insulation shall be covered with canvas cloth and applied with UV paint.
Underground piping for water supply:
All the piping running underground shall be UPVC heavy pressure pipes, schedule 80 and conforming to ASTM –
D- 1785.
All the piping below ground shall be laid in trenches. The trench bottom should be smooth, free from rocks and
debris, continuous and provide uniform support. The bottom of the trench shall be compacted properly. The pipe
should have minimum cover of 400 mm. While crossing the road, proper sleeve should be provided so that in no
case piping will have to bare the load.
After proper lying of piping in the trench, proper soft sand should surround the pipe and back filling should be
done to fill the trench completely in uniform layers to prevent unfilled spaces and voids.
Internal drainage piping:
Internal piping up to and including 50 dia. shall be UPVC self fit, heavy class piping conforming to IS 4985 –
2000. The fittings for these pipes shall be molded fittings conforming to IS 7834 – 1987.
Pipe cutting should be done in proper way such that joints are properly sealed at the base of the fitting socket.
Proper burr inside and outside should be removed and the end should be chamfered by around 10 to 15o C.
Surface dirt and grease should be removed if any.
The layer of solvent cement should be applied to the outside of pipe and inside of fittings and the pipe should be
inserted in the fittings till it contacts the socket bottom and then pipe should be turned a bit and hold the fitting
and pipe until the pipe does not back out. Excessive cement from the exterior should be removed.
Internal piping above 50 dia. shall be self fit SWR PVC piping conforming to IS 13592 and SWR moulded fittings
conforming to IS 14735 -1999.

The method of installation is similar to above piping.
External drainage piping:
Running from outside of toilet to up to Gully traps (Waste) and up to manholes (Soil)
All the piping coming out from inside of the toilets and running vertically downwards and connecting Gully traps
(waste lines) and Man holes (Soil lines) shall be Ring fit SWR (Type B) piping conforming to IS 13592 with
moulded fittings conforming to IS 14735 -1999.
The method of installation is similar to that of internal piping.
The support shall be provided after every meter with the help of SRW clamps and GI screws.
From Gully traps to Manholes
Same as above.
Soil piping from manhole to manhole up to the Septic Tank.
Supply and laying of underground sewerage piping as manufactured by Supreme / Astral in SDR series, The pipes
shall be self socketed and joined with the help of solvent cement, SN 8, SDR 34, stiffness class 8 kN/m2.
The pipe should be properly laid in the trenches. The trench width shall be 600 mm. the trench should be provided
with proper bedding layer which should be free from stones and other such objects.
The piping should be covered with soft sand and back filling to protect the pipe.
Wherever the piping crosses the road, it should be covered with RCC 150 mm thick around the pipe.
VALVES:
Ball Valves:
Valves shall be Zalloto/eq. brand. Valves shall have pressure rating of 20 bars. Ball valves shall be used at the
inlet of each flat. The material of construction shall be brass.
PUMP SETS:
Transfer Pump: (To transfer water from UG to OH tank)
Transfer pump set shall be centrifugal multistage pump shall comprising of 2 pumps (1 Working + 1 standby).
Each pump to have the capacity of 5 l/s @ 30 head, The complete set shall be with nrv, isolation valves at the
discharge, control panel with auto changeover controller, time delay relay and dry run protection. The pump shall
stop once the tanks are full & float valve is horizontal position. Pump shall restart after 4 hrs based on time delay
relay.
Cutter sewage pump:
Cutter sewage dewatering pump set comprising of 2 pumps (1 working + 1 standby). Each pump to have the
capacity of 4 l/s @ 20 head, The complete set shall be with vrv,isolation valve a the discharge, control panel with
auto changeover controller, time delay relay and dry run protection.
Manhole chambers:
The manhole chambers shall be of sizes 600 mm x 600 mm clear as indicated in the drawing. The depth of the
manholes shall be as indicated in the site drainage plan. The manhole covers shall be in medium duty. The
thickness of the walls shall be 150 mm duly plastered inside with 12 mm thick plaster in proportion of 1: 3.
The channels and the benching shall be done in cement concrete 1: 2: 4 and rendered smooth with neat cement.
Gully traps:

The gully traps shall be of sizes 300 x 300 mm clear as indicated in the drawing. The gully traps shall conform to
IS: 651. These shall be free from visible defects, such as fire cracks or hair cracks. Each trap shall have CI grating
of square size corresponding to the size of inlet of gully trap. It will also have cover of 300 x 300 mm. The cover
weight and frame weight shall not be less then 7.0 kg.
Filtration system:
Filtration system shall have the capacity of 10000 LPH.The system shall comprise of feed pump,activated carbon
filter, sand pressure filter, chlorine dozin etc.

SECTION – P
ROAD WORK - SOIL STABILISATION - WBM ROAD - BITUMINOUS ROAD & BLOCK PAVING
1 Soil Stabilisation :
1.1 Lime stabilised Soil Sub base Soil - (For Clayey Soil) Materials : Unless otherwise specified the soil
used for stabilisation shall be the local soil.
1.2 Lime : Lime shall be commercial dry lime slaked at site or pre-slaked lime delivered to site in suitable
packing, and shall have the following specifications :
Properties Lime
Quick Lime Hydrated Lime
CaO Ca (OH)2
Calcium & Magnesium

oxides not less than 92% not less than 95%
Carbon dioxide
- at kiln not more than 3% not more than 5%
- elsewhere not more than 10% not more than 7%
1.3 The quantity of lime to be added as percentage by weight of the dry soil shall be as specified.
1. 4 The work of stabilisation shall not be carried out when the air temperature in the shade is less than
10 degrees C.
1.5 The soil before adding stabilizer shall be brought to required grade, level and shall be pulverised. The
pulveriser shall when tested for sieve analysis, 100% by weight, shall pass through 25 mm sieve and
60% by weight, shall pass through 4.75 sieve size.
1.6 Construction with manual means :
The soil shall first be freed of all vegetation and all other deleterious matter and shall be excavated
to the specified depth (varying between 150 mm to 200 mm). The soil shall then be pulverised by
means of crowbars, pickaxes or other approved means. Water in requisite quantities may be sprinkled
on the soil for aiding pulverisation.
1.7 Lime, in the specified quantity (varies from 2% to 10% by weight) shall be mixed with prepared
material either in slurry manner or dry state as directed by the Engineer.
The distance to which lime may be spared ahead of the mixing operation shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Mixing and remixing operations shall be continued until uniform distribution of lime in the mixture is
ensured. Non uniformity of colour reaction, when treated material is tested with standard
phenolphthalein alcohol indicator, shall be considered evidence of inadequate mixing.
1.8 Prior to rolling only optimum quality of water determined by tests or as instructed by the Engineer
shall be added.

1.9 Immediately after spreading, grading and levelling the mixed material, compaction shall be carried
out with 8 to 10 tonne rollers or other equivalent method. Rolling shall be started from outer edges
and progress towards the centre except at the super elevated portion when it shall commence at the
inner edge and progress towards the outer edge. During rolling the surface shall be checked for grade
and camber and any irregularities corrected by loosening the material and removing or adding fresh
material. Compaction shall continue until the density achieved is at least 100% of the maximum dry
density for the material.
1.10 Compaction shall be completed within three hours of its mixing.
The sub base shall be suitable cured for 7 days.
2 Cement Stabilised Soil
Soil shall be the local soil. The material shall be well graded and shall have grading finer than the
following grading :
Sieve designation Percent by weight

Passing the sieve
50.00 mm 100
40.00 mm 95
20.00 mm 45
10.00 mm 35
4.75 mm 25
600.00 micron 8
300.00 micron 5
75.00 micron 0
The soil shall have a liquid limit not greater than 45 % and a plastic limit not greater than 20%.
2.2 Cement shall conform to the requirement of IS:269, 455 or 1489.
2.3 Pulverising of soil, mixing with cement stabiliser, spreading, compacting with roller and curing shall
be as per specification for Lime stabilisation.
2.4 Mode of measurement :
Stabilised soil shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic metres.
3 Granular Sub base
3.1 Unless otherwise specified the thickness shall be a minimum of

150 mm consolidated thickness. If a thickness more than 150 mm is specified this shall be done in
two or more layers.
3.2 The materials unless otherwise specified, shall be crushed stone. Alternative materials if approved
shall be crushed concrete, laterite, kankar, gravel, murrum, sand. The mixed material shall be free
from organic and other deleterious materials and shall conform to one of the three gradings given
below:
Sieve Percentage by weight passing the sieve
designation
Grading 1 Grading 2 Grading 3
80.00 mm 100 100 100

63.00 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100
4.75 mm 35-70 40-90 50-100
75.00 micron 0-20 0-25 0-30
CBR Value (MIN) 30% 25% 20%
3.3 Prior to laying of sub base, the sub grade already finished shall be lightly sprinkled with water and
rolled with one pass of 8-10 tonne roller.
3.4 The sub base materials shall be spread on the prepared sub grade with the help of drag spreader,
motor grader or other approved means. The thickness of loose layers shall be so regulated that the
consolidated thickness does not exceed 150 mm.
3.5 Moisture content shall be checked and adjusted by sprinkling water so that it is from 1% above to 2%
below optimum moisture content. Immediately after, rolling with 8-10 tonne roller shall be
commenced, commencing from edge and proceeding towards centre, except in super elevated portion
where it shall be commenced from inner and and progress towards outer edge. Each pass of the
roller shall uniformly overlap not less than on third of the track made in preceding pass. During
rolling, the grade and camber shall be checked and defects if any shall be rectified by adding or
removing fresh materials.
3.6 Rolling shall be continued till the density is at least 100% of the maximum dry density for the material
determined as per IS:2720. All loose, segregated or otherwise defective area shall be made good to
the full thickness of layer and recompacted.
3.7 Granular sub base shall be measured as finished work in position in square metres for the specified
thickness.
4 Water Bound Macadam Sub Base/base Course :
4.1 Coarse aggregates shall be either crushed or broken stone and shall have, when tested as per IS:2386
Part I & Part IV.
(a) Los Angeles Abrasion value not more than 50% or Aggregates Impact Value not more than
40% and
(b) Flakiness index not more than 15% max

and shall conform to one of the gradings given below :
Grading Size Sieve designation in mm % by weight Remarks

No Range passing the sieve
1 90 mm 100 100 Suitable for 100 mm
to 80 65-85 compacted
40 mm 63 25-60 thickness
40 0-15
20 0-5
2 63 mm 80 100 Suitable for 75 mm
to 63 90-100 to 100 mm
40 mm 50 35-70 compacted thickness
40 0-15
20 0-5
3 50 mm 63 100
Grading Size Sieve designation in mm % by weight Remarks
No Range passing the sieve
to 50 95-100
20 mm 40 35-70
20 0-10
10 0-5
4.2 Screenings to fill the voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally consist of the same material as the
coarse aggregate or non plastic materials such as murrum whose liquid limit and plasticity index is
below 20 and 6 respectively and fraction passing 75 micron does not exceed 10%.
4.3 As far as possible screening shall conform to the gradings given below:
Grading Size of Sieve % by wt
Classification screening designation passing the Remarks
sieve
A 12.5 mm 12.50 mm 100 For use where
10.00 mm 90-100 coarse grading
4.75 mm 10-30 type 1 or 2 is
150 micron 0-8 used
B 10.0 mm 10.0 mm 100 For use where
4.75 mm 85-100 coarse grading
150 micron 10-30 type 2 or 3 are
used
4.4 Binding material shall be a suitable material approved by the Engineer and shall have a plasticity index
less than 6.
4.5 Sub grade/Sub base shall be checked for camber, levels, etc and made free and dust. One pass of
rolling with B-10 tonne roller shall be given, and if required, accompanied with light sprinkling of water.
If the sub grade is an existing water bound macadam road, 50 mm x 50 mm furrows shall be cut at an
angle or 45 degrees to the centre line of the road at 1metre intervals before laying the coarse
aggregates.
4.6 On the prepared sub grade a 25 mm course of screening Grade B shall be spread before the application
of coarse aggregates.
4.7 The coarse aggregates shall be uniformly spread in such a manner that the thickness of the compacted
layer obtained is as specified.
The surface of the aggregates spread shall be carefully checked with templates and all high and low
spots remedied. No segregation of large or fine particles shall be allowed and the coarse aggregates
as spread shall be of uniform gradation.
4.8 Immediately after the coarse aggregates are spread, rolling shall be started with the 8-10 tonne
tandem or vibratory rollers of approved type.
The rolling shall begin from the edge and gradually progress towards centre, uniformly lapping
preceding tracks by at least one half width.
After partial compaction, screening to completely fill the interstices shall be applied gradually over the
surface. Dry rolling with the roller shall be carried out accompanied by mechanical or hand brooming
so as to force the screening into the interstices and this operation shall be continued till no more
screenings can be forced into the voids of the coarse aggregate.

After application of screening and dry rolling is completed, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with
water, swept and rolled, accompanied by brooming. Wherever required, additional screening shall be
spared and rolled.
The approved binding materials shall be applied in two or more thin layers at a slow and uniform rate.
After each application the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, the resulting slurry swept in
with hand or mechanical brooms to fill the voids properly, and rolled during which water may be applied
to the wheels of roller to wash down the binding materials sticking to them. These operations shall
continue until the resulting slurry after filling of voids, forms a wave ahead of the wheels of the moving
roller.
4.9 The rate for the water bound macadam road shall be measured as finished work in position in square
metres.
5 Bituminous Courses :
5.1 Bituminous Courses Shall Consist of Following Treatment :
1 Application of Primer Coats on WBM road or tack coat on existing Bitumen road.
2 Premixed bituminous materials which may be any of the following that may be specified.
(a) bituminous bond macadam
(b) carpet
(c) bituminous concrete
3 Seal coat where specified.
5.2 Bitumen used shall either be straight run bitumen, of grade 80/100, 60/70, 30/40, road tar RT4/RT5
cut back or emulsion and shall conform to IS:73, 215, 217 or 454 as applicable.
Bituminous bound macadam : 50 mm to 75 mm thickness as specified (applicable only for base course). The
coarse aggregates shall conform to the following requirements :
Sieve Size % passing sieve size mm

Base course compacted thickness
50 mm 75 mm
Grade I II I II
63.00 -- -- 100 100

50.00 100 100 -- 90-100
40.00 -- 90-100 35-70 35-65
25.00 35-70 50-80 -- 20-65
20.00 -- -- 0-15 --
12.00 0-15 10.30 -- 5-20
2.36 0-5 -- 0-5 --
0.075 0-3 0-5 0-3 0-5
Quantity required for
10 m2 area 0.6 m3 to 0.75 m3 0.9 m3 to 1.10 m3
5.4 The existing surface, prior to application, shall be cleaned and pot holes, if any, packed in an approved
manner.

5.5 A prime coat at the rate of 7.5 kg to 10.0 kg per 10 m2 on an existing WBM road or tack coast of 4.0
kg to 7.5 kg per 10 m2 shall be applied using approved bitumen binder.
5.6 Bitumen binder and aggregate of approved grading are separately heated to the specified temperatures
and are then placed in the mixer chosen for the job. The mixing shall be done till a homogeneous
mixing is obtained.
5.7 The mix, immediately after heating and mixing, is laid in the desired position and is spread to desired
thickness. Its profile shall be checked with template.
5.8 The rolling shall be done with 8 to 10 tonne roller commencing from the edges and progressing towards
the centre and overlapping half the width of preceding lap. The finished surface shall not show separate
lines or markings.
5.9 A variation of not more than 6 mm over a length of 3 metres shall be allowed.
5.10 Seal coat where specified shall be applied as specified below :

The binder (bitumen) or approved quality shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 7 kg per 10 m2 of
the road surface, and along with it stone chippings of 6 mm size (i.e passing 10 mm sieve and retained
on 2.5 mm sieve) at the rate of 0.1 m3 per 10 m2 area. The layer is rolled to give a smooth finished
surface.
6 Premixed Carpet :
6.1 Premixed bitumen carpet thickness 20 to 25 mm as specified.
6.2 The bitumen binder of 80/100 grade or road tar RT-3 shall be used.
6.3 The aggregates shall be of 12 mm size i.e passing 20 mm sieve and retained on 10 mm sieve and 10
mm size (passing 12 mm sieve and retained on 6 mm sieve) and shall conform to the following
requirement :
os Angles Abrasion Value : 40% max.

Aggregate Impact Value : 30% max.
Flakiness Index : 25% max.
6.4 Filler shall be inert material such as stone dust, hydrated lime or cement or fly ash etc.
6.5 Suitable plant shall be used for mixing.
6.6 Preparation of surface shall be the same as described under bituminous macadam road.
6.7 Bitumen Prime Coat on WBM road at the rate of 7.5 kg to 10 Kg per 10 m2 Bitumen Tack Coat at the
rate of 6 kg to 7.5 kg per 10 m2 on the existing bitumen road shall be applied uniformly.
6.8 Premix is prepared in a mechanical mixer or other approved plant. The aggregate and the bitumen
are heated separately to the required temperature. After obtaining a homogeneous mix, the same is
spread on the prepared surface uniformly to the required thickness. The surface shall then be rolled
with a 8-10 tonne roller until there is no further movement of aggregates in the mix.

6.9 Seal Coat shall be applied as described under bituminous macadam road.
7 Bituminous Concrete :
7.1 The aggregate shall conform to the following grading :

Sieve Size mm % by weight passing
Limit - I Limit - II
20.00 -- 100
12.50 100 80-100
10.00 80-100 70-90
4.75 55-75 50-70
2.36 35-50 35-50
0.60 18-29 18-29
0.30 13-23 13-23
0.15 8-16 8-16
0.075 4-10 4-10
7.2 The exact quantity and the quality of bitumen binder shall be decided on Marshall test and shall be
approved by the Engineer.
7.3 Mineral filler shall be of approved quality.
7.4 The existing bituminous surface shall be cleaned of all dust. The pot holes if any shall be filled with
premix chipping and rolled.
7.5 Plant used for road shall be of approved make and shall be capable of hot mixing and spreading
uniformly and finishing the surface to produce a uniform level.
7.6 The surface then is rolled till complete compaction is obtained. The surface shall not be wavy.
8 Mode of Measurement and Payment :
Unless otherwise specified the rate quoted shall include the cost of preparing and rectifying the original surface,
applying primer or tack coat as specified, and providing and laying the bituminous course of approved type and
thickness specified, rolling and applying the seal coat specified complete.
The work shall be measured in position and shall be paid in square metres.
9 Concrete of Stone Block Payment :
9.1 Concrete blocks for the work unless otherwise specified, shall be of M-25/10 concrete mix, with water
cement ratio not greater than p.35 and cast to a specified shape and required thickness of (80 mm )
and vibrated and compacted thoroughly and cured for 14 days before they are used. The work of
mixing and concreting shall be carried out in accordance with the specification set out under Concrete.
9.2 Stone blocks, unless otherwise specified shall be 75 mm thick length and of uniform width as specified
and shall be of granite of basalt.
9.3 The sub base shall be cleaned of all dirt and pot holes if any shall be filled with stones and chips and
the whole surface shall be rolled with a 8-10 tonne roller.

9.4 The kerbs, as per specification either of concrete or of natural stone and of approved size shall be
embedded of fixed in M-15/20 concrete to a correct level and alignment prior to laying of blocks.
9.5 The sand used shall be washed sand containing not more than 3% silt and clay and with not more than
15% retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The sand used shall be of uniform size and moisture content.
9.6 The sand shall be spread uniformly between kerbs and screeded to obtained a compacted thickness of
50 mm. If required of wider roads, temporary screed rails shall be provided. A cambered screed box
shall be used to obtained the correct camber. There shall be a surcharge of sand to a depth of 5 mm
to 15 mm depending on the moisture content and depending on the extent to which the block will be
lower than the initial level when they are vibrated.
9.7 Each block shall be placed according to the pattern shown in the drawing and as directed by the
Engineer. The course shall start from a firm starting edge such as a row of concrete or stone blocks
or other approved edges. Transportation of blocks over the vibrated portion of blocks shall not be
allowed.
9.8 Each block shall be placed without disturbing the neighbouring blocks. The order of laying blocks shall
be such that it will not be necessary to force a block between those already laid.
9.9 Damaged blocks shall not be used for the work.
9.10 The blocks so laid shall fit closely together.
9.11 Around the edge of manhole or other opening, the block may be cut to suit the profile.
9.12 The blocks are vibrated with an approved plate vibrator which has an area between 0.2 to 0.3 square
metres and a centrifugal force of approximately one tonne. The vibrator should be guided over the
whole area and at least three passes of vibration shall be given to obtain the finished level. Vibration
shall not be carried out within one metre of unrestrained edge.
9.13 After initial vibration, sand shall be brushed over the surface of the blocks and shall be vibrated. At
least three passes of plate vibrator shall be given to completely interlock and fill the joints.
10 Mode of Measurement and Payment :
10.1 The rate shall include rolling the sub base, rectifying the pot holes, spreading sand, providing and
laying specified blocks, vibrating, and spreading and laying sand and revibrating.
10.2 The work shall be measured and paid in square metres for the specified thickness.
10.3 Kerb stone shall be measured and paid separately in running metres.
11 CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT UNDER CONTROLLED CONDITIONS
11.1 Materials
11.1.1 Cement
(a) Cement used on work shall be as per sub head cement concrete of-CPWD specifications- 2009 (Vol.-!).

11.1.2 Water : Water used on work shall conform to SH: cement concrete of CPWD, Specification 2009- Vol. I.
11.1.3 Coarse Aggregate : These shall be crushed or broken from hard stones obtained from approved quarry.
These shall be clean strong, durable of fairly cubical shape and free from soft, friable, thin elongated
and laminated disintegrated pieces. These shall also be free from dirt, organic deleterious and any
other foreign matter and adherent coatings and shall satisfy the physical requirements laid down in
para 11.19 under quality control.
11.1.4 Fine Aggregate: This shall be coarse sand conforming to CPWD Specification 2009 Vol. I.
11.1.5 Grading of Mixed Aggregates : The grading of all aggregates (coarse and fine aggregates) to be used in
the work shall be determined in the laboratory. The coarse and fine aggregates shall be mixed in
suitable proportions so that the grading of the mixed aggregates shall be in the range indicated in
Table 11.1
TABLE11.1
US. Sieve Size %age passing by weight

(IS 460)
45 mm 100
22.4 mm 55-60
11.2mm 45-50
5.6 mm 35-40
2.8 mm 30 - 35
1.4 mm 20-25
710 microns ' 15-20
355 microns 10-14
180 microns 2-5
11.2 Mix Design
11.2.1 The mix shall be approved by Engineer so as to obtain the following mean strength that exceeds the minimum
specified flexural strength by 1.64 times the designed standard deviation.
Minimum work's beam

flexural strength at 28 days = 300 kg/sqm. for M-30 or specified in item
Designed standard deviation = 80 kg/sqm. for M-30 or for specified grade(s) Design flexural strength
at 28 days = 300+60x1.64 = 398.4 kg/sqm. (f + 1.64 s )says 400 kg.
Water cement ratio by weight = 0.5
Minimum slump not more than 25 mm
11.2.2 For the purpose of tendering the contractor shall, base his rate on the assumption that the quantity of cement
used for one cum. of finished concrete shall be 340 kg. or M - 30, If the actual quantity of cement required to be used as
a result of the laboratory test is different from that assumed above, necessary adjustment in the cost due to short cement
used shall be made on the basis of issue rate of cement including storage charges plus 2.5% for handling charges.
However, under no circumstances the quantity of cement to be used shall either exceed 350 kg./cum or fall below 330
kg. per cum of finished concrete.

11.3 Statistical Field Check
11.3.1 Samples of concrete shall be taken at the mixer and works-beams, made, cured and tested in accordance with IS
1199 and IS 516.
11.3.2 When a mix is used for the first time, it is important to get a large number of results, as soon as possible, in order
to.establish the level of control and then suitability of the mix proportions. A sample of concrete shall be taken at random
on eight separate occasions during each of the first five days of using that mix. From each sample two beams shall be
made one for test at 7 days and the other for test at 28 days.
11.3.3 The work beam results shall be examined both individually and in consecutive (but not overlapping) sets of four,
for which the average and the range of each set is calculated. The mix proportions shall be modified to increase the
strength, if in the first ten consecutive (but not overlapping) sets any of the following conditions are not satisfied.
(I) Each sample has a test, strength not less than the minimum specified strength i.e. 30 kg/sq. cm. (or otherwise
specified in item).
OR
(II) (a) Not more than two individual results (Not more than one of first twenty) of the 40 beams tests shall fall below the
minimum work beam strength but they shall not be less than 80% of the specified beam strength of 30 kg./sq. cm (or
otherwise specified in item) or the minimum specified strength minus 1.35 times the standard deviation whichever is
greater,
(b) No value of the range in any set shall exceed 3 times the designed standard deviation.
(c) The average for all samples (10 sets) shall not be less than the minimum specified strength i.e. 30 kg/sq. cm (or
otherwise specified in item) plus 1.64 times the designed standard deviation 60 kg./sq.cm M-30.
11.3.4 If either of these conditions (11.3.3 I or 11.3.3 II) are not satisfied, the mix shall be modified and the procedure
described above shall be repeated till results satisfying the above criterias are obtained.
11.3.5 Subsequently samples shall be taken at the rate of one for every 30 cubic metre of concrete laid. Eight beam
specimen shall constitute one sample. A set of 4 specimen shall be tested after 7 days and another set of 4 specimen
shall be tested after 28 days. These test results shall be checked individually and in sets of four as the work progresses.
If at any stage it is found that either of conditions 16.43.4.3.I or 16.4.3.II are not satisfied, the overall average and the
standard deviation of the previous consecutive 40 beam test results including the non-complying set shall be calculated.
If the overall average strength minus 1.64 times the standard deviation is more than the specified beam strength (30
kgm/sq.cm) (or otherwise specified in item) the concrete shall be accepted. But if it is less than the concrete work
corresponding to these 40 beams tests shall be rejected and the mix proportion shall be modified forth with for further
work. The rejected work shall be replaced by the contractor immediately at his own cost and expense.
11.3.6 The statistical field checks described in 11.3.1 to 11.3.2 are meant to control the quality of concrete. The standard
of acceptance of concrete shall be governed by the provision of para 11.3.3 to 11.3.5.
11.4 Slump Test

The test shall be carried out as per IS 1199. A slump test shall be carried out at each mixer at least one in fifty batches
mixed or more frequently if directed by the Engineer-in--Charge. Any batch from which slump test is being made shall
not be transferred to the place of laying till the slump test has been completed. Not only the batch which gives a slumps
in excess of that specified shall be rejected but the concrete already laid immediately preceding the batch tested upto the
nearest last transverse joint may be rejected by the Engineer or his subordinate, if he is satisfied that such preceding
batches were substandard in this respect. The decision of the Engineer in this respect shall be final and binding on the
contractor. Such rejected concrete shall be removed by the contractor immediately and replaced with proper slump
concrete at his cost and expense.
11.5 Steel Forms
11.5.1 All side forms shall be of mild steel. The steel forms shall be of M.S. Channel sections and their depth shall be
equal to the thickness of the pavement.
11.5.2 The side forms shall have a length of at least 3.0 metres except on curves of less than 4.5 metres radius where
shorter lengths may be used. When set to grade and stacked in place the maximum deviation of the top surface of any
section from a straight line shall not exceed 3 mm. The method of connection between sections shall be such that the
joint formed shall be free from play or movement in any direction. The use of bent, twisted or worn out forms shall not
be permitted. At least three stake pockets for bracing pins or stakes shall be provided for each 3.0 M length of forms.
Bracing and supports must be ample to prevent the springing of forms under pressure of concrete or weight or thrust of
the machinery (like screed vibrator) operating on the forms. Support to the forms shall be sufficiently rigid to hold them
in position during the entire operation of laying and compacting and finishing and that they shall not at any time deviate
more than 3 mm from straight edge 3 metres in length. Forms which show a variation from the required rigidity of the
alignment and levels shown on the plans shall be reset or removed as directed. The length and number or pins or stakes
shall be such as to maintain the forms at the correct line and grade.
11.5.3 The supply of forms shall be sufficient to permit their remaining in place for at least 12 hrs. after the concrete has
been placed or longer, if in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary.
11.5.4 The top line of the forms is not to vary from the correct level or alignment and the levels and alignment of the
forms are to be checked and corrected as necessary immediately prior to the placing of concrete. The top edges and faces
of the forms are to be carefully cleaned and maintained in clean condition.
11.5.5 While removing the steel forms, care shall be taken to withdraw them gradually, any damage to the bull nosed
edges shall be made good while the concrete is still green.
11.5.6 Setting of Forms

(a) Setting of forms shall be according to the slab plan subject to the approval of Engineer and concreting shall not
commence until the setting of forms is approved.
(b) Forms shall be set for at least 50 metres in advance of the point where the concrete is being laid and shall not be
removed until at least 12 hrs. of placing of the concrete or longer if in the opinion of Engineer is necessary.
(c) After setting, the working faces shall be thoroughly oiled by using approved oil before concrete is placed against them.
(d) The pavement joints of overlay layer would overlap with the joints of underlay cement concrete.
11.6 Batching and Mixing

As detailed in SH: 5 of reinforced cement concrete work of CPWD specifications 2009.
11.7 Placing of Concrete .

As detailed in SH: 5 of reinforced cement concrete work of CPWD specifications 2009.
11.8 Compaction of Concrete

11.8.1 Compaction shall be carried out by electrical
ly (or) diesel operated needle and screed vibrators as stipulated hereafter. Needle vibrator should be used all over the
area for obtaining initial compaction of concrete. These should be of diameter not less than 4.5 cm. If the vibrator are
pneumatic the pressure must not be below 4 kg/sq.cm. If electrically operated, they should have a minimum frequency
of 3500 impulses per minute.
11.8.2 There should be at least three needle vibrators working in any bay. A vibrating screed consisting of a steel or
timber section, weighing not less than 15 kg. per metre with a tamping edge of not less than 7 cm width and having a
vibrator mounted thereon shall follow-needle vibrators to obtain full compaction. The face of the wooden tamping edge of
the screed shall be lined with M.S. Plate rigidly fixed by means of counter sunk screw, Where screed vibrators are used
for compaction, a standby unit shall always be maintained ready for use, should the other one go out of order. Where
electrically driven vibrators are employed, a standby diesel pneumatic unit shall be kept ready for use in case of power
failure. At the discretion of the Engineer, for compaction at edges and joints, vibrators may be supplemented by hand
tamping and rodding for securing satisfactory results. Under no circumstances honey combing of concrete at joints or
elsewhere shall be permitted.
11.8.3 When using screed vibrator for compaction it should hot be dragged over the concrete. During the initial passes it
shall be lifted to the adjacent forward position in short steps, subsequently, it shall be slowly slided over the surface with
its axis slightly tilted away from the direction of sliding and the operation repeated until a close, dense surface is obtained.
11.8.4 Concreting shall be carried out in one operation between the expansion joints and construction joints without any
break at the dummy joints.
11.8.5 Concrete shall be deposited on the base as near the joints as possible without touching them It shall then be
shoveled against the sides, maintaining equal pressure and deposited approx. 50 mm higher than the depth of the joints,
care being taken that it is worked well around the joints. The concrete shall not be dumped from the bucket directly upon
or against the joints.
11.8.6 Workmen shall not be allowed to walk on freshly laid concrete and proper cat walk shall be provided with
independent supports beyond concreting bays,
11.9 Finishing of Concrete

11.9.1 During compaction, any low or high spots shall be made up by adding or removing concrete. After longitudinal
floating has been completed but while concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be tested for trueness with a 3 m
straight edge. Any depressions or high spots showing departure from the true surface shall be immediately rectified. High
spots shall be cut down and refinished. Depressions shall be enlarged to about 8-10 cm and filled up with fresh concrete,
compacted and finished.
11.9.2 The straight edge testing the refloating is to continue until the entire surface:.
(a) is free from observable departure from the straight edge,
(b) conforms to the required levels and across section, and
(c) shall conform to the specified surface when the concrete has hardened.
11.9.3 The foregoing work is to be carried out while the concrete is still plastic and workable.
11.10 Belting
11.10.1 Just before concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with a two ply canvas belt not less than 20
cm wide and at least 1 metre longer than the width of the slab Hand belts shall have suitable handles to permit controlled
uniform manipulation. The belt shall be operated with short strokes transversed to the centre line of the pavement and
with rapid advance parallel to the centre line.
11.11 Brooming
11.11.1 After belting and as soon as the surplus water, if any, has risen to the surface, the pavement shall be given a
broom finish with an approved steel or fiber broom not less than 45 cm wide. The broom shall be pulled gently over the
surface of the pavement from edge to edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be perpendicular
to the centre line of the pavement and so executed that the corrugations formed shall be uniform in character and width
and not more than 1.5 mm deep.
11.11.2 Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such a stage that the surface is likely to be torn or
unduly roughened by the operation. The broomed surface shall be free from porous or rough spots, irregularities,
depressions, and small pockets such as may be caused by accidental disturbing of particles of coarse aggregates embodied
near the surface. The brooming shall be of uniform pattern all through.
11.11.3 Edging: After belting/brooming has been completed but before the initial setting of concrete, the edges of the
slab shall be carefully finished with an edger of 6 mm radius, and the pavement edges shall be left smooth and true to
line.
11.12 Honey.Combing
11.12.1 The side forms shall not be removed until 12 hours or such longer period as the Engineer may decide after the
laying of concrete.
11.12.2 As soon as the side forms am removed, any minor honey combed area shall be filled with mortar composed of
one part of cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Major honey combing areas or segregated concrete or other defective
work or areas damaged by removal of the forms or concrete damaged by rain or due to any other reason whatsoever
shall be considered as defective work and shall. be removed and replaced by the contractor at his own expense. The total
area of honey combed surface shall not exceed 4 per cent of the area of the slab side. However, no individual honeycomb
patch shall exceed 0.1 sqm. Engineer's decision as to whether the concrete is defective or not shall be final and binding.
11.13 Surface Accuracy

11.13.1 After the concrete has sufficiently hardened after about 12 hours and not later than 24 hours, the surface shall
be tested again for high spots. All high spots shall be marked and those exceeding 3 mm shall be ground down
immediately. Care shall be taken to see that the grinding does not in any way damage the concrete surface.
11.13.2 The final surface finish is to be such that when tested with a profilograh/roughness indicator/or a 3 metre long
straight edge or an equivalent mechanical unevenness indicator placed anywhere within the same or adjoining slab in any
direction on the surface, there shall be no variation greater than 3 mm.
11.13.3 If the surface Irregularity exceeding 3 mm still remains despite grinding as per para
the concrete shall be removed to its full depth. The area off concrete to be removed shall be complete slab between the
nearest joints where the defective slab is less than 4.5 metres from the expansion joint, the whole area upto the expansion
joint shall be removed to the full depth. The concrete so removed shall not be reused in the work. Fresh concrete shall be

laid in the manner already de scribed in above paras and shall again be subject to test for surface accuracy and other
quality control measures, nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
11.13.4 Every slab shall bear an impression not exceeding 3 mm in depth comprising the number allotted to the slab and
the date on which it is laid. This impression shall be formed by the contractor when the concrete is green so as to leave
permanent mark on setting.
11.13.5 initial Curing
11.13.5.1 Immediately after completion of the finishing operations, the surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered
with wetted burlap, cotton or jute mats. The mats used shall be of such length (or width) that as laid they shall extend at
least 45 cm beyond the edges of the slab. The mats shall be placed so that the entire surface and both edges of the slab
are completely covered. This covering shall be placed as soon as, in the judgment of the Engineer the concrete has set
sufficiently to prevent damage to the surface prior to being placed, the mats shall be thoroughly saturated with water and
shall be placed with the wettest side down. The mats shall be so placed and weighed down as to cause them to remain in
intimate contact with the surface covered, and the covering shall be maintained full wetted and in position for 24 hours
after the concrete has been placed or until the concrete is sufficiently hard to be walked on without suffering damage.
Water shall be gently sprayed so as to avoid damage to the fresh concrete. If it becomes necessary to remove a mat for
any reason, the concrete slab shall not be exposed for a period of more than half an hour.
11.13.5.2 Worn burlap or burlap with holes shall not be permitted. Burlap reclaimed from previous use other than curing
concrete shall be thoroughly washed prior to use for curing purposes. If burlap is obtained in strips, shall be laid to overlap
by at least 150 mm.
11.14 Burlap shall be placed from suitable bridges. Walking on freshly laid concrete to facilitate placing burlap shall not
be permitted.
11.15 Final Curing

11.15.1 Upon the removal of the burlaps, the slab shall be thoroughly wetted and then cured as follows:-
All joints shall be filled with filler in order to prevent the edges of joints from getting damaged and entry of clay materials
into the joints during final curing. Exposed edges of the slab shall be banked with a substantial berm of earth. Upon the
slab shall then be laid a system of transverse and longitudinal dykes of clay about 50 mm high immediately covered with
a blanket of sandy soil free from stories to prevent the drying up and cracking of clay. The rest of slab shall then be
covered with sufficient sandy soil so as to produce a blanket of earth not less than 40 mm deep after wetting. The earth
covering shall be thoroughly wetted while it is being placed on the surface and against the sides of the slab and kept
thoroughly saturated with water for 21 days and thoroughly wetted down during the morning of the 22nd day and shall
thereafter remain in place until the concrete has attained the required strength and permission is given by the Engineer.
Thereafter the covering shall be removed and the pavement cleaned and swept. If the earth covering becomes displaced
during the curing period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and resaturated.
11.15.2 Contractor shall appoint chowkidars at his expense to prevent workmen, cattle, etc., straying on the pavement
concrete.
11.15.3 Concrete shall not be subjected to any load or weight of any plant until at least 28 days after laying.
11.16 Construction Joints

11.16.1 Construction joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing and also at places where concreting is stopped due
to unforeseen circumstances. The joints shall be straight and vertical through the full thickness of the slab. While concrete
in adjacent bay is still green, flats of suitable size shall be drawn along the edge and a groove of size 10 mm x 25 mm
deep shall be neatly formed and finished. The edges of the groove shall be full nosed. After curing of concrete is complete,
this groove shall be-thoroughly cleaned' of all sand dust and shall be perfectly dried and filled with hot poured sealing
compound conforming to grade B of IS 1634. Before filling with sealing compound the faces of concrete of the joint shall
be coated with primer of approved brand to a depth of 25 mm at the rate of 2.6 liters per 10 square meters. Bitumen
emulsion shall not be used as primer.
11.17 Dummy Joints

11.17.1 The joints shall be 10 mm wide and shall extend vertically from the surface of the slab to a depth equal to 1/3rd
of the thickness of the slab but not less than 4 cm in any case. The joint may be formed by depressing into the soft but
compacted concrete a high tensile M.S. or other approved Tee of flat bar of depth not less than required depth of the joint
plus 25 mm. The bar used for forming the groove shall be coated with soft soap or other suitable lubricant to facilitate its
removal when the steel Tee or flat is removed joints shall be neatly formed with proper tools and mortar/fine material
from the slab itself. No additional cement mortar (rich or otherwise) shall be used.
11.17.2 Cutting or sawing by a saw mounted on a movable frame and driven mechanically shall also be permitted as a
method for making the joint. In this case the width may be reduced to 6 mm. any other method for making joints can be
followed with the prior approval of the Engineer.
11.17.3 In all cases, except where cutting is done with saw, the joint edges shall be bullnosed. Care should be taken to
see that the edges of the grooves are not damaged.
11.17.4 The grooves shall be filled with hot poured sealing compound conforming to Grade B of IS: 1834. Prior to filling
with sealing compound, the joints shall be cleaned by compressed air and primed with Shalijet primer or equivalent at the
rate specified in Para 18.37.16.1
11.17.5 All joints shall be sealed as soon as practicable after 28 days of casting of cc pavement. Joints shall be sealed
flush with the adjacent pavement surface in summer and 3-4 mm below finished concrete surface in winter. The pavement
shall be opened to traffic only after joint sealing over the entire pavement. To prevent tackiness or pickup under traffic,
the exposed surfaces of the sealing compound shall be dusted with hydrated lime, if directed by Engineer, for which
nothing extra shall be paid to the contractor.
11.17.6 In case of sudden rain or storm, the work can be concluded at the dummy joints but these will then be formed
as construction joints.
11.17.7 Before sealing of joints, it may be ensured that the groove extends fully across the bay between consecutive
longitudinal joints, in the case of transverse joints and is continuous in the case of longitudinal joints. Any concrete or
other foreign matter must be removed from the groove.
11.18 Concreting during Rains

11.18.1 To prevent damage to freshly laid concrete during monsoon, or sudden rains, the contractor shall provide an
adequate supply of tarpuolines or other water proof covering material. Any concrete damaged by rain shall be- removed
and replaced by the contractor at his own cost as directed by the Engineer.
11.19 Quality Control
The following quality control tests shall be carried out at frequencies specified against each as in Table 11.2
s. Test Test Frequency Acceptance
No. Method Criteria
1 2 3 4 5

(i) COARSE AGGREGATE
(a) Flakiness IS 2386 (Pt.l) Before approval of the quarry and at Not more than 15%
index. every subsequent change in the source
of supply and one test per 100 cum of
aggregates
(b) Impact IS 2386 (Pt.IV) -do- Not more than 30%

value.
(c) Los angles IS 2386 (Pt.IV) -do- Not more than 40%
abrasion
value.
(d) Deleterious IS 2386 (Pt ll) Before approval of the quarry As per table 1 of
materials. and at every subsequent change in the IS 383
source of supply
(e) Moisture content. IS 2386 (Pt III) Regularly as required subject to a min. -do-
one test per day
(ii) FINE AGGREGATES
(a) Silt content. CPWD specification's One test per 15cusn Not more than 8%
2009, Vol 1, SH:CC
(b) Gradation of sand IS 2386 (Pt.I) -do- Fineness modulus

between 2,5 to 3.9
(c) Deleterious IS 2386 (Pt.ll) Before approval 'of the quarry and at .' As per table-1 of IS 383
materials. every subsequent change in the source
of supply
(d) Moisture content. IS 2386 (Pt. lll) Regularly as required subject to a min.
2 test/day.
(iii) MIXED AGGREGATES
(a) Grading IS 2386 (Pt 1) 1 test per 15 cum As per para 11.1.5
1 2 3 4 5
(iv) Slump test IS 1199 At least once In 50 batches Not more than 25 mm
of concrete at each mixer or more frequently if
directed by the Engineer
(v) Flexural strength IS 516 One test of sample consisting of eight As per para 11.3.5
specimen for every 30 cum of concrete
(vi) Surface accuracy As prescribed Regularly As per para 11.13
11.20 Equipments
11.20.1 Equipments as per list at Appendix C shall be provided by the contractor in the field testing laboratory. Nothing
extra shall be paid to him on this account. Records as required shall be maintained at site. All tests details in support of
mix design shall be maintained as part of records of the contract and shall be signed both by the contractor and the
Engineer- in-Charge. The contractor shall provide all labour, materials and equipment required for all tests to be carried
out at his own cost.
11.20.2 The Engineer reserves the right to test any part of concrete laid regarding quality soundness, compactness,
thickness, strength and finish of the concrete, at any time before the expiry of the “Defect liability period" not withstanding
that necessary .tests had been carried out and found satisfactory at the time of execution.
11.20.3 All defective unsound sub-standard work and concrete of sub-standard strength and quality etc. as established
vide paras 11.3 shall be rejected and shall be replaced by the contractor at his own expense in the manner as detailed in
para 11.3. Where due to operational or any other reason such replacement does not become possible (decision of Engineer
in this, respect being final and binding on the contractor), the cost of removal and replacement of such rejected work
shall be recovered from the contractor whether such rejected work is subsequently replaced by the Government or not.
11.21 Defects Liability Period

11.21.1 This period shall be /reckoned in the case of this work as one year from the date of completion of work and jt
shall be the liability of the contractor to repair, strengthen or reconstruct any portion of the work which has shown damage
or any defect, arising out of any bad workmanship or defective material used in the work during this period. In the case
of this rectification not being commenced by the contractor within 7 days from the date of notice from the Engineer and
completed expeditiously the Engineer reserves the right to get the repair work executed at the risk and cost of the
contractor.
11.22 Measurements
11.22.1 For the purpose of ascertaining the quantity of concrete in the pavement, thickness shall be measured by means
of a scale correct to the nearest 2 mm. The thickness of the concrete pavement slabs shall be taken on either side of the
pavement at each dummy joint at four corners of the slab immediately after removal of the side forms. In case the
average thickness of the slab exceeds the specified thickness, payment shall be restricted to the specified thickness.
11.23.2 The dimensions of each slab of pavement shall be measured as follows to the nearest 5 mm.
(a) Length
(i) Between the end of a pavement to the centre line of the expansion joints.
(ii) Between the centre lines of consecutive expansion joints.
(b) Width
(i) Between the edge of a pavement and the centre line of the construction joints. (ii) Between the centre lines of
construction joints and expansion joints, (iii) Between the centre lines of consecutive construction joints.
Note : The quantity of concrete in the pavement slab shall be worked out by multiplying the area of the slab and its
average thickness or specified thickness whichever is less. No deduction shall be made for any joints in the concrete slab.
11.22.3 Measurements of concrete slabs shall be recorded jointly by the Engineer or his authorised subordinate and the
contractor or his authorised agent.
11.23 Rate
The rate of the item for concrete in pavement shall include the cost of all materials and labour including charges for
machinery tools & plants required in all the operations described above. The rate also includes all cost of setting up the
laboratory at site and carrying out the quality control measures/tests enumerated above by the contractor at his own cost
in the presence of Engineer or his authorized representative and submission off test results on completion of tests to the
Engineer thereof:
12 HARD CRETE
Hard crete of approved quality and brand to be used. It shall be mixed in ratio and method as recommended by
manufacturer and approved by Engineer in cement concrete for Saying in paramount. Quantity shall be measured in litre

used in cement concrete. Hardcrete to be brought in sealed container and proper record of quantity be maintained. Empty
containers of hardcrete shall not be removed from site with but prior permission of Engineer.
13 EXPANSION JOINT
13.0 Materials
Premolded Joint Filler in Expansion Joint: It shall conform to IS 1838 (Pt. 1). The thickness shall be 25 mm with tolerance
1.5 mm. and shall be of the maximum available standard length not less than one lane width. The filler board shall be
positioned vertically with the prefabricated joint assemblies along the line of the joint within tolerance of ± 10 mm from
the intended line of the joint. The depth of board shall be 25 mm less than thickness of slab within a tolerance of ± 3mm
so that the top of the board shall be below the surface or will not impead the passage of the finishing straight edge or
oscillating beam of the paving machine.
Bitumine Hot Sealing Compound: The joint sealing compound shall be fuel and heat resistant type complying to grade B
of IS 1834. It shall be capable off adhering to the concrete without cracking, spalling and disintegration.
14 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE
14.1 Expansion joints shall be provided as shown in the drawing and as per directions of Engineer. All joints shall be
constructed true to Sine with their faces perpendicular to the surface of the pavement. The joint shall be 20 mm wide.
The depth of the non-extruding filler pad shall be 25 mm less than the depth of the concrete slab.
14.2 Before the provision of expansion joint, the face of the already laid 'concrete slab shall be painted with primer at
the rate of 2.6 liters per 10 square metres. The expansion pad shall be properly cut to shape and shall then be placed, in
position abutting the painted face of the already laid concrete slab. The adjacent slab shall then be concreted. The face of
the pad' against which the new concrete slab is to be laid shall also be painted with primer before laying the concrete,
while concreting a neat groove of size 20 mm x 25 mm as per drawing shall be formed on top of the pad taking care that
the edges are absolutely straight and that the groove so made does not get filled with any material like concrete, mortar
and other rubbish.
14.3 Before the curing process is started, the top of expansion joint shall be filled with bitumen sand mixture in order to
ensure that no foreign material used in curing enters into the joint. This filling shall be removed before filling the joints
with sealing compound.
14.3.1 For sealing the joints following operations shall be carried out :—
(a) The joints are cleared of any foreign matter to the full depth upto the top of expansion pad with steel spatula.
(b) The joints are blown with compressed air.
(c) Cleaning is done with Kerosene oil.
(d) Priming is done with spray gun @ 2.6 liters per 10 sqm of the surface to be primed.
(e) The primer is allowed to dry completely before pouring the sealing compound.
(f) The sealing compound grade TV is heated to the required temperature ranging between 155 deg. C to 165 deg. C or
to the temperature range specified by the manufacturer Over heating shall be avoided. Pouring shall be done from vessel
with spout in such a manner that the material will not get spilled on the exposed surface of the concrete, any excess filler
on the surface of the pavement shall be removed immediately and the pavement surface cleaned.

(g) The filling shall be worked into the joints with hot flats to ensure escape of trapped air.
(h) The filling is then ironed with hot iron. It is recommended that while in summer the joints may be sealed flush with
the adjacent pavement surface, in winter the sealing compound may be filled to a depth 3-4 mm below the surface.
(i) The edges of the joints are then cut and trimmed to ensure neat and straight line finish.
(j) To prevent tackiness or pick up under traffic, the exposed surfaces of the sealing compound shall be dusted with
hydrated lime, if directed by Engineer (Nothing extra shall be paid for the same)
14.3.2 Measurement : The measurement of the specified depth of joint shall be recorded in metres correct to
two places of decimals.
SECTION – Q
ELECTRICAL WORKS
GENERAL AND TECHNICAL (ELECTRICAL WORKS)
1.1 Scope:
i) The general specification for electrical works (Internal) aims to lay down general guidelines to ensure safe, efficient,
reliable and economical use of electricity.
ii) While these Specifications serve as general guidelines, appropriate technical sanctioning authority can depart from such
guidelines to meet the particular requirements of any work or for other technical reasons.
iii) This Chapter covers the general and technical requirements applicable to works contract for execution of Internal &
External Electrical Installation works.
iv) Successful bidder will liaison with State Electricity Board to obtain power supply
v) Further all the liaison and co-ordination work with the Supply Authorities for obtaining electrical load sanction, obtaining
the released order from supply and other bodies like GSEB,Electrical Inspector, Goa Pollution Board, State Electricity
Board, PWD etc for Electrification,Fire Fighting and HVAC works. Or any other type of Electrical Panel room, including
submitting of all relevant Tests, Reports, Installation compliance, drawings etc. shall be done by the Contractor without
any Extra Cost. No Separate Amount towards the same will be paid. Employer shall arrange only for official payments
towards service connection charges for getting electric supply on produce of original receipt of same in name of employer
for reimbursement. On completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Client / Consultants
Certificates of final inspection and approval by the Local Electric Supply Authority.
vi) It is the responsibility of the contractor to coordinate with various utility agencies, the exact location of such point of
supply and mode of connection.
vi) The contractor shall get approval for the electrical work of installed electrical equipment like Transformer, HT Breaker,
Metering Kiosk, DG, LT Panels, HT/LT cables, etc from GSEB and Electric Inspector
vii) Before procuring any new item, the contractor should take approval from the client/consultant.

1.2 Related Documents:

Each work has its own particular requirements. Therefore, in addition to the GeneralSpecifications, governing BIS, I.E.
Rules, Standard Contract Conditions etc. therewould be necessity of Additional conditions/Specifications for a particular
work. Incase of any discrepancy such additional conditions/ specifications will overridethese General Specifications.
1.3 Terminology:
The definition of terms shall be in accordance with IS: 732-1989 (Indian Standard Code of Practice for Electrical Wiring),
except for the definitions of point, circuit, and sub main wiring, which are defined in this specification. Some of the
commonly used terms are indicated in Appendix-A.
1.4 Works to be done by the Contractor:

Unless and otherwise mentioned in the tender documents, the following works
shall be done by the contractor, and therefore their cost shall be deemed to be
included in their tendered cost: -
(i) Foundations for equipment’s and components where required, including foundations bolts.
(ii) Cutting and making good all damages caused during installation and restoring the same to their original finish.
(iii) Sealing of all floor openings provided by him for pipes and cables, from fire safety point of view, after laying of the
same.
(iv) Painting at site of all exposed metal surfaces of the installation other thanpre-painted items like fittings, fans,
switchgear/distribution gear items, cubicle switchboard etc. Damages to finished surfaces of these items while handling
and erection, shall however be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
(v) Testing and commissioning of completed installation.
1.5 Electric Power Supply and Water Supply:

Unless and otherwise specified, power supply and water supply will be arranged bythe Contractor at the site for installation
purpose.
Contractor will take due care to ensure safety of Electrical installation during execution of work.
1.6 Tools for handling and erection:

All tools and tackles required for handling of equipments and materials at site of work as well as for their assembly and
erection and also necessary test instrumentsshall be the responsibility of the contractor.
1.7 Co-ordination with other agencies:

The contractor shall co-ordinate with all other agencies involved in the building work so that the building work is not
hampered due to delay in his work. Recessed conduit and other works, which directly affect the progress of building work,
shouldbe given priority.
1.8 Care of Buildings:

Care shall be taken by the contractor to avoid damage to the building during executionof his part of the work. He shall be
responsible for repairing all damages and restoringthe same to their original finish at his cost. He shall also remove at his
costs allunwanted and waste materials arising out of his work from the site.
1.9 Structural Alterations to Buildings:

(i) No structural member in the building shall be damaged/altered, without prior approval from the competent authority
through the Engineer-in-charge.

(ii) Structural provisions like openings, cut-outs, if any, provided by the department for the work, shall be used. Where
these require modifications, or where fresh provisions are required to be made, such contingent works shall be carried
out by the contractor at his cost.
(iii) All such openings in floors provided by the Department shall be closed by
the contractor after installing the cables/conduits/rising mains etc. as thecase may be, by any suitable means as approved
by the Engineer-in-chargewithout any extra payment.
(iv) All chases required in connection with the electrical works shall be provided
and filled by the contractor at his own cost to the original architecturalfinish of the buildings.
1.10 Addition to an installation:

Any addition temporary or permanent to the existing electrical installation shall not
be made without a properly worked out scheme/design by a qualified Electrical Engineer to ensure that such addition does
not lead to overloading, safety violation
of the existing system.
1.11 Drawings:
(i) The work shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings enclosed with the tender documents and also in
accordance with modification thereto from time to time as approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
(ii) All wiring diagrams shall be deemed to be ‘Drawings’ within the meaning of the term. They shall indicate the main
switch board, the distribution boards (with circuit numbers controlled by them), the runs of various mains and sub mains
and the position of all points with their controls.
(iii) All circuits shall be indicated and numbered in the wiring diagram and the points shall be given the same number as
the circuit to which they are electrically connected.
1.12 Conformity to IE Act, IE Rules and standards:

All Electrical works shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of Indian Electricity Act, 2003 and Indian
Electricity Rules, 1956 amended up to date (Date of call of tender unless specified otherwise). List of Rules of particular
importance to Electrical Installations under these General Specifications is given in Appendix C for reference.
1.13 General requirements of components:
1.13.1 Quality of materials:

All materials and equipments supplied by the contractor shall be new. They shall be of such design, size and materials as
to satisfactorily function under the rated conditions of operation and to withstand the environmental conditions at site.
1.13.2 Inspection of materials and equipments:

(a) Materials and equipments to be used in the work shall be inspected by the Departmental officers. Such inspection will
be of following categories:
(i) Inspection of materials/equipments to be witnessed at the
Manufacturer’s premises in accordance with relevant BIS/Agreement Inspection Procedure.
(ii) To receive materials at site with Manufacturer’s Test Certificate(s).
(iii) To inspect materials at the Authorized Dealer’s Godowns to ensure delivery of genuine materials at site.
(iv) To receive materials after physical inspection at site.
(b) The Departmental officers will take adequate care to ensure that only tested
and genuine materials of proper quality are used in work(c) Similarly, for fabricated equipments, the contractor will first
submit dimensional detailed drawings for approval before fabrication is taken up in the factory. Suitable stage inspection
at factory also will be made to ensure proper use of materials, workmanship and quality control.

(c) The tender specifications will stipulate the Inspection requirements or their waiver for various materials/equipments
including norms of inspection in specific cases.
1.13.3 Ratings of Components:

(a) All components in a wiring installation shall be of appropriate ratings of voltage, current, and frequency, as required
at the respective sections of the electrical installation in which they are used.
(b) All conductors, switches and accessories shall be of such size as to be capable of carrying the maximum current, which
will normally flow through them, without their respective ratings being exceeded.
1.13.4 Conformity to standards:

(a) All components shall conform to relevant Indian Standard Specifications, wherever existing. Materials with ISI
certification mark shall be preferred.
(b) A broad list of relevant Indian Standards is given in Appendix D. These Indian Standards, including amendments or
revisions thereof upto the date of tender acceptance, shall be applicable in the respective contracts.
1.13.5 Interchangeability:
Similar parts of all switches, lamp holders, distribution fuse boards, switch gears, ceiling roses, brackets, pendants, fans
and all other fittings of the same type shall be interchangeable in each installation.
1.14 Workmanship:
1.14.1 Good workmanship is an essential requirement to be complied with. The entire work of manufacture/fabrication,
assembly and installation shall conform to sound engineering practice.
1.14.2 Proper supervision/skilled workmen:

The contractor shall be a licensed electrical contractor of appropriate classsuitable for execution of the electrical work. He
shall engage suitably skilled/licensed workmen of various categories for execution of work supervised by supervisors /
Engineer of appropriate qualification and experience to ensure proper execution of work. They will carry out instructions
of Engineer-in-charge and other senior officers of the Department during the progress of work.
1.14.3 Use of quality materials:

Only quality materials of reputed make as specified in the tender will be
used in work.
1.14.4 Fabrication in reputed workshop:

Switch boards and LT panels shall be fabricated in a factory/workshop having modern facilities like quality fabrication,
seven tank process, powder/epoxy paint plant, proper testing facilities, manned by qualified technical personnel.
1.15 Testing:
All testes prescribed in these General Specifications, to be done before, during andafter installation, shall be carried out,
and the test results shall be submitted to theEngineer-in-charge in prescribed Performa, forming part of the Completion
Certificate.
1.16 Commissioning on Completion:

After the work is completed, it shall be ensured that the installation is tested and commissioned.
1.17 Completion Drawings and Completion Certificate:

(i) For all works completion certificate after completion of work as given in Appendix-E shall be submitted to the Engineer-
in-charge.
(ii) Completion drawings drawn to a suitable scale and readable size, clear white papers ( three sets) indicatingthe
following, along with three blue print copies of the same shall also besubmitted.
(a) General layout of the building.

(b) Locations of main switchboard and distribution boards, indicating the circuit numbers controlled by them.
(c) Position of all points and their controls.
(d) Types of fittings, viz. LED, fluorescent, pendants, brackets, bulk head, fans and exhaust fans etc.
(e) Name of work, job number, accepted tender reference, actual date of completion and name of the firmwho executed
the work with their signature.
1.18 Guarantee
The installation will be handed over to the Department after necessary testing and
commissioning. The installation will be guaranteed against any defective design/ workmanship. Similarly, the materials
supplied by the contractor will be guaranteedagainst any manufacturing defect, inferior quality. The guarantee period will
be fora period as indicated in the General/Special Conditions of Contract from the date of handing over to the Department.
Installation/equipment’s or components thereof shall be rectified/ repaired to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer-in-charge.
CHAPTER - 2
ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION AND WIRING
2.1 Introduction:
The electric power will be received and distributed in a building, through following
means:-
(i) Cabling and switchgear to receive power. The building is divided into convenient number of parts, each part served by
a rising main system to distribute power vertically/horizontally.
(ii) Power flows from rising main through tap-off box to floor main board to final DBs and then to wiring.
(iii) Dedicated circuit for different loads such as lighting, HVAC, power plug loads shall be provided, wherever possible.
(iv) The distribution/wiring system essentially consists of provision of cables, switchgear, rising main, bus-ducting,
earthing, laying of pipes/ conduits etc. (in surface or recess) based on proper detailed designing to decide on various
sizes/capacities of these components and various controls and safeties involved, to provide an efficient, reliable, safe and
adequate electrical distribution and wiring system.
2.2 System of distribution and wiring:
(i) The wiring shall be done from a distribution system through main and/or branch distribution boards. The system design
and location of boards will be properly worked out.
(ii) Each main distribution board and branch distribution board shall be controlled by an incoming circuit breaker/linked
switch with fuse. Each outgoing circuit shall be controlled by a circuit breaker/switch with fuse.
(iii) For non-residential and residential buildings as far as possible DBs shall be separate for light and power.
(iv) Only MCCB/MCB/HRC fuse type DBs shall be used. Rewirable type fuses shall not be used.
(v) Three phase DBs shall not be used for final circuit distribution as far as possible.
(vi) ‘Power’ wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from light wiring, from the level of circuits, i.e., beyond the branch
distribution boards. Conduits for light/power wiring shall be separate.
(vii) Essential/non-essential/UPS distribution each will have a completely independent and separate distribution system
starting from the main, switchboard upto final wiring for each system. As for example, conduit carrying non-essential

wiring shall not have essential or UPS wiring. Wiring for essential and UPS supply will have their own conduit system. No
mixing of wiring is allowed.
(viii) Generally, no switchboard will have more than one source of incoming supply. More than one incoming supply will
be allowed only at main board with proper safety and interlocking so that only one source can be switched on at a time.
(ix) Each MDB/DB/Switch Board will have reasonable spare outgoing ways for future expansion.
(x) Balancing of 3-phase circuit shall be done.
2.3 Wiring:
2.3.1 Submain& Circuit wiring:
(a) Submain wiring:

Submain wiring shall mean the wiring from one main/distribution switchboard to another.
(b) Circuit wiring

Circuit wiring shall mean the wiring from the distribution board to the 1 sttapping point inside the switch box, from where
point wiring starts.
2.3.2. Measurement of submain and circuit wiring:
(i) Circuit and submain wiring shall be measured on linear basis along the run of the wiring. The measurement shall
include all lengths from end to end of conduit or channel as the case may be, exclusive of interconnections inside the
switchboard etc. The increase on account of diversion or slackness shall not be included in the measurement.
(ii) The length of circuit wiring with two wires shall be measured from the distribution board to the nearest switch box
from which the point wiring starts. Looping of switch boxes also will be counted towards circuit wiring, measured along
the length of conduit/channel.
(iii) When wires of different circuits are grouped in a single conduit/ channel, the same shall be measured on linear basis
depending on the actual number and sizes of wires run.
(iv) Protective (loop earthing) conductors, which are run along the circuit wiring and the sub main wiring, shall be
measured on linear basis and paid for separately.
(v) Note: Conduit carrying submain will not carry circuit/point wiring. Similarly conduit carrying circuit wiring will not
carry submain/point wiring. Conduit carrying point wiring will not carry submain/circuit wiring.
2.3.3 Measurement of other wiring work:
Except as specified above for point wiring, circuit wiring and submain wiring, other types of wiring shall be measured
separately on linear basis along the run of wiring depending on the actual number and sizes of wires run.
2.4 Point wiring:
2.4.1 Definition
A point (other than socket outlet point) shall include all work necessary in complete wiring to the following outlets from
the controlling switch or MCB.
(a) Ceiling rose or connector (in the case of points for ceiling/exhaust fan points, prewired light fittings, and call bells).
(b) Ceiling rose (in case of pendants except stiff pendants).
(c) Back plate (in the case of stiff pendants).
(d) Lamp holder (in the case of goose neck type wall brackets, batten holders and fittings which are not prewired).
2.4.2 Scope:
Following shall be deemed to be included in point wiring.
(a) Conduit/channel as the case may be, accessories for the same and wiring cables between the switch box and the point
outlet, loop protective earthing of each fan/light fixture.
(b) All fixing accessories such as clips, screws, Phil plug, rawl plug etc. as required.
(c) Metal or PVC switch boxes for control switches, regulators, sockets etc, recessed or surface type, and phenolic
laminated sheet covers over the same.
(d) Outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull-through boxes etc. but excluding metal boxes if any, provided with switchboards
for loose wires/conduit terminations.
(e) Control switch or MCB, as specified.
(f) 3 pin or 6 pin socket, ceiling rose or connector as required. (2 pin and 5 pin socket outlet shall not be permitted).
(g) Connections to ceiling rose, connector, socket outlet, lamp holder, switch etc.
(h) Bushed conduit or porcelain tubing where wiring cables pass through wall etc.
(Note: In areas where false ceiling are provided, termination of wires should be at the fittings, Flexible conduits from
ceiling junction box to the fittings shall be provided duly coupled at both ends. This shall be included within the scope of
point wiring.)
(i) Interconnecting wiring between switches within the switch box on the same circuit.
2.4.3 Measurement
(a) Point wiring (other than socket outlet points)

(i) Unless and otherwise specified, there shall be no linear measurement for point wiring for light points, fan points,
exhaust fan points and call bell points. These shall be measured on unit basis by counting, and classified as laid down in
2.4.4.
2.4.4 Classification:
Points measured under 2.4.3 on unit basis shall be classified as under according to the type of building.
(i) Group ‘A’, for point wiring for type I, type II and type III residential quarters and hostels.
(ii) Group ‘B’, for point wiring for type IV and above type of residential quarters and barracks.
(b) Non residential buildings:

Group ‘C’ for all types of non-residential buildings such as offices, hospitals, laboratories, educational institutions, libraries
etc.
(c) For any other type of building:-

The group under which the points are to be classified shall be decided by the concerned Chief Engineer (Elect.).
2.4.5 Point wiring for socket outlet points:

(i) The light plug (6A) point and power (16A) point wiring shall be measured on linear basis, from the respective tapping
point of live cable, namely, switch box, another socket outlet point, or the sub distribution board as the case may be, up
to the socket outlet.
(ii) The metal/PVC box with cover, switch/MCB, socket outlet and other accessories shall be measured and paid as a
separate item. Note: There shall normally be no “on the board” light plug point.
(iii) The power point outlet may be 16A/6 A six pin socket outlet, where so specified in the tender documents.
2.4.6 Group Control point wiring:

(i) In the case of points with more than one point controlled by the same switch, such points shall be measured in parts
i.e. (a) from the switch to the first point outlet as one point and classified according to 2.4.4, and (b) for the subsequent
points, the distance from that outlet to the next one and so on, shall be treated as separatepoint (s) and classified
according to 2.4.4.
(ii) No recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one switch in such cases.
2.4.7 Twin control light point wiring:

(i) A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be measured as two points from the fitting to the
switches on either side and classified according to 2.4.4.
(ii) N recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one ceiling rose or connector in such cases.
2.4.8 Multiple controlled call bell point wiring:
(i) In the case of call bell points with a single call bell outlet, controlled from more than one place, the points shall be
measured in parts i.e. (a) from the call bell outlet to one of the nearest ceiling roses meant for connection to bell push,
treated as one point and classified according to 2.4.4 and, (b) from that ceiling rose to the next one and so on, shall be
treated as separate point (s) and classified according to 2.4.4.
(ii) No recovery shall be made for non-provision of more than one ceiling rose or connector for connection to call bell in
such cases.
2.5 Wiring System:
(i) Wiring shall be done only by the looping system. Phase/live conductors shall be looped at the switch box. For point
wiring, neutral wire/earth wire looping for the 1st point shall be done in the switch box; and neutral/earth looping of
subsequent points will be made from point outlets.
(ii) In wiring, no joints in wiring will be permitted any where, except in switch box or point outlets, where jointing of wires
will be allowed with use of suitable connector.
(iii) The wiring throughout the installation shall be such that there is no break in the neutral wire except in the form of
linked switchgear.
(iv) Light, fans and call bells shall be wired in the ‘lighting’ circuits. 15A/16A socket outlets and other power outlets shall
be wired in the ‘power’ circuits. 5A/6A socket outlets shall also be wired in the ‘power’ circuit both in residential as well
as non-residential buildings.
(v) Colour coding:
Following colour coding shall be followed in wiring:-
Phase : Red/Yellow/Blue.(Three phase wiring)
Live : Red (Single phase wiring)
Neutral : Black
Earth : Yellow/Green.
(vi) Termination of circuit into switchboard:-
Circuit will consist of phase/neutral/earth wire. Circuit will terminate in a switch board (first tapping point, where from
point wiring starts) in
following manner:-
Phase wire terminated in phase connector.
Neutral wire terminated in neutral connector.
Earth wire terminated in earth connector.
The switchboard will have phase neutral and earth terminal connector blocks to receive phase/ neutral/earth wire.

2.6 Run of wiring:
(i) The type of wiring shall be as specified in the tender documents namely, surface conduit/recessed conduit, steel/PVC,
channel.
(ii) Surface wiring shall run as far as possible along the walls and ceiling, so as to be easily accessible for inspection.
(iii) Above false ceiling, in no case, open wiring shall be allowed. Wiring will be done in recessed conduit or surface steel
conduit.
(iv) In recessed conduit system, routes of conduit will be planned, so that various inspection boxes provided don’t present
a shabby look. Such boxes can be provided 5 mm above plaster level, and they can be covered with plaster of Paris with
marking of junction boxes.
(v) Where number of electrical services like electrical wiring, telephone wiring, computer cabling, pass through corridors,
it may be proper to plan such service with properly designed aluminium/PVC channels duly covered by a false ceiling, so
that subsequently such service can be maintained and additional cables can be provided.
(vi) Generally conduits for wiring will not be taken in floor slabs. When it is unavoidable special precaution to be taken to
provide floor channels with provision for safety and maintenance. Alternatively false flooring can be provided.
2.7 Passing through walls or floors:
(i) When wiring cables are to pass through a wall, these shall be taken through a protection (steel/ PVC) pipe or porcelain
tube of suitable size such that they pass through in a straight line without twist or cross in them on either porcelain, PVC
or other approved material.
(ii) All floor openings for carrying any wiring shall be suitably sealed after installation.
2.8 Joints in wiring:

(i) No bare conductor in phase and/or neutral or twisted joints in phase, neutral, and/or protective conductors in wiring
shall be permitted.
(ii) There shall be no joints in the through-runs of cables. If the length of final circuit or submain is more than the length
of a standard coil, thus necessitating a through joint, such joints shall be made by means of approved mechanical
connectors in suitable junction boxes.
(iii) Termination of multistranded conductors shall be done using suitable crimping type thimbles.
2.9 Capacity of Circuits:
(i) Lighting circuit shall feed light/fan/ call bell points. Each circuit shall not have more than 800 Watt connected load or
more than 10 points whichever is less. However, in case of CFL points where load per point may be less, number of points
may be suitably increased.
(ii) Power circuit in building will feed outlets as per the design finalised in tender documents, drawings or as per the
instructions of engineer in charge.
(iii) Load more than 1 KW shall be controlled by suitably rated MCB and cable size shall be decided as per calculations.
2.10 Socket out lets:
(i) Socket outlets modular type shall be 6A 3/5 pin, 16 Amp 3 pin or 16/6 Amp 6 pin. 2 pin socket outlets will not be
permitted.
The third pin shall be connected to earth through protective (loop earthing) Conductor.
(ii) Conductors connecting electrical appliances with socket outlets shall be of flexible type with an earthing conductor for
connection to the earth terminal of plug and the metallic body of the electrical appliance.
(iii) Sockets for the power outlets of rating above 1KW shall be of industrial type with associated plug top and controlling
MCB.
(iv) Where specified, shutter type (interlocking type) of sockets shall be used.
(v) Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch or MCB, as specified. The control switch/MCB shall be connected on
the ‘live’ side of the line.
(vi) 5A/6A and 15A/16A socket outlets shall be installed at the positions specified in working drawings or or any other
level in special cases as desired by the Engineer in-charge.
(vi) Unless and otherwise specified, the control switches for the 6A and 16A socket outlets shall be kept along with the
socket outlets.
2.11 Cables:
(i) Copper conductor cable only will be used for submain/ circuit/ point wiring.
(ii) Minimum size of wiring:
Light Wiring : 1.5 sq.mm.
Power Wiring :2.5, 4.0 sq.mm.
Power circuit rated : More than 1 KW, Size as specoified or as per calculation.
(iii) Insulation : Copper conductor cable shall be PVC insulated
conforming to BIS Specification.
(iv) Multi stranded : Cables are permitted to be used.
2.12 Flexible Cable:
(i) Conductor of flexible cables shall be of copper. The cross sectional area of conductor for flexible cable shall be as per
design.
(ii) Only 3 core flexible cables shall be used for connecting single-phase appliances.
(iii) Unless the flexible cables are mechanically protected by armour, or tough
rubber, or PVC sheath, these shall not be used in workshops and other places where they are liable to mechanical damage.
(iv) Flexible cable connection to bell push from ceiling rose shall be taken through steel conduit/metallic casing and
capping.
2.13 Wiring Accessories:
(a) Control switches for point:

(i) Control switches (single pole switch) carrying not more than 16A shall be modular type. The switch shall be ‘On’ when
the knob is down.
(ii) (a) In type I, II & III quarters, Barracks & school buildings (except principal’s & staff rooms) etc. Piano type switches
shall be provided (unless specifically asked for by the user department / Architect.)
(b) Modular type switches to be provided for remaining types of buildings i.e. in all types of remaining non-residential
buildings &residential buildings of type IV &above & Transit hostel or as may be decided by the Architect / user department.
(Note: Provision is meant for new constructions and in existing buildings during rewiring if the building work renovation
is also progress in the area. Otherwise existing type of piano switches will be continued.)
(iii) It is recommended to provide double pole MCB in proper enclosure as power out let for window type AC units, geysers
etc.
(b) Switch Box:

(i) Switch box shall be hot dip galvanized, factory fabricated. Suitable in size for surface/ recess mounting and suitable in
size for accommodating the required number of switches and accessories (where required to be used for applications other
then modular switches/ sockets).
(ii) Switch box also can be of non-metallic material. The technical sanctioning authority will approve specified makes of
reputed quality and specifications.
(c) Switch box covers (for application other than modular type):
Phenolic laminated sheets of approved shade shall be used for switch box covers. These shall be of 3mm thick synthetic
phenolic resin bonded laminated sheet as base material and conforming to grade PI of IS: 2036-1974.
Note: Specification for switch boxes is covered in the chapters on the various types of wiring.
(d) Ceiling rose:

(i) A ceiling rose shall not be used on a circuit, the voltage of which normally exceeds 250V.
(ii) Only one flexible cord shall be connected to a ceiling rose. Specially designed ceiling roses shall be used for multiple
pendants.
(iii) A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminal as an integral part of it.
(e) Lamp holders:

(i) Lamp holders may be batten, angle, pendant or bracket holder type as required. The holder shall be made of brass
and shall be rigid enoughto maintain shape on application of a nominal external pressure. There should be sufficient
threading for fixing the base to the lamp holder part so that they do not open out during attention to the lamp or shade.
(ii) Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like shall have not less than 1.3 cm nipple, and all those for use with flexible
pendant shall be provided with cord grips.
(iii) All lamp holders shall be provided with shade carriers.
(iv) Wherecenter contact Edison Screw lamp holders are used, the outer or screw contact shall be connected to the ‘middle
wire’, or the neutral conductor of the circuit.
(f) Fittings: Types:
The type of fittings shall be as specified in tender documents.
Indoor type fittings:

(i) Where conductors are required to be drawn through tube or channel leading to the fitting, the tube or channel must
be free from sharp angles or projecting edge, and of such size as will enable them to be wired with the conductors used
for the final circuit without removing the braiding or sheathing. As far as possible all such tubes or channels should be of
sufficient size to permit looping back.
(ii) Wires used within prewired fittings shall be flexible with PVCinsulation and 14/0.193 mm (minimum) copper
conductors. The leads shall be terminated on built-in-terminal block, ceiling rose or connector, as required.
(iii) Fittings using discharge lamps shall be complete with power factor correction capacitors, either integrally or externally.
An earth terminal with suitable marking shall be provided for each fitting for discharge lamps.
(iv) Fittings shall be installed such that the lamp is at a height of 2.4m above floor level, unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
(v) Fittings made of CRCA shall be phosphatized and powder/epoxy painted. For coastal areas and humid area like toilets,
kitchen, for prolonging the life of such fittings, corrosion free materials like engineering plastic, aluminium, stainless steel
etc. should be used.
Outdoor fittings:
Outdoor fittings shall have suitable IP protection. It is preferable that street light fittings are of cast aluminium body of
IP65, for reducing recurring maintenance cost and improved performance. Where required IP 66 fittings also can be
provided for reducing maintenance frequency and cost. Other fittings, which are not available with tested IP 65/54
protection, can be properly fabricated with weatherproof features, proper gasketing etc. As far as possible corrosion free
material like cast aluminium, stainless steel, engineering plastics may be used for fabrication of such fittings, to prolong
life such fittings. There should not be any exposed wiring in such outdoor fittings.
LED Light Fittings

1) System efficancy shall not be less than 90 lumens/watt,
2) CRI shall be more than 80.
3) Total harmonic distortion voltage and current shall be less than 10%
4) Operating voltage range shall be in range of 160V to 270V
5) Power Factor of Luminaire shall be more than 0.95
6) Luminaire shall conform to respective IS.
7) Luminaire shall withstand surge protection upto 2 kV
8) Luminaire shall carry minimum three years warrantee.
9) Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) shall be required between 2700K-6500K.
2.14 Attachment of fittings and accessories:
(a) Conduit wiring system:

(i) All accessories like switches, socket outlets, call bell pushes and regulators shall be fixed in flush pattern inside the
switch/regulator boxes. Accessories like ceiling roses, brackets, batten holders etc.shall be fixed on outlet boxes. The fan
regulators may also be fixedon outlet boxes, if so directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
(ii) Aluminium alloy or cadmium plated iron screws shall be used to fix the accessories to their bases.
iii) The switch box/regulator box shall normally be mounted with their bottom 1.25m from floor level, unless otherwise
directed by theEngineer-in-charge.
(b) Fixing to walls and ceiling:

(i) Wooden plugs for fixing to wall/ceiling will not be allowed. Fixing will be done with the help of PVC sleeves/Rowel plugs/
dash fasteners as required. Fittings installed in false ceiling should be properly fixed using GI chain of thickness 3 mm or
more and supported from RCC slab using required fastners, clamps, bolt etc as required and as per the instruction of
engineer in charge. The length of the chains should be as per the space between false ceiling and rccc slab on all floors
(ii) Drilling of holes shall be done by drilling machines only. No manualdrilling of hole will be allowed.
2.15 Fans, Regulators and Clamps:
(a) Ceiling Fans:

(i) Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
(ii) The minimum distance between fan blades and the ceiling should be
about 0.3 meters.
(iii) Energy Efficient fans with BEE 3-5 star rating or complying with IS 374: 1979, shall be used. The minimum service
value of fans shall be 3.5m3/min/W and air delivery 200 m3/min.
iv) All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector boxes, and suspended from hooks or shackles,
with insulators between hooks and suspension rods. There shall be no joint in the suspension rod.
(v) For wooden or steel joists and beams, the suspension shall consist of GI flat of size not less than 40 mm x 6 mm,
secured on the sides of the joists or beams by means of two coach screws of size not less
(vi)Step Type Electronic regulators should be used instead of resistance type regulators for controlling speed of fans.
(vii) All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector boxes, and suspended from hooks or shackles,
with insulators between than 5 cm for each flat. Where there is space above the beam, a through boltof size not less than
1.5 cm dia, shall be placed above the beam from which the flats are suspended. In the latter case, the flats shall be
secured from movements by means of another bolt and nut at the bottom of the beam. A hook consisting of MS rod of
size not less than
1.5 cm dia shall be inserted between the MS flat through oval holes on their sides. Alternatively, the flats may be bent
inwards to hold tightly between them by means of a bolt and nut, a hook of ‘S’ form.
(xi) In the case of ‘I’ beams, flats shall be shaped suitably to catch the flanges and shall be held together by means of a
long bolt and nut.
(xii) For concrete roofs, a 12 mm dia. MS rod in the shape of ‘U’ with their vertical legs bent horizontally at the top at
least 19 cm on either side, and bound to the top reinforcement of the roof shall be used, as shown in Fig. 5.
(xiii) In buildings with concrete roofs having a low ceiling height, where the fan clamp mentioned under sub clause (v)
above cannot be used,or wherever specified, recessed type fan clamp inside metallic box, as shown in Fig. 6 shall be used.
(xiv) Canopies on top of suspension rod shall effectively hide the suspension.
(xv) The leading in wire shall be of nominal cross sectional area not less than 1.5 sq. mm. and shall be protected from
abrasion.
(xvi) Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans shall be hung 2.75m above the floor.
(xvii) In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including wiring, the same shall be measured in units
of 10cm. Any length less than 5cm shall be ignored.
(xviii) The wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying and drawing54p1pcable in existing conduit.
(b) Exhaust Fans:

(i) Exhaust fans shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
(ii) Exhaust fans shall be erected at the places indicated by the Engineerin- charge. For fixing an exhaust fan, a circular
opening shall be provided in the wall to suit the size of the frame, which shall be fixed by means of rag bolts embedded
in the wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered to the original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be connected to the
exhaust fan point, which shall be wired as near to the
opening as possible, by means of a flexible cord, care being taken to see that the blades rotate in the proper direction.
(iii) Exhaust fans for installation in corrosive atmosphere, shall be painted with special PVC paint or chlorinated rubber
paint.
(iv) Installation of exhaust fans in kitchens, dark rooms and such otherspecial locations need careful consideration; any
special provisions needed shall be specified.
(c) Regulators:
The metallic body of regulators of ceiling fans/exhaust fans shall be connected to earth by protective conductor.
2.16 Marking of Switch Boards:

(i) Schematic diagram:
First a comprehensive schematic diagram for each building is to be prepared, starting from Main LT Panel, rising main,
submain boards, DBs, etc. and the manner in which they are connected. This will include essential, nonessential and UPS
systems. Sizes of interconnecting main/submain cablesshall be indicated.
(ii) Marking of each Main Board:

Each main board/submain board shall be marked indicating rating of each incoming/outgoing switch and the details of
load/area it feeds. Detail/size of incoming and outgoing cable also shall be marked indicating from where the incoming
cable has originated.
(iii) Marking of Distribution Board:

Each Distribution Board shall be marked indicating detail of incoming switch (Size of cable and from where it is fed) and
marking of each outgoing MCB indicating the area it feeds. Suitable marking sticker will be suitably fixed to indicate
such details.
(iv) Marking of Power/Light DBs:
Power/light DBs shall be marked ‘P’ and ‘L’ respectively.
(v) Marking for Non-essential/Essential/UPS/Switch Boards:

Each switchboard shall be marked Essential/non-essential/UPS to indicate the nature of such switchboards.
(vi) Marking of Main earthing terminal:

Main earthing terminals in main/sub main switchboard shall be permanently marked, as “safety Earth – don’t remove”.
2.17 LT distribution switchgear:

Only following type switchboards will be used:
(a) Main/Submain switchboard of cubicle type.
(b) DBs –Conventional DBs of reputed makes can also be used with the approval of technical sanctioning authority in
addition to prewired DB.
(c) Specially designed switchboards.
Also specially designed switchboards can be used with detailed specification and fabrication drawings approved by the
technical sanctioning authority.
(d) Specifications of cubicle panel and pre-wired DB are given in Clause 4.1.2
of Chapter 4.
2.18 Location of Switchboards:

(i) Switch boards are to be located in common areas like corridors, lobby etc. and not to be located in locked room.
(ii) Switch board shall be located only in dry situation and in well-ventilatedspace. They shall not be placed in the vicinity
of storage battery or exposed to chemical fume.
(iii) Switch boards shall not be erected above gas stove, or sinks or within 2.5 meter of any washing unit in washing rooms
of launderings or in the bath rooms, toilets, or kitchen.
(iv) As far as possible main boards shall not be located in basement. Such main boards can be located in ground floor.
(v) It is preferable to locate floor main boards in rising main shafts of adequate size, with steel doors (having ventilation)
or in suitable room.
(vi) Similarly DBs can be in suitable nitchesin corridor walls having doors.
(vii) Locating main boards under staircase or standing open in corridor is not a desirable practice, besides being highly
unaesthetic.
(viii) The main switchboard, which receives power to the building, should be invariably located in a switch room, having
round the clock access, for emergency attendance to the switchboard.
Colour Code of Conductors
Colour code shall be maintained as indicated by the Consultant for the entire wiring installations. Red, yellow,
blue shall be for three phases, black for neutral and green with yellow band shall be for earthing.
2 (A) SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES (MODULAR & INDUSTRIAL TYPE)

2.1. Switches
All switches shall be enclosed type flush mounted suitable for240 volts AC. All switches shall be fixed inside the
switch boxes on adjustable flat M S strips/plates with tapped holes and brass machine screws, leaving ample
space at the backand sides for accommodating wires. Switch controlling the light point shall be connected to the
phase wire of the circuit and load shall be restricted to maximum 800 watts per switch& maximum 1500
watts per circuit. All wiring accessories shall be BIS approved. Perfect alignment shall be maintained while
fixing of the back boxes.
2.2 Modular Socket Outlet
Socket outlets shall be of the three pin. The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the phase wire of
the circuit and not more than two socket outlets of 16 amps shall be connected on one circuit. An earth wire
shall be provided along with the circuit wires and shall be connected to earthing screw inside the box. All sockets
shall be shuttered type.
a. Every socket outlet shall be controlled by an individual switch unless mentioned otherwise.
b. The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the `Live’ side of the line.

c. 6 amps and 16 amps socket outlet shall normally be fixed at any convenient height above the floor level
as desired by the Architect. The switch for 6 and 16 amps, socket outlet shall be kept along with the
socket outlet. However, in special case, if desired by the Architect the 6 amp. socket outlet can be placed
at the normal switch level.
16 amps socket outlet in the kitchen of the residential or commercial buildings shall be fixed at any
convenient height above working platform or as specified in drawings / schedule of equipments.
In a room containing a fixed bath or shower, there shall be no socket outlet and there shall be no
provision for connecting a portable appliance. Any stationary appliance connected permanently in the
bath room shall be controlled by an isolator switch or circuit breaker having outlets at such location
where water / moisture does not effect. Generally, switches and outlets shall be planned at a minimum
distance of 1.5 Metre away from any water supply outlet, so that splashed water may not affect the live
installation.
d. Where socket outlets are placed at lower level, they shall be enclosed in a suitable metallic box with the
system of wiring adopted or shutter type sockets shall be provided as specified.
e. In an earthed system of supply, a socket outlet and plug shall be of three pin type, the third terminal
shall be connected to earth.
f. Conductors connecting electrical appliance with socket outlet shall be flexible twin cord with an earthing
cord which shall be secured by connecting between the earth terminal of plug and the metallic body of
the electrical appliance.
g. Where use of shutter type of interlocking type of socket is required for any special installation, the items
should be separately and specifically listed in the Schedule of Quantities of that particular work.
2.2 Industrial Plug & Sockets.
Industrial plugs and sockets shall have the technical parameters, construction as detailed here under.
2.2.1 CONSTRUCTION
The outer casting shall be made of non-corroding die cast aluminum alloy. The interiors shall be moulded out of
superior grade phenolic/polyester compound. Protective cap/cover shall be provided for socket to ensure safety
when socket not in use. Contact tubes of socket shall be deeply recessed to prevent finger contact. An overhang
around the pins of the plug shall be provided for finger protection from accidental contact. The earth connection
shall make first and breaks last. Rubber cable guard in the plug shall be provided for giving protection to incoming
flexible cable. MCB of the rating as mentioned in the table shall be provided. Plug, socket, MCB shall be housed
in a sheet steel enclosure which shall be chemically phosphate and powder painted. Weather proof enclosure
shall be provided for outdoor type sockets points & MCB boxes.
Construction shall be Flameproof for hazardous area Light/Power points socket outlets
2.2.2 Technical Parameters
Current Type No. of Pole Rated Voltage MCB protection

Rating
25 A Plug & Socket 2P + E 240 V 25 A SP
32 A Plug & Socket 2P + E 240 V 25 A SP
25 A Plug & Socket 3P + N + E 415 V 32 A TP
32 A Plug & Socket 3P + N + E 415 V 32 A TP
3. MEDIUM VOLTAGE 1.1 KV GRADE XLPE / PVC CABLES
3.1 General
The MV cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with drawings,
Specifications, relevant Standard Specifications and cable manufacturer's instruction.
3.2 Material
The MV cables shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated PVC inner sheathed and HR PVC / FRLS PVC
outer sheath of 1100 volts grade as asked for in the schedule of quantities. Cables up to 16 sq.mm shall be with
copper conductor and 25 sq.mm and above shall be with aluminium conductor.

The MV cables 25 sq. mm & above shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated PVC inner sheathed and
FRLS PVC outer sheath of 1100 volts grade AL. Cables below 25 sq.mm shall be with copper conductor, with HR
PVC core insulation and sheathing.
3.2.1 Specifications of PVC insulated copper cable shall be as follows:
a Conductor
Stranded compacted circular conductor shall be of electrical grade high conductivity copper below 25
sq.mm as per IS 8130 / 84
b. Insulation
The insulation shall be PVC; application shall be by extrusion process insulation confirming to IS 5831-
1984. The thickness of insulation will be as per the relevant codes.
c. Laying-up
Insulated conductors of multi core cables shall be with thermoplastic fillers in the interstices. The phase
identification of cores shall be by coloured strips.
d. Inner Sheath
Cores shall be surrounded either by a wrapped or an extruded PVC sheath.
The thickness of the inner – sheath shall be as per relevant codes.
e. Armouring
The armouring shall be provided over the inner sheath.
Single core cable shall have dia -magnetic armouring. Multi core cables shall have either galvanized
round steel wires or flat steel strip armouring. Steel wires and strips for armouring confirm to IS: 3975.
The direction of lay of armouring shall be opposite to that of cores.
f. Outer Sheath
Single and multi core cables are provided with an extruded FRLS grade PVC outer-sheath. The thickness
of the sheath shall be as per IS: 1554-1988. The PVC compound for the outer-sheath shall confirm to
Type ST1 of IS 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black with marking at every meter.
3.2.2 Specifications for XLPE aluminium / copper cable shall be as follows:
a Conductor
Stranded compacted circular conductor shall be of electrical grade high conductivity aluminium per IS
8130/84
b. Insulation
The insulation shall be of natural unfilled chemically cross linked polyethylene conforming to IS 7098.
The thickness of insulation shall be as per the relevant codes.
c. Laying-up
Insulated conductors of multi core cables shall be with plastic fibre in the interstices. The phase
identification of cores shall be by colored strips.
d. Inner Sheath
The cores shall be surrounded by either a wrapped or by an extruded PVC sheath.

The thickness of the inner sheath shall be as indicated in the relevant codes.
e. Armouring
The armouring shall be provided over the inner sheath.
Single core cable shall have non-magnetic armouring. Multi core cables shall have either galvanized
round steel wires or flat steel strip. Steel wires and strips for armouring confirm to IS: 3975. The
direction of lay of armouring shall be opposite to that of cores.
f. Outer Sheath
Single and multi core cables are provided with an extruded FRLS grade PVC outer-sheath. The
thickness of the sheath shall be as per IS:1554-1988. The PVC compound for the outer-sheath shall
confirm to Type ST2 of IS 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black with marking at every
meter.
3.2.3 Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS: 3961. The Conductor shall be stranded Aluminum/Copper
circular/ sector shaped and compacted. In multi core cables the core shall be identified by red, yellow, blue
and black coloring of insulation.
Repaired cables shall not be used.
3.2.4 The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and underground buried installation
with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water.
3.2.5 Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of the length of cables in meters at every one meter shall be
provided on the outer sheath of all cables.
3.2.6 Cables shall be supplied in non returnable wooden drums as per IS: 1049.
Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate ingress of water
during transportation, storage and erection.
3.2.7 The product should be coded as per IS: - 7098 Part-I as follows:-
Aluminium Conductor A
XLPE Insulation 2X
Steel round wire armour W
Steel strip armour F
Steel Double round wire armour WW
Steel Double strip armour FF
Non-magnetic (Al.) round wire armour Wa
Non-magnetic (Al.) strip armour Fa
PVC outer sheath Y
3.3 Inspection
All cables shall be inspected by the contractor upon receipt at site and checked for any damage during transit.
3.4 Joints in Cables
The Contractor shall take care to see that all the cables received at site are apportioned to various locations in
such a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoid cable jointing. This apportioning shall be got approved
by the Owner’s site representative before the cables are cut to lengths. Where joints are unavoidable heat
shrinkable type joints shall be made. The location of such joints shall be got approved from the Owner’s site
representative and shall be identified through a marker.
3.5 Jointing Boxes for Cables
Cable joint boxes shall be installed with heat shrinkable sleeve and of appropriate size, suitable for XLPE armoured
cables of particular voltage rating.
3.6 Jointing of Cables
All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joint boxes and the filling in of compound shall be done
in accordance with manufactures’ instructions and in an approved manner. All straight through joints shall be
done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resin.
All cables shall be joined colour to colour and tested for continuity and insulation resistance before jointing
commence. The seals of cables must not be removed until preparations for jointing are completed. Joints shall
be finished on the same day as commenced and sufficient protection from the weather shall be arranged. The
conductors shall be efficiently insulated with high voltage insulating tape and by using of spreaders of approved
size and pattern. The joints shall be completely topped up with epoxy compound so as to ensure that the box is
properly filled.
3.7 Cable End Terminations
Cable end termination shall be done in cable terminal box using crimping sockets and proper size of glands of
double compression type
3.8 Bonding of Cables
Where a cable enters any piece of apparatus, it shall be connected to the casing by means of an approved type
of armour clamp and gland. The clamps must grip the armouring firmly to the gland or casing, so that no undue
stress is passed on to the cable conductors.

3.9 Cable Installation
Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize stretching of
the cable. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be exercised
in laying cables to avoid forming kinks.
3.10.1 Laying of Cables on Cable Trays
The relative position of the cables, laid on the cable tray shall be preserved and the cables shall not
cross each other. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cable shall be bent
smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturers. All cables shall be laid with minimum one
diameter gap and shall be clamped at every meter to the cable tray. Cables shall be tagged for
identification with aluminum tag and clamped properly at every 20M. Tags shall be provided at both
ends and all changes in directions both sides of wall and floor crossings. All cable shall be identified by
embossing on the tag the size of the cable, place of origin and termination.
All cables passing through holes in floor or walls shall be sealed with fire retardant Sealant and shall
be painted with fire retardant paint upto one meter on all joints, terminations and both sides of
the wall crossings
3.9.2 Laying of Cables in Ground
The width of trench for laying single cable shall be minimum 350 mm. Where more than one cable is
to be laid in horizontal formation, the width of the trench shall be workout by providing 200 mm gap
between the cables, except where otherwise specified. There shall be clearance of 150 mm between
the end cable and the side wall of the trench. The minimum depth of the cable trench shall not be less
than 750 mm for single layer of cables. When the cables are laid in more than one tier the depth of the
trench shall be increased by 300 mm for each additional tier.
Excavation of trenches : The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever
there is a change in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided. Where gradients and changes in
depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual. The excavated soil shall be stacked firmly by the side
of the trench such that it may not fall back into the trench. The bottom of the trench shall be leveled
and shall be made free from stone, brick bats etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of
clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 100 mm in depth. Prior to laying of cables, the cores shall be
tested for continuity and insulation resistance. The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks, at
a suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry the weight of the
drum and the spindle is horizontal. Cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and
uniformly without jerks and strains. The entire drum length shall be laid in one stretch. However,
where this is not possible the remainder of the cable shall be removed by `Flaking’ i.e. by making one
long loop in the reverse direction. After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over
the rollers, the cable shall be lifted off the rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing about
10 meters apart and laid in a reasonably straight line. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation
shall have a cover of clean, dry sand of not less than 150 mm. above the base cushion of sand before
the protective cover is laid. In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after the first cable has
been laid, a sand cushion of 300 mm shall be provided over the initial bed before the second tier is
laid. Finally the cables shall be protected by second class bricks before back filling the trench. The
buried depth of uppermost layer of cable shall not be less than 750mm.
Back Filling : The trenches shall be back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp
edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding
300 mm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm in the centre and tapering
towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence.
3.10 Cables inside Building
Cables inside buildings shall be laid on the cable trays. All cables passing through walls shall run through GI
Pipes sleeves of adequate diameter 50 mm apart maintaining the relative position over the entire length.
3.11 Route Marker
Route marker shall be provided along straight runs of the cables not exceeding 30 meters also for change in the
direction of the cable route and underground joints.
Route marker shall be of cast iron painted with aluminum paint. The size of marker shall be 100 mm dia with
“Cable” and voltage grade inscribed on it.

3.12 Testing of Cables
Cables shall be tested at works for all routine tests as per IS including the following tests before being dispatched
to site by the project team.
a) Insulation Resistance Test.

b) Continuity test.
c) Sheathing continuity test
d) Earth test.(in armoured cables)
e) Hi Pot Test.
Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phase and earth for each length
of cable, before and after jointing. On completion of cable laying work, the following tests shall be conducted
in the presence of the Owner’s site representative.
a) Insulation Resistance Test( Sectional and overall)

b) Continuity test.
c) Sheathing continuity test
d) Earth test.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice and Electricity Rules. The
Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, equipment and labour for conducting the abo
4. Cable Trays
Ladder and perforated type Cable Trays shall be of Hot dip Galvanized bolted type and factory fabricated out
of CRCA sheet with standard accessories like tee, bends, couplers etc. for different loads and number and size
of cables as given below :
Cable trays shall be galvanized as per Specification given under 3.14.
a. 1500 mm wide
Runners 25 x 100 x 25 x 3 mm
Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C
Suspenders 2 Nos. 40 x 40 x 5 mm GI angle 1500 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x 5mm GI
angle.
b. 1200 mm wide
Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C
angle.
c. 1000 mm wide
Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C
angle.
d. 750 mm wide
Runners 20 x 75 x 20 x 2.5 mm
Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C
Suspenders 2 Nos. 32 x 32 x 5 mm GI angle 900 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x 5mm GI angle.
e 600 mm wide
Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C
f. 450 mm wide
Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C
g. Supply and fixing of perforated type cable trays of the following sizes of pre-galvanized iron.
i. 600 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
i. 450 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
i. 300 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
ii. 150 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
Note : Suitable length of 10 mm dia GI rod suspenders at 900 mm interval shall be included in the item for
perforated type cable tray.
Alternative to fabricated support of cable tray, Steel wire rope hangers shall be used to suspend the cable trays.
This hanger shall consist of a pre-formed wire rope sling with a range of end fixings to fit various substrates and
service fixings. The end fixings and wire must be of the same manufacturer with several options available. The
system shall be secured and tensioned with a hanger self locking grip at the other end. Once the grip is locked
for safety purpose, unlocking shall only be done by using a separate setting key and shall not be an integral part
of the self locking grip. Only wires and/or supports supplied and/or approved shall be used with the system.
4.1 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanizing Process

(for Mild Steel Used For Earthing, Cable Trays Or Junction Boxes For Electrical Installation.)
General Requirements
I. Quality of Zinc
Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS: 209-1992.
II. Coating Requirement
Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in accordance with
IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.
The weight of coating expressed in grams per square metre shall be calculated by dividing the total
weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface.
The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash and dross inclusions,
bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains bulky white deposits, blisters.
Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing and then
galvanizing.
ve tests and shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried out in the
presence of the Owner’s site representative, results will be noted and signed by all present and record be
maintained.
4.2 Floor Cable Trunking – ALUMINIUM

General
(a) Trunking and fittings shall comply shall be with a 1.6 mm thick Aluminium sheet.
(b) Trunking shall be top accessed. Inverted trunking is not acceptable.
(c) All multi-compartment trunking systems shall maintain the stated segregation throughout, including
all accessories.
(d) Trunking shall be manufactured using anodised aluminium sheet. The trunking shall normally be
supplied in 2500mm lengths with a material thickness of 1.6mm. Lengths of trunking, shall be
coupled together by means of joint sleeves, made of anodize aluminium. At each joint in the trunking,
continuity shall be maintained by means of copper links, not less than 25 x 3 mm to achieve an
acceptable earth loop impedance level in compliance with BS 2989, fixed with brass nuts, bolts and
serrated washers. LSZH copper cable link with cable lugs may be used, if the proper connection
method is provided to avoid long term corrosion and electrolytic action. The LSZH cable shall have
an equivalent cross sectional area to the copper links. Bonding link shall be fixed on external surfaces.
(e) Manufacturer’s standard fittings shall be used for all connections and changes of direction. All
vertical bends, Crossover boxes, access outlets, and junction boxes shall be of the same
manufacturer as the trunking. Trunking shall not be cut or bent to form bends, flanges or
attachments. Gusset bends shall be used wherever necessary to provide sufficient bending
radius for the cables. Site fabricated items shall not be accepted.
(f) The minimum size shall be 50mm by 40mm with single compartment. The maximum recommended
size for the trunking is upto 300mm by 40mm with triple compartments.
(g) All inside edges of trunking shall be smooth and provision shall be made to prevent abrasion at bends.
(h) Cable retaining straps supplied by the trunking manufacturer shall be fitted at intervals not exceeding
1m. Where trunking passes through walls, floors and ceilings, proprietary fire barriers shall be installed
in the trunking. The fire barrier shall have a rating not less than that of the original construction of
the opening.
Trunking shall be adequately supported throughout its length. Trunking support and channel shall be
quick-fixing type and shall be such as to space the trunking a minimum of 13mm from any part of the
wall or bulkhead.
(i) A minimum of two fixings shall be provided between joints in the trunking except where the distance
between is less than the maximum spacing.

(j) Where trunking is cut or drilled, the cut edges of the trunking shall be smoothed to prevent abrasion
of the cables and shall be painted with anti-corrosion paint like aluminium coating, to the same
colour as the adjacent surfaces, such painting to be carried out as the work proceeds. In no
circumstances will rough screw edges and nuts be allowed in the interior of the trunking.
(k) Flush or buried trunking and under floor metal ducts shall comply with BS 2989.
(l) The space factor for cables installed in trunking shall not exceed 35% as per IEE regulations.
(m) All lengths of vertical run trunking in excess of 3000mm shall contain cable supports made of
insulating, non-hygroscopic, non-combustible material. The spacing between such supports shall not
exceed 900mm. An additional support shall be provided at the top of all vertical runs exceeding
3000mm, to support the weight of the cable and distribute the cables within the trunking to prevent
undue compression of the installation.
(n) Where trunking crosses expansion joints, a trunking fitting shall be used which shall allow for
expansion and maintain earth continuity.
(o) Suitable cutout on under floor trunking at ticket barriers shall be provided to suit Automatic Fare
Collection System Contractor’s requirement. The cutout shall not have a sharp edge or abrasive effect
on cables. The location and route for the cutout and under floor trunking shall be according to Working
Drawings.
(p) Trunking installed externally shall be manufactured from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with
BS 2989 protection Class 3, or other international standards. Trunking installed internally shall be of
Class 2.
(q) Partitions or dividers shall be of the same material and finish as the trunking. The method of fixing
shall not cause any long-term corrosion or electrolytic action.
(r) Connections to multiple boxes, switchgear and distribution boards shall be made with multi
compartment vertical access boxes. Expansion joints in long continuous runs shall be provided as
recommended by the manufacturer.
(s) Junction boxes shall be of GI material and shall be provided with 3mm thick screw mounted covering
at the top.
(t) For the junction boxes coming in the passages shall have SS cover while junction boxes in the other
areas (under work station etc.) shall be provided with finish as per interior requirements.
4.3 ACCESS OUTLETS
a) Access Outlets are made of very high quality materials to withstand heavy load and corrosion.
b) Manufactured from high-pressure die cast material for strength &durability.
c) The trap frame & trap are made of flame retardant Engineering Plastic - ABS&Polyamide ratchet for strength
& durability.
d) The Trap Frame can be easily removed by pulling either one of the Nylon Bars to detach & remove the unit for
servicing or installation of accessories to save installation & servicing time.
e) Patented screw less ratchet bar level adjusting system to match with screed / floor height. The trap lid is self-
adjustable to any floor finish thickness.
f) Trap cover must be reinforced with a 2.5mm thick pre-galvanized steel plate to provide rigidity & added strength.
Trap lid to have a screw less knob-hinged design for quick mounting on to the frame requiring minimum maintenance.
g) The Trap cover must have 8 mm recessed for installation of carpet and tiles.
h) Trap trim design to protect carpet from damages and give the floor area added aesthetics.
i) Trap lid should be made of Electrostatic Polyester Epoxy Coating to provide excellent and enhanced protection
on visible parts against chemical or saline corrosion.
j) Strong and durable trap lifting handle on the trap cover is made of similar color material and has special design for
easy lifting, even with large fingers.
k) Cables are guided by Cable Retainers through generous cable outlet which open automatically and lock into position
when cables are present.
l) Trap cover of Access box should be retained by Cable Grommets with high quality durable foam to prevent the cable
damage from exit position & also prevent ingress of dust when closed.
m) Access Outlet should carry service plates for providing services i.e.: Power, Data & Telecom. The Access outlets
must accommodate to have three compartments to run Mains Voltage & Extra Low Voltage cables.
n) The system must have Positive Double Earthing connections.
o) Earth wire connector should be provided in all the boxes, and complies with the requirement of current IEE regulation.
p) Access outlets are tested to a load bearing of 2 tons on the trap lid for heavy traffic areas
q) Four side blanks are made with removable perforations to suit ducts installation.
r) Standards & Approvals – The system must comply to the relevant specification &
IEC 61084 standards.
4.4 CROSSOVERS/JUNCTION BOXES

a) Cross Overs/Junction boxes are made of very high quality materials to withstand heavy load and corrosion.
Manufactured from high-pressure die cast material for strength &durability.
b) The trap lid is self-adjustable to any floor finish thickness using the leveling screws on all the four corners.

c) The Trap cover is made of 2.5mm thick pre-galvanized steel plate to provide rigidity & added strength.
d) The Trap covers to have flexibility for quick mounting on to the base box requiring minimum maintenance.
e) The Trap cover must have 8mm recessed for installation of carpet and tiles.
f) The Flyover units, trapframe and traps should be made of Electrostatic Polyester Epoxy Coating to
provide excellent and enhanced protection on visible parts against chemical or saline corrosion.
g) The Cross Overs should carry fly-over made of Electrostatic Polyester Epoxy Coating for cables
passage to ensure segregation of service
h) Crossovers are tested to a load bearing of 3.6 tons on the trap lid for heavy traffic areas
i) The Cross Overs should have provision to Power, Data & Telecom services.
j) The system must accommodate to run Mains Voltage & Extra Low Voltage cables.
k) The trap cover screws must be made from Stainless Steel for extra protection.
l) The system must have Positive Double Earthing connections.
m) Earth wire connector should be provided in all the boxes, and complies with the requirement of current IEE
regulation.
n) The complete system must have excellent protection against rust.
o) Four side blanks are made with removable perforations to suit ducts installation of upto 38-mm height.
p) The one-piece base frame design ensures minimum openings to prevent concrete seepage into the box
during casting of concrete or screeding.
q) Standards & Approvals – The system must comply with the relevant specification &IEC 61084 standards.
4.5 VERTICAL ACCESS BOXES

a) Vertical access boxes are made of very high quality materials to withstand heavy load and corrosion.
b) Vertical access boxes facilitate the connectivity of floor raceways to the equipments on the wall like the
distribution boards, so the product should be designed as “L” shaped
c) The Vertical access boxes should have provision to carry Power, Data & Telecom services
d) The vertical access boxes should have the duct entry knockouts of upto 38mm and also provision for carrying
the conduits to the wall
e) The vertical access boxes are made of electrostatic polyester epoxy coating to prevent the rust accumulation
5 .EARTHING
5.1 Earthing
The system shall be TNS with four wire supply system (R, Y, B, N and. E) brought from the main L T Panel. All
the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation and all metal conduits trunking, cable sheaths,
switchgear, distribution panels, light fittings and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded together and
connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an efficient earthing system. All metal work such as
pipe lines, ducts, cable trays, stair case railing etc shall be bonded to earth.
All earthing shall be in conformity with IS: 3043 1987, and the basic system of earthing shall be TNS.
5.2 Earthing Conductors
Earthing conductors shall be of copper for equipment neutral earthing, IT equipment earthing, Server / Hub
rack earthing, Isolation transformer neutral earthing etc. as per as mentioned in Schedule of quantities.
Copper \ GI conductor shall be used for general body earthing as mentioned in the Schedule of quantities.
Conductor shall be protected against mechanical injury and corrosion.
5.3 Sizing of Earthing Conductors
Sizing of earth conductor for receiving station, HV equipment and main LV panels etc. shall be based on actual
fault current calculated.
Earthing grid near substation station & earthing grids for other building shall be connected together at ground
floor for equipotential bonding & to minimize overall resistance of earthing path.
Earthing grids of electronic \ IT equipment shall be separate & shall not be connected to general earthing grids
with prior consent from user. Electronic \ IT equipment earthing grids for various building scan be interconnected
for equipotential bonding & to minimize overall resistance of earthing path.
For lighting & power circuits cross sectional area of earthing conductor shall not be smaller than half of the
largest current carrying conductor subject to an upper limit of 80 Sq.mm. If the area of the largest current
carrying conductor or bus bar exceeds 160 sq.mm then two or more earthing conductors shall be used in
parallel, to provide at least half the cross sectional area of the current carrying conductor or bus bars. All
fixtures, outlet boxes, junction boxes and power circuits up to 15 amps shall be earthed with PVC insulated
copper wire.
5.4 Connection of Earthing Conductors
All joints in tapes shall be with four rivets (minimum 2 nos. diagonally opposite in case of smaller width strip)
and shall be brazed in case of copper and by welding bolting in case of GI, wires shall be connected with crimping
lugs, all bolts shall have spring washers. Sub- mains earthing conductors shall run from the main distribution

panel to the sub distribution panel. Final distribution panel earthing conductors shall run from sub-distribution
panel.
Circuit earthing conductor shall run from the exposed metal of equipment and shall be connected to any point
on the main earthing conductor, or its distribution panel. Metal conduits, cable sheathing and armouring shall
be earthed at the ends adjacent to distribution panel at which they originate, or otherwise at the commencement
of the run by an earthing conductor in effective electrical contact with cable sheathing. Where equipment
is connected by flexible cord, all exposed metal parts of the equipment shall be earthed by means of an earthing
conductor enclosed with the current carrying conductors within the flexible cord. Switches, accessories, lighting
fitting etc, which are rigidly secured in effective electrical contact with a run of metallic conduit shall not be
considered as a part of the earthing conductor for earthing purposes, even though the run of metallic conduit
is earthed. The installation shall be complete in all respects for efficient and trouble free service. All work shall
be carried out in a first class quality and neat workmanship. Grounding conductors shall be handled carefully to
avoid kinking and cutting of the conductors during their installation. All exposed ground conductors run shall be
taken in a neat manner horizontal, vertical and parallel to the building walls or columns and shall not be laid
haphazardly. All connections to the grounding grid shall be made with earthingstrip welded to grid and bolted
at equipment ends.
5.5 Prohibited Connections
Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas, water or inflammable liquid, structural steel
work, metallic enclosures, metallic conduits and lightning protection system conductors shall not be used as
a means of earthing an installation or even as a link in an earthing system. The electrical resistance measured
between earth connection at the main L T panel and any other point on the completed installation shall be low
enough to permit the passage of current necessary to operate or circuit breakers, and shall not exceed 1 ohm.
All switches carrying medium voltage shall be connected with earth by two separate and distinct connections.
The earthing conductors inside the building wherever exposed shall be properly protected from mechanical injury
by running the same in G I pipe of adequate size. The overlapping in strips at joints where required, shall be
minimum 75 mm. The joints shall be riveted and brazed in case of copper and by welding / bolting in case of GI
in an approved manner. Sweated lugs of adequate capacity and size shall be used for termination of all conductor
wires above 6 sq.mm size. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the metal body is
cleaned of paint and other oily substances and properly tinned. Equi-potential bonding of all metallic structures
shall be done.
5.6. Ensured Earthing.

The following must always be ensured in earthing system.
- All earths must be interconnected at the earth pits. This includes generator neutrals, transformer neutrals,
transformer body, lightning protection system earths, UPS earths etc.
- Extraneous conductive parts such as gas pipes, other service pipes and ducting risers and pipes of fire
protection equipment and exposed metallic parts of the building structure.
5.7 Soil Resistivity.

The Contractor shall get the soil resistivity test done at his own cost of the area where earthing pits are to be
located before starting the installation.
5.8 Resistance to Earth

The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 1 ohm.
5.9 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanizing Process
General Requirements
I. Quality of Zinc
Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS:209-1992.
II. Coating Requirement

Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in accordance with
IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.
The weight of coating expressed in grams per square meter shall be calculated by dividing the total
weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface.
The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash and dross inclusions,
bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains bulky white deposits, blisters.
Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing and then
galvanizing. Jointing of earthing tape shall be by welding. All joints and cut ends shall be properly
painted with aluminium paint.
5.10 Earthing Electrode
Conventional Plate electrode (Alternate-I )

Copper Earth Electrode
Earthing electrode shall be600 x 600 x 3.15 mm thick tined copper plate electrode, with 2 Nos 50 x 6 mm
copper strips from earth plate electrode to inspection chamber, 50 mm dia medium class GI pipe, CI funnel
with 20 gauge GI wire mesh, masonry chamber 1000 x 500 mm with concrete base as per IS3043 with C I heavy
duty / chequered plate manhole cover with frame painted with bitumastic paint and packing with mixture of
charcoal and common salt around plate electrode including digging of pit up to permanent moisture level and as
per soil condition but not less than 3 meters and back filling as required.
GI Earth Electrode
Earthing electrode shall be 600 x 600 x 6.3 mm thick GI plate electrode, with 2 nos. 50 X 6 mm GI strips from
earth plate electrode to inspection chamber, 50 mm dia medium class GI pipe, CI funnel with 20 gauge GI wire
mesh, masonry chamber 1000 X 500 mm with concrete base as per IS3043 with CI manhole cover with frame
painted with bitumastic paint and packing with mixture of charcoal and common salt around plate electrode
including digging of pit upto permanent moisture level but not less than 3 meters and back filling as required.
5.11 Earth for UPS / Low volt / Servers

Clean earth shall be used for earthing UPS / Low volt / Server systemsand shall be separate from safety earthing.
Separate earthing electrode shall be provided in the ground and from this electrode, single core copper cable of
required size shall be taken as earth conductor to be laid in the vertical shaft. This cable shall be terminated on
each floor in a earth terminal box located in the shaft. The earth terminal box shall have 50x6mm copper busbar
mounted on insulators. The busbar shall have facility to terminate the incoming earth cable as well as required
number of outgoing earth conductors.
6. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
6.1 Lightning Protection System (Conventional Type - Option – I)
6.1.1 General
Installation of Lightning Protection System shall be strictly in accordance with IS: 2309-1989.
Zone of Protection
The zone of protection of a lightning conductor defines the space within which a lightning conductor provides
protection against a direct lightning stroke by diverting the stroke to it. For a single vertical conductor, this zone is
described as a cone with its apex at the highest point of the conductor and with an angle called as protective angle.
For the purpose of providing an acceptable degree of protection the protective angle of termination network shall be
considered as 45. Between two or more vertical conductors of equal height spaced at a distance not exceeding twice
their height, the protective angle within the space bounded the air termination shall be taken as 60 to the vertical,
while the protective angle away from the conductor will be taken as 45 to the verticals.
6.1.2 Material and Dimensions
The materials of lightning conductor, down conductors, earth termination etc. shall be copper / GI as per schedule of
quantities and shall be protected against corrosion.
All air terminations and down conductors shall be of copper / GI as per schedule of quantities and shall conform to IS
: 2309-1989.
6.1.3 Joints and Bonds
The lightning protective system shall have as few joints as far as possible. Wherever joints in the conductor are
necessary they shall be mechanically and electrically effective, and shall be riveted and brazed in case of copper
and by welding / bolting in case of GI in an approved manner.
6.1.4 Earth Terminations
Each down conductor shall have an independent earth termination. All the earth termination shall be inter connected
and shall be capable of isolation for testing.
6.1.5 Earth Electrode
Earth pits shall be installed in accordance with IS : 3043-1987.
The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 1 ohm.
6.1.6 Air Terminations Mesh (On the Terrace)

As an alternative to vertical air termination, grid of horizontal air termination may also be provided as per IS
2309. Often combination of both may be provided when structure to be protected for high ratio of length to
height. Air termination mesh shall be provided not greater than 10mx20m. Down conductor shall be not more
than 10 m apart where the building height in more than 20 m.
6.1.7 Down conductor
In order to reduce probability of damage it is often necessary to have several parallel current paths. As
recommended by IEC 62305 & IS 2309 equal spacing of down conductors, 25 x 3 mm copper \ AL \ GI external
strip, around the building perimeter
The down conductor must be kept in constant physical contact with the structure via conductive mounting clamps.
Each down conductor shall be directly connected at the dedicated earthing pit and the dedicated earth pit shall
be connected to the other earth pits in the earthing grid.
6.1.8 Fasteners
Conductors shall be securely fixed to the building to be protected by fasteners which shall be not more than 1.20
meter apart for horizontal run and 1.0 meters for vertical run.
7. UNINTERUPTED POWER SUPPLY
7.1 General:
7.1.1 This section includes specification and description of requirement of 3 phase plus 4 wire earth uninterruptible
supply (UPS) for providing high quality A.C. power.
7.2 Codes & Standards:
7.2.1 Performance, Electromagnetic Compatibility & Safety shall be as per applicable IEC.
7.3 Scope:
7.3.1 The scope shall include design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete UPS system and
related accessories including
a) Supply of complete UPS system as per specification.

b) Supply of Battery circuit breakers.
c) Supply of sealed maintenance free lead acid batteries with Battery racks for total 30 minutes Backup.
d) Complete testing of all systems including UPS operation under linear and non- linear load condition
etc.
e) Delivery at site, handling, installation of complete system including interconnection from the UPS
system to batteries and to input/ output panels switches. All interconnections shall be done using
multistrand Flexible Cu. conductor cables of appropriate sizes. Outgoing neutral cables shall be of
double capacity.
f) Supply, testing of system on load at the works.
g) Service backup by engineer till system is fully operational as and when required.
7.4 Functional & Statutory Requirements:
h) The systems shall be 3 phases Input + 4 wire +Earth / 3 phases+ 4 wire +Earth Output, static ON
LINE configuration UPS with all latest functional facilities.
i) The system shall confirm all IEC regulation minimum for installation and relevant IS standards,
statutory requirements.
j) Complete Electronic and switching assemblies shall be mounted in one single metal cabinet 14SWG
CRCA sheet fabricated and powder coated finish with due ventilation

7.5 System Specification:
7.5.1 The system requirement are as follows:
- UPS 3 phase 4 wire input -3 phase 4 wire output with total 30 Minutes Battery backup 485
UPS systems shall be IGBT based with latest facilities and RS 485 interface card with
potential free contacts for attaching it to BMS system for central monitoring.
- Configuration: The system shall have following operation features.
 Normal Condition: Supply the load with power flowing from the normal A.C. source
through rectifier and inverter with battery-connected parallel with rectifier output.
 Abnormal Condition: Whenever supply deviates on voltage, frequency or waveform

beyond the specific limits, the battery bank supplies constant output for load through
inverter.
k) The output supplied to the loads shall be constant without switching or disturbance, when the main
A.C. Supply fails.
l) The same way when normal supply returns the inverter is synchronized with external source and load
is transferred.
m) The rectifier shall also charge the discharged batteries on return of normal supply and shall
automatically shift to float charge when batteries are fully charged.
n) When any UPS element fails and normal supply is available the static by pass switch shall switch the
load directly.
o) The bypass switch operates in same way above as above in case of UPS system fault and returns load
to UPS system once fault is cleared.
p) UPS should not go to bypass automatically when battery test failure.
q) Service Conditions: System should be able to operate in following operational conditions without
derating or damage.
r) Ambient temperature : 0o C to 50o C
s) Humidity : 0 to 95% relative.
Characteristics for
t) Input voltage shall be 433±5%V 4 wire + Earth, 50Hz.
u) Output voltage 400 V 3 phase, 4 wire + Earth, 50 Hz.
The system performance under steady state and transient load conditions shall remain within specified
limits for entire backup period when supplied through batteries.
7.5.2 Mechanical Features:
The enclosures shall be 14 SWG CRCA sheet treated & powder coated pertaining to IS 8623 unless otherwise
specified. Also redundant fans & blowers shall be provided such that fresh air is drawn from bottom and let
out from top rear
7.5.3 Performance:
 Overall system efficiency shall be specifying in specification sheet attached with BOQ.
 Noise level: The normal noise level emanating from machine when measured at 1.2 meters
under normal conditions shall be less than 60Db.
 Maximum inrush: Maximum inrush charging current shall be 6 times full load current.
 Output voltage and frequency should be 400V±2% and 50±0.5% respectively. This voltage &
frequency tolerance should not be exceeded over the full range of load (balanced or
unbalanced) and full range of battery voltage.
 Overload Capacity: 125% of full load for 10 minutes and 150% for 30 seconds.
 Transition Response Time (TRT):- 15 ms.
7.6 System Components:
 The device shall include rectifier/ Battery Charger, Inverter, Static bypass, system
controls with hermetically sealed components. These components shall have suitable
independent housing in cabinet.

 All assemblies shall be arranged for easy maintenance & plug-in modules & shall have adequate
supports.
 Transient voltage surge suppressors shall be provided for protection of components from
transient & switching surges.
7.6.1 Rectifier Charger:
 The rectifier shall be of adequate capacity to supply inverter under full load conditions &
simultaneously charge the batteries from full discharged state.
 Inherent harmonics suppressions in the Rectifier design shall reduce the harmonic as per
attached specification sheet %.
 Float charging requirements for battery bank as per manufacturer’s recommendations for
voltage & charging current shall be fulfilled.
 3 phase self-cooled double winding dry type transformer shall be provided at input (tuned
isolation transformer).
7.6.2 Battery:
 Batteries shall be sealed maintenance free Lead-acid batteries, mounted on racks with battery
disconnect & intercell connectors. Scope includes battery bank connections and providing
safety.
 Barriers for all busbars and cable connection leads on battery racks. Battery MCCB should be
provided with reverse polarity protection. Time required for charging the battery when
batteries are fully discharged is 15 Hrs without interruptions.
 On line battery – testing facility shall be provided as a feature when UPS is operating on normal
mode. If the battery bank fails on test the load shall be automatically transferred to static
bypass with alarm.
7.6.3 Inverter:
Pulse – width modulated with sinusoidal output.

1. Static bypass switch shall be full rated continuous duty rated switch.
2. Maintenance bypass: The switch shall be located behind lockable door. Key interlock shall
be provided for the bypass with the static bypass such that it can be operated only when
SBS is in service
7.7 Indications & Control:
All displays, indications & basic system controls shall be provided on control panel on UPS cabinet.
& shall be supported by sensors, transducers, Relays, wiring terminals as required. All indications
shall be labeled with LED displays or Plain language /LCD displays.
7.7.1 Quantity Indications:
a) Input voltage phase & line.

b) Input current phase & line.
c) Bypass input Voltage & frequency.
d) System output voltage phase & line.
e) System output current phase & frequency.
f) D.C.Bus voltage.
g) Battery current & direction.
h) Battery discharge elapsed time.
7.7.2 Visual Indications:
i) Normal operation.
j) Load on battery
k) Inverter OFF
l) Alarm condition.

7.7.3 Alarm Indications:
Alarm system should have audio (Hotter, with a manual alarm silence option), visual indications
(LED) for following failures and reporting over digital interface.
a) Input A/C under voltage, over voltage, under frequency & over frequency.
b) Input & inverter out of Synchronization.
c) Input single phasing.
d) Input revere phase sequence.
e) Battery system alarm.
f) Control power failure.
g) Fan failure.
h) UPS overloaded.
i) Battery operation end.
j) Battery under voltage shut down.
k) Battery charging control fault.
l) Isolation Transformer overheat.
m) Inverter overload.
n) Static bypass overheat.
o) Inverter fuse blow.
p) Inverter power supply fault.
q) Inverter O/P under voltage / over voltage.
r) Inverter contract open.
s) Inverter sensor fault.
7.7.4 Control on Front Board:
a) Inverter ON-OFF.
b) UPS start.
c) Battery test – Online.
d) Alarm accepts/ reset.
e) Output voltage adjustments.
Complete mimic including single line diagram of UPS shall be provided on front board.
7.7.5 The metering instruments used shall be digital with 0.5 class accuracy.
7.8 Drawings / Data for UPS:
Following drawings & manuals / information shall be submitted in at least THREE copies at appropriate
stages & for handling over the system.
1. Manufacturer’s data for product, features, components & performance along with the offer.
2. Operation & maintenance manual with:
a) List of recommended spares & replacement components.
b) Detail operating instructions covering operations in normal & abnormal conditions.
c) Shop drawings showing detail fabrication, assembly of components, internal & interconnecting wiring,
dimensions, plans & views, installation details access & clearance etc for approval.
d) Product certificates for Brought out items.
e) Factory test certificates & Inspection report.
7.9 Quality Tests:
Entire system shall be completely checked & tested for all functions, displays including :
a) Full load test.
b) Transient Analysis.
c) Over voltage test.
d) Power failure test.
e) Efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75% & 100% loads.
7.10 Execution:
7.10.1 Installation:
1. The entire system shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations & instructions
including all interconnections for supply & control circuits.
2. A minimum working space shall be maintained around the equipment as per shop drawings,
Consultant’s reference drawings & relevant standards.
3. All components shall be clearly identified using labels including battery cells individually.
4. Services of authorized representative or manufacturer for supervision of installation,
connections, testing, & adjustments shall be provided.
5. All cables shall be properly routed through cable trays and connected using proper lugs. All
battery terminals need to be shrouded.
7.10.2 Testing and Commissioning:
Under supervision of manufacturer‘s representative all system functions, operations, protective

features shall be checked & preset to ensure compliance or specifications.
Test the system as per recommendations & test listed below using pre- calibrated instruments.
1. Simulation of malfunctions to verify protective device operations.
2. Duration of supply on emergency. Low battery voltage alarm & shutdown, transfer & restoration
of normal supply.
In case of test any shortfalls / faults, the same shall be rectified & test procedure shall be again
repeated to establish satisfactory performance.
7.10.3 Cleaning:
On completion of installation, testing of the system all components, cabinets etc. shall be cleaned &
unwanted material, debris shall be removed from site. Scratches dents if any shall be cleaned &
touched up to match the original finish.
8. EXTERNAL / STREET LIGHTING POLES
8.1. Galvanised Conical Poles
8.1.1 3 Meter High Pole
3 meter high (2.5 meter above and 0.5 meter below ground) shall be 75 mm dia, 3.25 mm wall thickness MS
tubular straight pole with a cast aluminium adaptor for post top mounting. Pole shall be provided with 300 mm
x 300 mm x 6 mm thick MS base plate. Foundation for the pole shall be of cement concrete in 1:2:4 rates (1
part cement, 2 parts coarse sand and 4 parts stone aggregate) IP-55 weather proof junction box shall also be
provided to accommodate 1 No. 3 phase and neutral terminal block and 1 No. 6 amps SP MCB including 2.5
sq.mm PVC insulated copper conductor wires from the terminal block to the fixture and 2 Nos. 32 mm dia GI
sleeves of suitable length shall be provided to the junction box.
8.2 Cast Aluminium Poles
Design & Construction
Ornamental cast aluminum pole shall be made out of cast aluminum as per requirements of IS: 202 (1993).
Casting of all pole Sections shall be accurately done from permanent moulds and cores of the design submitted
to Achieve uniformity in all design aspects in internal and external shape of the unit. All sections shall be free
from defects like blow holes, porosity, hard spots, cracks, hot tears, cold shuts, distortion, sand and slag inclusion
and other harmful defects. All the casted sections used in the pole shall be free from welding of any kind used
to repair it. The casted sections shall be machined from all the locations used to insert the pieces into one
another using either threading or socket method. Accuracy of all machined parts shall be maintained throughout
a lot for random replacements of sections if and when required. All the threaded joints shall be mechanically
tightened and sealed using industrial tools to make the entire unit vandal resistant.
Aesthetic appearance
All the grooves and carvings of the pole unit shall be free from any kind of distortion for a pleasing aesthetic
appearance.
Material

Cast aluminum material used for casting pole unit shall be Grade FG-220 types, as described in IS: 202 and shall
have minimum tensile strength of the order of 200 N/mmsq.
Pre-treatment
Each and every casted piece shall be subject to Sand blasting at a pressure of 10-15 kgf to remove all its external
dirt and sand remains etc..
Painting and Finishing
Entire unit shall be given an extensive three stage treatment with PU based two packZn-Ph primer and paint
prescribed for CI surfaces to make it absolutely rust and corrosion proof, as well as giving it a pleasing
appearance. PU based paint shall be MRF make or equivalent.
Thickness of the coating
A minimum of 80 microns of coating thickness shall be achieved on the final piece.
Mounting arrangement
Pole unit shall be grouted using 4 nos. anchor bolts of size M-16x450 mm confirming to 6.8 Gr. as per IS 2062.
Pole unit shall be grouted on a foundation made out of 1:3:6 concrete cement after excavating the earth with
proper cable sleeves etc.. laid in the foundation itself.
Dimensions of the unit
Total height = 3000 mm
Dia of base plate = 380 mm
Pitch Circle Dia = 335 mm
Description of top bracket / arms
Single double decorative arm shall be provided on the pole (as asked for in B.O.Q.), secured with the help of two
nos. bolts outreach not less than 400 mm.
Service window
A service window of the size 150 mm x 100 mm shall be provided in the base of the pole to allow access to
electrical connections and terminations. It shall be covered with MS plate and proper rubber gaskets shall be
provided to prevent any ingress of water etc..
Electrical connections
Four way connectors shall be provided along with Slide lock and 1 no. 6 amps Sp MCB including 2.5 sqmm PVC
insulated copper conductor wires from the terminal block to the fixture and 2 nos. 32 mm dia GI sleeves of
suitable length shall be provided upto the service window. An earth boss is provided on the control plate along
with connectors and interrupters.
2. LIFT
Supply of Elevator spares, testing & re-commissioning of Existing Elevator.
The supply of elevator spares are as mentioned below but not limited & if any additional item required to
recommissoned the lift shall be considered without extra cost.
MPU Card,Cabin Fan,5V DC Power Supply card,IR Sensor,reed Switch Assembly,11KW Fuji Inverter,Limit
Switches,3000VA UPS,800 VA UPS,door lock contact,emergency alarm unit,emergency lights,etc.

Testings
General
At the completion of the work, the contractor shall carry out the pre-commissioning as well as commissioning
checks as given below on the entire installation and records be maintained for reference of any statutory
authority, Client or their representatives.
Pre - Commissioning Checks
Note - Pre- Commissioning checks are to be carried out by Electrical contractor in presence of Project Management Team.
Sr. Component Points to be checked

No.
1 Wires  Correct identification of each wire by continuity check and providing correct
ferrules as per approved drawings.
 Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper copper lugs.
 Wires are dressed and bunched properly.
 Connections are properly tightened.
 Not more than two wires are connected on any one side of terminal.
 IR values of the circuit are measured and recorded.
2 Switch boxes &  Wires are connected properly as per wiring diagram.
Receptacles  Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper copper lugs is done.
 Earthing connection is made properly.
 Functional check is OK
3 LT Panels \ UPS panels \  External cables are glanded properly.

APFC panels  Wires are connected properly as per wiring diagram.
 Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper copper lugs is done.
 Two Earthing connections are made properly.
 Functional check is OK
 Check proper mechanical operations of circuit breaking devices including
alignment of trolley for drawout type device.
 Check contact alignment. And proper sequence of closing and opening of
main and arcing contacts.
 Check electrical relays, meters & controls for correct wiring.
 Check polarity and connections of all instrument transformers.
4 Bus ducts \ rising Mains  Visual checks for installation & support
 Check Insulation resistance with 1000 V megger
 Check Earth continuity
5 Light fittings  Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper copper lugs is done.
6 Lighting Poles  Concrete foundation is firmly set and cured.

 Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper copper lugs is done.
7 HT \ LT Cables  Cable identification tags are provided at both ends.

 Cable entry in all equipment is through proper sized glands.
 Cable termination is made by proper crimping type lugs.
 Not more than two conductors are connected on any one side of terminal.
8 Earthing  The resistance value of each earth electrode are measured and recorded.
 Total resistance of earthing system should be as per the design value and in
any case, shall not be more than 1 Ohm as per IS-3043.
 Continuity test for earth continuity conductors with ELV tester.
Commissioning Checks
Note –Commissioning checks are to be made in following sequence starting from Transformer / DG to main panel to last
light fitting. All results of testing and observations are to be preserved for record and reference by any statutory authority.
Sr. Component Points to be checked

No.
5. Main LT panel \ UPS  All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.
panels \ APFC panels  Incoming line voltage is correct as per panel incoming meter or checked by
tong tester.
 Energize only control circuits and carry out closing and tripping operations (
where AC supply is derived from main supply and used for operation, the
switch gear bus may be energized).
 Check operation of electrical interlocks.
 Check tripping of breaker by manual operation of relay.
 Check operation of mechanical closing and tripping devices.
 If incoming line voltage is correct, switch on out going feeder one by one and
note that each one is kept ON for 5 – 10 minutes without any problem.
 Residual voltage shall be measured after switching of the capacitors for
APFCR panel
 Discharge resistor shall be tested for its working for APFCR panel

6 Switch boxes &  All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.
Receptacles  Check the voltage with test lamp.
 Switch on the circuit.
7 Lighting Panels  All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.
 Incoming line voltage is correct as per panel incoming meter or checked by
tong tester.
 If incoming line voltage is correct, switch on out going feeder one by one and
note that each one is kept ON for 5 – 10 minutes without any problem.
8. Light fittings  All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.
9 Lighting Poles  All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.
 Check the voltage with test lamp.
10 Earthing  Check if all earth electrodes in earth pits for it’s correct installation and
connection to earth grid.
 Check if all protective conductors from the earth electrodes to grid and from
grid up to all electrical equipment are made correctly.
 Remove the protective conductor / grid connection with earth electrode and
measure earth electrode resistance by using earth megger.
 Repeat above procedure for all electrodes.
 Ensure that total earth resistance of the installation is less than 1 mega-
ohms.
Apart from above test, the below mentioned test shall be performed for electrical equipments existing/
installed on site –Kalabhavan at Sancoale

Testing of Existing Transformer

The following tests are to be carried out jointly in presence of concern contractor in presence of client /
client’s representative.
1) Routine Test as per IS 2026
2) Specific Resistance Test
3) Insulation Resistance of HV, LV, in between HV and LV, Winding and Body.
Test Voltages
a. Impulse (1.2 / 50 micro second wave) withstand voltage
H.V. Winding – 75 KV (Peak)
b. One Minute power frequency withstand voltage
H.V. Winding – 28 KV
L.V. Winding – 3 KV
The test results of joint inspection shall be recorded on the test report of Transformer with its Sr. No.
The Engineer in charge or his representative should check all-connections on H.T. side, L.T. side and earths and
insulation and earth resistance test should be carried out and results obtained shall be recorded. .
After above formalities the Transformer, should be charged/commissioned in presence of Engineer in charge or his
representative along with load trials and shall be handed over to the department for beneficial use
After charging the Transformer, line, phase voltages, and line current shall be measured, and the same shall be
submitted. Correct phase sequence to be set.
Following test certificates shall be submitted:
1. Manufacturer's original certificate of Transformer as stipulated in IS from the employer.
2. Test certificate for dielectric strength of oil as per IS.
3. Test results of IR values.
4. Test results of all earth electrodes.
5. Readings of Voltages & currents at the time of commissioning.
Testing of Existing Metering Cubicle

General procedure for testing and commissioning of relays shall be in general accordance with good practice.
Commissioning checks and tests shall include in addition to checking of all small wiring connections, relays calibration and
setting tests by secondary injection method or primary injection method. Primary injection tests will be preferred for relay
calibration and setting.
Checks and tests shall include the following:-
a) Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.
b) Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.
c) Insulation tests
d) HV test
e) The complete panel shall be tested with 5000 V megger for insulation between poles and poles to earth. Insulation
test of secondaries of CTs and VTs to earth shall be conducted using 500V megger.
f) The trip supply battery unit (where provided) shall be checked for liquid level and density and the voltage
measured.
g) If situation demands consultant/client may ask to carry retest of HV (at 80% of earlier test voltage) at site.
TESTING of 11 KV 630 amps VCB

Type Tests.
Units should be type tested in accordance with IEC standards 60056, 62271-102, 60265,
62271-200, 62271-105,60529 and 60694.
Routine tests
Routine tests should be carried out in accordance with IEC 62271-200 standards. These tests should be ensure the
reliability of the unit.
Below listed test should be performed as routine tests of units:
 Withstand voltage at power frequency
 Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit
 Partial discharge test for the tank
 Withstand voltage on the auxiliary circuits
 Operation of functional locks, interlocks, signaling devices and auxiliary devices
 Suitability and correct operation of protections, control instruments and electrical
 connections of the circuit breaker operating mechanism
 Verification of wiring
 Visual inspection
 Time travel characteristics measurement facility for Breaker should be available with the manufacturer to asses
the quality of RMU.
Testing of Existing DG
The testing of DG shall be carried out as per routine test.
DG set shall be tested in presence of Engineer in charge by authorized representative at site;
 Fuelled trial far 1 hour. Fuel, lubricating oil, etc shall be arranged by the agency.
 10% overload trial far a new hour within 12 hrs test.
Testing of Existing All LT & AMF Panels

Testing of panels shall be as per following codes:
i. IS: 8623 (Part-I) 1977 for factory built assemblies of switch gear for voltages upto and including 1000
VAC.
ii. IS : 13947 : 1993 Degree of protection
iii. IS: 5578 & 11353: 1985 Arrangement of bus bars.
General procedure for testing and commissioning of relays shall be in general accordance with good practice.
Commissioning checks and tests shall include in addition to checking of all small wiring connections, relays
calibration and setting tests by secondary injection method or primary injection method. Primary injection tests
will be preferred for relay calibration and setting.. Checks and tests shall include the following:-
h) Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.
i) Interlock function checks.
j) Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.
k) HV test
l) Trip tests
m) The complete panel shall be tested with 1000 V megger for insulation between poles and poles to earth.
Insulation test of secondaries of CTs and VTs to earth shall be conducted using 500V megger.
Testing of existing UPS
Entire system shall be completely checked & tested for all functions, displays including :
a) Full load test.
b) Transient Analysis.
c) Over voltage test.
d) Power failure test.
e) Efficiency at 25%, 50%, 75% & 100% loads.

Testing of Existing HT / LT Cables
The existing cables shall dismantled and then shall be tested as per below mentioned tests.Ater testing the same
shall be terminated.
Cables shall be tested at site for all routine tests as per IS including the following tests before being dispatched
to site by the project team.

b) Continuity test.
c) Earth test.(in armoured cables)
d) Hi Pot Test.
Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phase and earth for each length
of cable, before and after jointing
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice and Electricity Rules. The
Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, equipment and labour for conducting the above tests and
shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the
Owner’s site representative, results will be noted and signed by all present and record be maintained.
DOCUMENTATION
An instruction manual should be provided with necessary information for receiving, handling, storage, installation,
operation and maintenance.
Routine test certificate should be follow each unit, and standard schematic drawings should be delivered for Ring Main
Units. Compact Switchgear should be have drawings that consist of system single line drawings, general arrangement and
schematic drawings for order specific units.
All drawings shall confirm to International Standards Organization (ISO) “A” series of drawing sheets/Indian Standards
Specification IS : 11065. All dimensions and data shall be in ink and suitable for microfilming. All dimensions and data
shall be in S.I. Units.
List of drawings and Documents
The bidder shall furnish four sets of relevant descriptive and illustrative published
literature, pamphlets and the following drawings for preliminary study along with offer.
 General outline drawings showing dimensions and shipping weights, quantity of
Insulating media.
 Sectional views showing the general constructional features of the circuit breaker
 Including operating mechanism, arcing chambers, contacts with lifting dimensions for maintenance.
 Drawings showing control cabinets and circuit diagrams for operating mechanism.
 Schematic diagrams of breaker offered for control and supervision
 Structural drawings for support structures.
 Foundation plan and loading data and foundation design.
 Drawings showing the complete operation cycle of the Ring Main Unit with description.

SECTION – R
FIRE FIGHTING WORKS
1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
General:
Fire safety in building has become very important consideration in construction and maintenance. A normal
office building has fire load in the form of large quantity of papers and furnishing. Buildings like Hospitals,
Laboratories, Auditorium, Libraries, and Museum etc. require fire safety provisions by virtue of their type of
occupancy and importance irrespective of their height. The design and installation of a fire fighting system is of
utmost importance. The fire fighting installation on completion will have to be got cleared from the local fire
fighting authorities (Fire Service) for its efficacy, suitability and usability by the Fire Service in the event of a fire.
Following types of water based fixed fire fighting installations are normally provided in buildings:
Hydrant system
Wet Riser
Down Corner
Automatic Sprinkler
The design of fire fighting system for a building shall base as per the provisions in National Building Code of India
(Part IV) (Amended upto date) and also considering the provisions in the Development Control Rules of local
body/authority.
The operating pressure of individual hydrant shall be between 5.5 kg/cm2 to 3.5.kg/cm2 and the operating
pressure of the furthest level hydrant from main pump shall be minimum 3.5 kg/cm 2
The pipeline will be designed in such a way that it should be possible to get discharge at any location.
Specifications:
This part deals with the specifications of following pumps.

Specification No(s)
1.1 1. Main Fire Pump (Single Stage) (FF-MFP/SSC)
2. Jockey Pumps (FF-MFP/JP)
3. Booster Pumps (FF-MFP/BP)
Scope:
Supplying, installing, testing, perfect aligning, proper leveling and commissioning of Fire service
main/jockey/booster pump single/multi stage having specified discharge and head with required HP or similar to
with minimum parameters, confirming to IS:1520 with specified size of suction and delivery pipes, coupled with
squirrel cage. A.C. induction motor. The pump set shall be erected in alignment on cement concrete foundation.
The Main Fire pumps should be able to deliver minimum operating pressure of 3.5kg/cm2 at highest and farthest
hydrant.
Material:
Pump Body:
The centrifugal pumps shall conform to IS 1520. The pump casing shall be of heavy section close grained cast
iron and designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure. The casing shall be provided with shaft seal
arrangement as well as flanges for suction and delivery pipe connections as required.
Impeller:
The impeller shall be bronze. This shall be shrouded type with machined collars. Wear rings, where fitted to the
impeller, shall be of the same material as the impeller. The impeller surface shall be smooth finished for minimum
frictional loss. The impeller shall be secured to the shaft by a key.
Shaft:
The shaft shall be of stainless steel EN-8/C-40 and shall be accurately machined. The shaft shall be balanced to
avoid vibration at any speed within the operating range of the pump.
Shaft Sleeve:
The shaft sleeve shall be of bronze
Bearing:
The bearing shall be of stainless steel and of ball or roller type suitable for duty involved. These shall be grease
lubricated and shall be provided with grease nipples /cups. The bearings shall be effectively sealed against
leakage of lubricant of lubricant or entry of dust or water.
Shaft seal:
The shaft seal shall be mechanical type so as to allow minimum leakage. A drip well shall be provided beneath
the seal.
Motor:
Suitable HP squirrel cage induction motor, TEFC (totally enclosed fan cooled) synchronous speed 2900 RPM,
suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3 phase 50 Hz AC with IP 55 protection for enclosure, horizontal foot mounted
type with Class-“F” insulation, conforming to IS-325.

Body: Cast iron
Rotor Shaft: Stainless steel
Bearing: Refer specification for bearing under Pump above.
Winding: Class “F” insulated copper winding.
Base plate: Fabricated from Mild steel, foundation bolts etc.
Cement Concrete Foundation: Cement, Sand and Water, in 1:2:4 ratio.
Anti Vibrating Pads: Made from high quality rubber of specified grade and strength.
Hardware: Mild Steel
Method of Construction:
The surface of the pump foundation should be chipped with pneumatic hammer or sharp pointed chisel. The
teak wood box of appropriate size shall be placed and filled with cement concrete in 1:2:4 ratio with 20 x 25 mm
stone metal and required size and strength of foundation nut & bolts. The necessary curing and finishing shall
be done in approved manner. The M.S. fabricated base plate of suitable size and strength should be fixed with
anti-vibration rubber pads. Proper leveling and alignment shall be observed before tightening of foundation
bolts. Both the pump and motor shall be placed on common base plate frame with perfect alignment, proper
leveling. The pump should be connected to pipe line with M.S. flanges, caskets, nut bolt etc. and shall be checked
for the leakages. The coupling guard shall be provided with nut bolts of required size. The pump shall be tested
for 3.5 kg/cm2 pressure at highest and farthest point of the building for minimum 2 hours. The necessary test
certificate from manufacturer of pump and motor shall be produced. The motor should have efficiency more
than 90% and power factor above 0.80.
Mode of Measurement:
Executed quantity shall be measured on number basis.
1.2 Pipes
Specification No. (FF-PP)
Scope:
Supplying erecting C class (Heavy Duty) galvanized iron pipe, ISI mark of specified diameter with screwed
sockets, Joints & necessary G.I. fittings such as sockets, check nuts, elbows, bends, tees, reducers, enlarger,
plugs, etc. including electric resistance welding (ERW), fixing with clamps and all connected works such as
excavation, drilling holes in wall, slabs, backfilling & making good the damages.
Material:
The galvanized iron pipes shall be of type and diameter as specified and shall comply with I.S.1239-1973 and
1969 for the specified type. The specified diameter of the pipes shall refer to the inside diameter of the bore
pipes. The fittings of which the galvanizing has been damaged shall not be used. For the firefighting works, the
C Class pipes and accessories shall be used.
Anti-Corrosive Protection on Under Ground Pipe:
Corrosion protection tape shall be wrapped on M.S. Pipes to be buried in ground. This corrosion protection tape
shall comprise of coat tar/asphalt component supported on fabric of organic of organic or inorganic fiber and
minimum 4mm. thick and conform to requirement of IS: 10221-Code of practice for coating and wrapping of

underground mild steel pipe line. Before application of corrosion protection tape all foreign matter on pipe shall
be removed with the help of wire brush and suitable primer shall be applied over the pipe thereafter. The primer
shall be allowed to dry until the solvent evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and tape shall
be furnished by the same manufacturer. Corrosion protection tape shall then be wound around the pipe in spiral
fashion and bounded completely to the pipe. There shall be no air pocket or bubble beneath the tape. The
overlaps shall be 15mm and 250mm shall be left uncoated on either end of pipe to permit installation and welding.
This area shall be coated and wrapped after the pipe line is installed.
The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. If application is done in
cold weather, the surface of the pipe shall be pre-heated until it is warm to touch and traces of moisture are
removed and then primer shall be applied and allowed to dry. No joint shall be located in the thickness of the
walls. If the pipe is required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall be filled smooth and
any obstruction in the bore shall be entirely eliminated. The rate includes wastage in cutting etc. When the pipe
is to be fixed to walls it shall be fixed with standard bracket, clips or holder bates keeping the pipe about 12mm
clear of the wall. The pipe shall be fixed to the wall horizontally and vertically and parallel to one another when
more than one pipe is laid unless unavoidable. The supporting clips etc. for the pipe shall be spaced at about
two meters or so as necessary. When holes are not left during construction they shall be cut into the walls or
slabs, etc. to pass the pipe through or to fix clamps, etc. after fixing of the pipes, clamps etc. these shall be
neatly made good.
Pressure Testing:
All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and a half times the maximum operating
pressure, but not less than 10 kg/cm2 for a period not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed
during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. Piping repaired subsequent to
the above pressure test shall be re-tested in the same manner. System may be tested in sections and such
sections shall be securely capped. Pressure gauges may be capped off during pressure testing of the installation.
Galvanized iron pipes of specified diameter and type and galvanized iron fittings with ERW shall be erected on
MS angle support with one coat of etch primer and two coats of Post Office fire red enamel paint duly tested to
1.5 times of working pressure. Excavating and back filling trenches including dewatering, cutting through walls,
floor etc. and making site good. Laying, jointing, and fixing the pipe with the fittings including cutting pipes,
wastage and threading the ends. At all the road crossings the pipes shall be laid lower than the crust of the
road. During excavation if, any other service pipes (Water, electric, telephone, etc) come across, these shall be
carefully protected and supported. Any damages done shall be made good. The pipe shall be laid on a well
compacted bed in the trench. The trench after laying the pipe shall be refilled except at the joints in layers and
manually rammed. Care shall be taken to see that no earth, etc. gets inside the pipes. The filling shall be kept
raised by about 5cm. for subsequent settlement. Bedding and cushioning of murum, good earth, or sand shall
be provided for the pipe in case of trench through rock. The trench at the joints shall be filled similarly after
satisfactory testing of the pipe. Any surplus excavated stuff shall be disposed of satisfactorily without causing
nuisance.
Measurement shall be for one metre of each type and diameter of pipe laid complete with fittings, clamps etc. as
specified. The lengths shall be measured net on the straight and bends along the center line of the pipes and
fittings correct up to a cm.
1.3 Foot Valve with Strainer (-ve suction)

Scope:
Specification No. (FF-VL/FV)
Supplying and installing cast iron foot valve of specified diameter with strainer conforming to IS: 4038 with Gun
metal seat (flapper), nut bolts, gasket, washers etc. for negative suction.
Material:
Housing, seat discs and disc plates: Grey cast iron

Hinge pins and disc guide: High tensile Stainless Steel bars
Strainers: a) Grey cast iron b) Galvanized steel.
Disc faces: a) Vegetable tanned leather (Min.3 mm thick), b) Leaded tin bronze, c) Natural rubber (with
reinforcement of cotton canvas)
Flange jointing nature: a) Compressed fiber board or rubber minimum 1.5mm thick. The fiber board shall be
impregnated with chemically neutral oil and shall have a smooth and hard surface. b) Compressed asbestos fiber.
The footwall with strainer shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, nut bolts to be erected at required position
and fitted firmly to pipe with proper alignment so as the joints should be leak proof with shellac and other material
required including necessary labour and required tools and plants.
1.4 Sluice valve
Specification No. (FF-VL/SV)
Scope:
Supplying and installing cast iron double flange sluice valve of specified diameter conforming to IS:780, ISI mark,
having cast iron body and gun metal working parts with nut bolts, gaskets etc. and tested to 1.5 times of working
pressure, in an approved manner.
Material:
Body: a) Brass b) Leaded tin bronze

Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin bronze b) Forged brass, c) Brass
Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland nut, gland flange, body
seat rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where renewable): a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Extruded brass
rod, c) Forged brass d) Brass
Stem, hinge pin and plug: a) Extruded brass b) High tensile brass, c) Forged Brass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel.
Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand Wheel: Cast iron
Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre
Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute b) Asbestos
Spring: Phosphor bronze wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber
The double flange sluice valve shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts, etc. to be fitted to pipe,
accessories with washers, spring washers, check nuts as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof
including necessary labour and required tools and plants.

Mode of Measurement;
1.5 Butterfly valves
Specification No. (FF-VL/BFV)
Scope:
Supplying & installing cast iron double flange butterfly valve of size 75/80mm. dia confirming to IS: 13095 having
cast iron body. FG 220 Nitrite rubber replaceable seat with Moulded “O” ring, C.I. powder coated disc flow
control complete & instead to 1.5 times of working pressure in an approved manner.
Material:
Body: Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron Carbon steel.

Disc: a) Cast iron Spheroid graphite iron carbon steel, b) Stainless steel Gun metal c) Aluminium bronze
Shaft: a) Stainless steel b) Carbon steel Aluminium bronze Nickel copper alloy
Seating ring Seal retaining ring: a) Stainless steel, b) Gun metal aluminium bronze deposited metal suitable
for duty or resilient material.
Seat: Elastomers
Shaft bearing seals: Manufacturer’s standards suitable for duty.
Internal fastenings: Stainless steel
External bolting: Carbon steel
The double flange butterfly valve shall be fitted with provided flange, gaskets. Nut, bolts etc. to be fitted to pipe,
accessories with washers, spring washers, check nuts as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof
including necessary labour and required tools and plants.
1.6 Non Return Valves
Specification No. (FF-VL/NRV)
Scope:
Supplying & installing double flange NRV of specified diameter conforming to IS: 5312 (Part-1), ISI mark, having
cast iron body and gun metal working parts with nut bolts, gaskets etc.and tested to 1.5 times of working
pressure in an approved manner.
Material:
Body, cover, door, bearing holder: Grey cast iron

Hinge pin, door pin and door suspension pin: Stainless steel
Body seat rings: Leaded tin bronze
Door face ring: Leaded tin bronze
Bearing bushes/Bearing block: Leaded tin bronze
Plugs for hinged pin/Air release plug: Leaded tin bronze
Bolts: Carbon steel
Nuts: Carbon steel

Gaskets: Rubber
Hinges: Grey cast iron
P N Rating and Test Pressure:
S.No. PN Rating Test for Test Pressure Test Duration in

(Gauge)MPs minutes
1 PN 1.0 Body 1.5 5

Seat 1.0 2
2. PN 1.6 Body 1.5

Seat 1.0
The double flange NRV shall be fitted to pie with provided flange, gaskets, and nut bolts etc. accessories with
washers, spring washers, and check nuts as required with roper alignment so as to be leak proof including
necessary labour and required tools and plants.
1.7 Hydrant Valves (Landing Valves)
Specification No. (FF-VL/HV)
Scope:
Supplying and installing gun metal single outlet, hydrant valve Morris pattern, oblique type, conforming to
IS:5290, ISI mark, with G.M. blanks cap and M.S. or G.I. chain in an approved manner.
Material:
Valve Body, bonnet, stop valve, Check nut, female outlet: Bronze/Aluminium alloy or Stainless Steel as per
BOQ
Hand Wheel: M.S. or C.I. (Black painted)
Spring: Made of phosphor wire
Washer, Gasket: Rubber
Blank Cap: ABS plastic
The hydrant valve shall be connected with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts etc. with use of required tools and
plants.
The water discharge shall be not less than 900 lpm for single head and 1800 lpm for double head valves at
7kg/cm2
1.8 Priming Tank
Specification No. (FF-VL/FFA/PT)
Scope:

Supplying and Installing One piece Moulded hdp /Fibre water tank of required capacity with necessary plumbing
material on provided M.S. structural supports in an approved manner.
Material:
Priming Tank: HDPE/Fiber of good quality material

Gate Valves: As per (FF-VL/GV) above
The priming tank shall be installed on provided M.S. structural supports with 20/25 mm dia. Inlet valve and
50mm dia. Outlet valve with provided necessary G.I. piping upto delivery of main fire pump before non-return
valve.
1.9 Hose Reel
Specification No. (FF-FFA/HRD)
Scope:
Supplying and installing wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum as per IS:884 and fitted with 19mm dia. 30
meter long high pressure polypropylene (Polyhose) pipe as per IS: 444 (type III) G.M. chrome plated nozzle and
19 mm dia. And G.M. gate valve on the inlet pipe with necessary M.S. Bracket for holding Hose reel drum fitted
in position with wall fasteners, in an approved manner.
Material:
Hub and sides: Aluminium Alloy/Mild steel/Aluminium sheet.

Wall Bracket: Cast iron/Mild steel
Hose tube (20mm): Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced) Type-2, (Nominal internal dia) as per IS-12585
Nozzle with branch Pipe: Brass as per IS 8090
Stop Valve (Ball Valve): Gun metal
The wall mounting swinging Hose reel drum with Gun Metal Nozzle, gate valve, shall be connected on M.S.
bracket with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts etc. with use of required tools and paints. The water flow rate
shall be not less than 24 LPM and the range of jet shall be not less than 6 metre.
1.10. R.R.L. Hose Pipe
Specification No. (FF-FFA/RRL)
Scope:
Supplying fire fighting R.R.L. Hose pipe, conforming to IS: 636 (Type-A) 15 meter length, fitted with male and
female G.M. coupling conforming to IS: 993, with ISI mark.
Material:

Hose pipe material: Rubber lined woven jacketed & 63mm in dia., the lining and the cover shall be of uniform
thickness, reasonably concentric and free from air blisters, porosity and splits. The tensile shall be minimum
5.00 MPa and shall withstand pressure of 10.2kg/cm2
Coupling: Gun metal
Hose pipe of 15 metre length with male and female Gun metal coupling shall be connected as per direction.
1.11 Nozzles
Specification No. (FF-FFA/NZ)
Scope:
Supplying G.M. branch pipe of 63 mm diameter with specified length fitted with 20 mm diameter detachable
hexagonal nozzle confirming to IS: 903, ISI mark.
Material:
Nozzle: Chrome plated Gun metal
Gun metal hexagonal nozzle fitted with required tools and plants including necessary labour, material etc.
1.12 Fire Brigade connection
Specification No. (FF-FFA/FBC)
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header pf 150mm  G.I. “C” class pipe having 2 Nos. of 100mm ‘T’ outlet
with 100mm  flange, fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. fire branching inlet connection, each consisting of 2 Nos. 63mm
dia. G.M. male inlet for supplying water in fire tank.
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. ‘C’ class (Heavy duty)

Branching inlet: Gun metal
Male inlet: Gun metal
In case under ground storage tank is not approachable by fire tenders, a 4 way 63mm diameter instantaneous
male inlet connection is provided at street level and connected to UG tank with 1 meter length of 150mm.
diameter underground pipe. The whole unit shall be placed in provided MS box made of 2mm thick MS sheet
with openable glass cover.

1.13 Siamese connection (Fire service inlet)
Specification No. (FF-FFA/SMC)
Scope:
Supplying and installing fire brigade Header (Siamese Connection) of 150mm  G.I. ‘C’ class pipe having 2 Nos.
of 100mm ‘T’ outlet with 100mm  flange, fitted with 2 Nos. of G.M. Male inlets with spring type NRV for supplying
water to Wet riser.
Material:
Pipe material: G.I. ‘C’ class

Branching inlet: Gun metal
Male inlet: Gun metal
Non Return Valve: As per (FF-VL/NRV) above
In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire service, a 4 way 63mm diameter collecting head shall
be provided and connected with each riser/down corner and the ring main with non return valve and with provided
butterfly/sluice valve. This should be located at a place where fire brigade tender can reach.
The whole unit is placed in provided MS box made of 2 mm thick MS sheet with open-able glass cover.
1.14 Air Cushion Tank (Air Vessel)
Specification No. (FF-FFA/ACT)
Scope:
Supplying and installing Air Vessel of 300mm  1.5 mtr. In height M.S. Tank fabricated from M.S. black ERW
pipe, conforming to I.S.3589, having 6mm thickness, dish end at both ends, duly welded with 300mm  pipe,
having inlet of 50mm  , duly fitted with 50mm  sluice valve and 20/25mm  drain with G.M. gate valve, to
be installed inside pump house along with provided M.S. angle tripod.
Material:
Air Vessel: MS ERW pipe confirming to IS: 3589

Tripod: MS angle of size 75 x 75 x 5mm
300mm dia. 1.5 metre height air vessel, Gate Valve, flanges, MS angle Tripod including necessary labour,
material and use of required tools and plants.
1.15 Air Release Valve
Specification No. (FF-FFA/ARV)

Scope:
Supplying and erecting Air release cock of 20/25mm  made from G.M. with necessary G.I. coupling for fixing
on top of Air vessel or on wet riser.
Material:
Air release Valve: Gun metal

Coupling: G.I.
Air release Valve with necessary GI coupling shall be fixed on top of wet riser with required labour, tools etc.
1.16 Pressure Gauge
Specification No. (FF-FFA/PG)
Scope:
Supplying and installing pressure guage of 100 mm dia or 0-14 kg/cm2 fitted with 12/15mm  pad cock valve,
G.I. nipple, elbow etc. as per requirement in an approved manner.
Material:
Pressure gauge: 100 mm diameter made from brass metal

Cock valve, elbow, pipe: G.I.
The 100 mm dia Pressure Guage with G.I. cock valve, erected with G I pipe including accessories with required
labour, tools. Etc. as directed by engineer - in -charge.
1.17 Pressure Switch
Specification No. (FF-FFA/PS)
Scope:
Supplying and installing pressure switch with 12/15mm  isolation valve, G.I. nipple, elbow etc. in an approved
manner.
Material:
Pressure switch: Brass metal

Isolation valve, elbow, Nipple: G.I.
The Pressure switch with G.I. isolation valve, and necessary G.I. fittings (elbow, Nipple) fitted with required
labour, tools. Etc.

1.18 Gate Valves
Specification No. (FF-VL/GV)
Scope:
Supplying and installing Gun metal Gate valve of specified diameter having threaded ends conforming to IS: 778,
ISI mark, along with G I threaded nipple.
Material:
Body: a) Brass b) Leaded tin bronze

Bonnet or cover: a) Leaded tin bronze b) Forged brass, c) Brass
Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, gland nut, gland flange, body
seat rings and disc or wedge facing rings (where renewable): a) Leaded tin bronze, b) Extruded brass
rod, c) Forged brass d) Brass
Stem, hinge pin and plug: a) Extruded brass b) High tensile brass, c) Forged Brass
Ball (for ball type check valves): Chromium steel.
Nut bolts: Mild steel
Hand Wheel: Cast iron
Gasket: Compressed asbestos fibre
Gland packing: a) Hemp and jute b) Asbestos
Spring: Phosphor bronze wire
Seating ring: Synthetic rubber
The Gate valve shall be fitted to pipe with provided flange, gaskets, Nut bolts, etc. to accessories with washers,
spring washers, check nuts as required with proper alignment so as to be leak proof including necessary labour
and required tools and plants.
Mode of Measurement;
1.19 Orifice Plate
Specification No. (FF-FFA/OP)
Scope:
Supplying and erecting one no. Brass orifice plate having 6 mm thick with specified outer diameter and suitable
inner diameter to reduce the pressure between 3.2 kg/cm2 to 5.5 kg/cm2.
Material:
Body: Stainless steel 6 mm thick
The orifice plate shall be placed before the hydrant valve

1.20 Common Auto control Panel
Specification No. (FF/ACP)
1) Mounting : Floor Mounted
2) Type : Floor mounted and cubical compartmentalized type
3) Panel : 14/16 guage CRCA stove enamel
4) Incoming : 200 AMP, TPN MCCB
5) Bus Bar : TPN Aluminum bars of 200 Amps rating
6) Accessories (Incoming side) : Ammeter 0-200 Amps with ASS
: Voltmeter 0-500 Volts with VSS
: Phase indicating lights with control fuse
7) Outgoings 1) Star delta starter with
: 160 Amps TP MCCB – 1 No.
: TP contactor – 3 No.
: Overload relay -1 No.
2) DOL starter -2 Nos
: 63 Amps TP MCCB – 2 Nos.
: TP contactor -2 Nos
: Overload relay -2 Nos
8) Power and control wiring : As per IS Code of Electrical
9) Accessories with each MCCB : Single phase preventor
(on outgoing side) on starter feeder : start/stop push button/auto/manual switch
: ON / OFF indicator
10) Earthing : 50 x 6 mm GI Strip
11) Other Accessories : Audio visual Alarm with flasher and
Hooter and for hydrant pump tripped,
Jockey pump tripped, (both and standby)
Hydrant mains pressure low and other
off normal condition.
1.21 Scope: (Armoured cables)

Specification No. (CB-LT/AL, CB-LT/CU)
Providing armoured cable of specified voltage level, size & specified conducting material Aluminium / Copper),
including required material, hardware’s for erection and erecting on wall, ceiling, RCC slab or drawing the same
through pole, pipe, laying in provided conduit, trench, ducts, trays as per approved method of construction
including glands, lugs, etc.
Material:
Cables:
Cables shall be PVC for LT/MP and XLPE for HT and of required construction, colour, shall carry ISI mark, IS No.
manufacturer’s name, size, duly embossed/screen printed at every meter and having the total count of
progressive length in meter at each mark.
Earth wire: Galvanized iron (GI) wire of appropriate gauge
Glands: As per specification
Lugs: As per specification (CB-CL/AL, CB-CL/CU)
Saddles: Saddles fabricated from GI sheet of required gauge and size depending on dia of cable either galvanized
or painted with superior quality enamel black paint with necessary shearing mechanical strength, semi circular
shaped with extended piece having suitable holes for fixing.
G.I. Strip: 22.g x 25mm width G.I. Strip.
Clamps : MS Clamps fabricated of required length and shape, having the size of 3/6mm thick mild steel having
25/50mm width (as per size of cable), rounded ends with wooden/resin cast grip for holding the cable.
Identification tags: For identifying root, connection position GI strip with identification mark/name
embossed/painted with arrangement to tie should be fix on cable or arrangement of ferrules to be done.
Hardware: Sheet Metal (GM) screws of required sizes, plugs/wooden gutties, etc.
General:
a) Irrespective of method of construction the cable ends shall be terminated with appropriate size & type of
glands with lugs duly crimped, as directed by Site engineer.
b) Wherever the cable has to be bent, the turning radius shall be as mentioned in Table No.7/2. Grouping of
cables shall be done with adequate distance between cables as mentioned. In IS so as to minimize de-
rating. Cables shall be tagged / ferruled with identification name/mark at the point from where distribution
starts and at ends. Bare earth wire of appropriate size shall run along with the cable. Earth wire running
with the cable shall be terminated at the earth terminal nearest to cable termination.
1.21.1 Erection of Cable on Surface:
Erection shall be done as per the routes and layout finalized, in perfect level and a plumb. Before fixing the cable
shall be straightened as far as possible for good aesthetics look, continuous bare GI earth wire of required gauge
shall be run. Cable with G.I. wire shall be fixed by saddles firmly clipped on cable and shall be fixed to wall with
minimum 50 x 8mm SM screws with plugs/wooden gutties, etc. (Distance between two supports / saddles shall
be minimum 450mm). Wooden gutties shall be used wherever required (Especially for stone wall). The entries
made in wall, floor slab, etc. for laying the cable shall be made good by filling and finishing with plastering the
same.
1.21.2 Erection of cable/s on trays:
Cable/s shall be laid with PVC tags on GI trays. At bending point care shall be taken so that sharp edges of sheet
will not damage insulation of cable.

Executed quantity shall be measured on the basis of running meter per run of cable.
2.0 INTELLIGENT ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
2.1. BASIS OF DESIGN

An Intelligent Fire Alarm System (IFAS) shall be provided to effect total control over the life safety services
required in the building. The IFAS shall be of the digital, distributed processing, real time, multi-tasking, multi-
user and multi-location type.
The IFAS provided shall be able to tie-up the following Mechanical, Electrical & Low Voltage Services into an
integrated system.
a. Air Handling Units
b. Lifts
The system shall be provided with Addressable and Analog fire alarm initiating, annunciating and control devices.
The addressable and intelligent system shall be such that smoke sensors, thermal/heat sensors, manual call
points etc., can be identified with point address. The system shall be capable of:
a. Setting smoke sensor sensitivity remotely to either high sensitivity manually or on a pre-programmed
sequence e.g. occupied/unoccupied period. The FAS shall be able to recognize normal and alarm
conditions, below normal sensor values that reveal trouble condition, and above normal values that
indicate either a pre alarm condition or the need of maintenance.
b. The operator shall also be able to adjust alarm and pre alarm thresholds and other parameters for the
smoke sensors.
c. Provide a maintenance/pre-alert alarm capability at smoke sensors to prevent the detectors from
indicating a false alarm due to dust, dirt etc.
d. Provide alarm verification of individual smoke sensors. Systems that perform alarm verification on a
zone basis shall not be acceptable. Alarm verification shall be printed on the printer at the Control Station’s
printer to enhance system maintenance and identify possible problem areas.
e. Provide local numeric point address and Indicating display of device and current condition of the point.
Local annunciation shall not interfere with annunciation from the Fire Control System.
f. Provide outputs that are addressable, i.e. outputs shall have point address. The operator shall be able
to command such points manually or assign the points to Logical Point Groups (Software Zones) for pre-
programmed operation.
In the event of a fire alarm, but not in a fault condition, the following action shall be performed
automatically.
a. The System Alarm Indication on the main fire alarm control panel shall flash.
b. A local piezo-electric sounder in the control panel shall be sounded.
c. The LCD display on the main fire alarm control panel shall indicate all information associated with Fire
Alarm condition including the type of alarm point and its location within the premises.
d. History storage equipment shall log the information associated with the Fire Alarm Control Panel
condition, along with the time and date of occurrence.
e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event programs that are to be activated by a
particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated system outputs (alarm notification

appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
f. All lifts initiated through the systems will automatically be returned to Ground Floor.
g. Air handling units on affected floors shall automatically be switched OFF and simultaneously respective
fire dampers shall also be closed.
h. Shall give output for staircase pressurization fans to put on.
i. Shall give signal for start smoke evacuation system.
2.2. FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (F A C P)
2.2.1 The distributed Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall function as fully stand-alone panel as well as
providing a communication interface to the central station. FACP shall have its own microprocessor, software and
memory and should be listed under UL864 or EN54. In the event of failure of the central or communication
breakdown between the central station and the FACP, the FACP shall automatically operate on stand-alone mode
without sacrificing any functions.
2.2.2 The memory data for panel configuration and operation shall reside in non-volatile memory (EPROM). The card
containing the memory shall have battery back-up for up to 100 hours on the board itself, if required.
2.2.3 FACPs shall supervise detection circuits and shall generate an alarm in case of abnormal condition.
2.2.4 FACPs shall provide general purpose inputs for monitoring such functions as low battery or AC power failure.
FACPs shall provide tamper protection and commandable outputs, which can operate relays or logic level devices.
Output commands shall take any of, but not limited to, maintained command, Momentary Command, Alarm
Follow, or Alarm latch as required. Any relay in the FACP which is intended to be removable shall be supervised
against removal.
2.2.5 Smoke detectors shall be powered using the FACP-based smoke detection circuits. FACPs shall provide for
resetting smoke detectors, fault-isolation and sensor loop operation. It shall be possible to mix different fire
devices within the same FACP to optimize field wiring.
2.2.6 FACPs shall provide indication for communication with the central console and alarm/trouble conditions in each
sensor loops.
2.2.7 FACPs shall provide monitoring and control of one floor or area or for multiple floors or areas. FACPs shall meet
the following requirements to assure the integrity and reliability of the system.
a. The FACP shall be UL (9th Edition) listed independently as a fire alarm control panel.
b. FACP electronics shall be contained in an enclosure made of minimum 16 gauge steel. Access to FACP
switches and electronics shall be by key-lock. Usage of no other tools should be required. Visual
indicators of FSP status for each zone shall be visible without opening the key-locked cover.
2.2.8 All hardware and software to allow the FACP configuration and operation to be changed shall be provided. Memory
data shall be contained in non-volatile memory (EPROM).
Alarm verification with field-adjustable time from 0 to 60 seconds for individual smoke detector shall be provided.
During the alarm verification, the panel shall retard the alarm until the end of the period. If the alarm is only a
transient smoke alarm, the panel shall automatically reset the alarm. Only a verified alarm shall initiate the alarm
sequence for the software zone (Logical Point Group) or point. Final time setting shall be as per approval of the
fire authorities. When alarm verification is being performed on a smoke detector, the action shall be printed on
the listed printer(s).
2.2.10 Display at the FACP shall be provided to indicate point in alarm or trouble. In such systems, means for manually
scanning the points in trouble shall be provided and a trouble and alarm LED shall be used to indicate that there
are points in alarm/trouble. The alarm/trouble LED shall only extinguish when all alarm/troubles are cleared from
the loop.
2.2.11 It shall be possible to command test, reset and alarm silence from both the FACP and the central console.
2.2.12 FACP switches shall allow authorized personnel to accomplish the following, independent of the central console:
a. Initiate a general alarm condition.

b. Silence the local audible alarm.
c. It shall be possible to acknowledge (Silence the local FACP audible without silencing the alarm indicating
devices (hooters).
d. Reset all zones (Logical Point Group) / points, after all initiating devices have returned to normal.
e. Perform a complete operational test of the microprocessor and memory with a visual indication with
each board.
f. Test all panel LEDs for proper operation without causing a change in the condition of any zone (Logical
Point Group)
g. Walk Test
2.2.13 Software zones/loops shall be circuited and protected by Fault Isolation Modules such that in the event of a
zone/loop short-circuit, not more than twenty (20) devices shall be left non-functional.
2.2.14 Intelligent Smoke and thermal sensors shall be located as shown and shall report sensed levels in analog form.
2.2.15 Monitor modules shall be provided to monitor and address contact-type input devices. The monitor module shall
be supervised by FACP.
2.2.16 The FACP shall process the true continuous analog signal from the sensors. In addition, the FACP shall further
process all analog values for pre-alarm limits to prompt the operator for early maintenance. If a sensor value
increases to an above normal level or a pre-alarm limit for an extended duration, the FACP shall communicate
maintenance pre-alarm.
a. Any time sensor value transitions beyond the secondary and higher limit value, an alarm initiation and
report shall be issued.
b. Limits and sensor values shall be displayed, modifiable, and reported in decimal values.
c. The FACP shall have Drift Compensation facility to compensate for environment. The FACP shall have
the ability to recalibrate Pre-alarm and Alarm limits if required, after comparing each sensor’s operating
characteristics with the set sensitivity. This should be carried out at least once in every 24 hours. FACP
should annunciate trouble conditions when sensor(s) is beyond compensation range (excessively dirty
sensor).
d. The FACP should be UL listed / FM approved or EN 54 approved to provide the sensitivity measurement
and documentation required by NFPA72E.
2.2.17 FACP shall have real-time clock to prevent loss of time and date in case of failure of power supplies.
2.2.18 The display on FACP shall provide indication for AC Power, System Alarm, System Trouble/Security Alarm, Display
Trouble and Signal Silence.
2.2.19 Minimum two different password levels will be provided to prevent unauthorized System control or programming.
2.2.20 Operator control switches for Signal Silence, lamp Test, Reset, System Test and Acknowledge shall be provided.
2.2.21 The FACP should truly field programmable. This would mean that in the event of change of any logic, detector /
zone sequence alteration, the operator can initiate the FACP panel to reconfigure the above parameters.
2.2.22 The FACP should have a degraded mode of operation. In the event of the CPU failure the field devices (detectors
& modules) should be able to take a decision degrade mode to ensure reliability even during failure.

2.2.23 Power supply unit of FACP shall have following characters:
a. The main power supply shall be 230 VAC±10%, 50 Hz±1% and shall in turn provide all necessary power
of the FACP.
b. It shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours for standby power using dual-rate charging technique for
fast battery recharge.
c. It shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth fault detect circuit, capable of detecting earth faults
on sensitive addressable modules.
d. It shall provide indication for battery voltage and charging current.
2.2.24 For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks shall be plug-in type and shall have sufficient capacity for 18 to 12
AWG wire termination. Fixed terminal blocks shall not be acceptable.
3. DETECTORS & ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
3.1 GENERAL FEATURES COMMON TO ALL DETECTORS
a. Compatibility: All automatic fire detectors shall be interchangeable without requiring different mounting
bases or alterations in the signal panel.
b. Sensitivity: On average 30 mgs of burned material per cu.m. (as measured in a 1 cu.m. chamber or
.5% obs/ft) shall release an alarm sensitivity which shall be adjustable according to the use of the space.
c. Power Consumption: Each detector shall use the minimum of power, for economic circuits, so that it
shall have capacity to connect at least 240 devices & detectors in one loop.
d. Built-in-response indicator: Each detector shall incorporate indicator “LED” at the detector which shall
blink during normal condition and light up on actuation of the detector to locate the detector which is
operated. The detector shall not be affected by the failure of the response indicator lamp.
e. Maintenance: All detectors shall be fitted either with plug-in system or bayonet type connections only,
from the maintenance and compatibility point of view.
f. Construction: The detector shall be vibration and shock proof. When disassembling for cleaning
purposes, its components must not be damaged by static over voltage.
g. Atmospheric and Thermal Disturbance: The detector shall so designed as to be practically immune to
environmental criteria such as air currents, humidity, temperature fluctuations, pressure and shall not
trigger false alarm, due to the above conditions.
h. Continuous Operation: An alarm release shall not effect a detector’s functioning. After resetting the
alarm, the detector shall resume operation without any readjustment.
i. Adaptability to ambient conditions: Detectors shall be designed for adaptability to humid locations. No
performance deterioration shall be acceptable.
3.2 ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTORS
Heat detectors shall be intelligent and addressable devices, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire
Alarm Control Panel loops. Minimum to 240 intelligent detectors and devices should connect to one loop.
Heat Sensors shall be intelligent and addressable devices and shall connect to one of the C.I.E. loops.
The Sensors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused by a fire and shall, on command
from the C.I.E., send data to the C.I.E. representing the analogue level the temperature at the sensor.
3.3 ADDRESSABLE SMOKE DETECTOR

The intelligent smoke detector shall be an addressable device that is designed to monitor a minimum of
photoelectric technologies in a device. The design shall include the ability to adapt to its environment by utilizing
a built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate sensing settings. The detector
design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot obscuration. This detector shall utilize
advanced electronics that react to slow smoldering fires.
The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels based on the environment
type it is in (office, manufacturing, kitchen etc.) and then have the ability to automatically change the setting as
the environment changes (as walls are moved or as the occupancy changes).
An output connection shall be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
3.4 ADDRESSABLE OPTICAL BEAM SMOKE DETECTOR
The intelligent addressable optical beam smoke detector shall be an addressable device that is designed to
monitor a minimum obstruction to photoelectric properties in a path. The design shall include the ability to adapt
to its environment by utilizing a built-in microprocessor to determine its environment and choose the appropriate
sensing settings. The detector design shall allow a wide sensitivity window, no less than 1 to 4% per foot
obscuration.
The microprocessor design shall be capable of selecting the appropriate sensitivity levels based on the environment
type it is in and then have the ability to automatically change the setting as the environment changes.
An output connection shall be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
3.5 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS
Addressable manual stations shall be provided to connect to the Fire Alarm Control Panel loops.
The manual stations shall on command from the Control Panel send data to the panel representing the state of
the manual station.
Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting as shown on the plans, or semi-flush mounting, and shall be
installed not less than 42 inches, nor more than 48 inches above the finished floor unless otherwise specified by
applicable building codes.
3.6 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE
The monitor module shall provide address-setting and shall also store an internal identifying code which the Fire
Alarm Control Panel shall use to identify the type of device. Modules using binary jumpers are not acceptable.
An indication shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
3.7 RESPONSE INDICATOR
In addition to built-in response indicator in each detector, secondary response indicator of LED type shall be
provided outside the rooms wherever asked for by the Architect/Interior Designer, for indication of fire through
detector in the room. The design & colour shall be as per Interior Designer approval.
3.8 CONTROL MODULE
The control module shall provide address-setting and shall also store an internal identifying code which the
control panel shall use to identify the type of device. Modules which use binary jumpers are not acceptable. An
indication shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the control module is
operational and is in regular communication with the control panel.
3.9 ADDRESSABLE HOOTERS

All field hooters should preferably be addressable and software configurable. All hooters should be able to provide
at least a minimum of 3 different tones, which should be user configurable. The minimum decibel level of each
hooter should be 90db. All hooters should be UL/FM listed.
3.10 OTHER DEVICES
Fault-isolation of fire zones (Logical Point Group) / circuit modules shall be provided to enable part of a fault-
tolerant loop to continue operating when a short occurs in the loop.
4. FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
4.1 INTELLIGENT SYSTEM DEVICES

a. Each device shall be assigned a unique address via electronic addressing. Address selection via rotary
switch are also acceptable.
b. Devices shall receive power and communication from the same pair of conductors.
4.2 SENSORS
a. All fire sensors shall mount on a common base to facilitate the changing of sensor type if building
conditions change. The base shall be incompatible with conventional detectors to preclude the mounting
of a non-intelligent device.
b. Each sensor shall contain an LED which shall blink each time the sensor is scanned by the FACP. If the
FACP determines that the sensor is in alarm, the FACP shall command the sensor LED to get latched on.
c. Each sensor shall be capable of being tested for alarm via command from the FACP.
d. Each sensor shall respond to FACP scan for information with its type identification to preclude inadvertent
substitution of another sensor type. The FACP shall continue operation with the detector installed but
shall initiate a mismatch (trouble) condition until the proper detector is installed.
e. Each sensor shall respond to FACP scan for information with an analog representation of measured fire-
related phenomenon (smoke density, particles of combustion, temperature). Systems which only
monitor the presence of conventional detector in an addressable base shall not be acceptable.
4.3 INPUT DEVICES
a. The input device shall provide an addressable input for N.O. or N.C. contact devices such as manual
stations etc.
b. The input device shall provide a supervised initiating circuit. An open-circuit fault shall annunciate at the
FACP (subsequent alarms shall be reported).
c. The device shall contain an LED which will blink upon being scanned by the FACP. Upon determination
of an alarm condition, the LED shall be latched on.
4.4 AUTOMATIC FUNCTIONS AT FACP
The alarms shall be displayed at the FACP on an LCD display. The display shall indicate the device in alarm by ID
number, the appropriate alarm state, and the current time and date. It shall also display a point description of
minimum 32 characters and, the respective analog value. The display shall also contain a minimum 40 characters
alarm message. It shall be possible to see the number of acknowledged alarms, number of current fire alarms,
number of trouble conditions and number of other miscellaneous alarms in the system. The FACP printer shall

print out same information displayed on the LCD display. The LCD display and printer shall be powered directly
from the panel.
4.5 MANUAL FUNCTIONS AT FACP
i. At any given time, operator shall have the following manual capabilities at FACP by means of switches
located behind a key-locked cover:
a. Initiate an alarm summary display on the FACP LCD display. This display shall step through all
currently active alarms in the system.
b. Initiate a summary printout of all currently active alarms on the FACP printer.
c. Initiate an “all-point summary” printout on the FACP printer recording the status of each system
point (initiating circuits, indicating circuits etc.)
d. If the alarm is ignored by an operator than the history of same to be available
ii. At any time, the operator shall have following manual capabilities at the FACP under password control;
Operator privileges and ID numbers of up to four digits shall assignable by the main operator or
designated alternate. Actions taken by operators shall automatically be printed on the FACP printer with
operator initials, time and date.
a. Commands output points to different mode. Such commands shall be printed with selected
descriptors ON/OFF/AUTO, OPEN/CLOSE, DAY/NIGHT etc. In addition, command shall be used
to ISOLATE or DISCONNECT points. When isolated, alarms and troubles shall be received but
not acted upon.
b. Modify system parameters. Alphanumeric key pad shall be provided for operators to modify
the following parameters :
 Change sensor alarm and pre-alarm threshold

 Update date and time
 Change point descriptors
 Change action message
 Disable a point
 Change sensor verification time
 Change password
 Activate/deactivate indicating output control point
 Control-by-event programs on line
c. Select a system status report for printing on the printer from the control station. The following
real time reports shall be provided:
 All point log.

 Alarm summary
 Trouble summary
 Status summary
 Sensitivity log
 Disabled points log.
 Isolated points log
 Disconnected points log
 Logical group points log
The sensitivity log shall print the analog value of each addressable analog sensor.
d. Select printing of a trend sensitivity log which when enabled, shall print minimum last 24 analog
values for every addressable analog sensor taken at predetermined intervals. Systems which
limit the number of addressable analog sensors which can be trended are not acceptable.

e. Select a sequence of programmed commands which can be automatically executed, in
sequence, via a single command.
f. Perform a walk-test function such that a operation can be periodically checked out for all
initiating devices on a zone. In walk test mode, all initiators on the selected zone shall
automatically be isolated. As each device is placed into an alarm or trouble condition, the FACP
shall print the condition and automatically reset the device. No audible signals shall be initiated
from the zone to prevent disruption of building occupants. If a zone is inadvertently left in the
walk-test mode, it shall automatically reset to normal after a five-minute idle time is exceeded.
4.6 SYSTEM SUPERVISION
a. In the normal supervisory condition, only the “POWER” ON, and “RUN” conditions, shall be illuminated.
The LCD display shall display “System Normal” and the current time and date.
b. The LCD display shall indicate the loss of power condition and the printer shall record the same. Following
restoration of normal AC power, the trouble indicators shall be automatically reset and the printer shall
record the ‘return to normal condition’.
c. The LCD display shall indicate the loop in trouble and the printer shall record same.
d. The LCD display shall indicate trouble and the printer shall record same. Operation of a momentary
“Silence” switch shall silence the audible trouble signal but the visual “Trouble” LEDs shall remain ON
until the malfunction has been corrected and the system has reset. The FACP printer shall record this
action.
4.7 PROGRAMMING OF FACP
The LCD display and printer programming shall be accomplished on site by means of QWERTY keypad inbuilt in
panel which shall plug into the FACP. Modules requiring off-site programming are not acceptable. LCD shall initiate
test of all addressable sensors in the system.
Programming functions shall include alarm/trouble type assignment, point descriptor assignment, alarm message
assignment etc. Data file for the LCD display and a printer shall be stored in EEPROM.
5.0 FIRE CONTROL SEQUENCES
Upon activation of fire alarm devices:
FACP will display the exact address & alarm in the panel.
The Central Control Station shall switch OFF the AHUs of the affected floor fire damper and toilet exhaust fans
while the AHUs on the other floors shall remain operational so as to keep the area under positive pressure.
Staircase pressurization fans shall be operated through the fire alarm system.
The lifts alarms (provided by lift) shall be tied to the Fire Alarm System. The Fire Alarm
System shall function as follows:
In the event of a fire, a signal will be provided by the Fire Alarm System to return all lifts to ground floor.
Should an emergency alarm originate from an individual lift, an audible alarm shall sound at Fire Control Station.
When an alarm is detected
 All include annunciating devices on the floor one above and one below shall sound.
 The air handling unit for the floor shall be stopped.
 The air handling unit on the floor above and the floor below shall be started unless those floors are also in
alarm.
If the alarm has not been acknowledge at the central panel within one minute, all audible annunciating devices
on the floor above and the floor below shall sound.
It the alarm has not been acknowledged at the central panel within three minutes, all audible annunciating
devices on the building shall sound.
Appendix-V - List Of Bureau Of Indian Standards Codes:

All equipment, supply, erection, testing and commissioning shall comply with the requirements of Indian Standards and
code of practices given below as amended upto 30th April, 2002. All equipment and material being supplied by the
contractor shall meet the requirements of IS. Tariff advisory committee’s regulation (fire insurance), electrical
inspectorate and Indian Electricity rules and other Codes / Publications as given below:
1. Pipes and Fittings
IS Code No. Title

Specification for pre cast concrete pipes (with and without
IS : 458, (2003)
reinforcement)
amendment 1
IS : 651 ( 2007 ) Salt glazed stone ware pipes and fittings’.
amendment 1
Mild steel, tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 1
IS : 1239 (Part 1)
Mild Steel tubes.
2004,amendment 4
Mild Steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel fittings: Part 2
IS : 1239 (Part
Mild Steel tubular and other wrought steel pipe fittings.
2),1992,amendments 7
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
IS : 1536, 2001,
sewage.
amendment 4
IS : 1537, 1976, Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
amendment 6
IS : 1538 1993, Cast Iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
amendments 4
Cast iron/ / Ductile Iron drainage pipes and pipes fittings for over
IS : 1729, 2002
ground Non pressure pipe line socket and spigot series.
,amendments 4
Malleable cast iron pipe fittings.
IS : 1879, 2010
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 1 Basic
IS : 2643 (Part 1) 2005 profile and dimensions.
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 2

IS : 2643 (Part 2) Tolerances.
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes: Part 3 Limits

IS : 2643 (Part 3) of sizes.
IS : 3468,1991, Pipe nuts.

amendment 1
Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
IS : 3589, 2001
sewage (168.3 mm to 2032 mm outside diameter).
,amendments
Specifications for washers for use with fittings for water services.
IS : 4346, 1982
IS : 4711,2008,
Methods for sampling steel pipes, tubes and fittings.
amendments 1
IS : 6392, Steel pipe flanges
1971,amendments 1
2. Valves

Specification for copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for
IS : 778,1984,
water works purposes.
amendments 3
Specification copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type)

IS : 1703,2000,
for water supply fittings.
amendments 1
IS : 3950,yr(1979), Specification for surface boxes for sluice valves.
amendments 1
Specification for swing check type reflux (non return) valves: part
IS : 5312 (Part
2 Multi door pattern.
1),yr(2004),amendments 2
Specification for swing check type reflux (non return) valves: part
IS : 5312 (Part 2),yr(1986) 2 Multi door pattern.
IS:12992(Part1), Safety relief valves, spring loaded : Design

yr(1993),
Butterfly valves for general purposes.
IS:13095,
yr (1991),amendments 1
Pumps & Vessels
4.
Steel plates for pressure vessels for intermediate and high
IS : 2002, yr(2009), temperature service including boilers.
IS : 2825 Code for unfired pressure vessels.

Yr.1969,amendments 5
IS : 4648 (Part 1) Code of practice for Electrical layout in residential building.
IS : 8418 Specification for horizontal centrifugal self priming pumps.
Yr.1999.amendment 1
5. General
Structural Steel Sections
SP : 6 (1)
IS : 325 Three Phase Induction Motors
Yr.1996,amendments2,
Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are
IS : 554
required on the threads.
Yr.1999, amendments 1
PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto & including 1100
IS : 694
V.
IS : 800
Code of practice for general construction in steel
Yr.2007,
IS : 1068 Electroplated coatings of nickel plus chromium and copper plus

Yr.1993,amendments 1 nickel plus chromium.
IS : 1172 Code of Basic requirements for water supply drainage and

Yr.1993, sanitation.
IS : 1367 (Part 1) Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Part 1
Yr.2002, introduction and general information.
IS : 1367 (Part 2) Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners: Part 2
Yr.2002, product grades and tolerances.
IS : 1554 (Part 1)
Yr.1988, PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 for working
amendments 4 voltages upto and including 1100 V.
IS : 1554 (Part 2)
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 2 for working
Yr.1988,
voltages from 3.3 KV upto and including 11 KV.
amendments 3
IS : 1742
Code of practice for building drainage.
Yr.1983,

IS : 2064 Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliance code
Yr.1993, of practice.
IS : 2379
Yr.1990, Color code for identification of pipe lines.
amendments 1
IS : 9668 Code of practice for provision and maintenance of water supplies

Yr.1990, and fire fighting.
IS : 9912 Coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for
Yr.1981, protecting iron and steel pipe lines.
IS : 10221 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of underground mild

Yr.2008, steel pipelines.
IS : 11149
Rubber Gaskets
Yr.1984,amendment 1
IS : 11790 Code of practice for preparation of butt-welding ends for pipes,

Yr.1986, valves, flanges and fittings..
Fire Fighting
6.
Equipment
Installation of Sprinkler System
NFPA : 13
NFPA : 14 Installation of Standpipe & Hose System
NFPA : 20 Installation of Stationary pump for Fire Protection
IS : 636
Non-percolating flexible fire fighting delivery hose.
Yr.1988,
IS : 884
Specification for first aid hose reel for fire fighting.
IS : 901 Specification for couplings, double male and double female,

Yr.1988,amendments 1 instantaneous pattern for fire fighting.
IS : 902
Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes.
IS : 903 Specification for fire hose delivery couplings, branch pipe, nozzles
Yr.1993,amendments 2 and nozzle spanner.
IS : 904 Specification for 2-way and 3-way suction collecting heads for fire
Yr.1983,amendments 1 fighting purposes.
IS : 907 Specification for suction strainers, cylindrical type for fire fighting
Yr.1984, purposes.
IS : 908
Specification for fire hydrant, stand post type.
IS : 909
Specification for underground fire hydrant, sluice valve type.
Yr.1992,
IS : 910 Specification for combined key for hydrant, hydrant cover and
Yr.1980,amendments 1 lower valve.
IS : 2171
Specification for portable fire extinguishers dry powder (cartridge
type)
IS : 2190 Selection, installation and maintenance of first aid fire
Yr.2010, extinguishers – Code of practice.
IS : 2871
Specification for branch pipe, universal, for fire fighting purposes.
IS : 2878 Specification for fire extinguishers, carbon dioxide type (portable

Yr.2004,amendments 7 and trolley mounted).

IS : 3844 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of internal fire

Yr.1989, hydrants and hose reel on premises.
IS : 5290
Specification for landing valves.
IS 5714 Specification for coupling, branch pipe, nozzle, used in hose reel
Yr.1981,amendments 1 tubing for fire fighting.
IS : 8423
Specification for controlled percolation type hose for fire fighting.
IS : 10658 Specification for higher capacity dry powder fire extinguisher

Yr.1999,amendments 8 (trolley mounted).
IS : 11460
Code of practice for fire safety of libraries and archives buildings.
IS : 5514 (Parts 1 to 7)
Reciprocating internal combustion engines : Performance.
Yr. 1996
SECTION – S
HVAC WORKS
HVAC SCOPE STATEMENT
1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Report represents the Scope of Work for HVAC for “CONSTRUCTION OF KALA BHAVAN AT SANCOALE-BALANCE
WORK”
The proposed building is made in three floors with one Ground, First & Second floor located at Goa which is coming under
warm & humid climate as per ECBC. The HVAC system shall be able to maintain specified temperature and humidity
conditions for human comfort within occupied spaces and shall be suitable for proper operation of equipment and plants
in conformance with Design basis Report, specification & applicable standards.
The Proposed HVAC WORK comprises of Supply, installation, Testing, Balancing & Commissioning of Air conditioning and
Ventilation system. The subcontractor shall provide sufficient spare parts for equipments to maintain as specified. The
following areas shall be covered under HVAC scope.
Sub contractor shall be responsible for the detailed design of HVAC system serving the proposed building including
design, preparation of shop drawings, manufacture, supply, transportation, delivery, shifting to respective floors,
loading / unloading, installation, coordination among different trades , testing and commissioning, maintenance and
rectification of defects etc so that a complete workable HVAC System can be ready for operation and satisfying all the
requirements as stated in the specifications and drawings,
1.2 DRAWINGS ISSUED WITH TENDER

The HVAC Drawings issued with tender are diagrammatic only and indicate arrangement of various systems and the
extent of work covered in the contract. These Drawings indicate the points of supply and termination of services and
broadly suggest the routes to be followed. Under no circumstances shall dimensions be scaled from these Drawings. The
architectural/interiors drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of equipment, controls, grilles and
diffusers.
The contractor shall follow the tender drawings in preparation of his shop drawings, and for subsequent installation
work. He shall check the drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which his work will be installed.
Maximum headroom and space conditions shall be maintained at all points. Where headroom appears inadequate, the
contractor shall notify the Architect/Consultant/Owner’s site representative before proceeding with the installation. In
case installation is carried out without notifying, the work shall be rejected and contractor shall rectify the same at his
own cost.
The contractor shall examine all architectural, structural, plumbing, electrical and other services drawings and check the
as-built works before starting the work, report to the Owner’s site representative any discrepancies and obtain
clarification. Any changes found essential to coordinate installation of his work with other services and trades, shall be
made with prior approval of the Architect/Consultant/Owner’s site representative without additional cost to the Owner.
The data given in the Drawings and Specifications is as exact as could be procured, but its accuracy is not guaranteed.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
The general character and the scope of work to be carried out under this contract are illustrated in Drawings,
Specifications and Schedule of Quantities. The Contractor shall carry out and complete the said work under this contract
in every respect in conformity with the contract documents and with the direction of and to the satisfaction of the
Owner’s site representative. The contractor shall furnish all labour, materials and equipment (except those to be
supplied by the owner) as listed under Schedule of Quantities and specified otherwise, transportation and incidental
necessary for supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete air conditioning system as described in the
Specifications and as shown on the drawings. This also includes any material, equipment, appliances and incidental work
not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the Drawings/Documents as being furnished or installed, but which are
necessary and customary to be performed under this contract.
The Scope of HVAC System covers supply, installation, testing, balancing & commissioning of the following systems.
a) VRF System.
b) Supply & Exhaust fans for Kitchen area ventilation.
c) Sheet metal ducts inclusive of supply air, return air, exhaust & outdoor air ducts, external thermal insulation,
acoustic lining, fire rating wherever required, canvas connections, silencers, bird screens, air intake/exhaust
louvers, gravity louvers, volume control dampers, fire and smoke dampers as required as per standards, approved
drawings and specification.
d) Supply and return air Diffuser & Risers.
e) Refrigerant Piping inclusive of insulation, fittings & u trap if any.
f) Condensate drain piping inclusive of fittings, insulation & u traps.
g) Vibration isolators for all HVAC equipment.
h) Wiring and earthing from MCCB/ MCB/ Power Outlet/ Starter panels to various refrigeration, air conditioning and
mechanical ventilation equipment, control wiring and interlocking.
i) Cutting holes, chases and the like through all types of non structural walls, and finishing for all services crossings,
including sealing, frame work, fire proofing, providing sleeves, cover plates, making good structure and finishes to
an approved standard.
j) Before procuring any new item, the contractor should take approval from the client/consultant.
The Scope of HVAC vendor also covers the following
a) Balancing, testing and commissioning of the entire Air Conditioning and mechanical ventilation system installation.
b) Test reports, list of recommended spares, Shop drawings for consultant Approval before commencement of work,
as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manual for the entire HVAC installation, Handling over documents.
c) Complete co-operation with independent commissioning agent if any and corrective actions on snag list points
prepared by such independent commissioning agent.
d) Training of Owner’s Staff
1.4 EXCLUSIONS
1.4.1 ASSOCIATED CIVIL WORKS

Following civil works associated with HVAC installation are excluded from the scope of this contract. These shall be
executed by other agencies in accordance with approved shop drawings of and under direct supervision of the air
conditioning contractor.
a) RCC/ PCC foundation.
b) Supply and fixing of G.I./wooden frame for mounting of grilles in masonary walls.
c) Supply and fixing of GSS frame for mounting of grilles / diffusers in false ceiling / boxing.
d) Making of trenches and back filling the same after laying / pressure testing etc. of pipes.
e) Cutting holes, chases and the like through all types of structural walls.
f) Fresh/ Exhaust Air Architectural louvers on toilets, shafts, etc. if any.
1.4.2 ASSOCIATED SERVICES WORKS
ELECTRICAL WORKS
All associated ELECTRICAL WORKS listed below are excluded from the scope of this contract. These shall be installed by
other agencies in accordance with approved shop drawings of, and under direct supervision of the air conditioning
contractor.
a) Providing power supply near each VRF outdoor unit at locations called for on air conditioning Contractor’s approved
shop drawings.
b) Providing Push button (on/off) Panel and power supply near each Cabinet type Fans at locations called for on air
conditioning Contractor’s approved shop drawings.
c) Providing 15 amps power outlet within 3 meter reach of each Indoor Units at locations called for on air conditioning
Contractor’s approved shop drawings.
PLUMBING WORKS
All associated PLUMBING WORKS listed below are excluded from the scope of this contract. These shall be installed by
other agencies in accordance with approved shop drawings of, and under direct supervision of the air conditioning
contractor.
a) Providing floor drains.

b) Disposal of condensate drain from ac units beyond the condensate drain riser/header.
BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
All associated BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM listed below are excluded from the scope of this contract. These shall
be installed by other agencies in accordance with approved shop drawings of, and under direct supervision of the air
conditioning contractor.
a) Providing control module & associated cabling for integration of HVAC system with Fire Fighting system.
1.5 DESIGN INTERFACES
The physical interfaces relate to architecture, structure towards allocation of spaces and provision of electrical
and PHE services for this system.
The key areas of design interface with Architectural include
 The exact orientation of the building

 Reflected ceiling plans
 Location & outlook of grilles/registers, U- value of glazing, design occupancy, space proofing & planning for AC
unit locations, trap door positioning and coordination of louvers & ceiling headroom etc
The key areas of design interface with Structure include
 Appropriate loading
 Wall openings and beam sleeves (if any) for pipe and duct routing etc
The key areas of design interface with Electrical include
 Power supply to all HVAC equipment

 Co-ordination of single/three phase supply, design current & voltage, starting current, location of supply
isolator/switch/motor control centre/control panel, interface between electrical & HVAC trade contractors, co-
ordination of protective devices etc.
The key areas of design interface with PHE include
 Drain points/channels for Ceiling suspended Indoor Units.
2.0 LIST OF HVAC DRAWINGS
S.No. Drawing No. Title
1 MEP/HVAC/TD/002 HVAC Layout Ground Floor

2 MEP/HVAC/TD/003 HVAC Layout First Floor
3 MEP/HVAC/TD/004 HVAC Layout Second Floor
3.0 HVAC - DESIGN BASIS REPORT
3.1 INTRODUCTION
This Concept design report details the proposed Air conditioning and Ventilation system for the project Construction of
kala Bhavan at Sancoale-Balance work” – Goa.
3.1.1 The proposed facility.
The proposed building located on Goa, with Ground , First Floor & Second Floor.
3.2 The scope of Design
The scope of this design covers:

The design of the air conditioning system for
Audotrium,Black box,waiting area,green room,etc
.
3.3 Basis of Design.
The proposed building is coming under Warm & Humid climate as per ECBC.
3.3.1 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
Climatic & Design conditions

The following weather Data available from ISHRAE hand book is being used for further calculations of heat loads:
Outside Conditions
Summer 32.2 °C Dry Bulb (90° F DB)
27.7°C Wet Bulb (82° F WB)
Monsoon 28.8 °C Dry Bulb (84° F DB)
27.2°C Wet Bulb (81° F WB)
Inside Design Conditions 24°C Dry Bulb ±2°C

RH NMT 55%
Occupancy load per person, Ventilation & Lighting Load:
OPD, XRAY, ECG, DOCTOR, NURSE, MEETING, CT SCAN, EMT ROOM

Sensible load 255 Btu/h
Latent load 245 Btu/h
Ventilation Air 1 Air Changes per Hour OR
As per ASHRAE 62.1Standard
Lights 1.8 Watts per Sq.ft (As per ASHRAE)
Office Areas
Sensible load 240 Btu/h
Latent load 160 Btu/h
Ventilation Air 1 Air Changes per Hour OR
As per ASHRAE 62.1Standard
Lights 1.8 Watts per Sq.ft (As per ASHRAE)
Building Envelope factors
U factor in Btu/hr.sqft
Sr. No. Description
deg F
1 Wall 0.36
2 Glass - U factor 1.13
Glass - SC 0.56
3 Roof - Insulated 0.20
4 Floor 0.36
5 Partition 0.46
6 Ceiling 0.42
Ventilation Air
As per NBC or ASHRAE 62.1 Whichever is greater
Standards Followed
 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
 ASHRAE 62.1
 ASHRAE 90.1
 ISHRAE HVAC Handbook
 NBC
3.4 Air Conditioning & Ventilation Scheme
Based on the above and considering the type of facility, we have the following Air Conditioning and Ventilation system
option.
3.4.1 Air conditioning System - VRF
We are proposing VRF system by considering the following factors

 Space limitations to accommodate so many Outdoor units.
 High full load & part load efficiency of VRF System as compared to conventional systems.
The advantage of VRF systems:

 Energy efficient at Both Full and Part Load and hence significant reduction in connected Electrical Load as well as
energy consumption.
 Multiple Indoor Units can be connected to a single Outdoor unit which results in reduced machine foot print.
 Centralized controlling, Performance monitoring and BMS compatibility (if required).
 Recommended Refrigerant Copper pipe lengths for VRF units are much higher than conventional DX units and
hence the outdoor units can be installed in remote locations.
Disadvantages of VRF systems:
 Initial investment & Maintenance charges are more as compared to conventional split systems.
3.5 Ventilation System
Supply & Exhaust systems are considered for Kitchen Ventilation.
We are proposing Cabinet type FAV for all OPD rooms.
4.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR HVAC WORK
4.1 VRV/VRF SYSTEM
The Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF / VRV) System should be air cooled, split type air conditioning system consisting of
singular condensing units connected to multiple indoor units, each having the capability of individual set point control.
The system should have the ability to connect each condensing unit to required indoor units of different types and
capacities on one refrigerant circuit. The system is to be of the cooling type. Each Condensing unit should incorporate at
least one inverter based scroll/ rotary compressor & two fixed scroll/ rotary compressors, to obtain 10% to 100% step
less capacity control for enhanced Power saving. The Indoor units should be provided with Corded Remote Control as a
standard accessory.
a) Refrigerant
The Entire Condensing unit and Evaporating unit should be Factory assembled and tested .The units should come with an
initial charge of refrigerant R410A / other equivalent refrigerant. Any additional refrigerant is to be added at site.
b) Ambient conditions
To be capable of operating within a wide range of ambient temperatures, the Condensing units should be capable of
provide cooling within an ambient range of 5 Deg. C to 43 Deg. C. D.B. The regulation in Refrigerant flow is to be achieved
by inverter based scroll/rotary compressor, head pressure control (by varying fan speeds) and hot gas bypass connection.
c) Refrigerant Piping Distance Limits
To be capable of refrigerant piping runs up to 150m between the condensing unit and indoor units with 50m level difference
without any oil traps or double risers. The Oil Equalizing line should be inside the Condensing unit, to avoid ‘inverted’ oil
traps at site.
d) Condensing Units
They shall be fully weatherproofed, factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls.
The casing shall be from mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish. Provide the condenser coil fins with a
corrosion resistant finish.
Larger Condensing Units shall incorporate 3 compressors in condensing units with at least one inverter scroll/rotary
compressor and other two fixed speed scroll/rotary compressors.
The design shall be modular type allowing for side by side installation of the condensing Units.
Fan Motor Speed Control:

The condensing unit fan motors to have at least two speed operations to maintain constant head pressure control in all
ambient temperatures and modes of operation.
Outdoors units of the VRV / VRF system shall be compact air cooled type.
The compressor shall be of the high efficiency complaint scroll design with an EER of not less than 11.1 BTUH/watt (COP
of not less than 3.25) at ARI rating conditions. Each compressor shall have in-built overloads, HP and LP controllers and
mounted on vibration isolators.
“Coated PE Fins (with special acryl pre-treatment)” for Al fins of Condenser Coils is mandatory for increased durability to
salt corrosion.
i) Compressors
The compressor shall be highly efficient at least one inverter based scroll/rotary compressor & two fixed scroll/rotary
compressors as per the capacity & requirement. The compressors shall have electronic controls, capable of loading and
unloading to follow the variations on cooling using the latest axial compliant sealing technology. The microprocessor panel
should incorporate control for precise monitoring of status of the system.
ii) Heat Exchanger

The heat exchanger shall be constructed from seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminium fins to form a
cross fin coil. The aluminium fins shall be treated with an anti-corrosion film.
iii) Refrigerant Circuit

The refrigerant circuit shall be complete with condensing unit with refrigeration compressors, motors, fans, condenser
coils, electronic expansion valve, solenoid valves, 4 way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut down valves,
service ports, receivers and accumulators and all other components which are essential for safe and satisfactory operation.
iv) Safety Devices

Provide the following safety devices as a part of the outdoor unit: High pressure switch, fuses, crank case heater, fusible
plug, over current protector.
v) Oil Recovery
Equip the unit with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation for systems with long refrigerant piping. Operate
the oil recovery system after the first hour of operation and then every consecutive 4 hours of operation. Also fit high
efficiency oil separators to the discharge side of the compressor together with factory fitted oil equalization system.
vi) Selection Switches

Fit the condensing unit printed circuit board (PCB) with selection switches for the length of pipe work, emergency operation
switches and service mode switches, together with LED indications for operation / fault indication.
e) Refrigerant Pipe work
The scope of Refrigerant Piping work shall include Supply, installation, testing and commissioning all interconnecting pipe
work between the condensing unit and the Indoor units. The piping shall be refrigerant quality seamless copper tube with
brazed connections and with the appropriate Distribution joints and headers. The piping should be routed at site in such
a manner, that brazed joints in the Ref. Piping are kept to a minimum. During brazing, pass dry nitrogen through the pipe
work. For outdoor piping, the pipes, after insulation, should be covered with Woven Glass Cloth 125 gsm finished in U/V
Treated, pigmented Epoxy for Outdoor Piping, as per relevant code. All refrigerant pipes shall be insulated with elastomeric
nitrile rubber of adequate thickness as per manufactures standards or ASHARE Guidelines whichever is stringent and the
same shall be submitted to consultant or client for approval.
i) Joint Orientation
The Distribution refrigeration pipe joints and headers shall be located in an appropriate orientation to enable correct
distribution of refrigerant. The Distribution Joints should be factory insulated with pre-formed sections of EPDM /
Equivalent.
ii) Cleanliness of piping

All pipe work must be kept clean and free from contamination to prevent breakdown of the system. Seal all pipe ends and
keep sealed until immediately prior to making a joint.
iii) Pressure Testing

The piping shall be vacuum dehydrated immediately after installation of pipe work and prior to sealing of insulation joints
and start up of equipment & pressure tested to 3,800kPa; held for a minimum of 24 hours & checked for leaks and repaired
if necessary. Following this, the pipe work to be vacuum dehydrated to (-755mmHg) and held for one to four hours
depending on the pipe length.
iv) Fixing Pipe work

Pipes shall be layed on GI cable tray of adequate size and supports shall be fixed at minimum of 2 meter centers with
suitable saddling arrangement. Exposed Refrigerant pipes on the terrace shall be covered with openable GI Cable trays.

4.1.1 General
The system selected is a modular system, with number of indoors connected to centrally located outdoor units, as per
detail designing given in the tender. The outdoor units for all the system shall be air cooled type and mounted on terrace
of the building. Indoor units in various areas shall be as per enclosed drawings/ Bill of Quantities.
Wherever feasible in open spaces or large rooms the indoor units shall be logically split and connected to separate outdoor
units.
All the VRV air conditioners shall be fully factory assembled, wired, internally piped & tested. The outdoor unit shall be
pre-charged with first charge of R410a refrigerant. Additional charge shall be added as per refrigerant piping at site. All
the units shall be suitable for operation with 415 V ± 10%, 50 Hz ± 3%, 3 Phase supply for outdoor units & 230 V ± 10%,
50 Hz ± 3%, 1 Phase supply for indoor units.
The VRV system shall provide stable, trouble free & safe operation, with flexibility of operating desired indoor units. The
outdoor units must be capable of delivering exact capacity proportional to the number of indoor units switched on & the
heat load in the air conditioned area. The proportional operation shall be achieved by varying speed of the compressor in
the outdoor units.
The operation of the VRV system shall be through independent wired remote controllers/ wireless controller as specified.
The entire system shall be controlled by a system controller and shall be integrated through BACNET protocol with an
intelligent building management system. The system controller shall be able to control start / stop on time schedule and
also provide common fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others.
4.1.2 Outdoor Units
Outdoor units of the VRV system shall be compact air cooled type.
All the compressors of the outdoor units must be hermetically sealed scroll/Rotary type. Each module of outdoor unit must
have at least 1 inverter compressor, suitable to operate at varying heat load proportional to indoor requirement.
The outdoor units shall be suitable to operate within an ambient temperature range of – 5 Deg C to 43 Deg C, in cooling
mode & 20 Deg C to 15 Deg C in heating mode
The outdoor units must be suitable for up to 150 m refrigerant piping between outdoor unit & the farthest indoor units,
total piping of 300 m for all the indoor units. Allowable level difference between outdoor unit & indoor units shall be 50 m
in case of outdoor unit on top & 40 m in case of outdoor unit at bottom. Allowable level difference between various indoor
units connected to one out door unit shall be up to 15 m.
Back up operation, in case of failure of one of the compressors of outdoor unit, for single module outdoor units or failure
of one of the modules in case of multiple module outdoor units shall be possible. The VRV outdoor unit shall always be
supplying at least 33% of back up operation, of the full load capacity.
The outdoor unit shall employ system of equal run time for all the compressors, inverter or on / off type, within each
outdoor unit – Single Module or Multi Module.
The outdoor units shall be suitable to operate within an ambient temperature range of – 5 Deg C to 43 Deg C, in cooling
mode.
Air cooled condenser shall have Axial Flow, upward throw fan, directly coupled to fan motors with minimum IP 55
protection. The outdoor unit condenser fan shall be able to develop external static pressure up to 7.5 mm of H2O. The
outdoor unit should be with canopy at top to protect from heavy rain.
The entire operation of outdoor units shall be through independent remotes of indoor units. No separate Start/ Stop
function shall be required.
Starter for the Outdoor Unit compressor shall be “Direct on Line” type. Inverter compressor of the unit shall start first &
at the minimum frequency, to reduce the inrush current during starting. Specification for starter panels furnished in below
electrical section.
Refrigerant control in the outdoor unit shall be through Electronic Expansion Valve. Complete refrigerant circuit, oil
balancing/ equalizing circuit shall be factory assembled & tested.
Noise level of outdoor units shall not exceed 65 dB (A) at a distance of 1.5 m from the unit.
The outdoor units shall confirm to Technological Guideline for Harmonic Suppression – JAEG 9702-1995. High Harmonic
Environmental Target Level for Power Distribution system shall be 5%.
Outdoor units shall be complete with following safety devices:
 High pressure switch

 Fan driver overload protector
 Over current relay
 Inverter Overload Protector
 Fusible Plug
 Short Circuit Protection
Unit shall be supplied with
 Installation manual
 Operation Manual
 Connection Pipes
 Clamps
Monitoring from BMS
Necessary relays and contacts shall be provided for monitoring the status of the outdoor units from the building
management system. The outdoor units shall provide necessary volt free contacts for this purpose. Status shall include
start / stop/ run and trip.
Unit shall be supplied with
Connection Pipes
Clamps
Necessary relays for hard wired points to BMS for providing ON/OFF status and trip alarm
Note: Maintenance of the VRF outdoor units should be done on weekly, fourth nightly & monthly basis.
4.1.3 Indoor Units
a) Ceiling Mounted duct type units
These units shall be ceiling suspended with suitable supports to take care of operating weight of the unit, without
causing any excessive vibration & noise. The cold air supplied by these units will be supplied to the area to be air
conditioned, through duct system specified in the tender.
Each indoor unit must have electronic expansion valve operated by microprocessor thermostat based temperature
control to deliver cooling/ heating as per the heat load of the room.
The unit casing shall be Galvanized Steel Plate.
Unit must be insulated with sound absorbing thermal insulation material, Glass Fiber.
The noise level of unit at the highest operating level shall be selected to meet the noise criteria specified for each area.
The unit must be able to develop external static pressure of 25mm (250Pa) at the specified air quantities – to match the
specified supply air ducting, grills and extract grills plus 5Pa.
Unit must have Thermal Fuse for fan motor protection, in case of motor heating.
Each indoor unit shall have factory installed as standard equipment, maintenance free long-life filter and resin net with
mold resistant.
The unit will be connected in series to a suitable outdoor unit & it must be possible to operate the unit independently,
through corded/ cordless remote specified in the bill of quantities. The entire system shall be controlled by a system
controller and shall be integrated through BACNET protocol with an intelligent building management system if specified in
bill of quantities. The system controller shall be able to control start / stop on time schedule and also provide common
fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others.
b) Hiwall type units
Wall mounted units must be compact & stylish design that does not detract from the décor of the room.
Each indoor unit must have electronic expansion valve operated by microprocessor thermostat based temperature control
to deliver cooling/ heating as per the heat load of the room.
The unit must have provision of adding drain pump kit if required & specified. The drain pump must be suitable to lift
drain up to 1000 mm from the bottom of the unit.
Unit must be insulated with sound absorbing thermal insulation material, Polystyrene/Polyethylene foam. The noise level
of unit at the highest operating level shall not exceed 46 dB (A), at a vertical distance of 1.5 m from the grille of the unit.

The unit shall be supplied with Resin Net filter with Mold Resistance. The filter shall be easy to remove, clean & re install.
The unit grille must be washable with soap solution.
It shall be possible to set minimum 5 steps of discharge angle by remote controller.
It shall be possible to fit drain pipe from either side of the unit (Left or right)
The unit will be connected in series to a suitable outdoor unit & it must be possible to operate the unit independently,
through corded/ cordless remote specified in the bill of quantities. The entire system shall be controlled by a system
controller and shall be integrated through BACNET protocol with an intelligent building management system if specified in
bill of quantities. The system controller shall be able to control start / stop on time schedule and also provide common
fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others.
c) Cassette – Round Flow:
Designed for low-noise operation, these AC's ensure pleasant air conditioned environment. They are easy to install and
give you high quality cooling and healthy breathing indoor air.
Available in 1.5, 2, 3 and 4 TR
Sleek and stylish, goes with any modern décor
Quiet and efficient air flow in 360 deg. orientation with improved temp. Distribution
The air filter has an anti-mould & antibacterial teratment that prevents the growth of mould generated from dust or
moisture.
Programmable Timer
Power-saver compressor
Fuzzy logic
Integrated drain pump
Non flocking surfaces, which repel dirt& also easy to clean.
D) AHU :
The scope of this section, comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of double skin construction air
handling units, conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with requirements of drawings and of the Schedule
of Quantities
Scope includes coordination with manufacturer, transportation of AHU from Factory to site, unloading at site of double
skin AHU, lifting / shifting to respective AHU rooms, assembling at site, Installation on foundation, connecting the AHU to
existing insulated Chilled Water Piping, insulated Drain Piping, Supply & Return air GP sheet insulated ducts and electrical
Control / Power Cabling, Testing & Commissioning of the same and coordination with original equipment manufacturer for
post installation upkeep of the AHU.
All the AHU dimensions should be as per the site conditions and to suit the available AHU room dimensions.
The air handling units shall be floor mounted, single tier, double skin construction, suitable for Comfort air conditioning
application, with thermal break profile comprising of various sections like mixing box (wherever the return air and fresh
air are ducted), filter section, coil section, fan section, Filter section with Microvee filters and plenum mounted HEPA
filters, as shown on drawings and included in schedule of quantities.
The air handling capacities, maximum motor horse power and static pressure shall be as shown on Drawings & Boq.
Double skinned panels shall be min 43 mm thick made of galvanized steel, pressure injected with foam insulation (density
38 Kg/ cub mtr) with K factor not exceeding 0.02 Watt/Mc. Outer sheet of panels shall be made of galvanized
preplasticised sheet of 0.63 mm thick, and inner sheet of 24 Gauge plain G.I. Sheet.
The entire framework shall be mounted on an aluminum alloy or galvanized steel (depending on size) channel base as per
manufacturer’s recommendation. The panels shall be sealed to the framework by heavy duty `O’ ring gaskets held captive
in the framed extrusion. All panels shall be detachable or hinged. Hinges shall be made of die cast aluminum with
stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made of hard nylon and be operational from both inside and outside of
the unit. Units supplied with various sections shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing
and gaskets shall be concealed. Gaskets shall be air tight EPDM Gasket mounted on aluminum profile.
Units shall have hinged, quick opening access door in the fan section and also in filter section where filters are not
accessible from outside. Access doors shall be double skin type. All units shall have a transparent view window and internal
marine light with external ON-OFF switch to monitor the motor and the belt drive package. The inspection door of the Fan
section shall have limit switch which shall switch off the motor if the inspection door is opened while the unit is in operation.
Condensate drain pan shall be fabricated from 18 gage stainless steel sheet with all corners welded. It shall be
isolated from bottom floor panel through 25 mm heavy duty TF expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foam.
AHU’s requiring mixing boxes shall be complete with following:
 Fresh Air opening as per design (for normal working) with 10 Micron
 washable type EU 4 filter & aluminium aerofoil type low leakage volume control dampers
 Fresh Air opening as per design (for fumigation for 100% of supply air) with 10 Micron washable
type EU 4 filter & aluminium aerofoil type low leakage volume control dampers
Return air opening with aluminium aerofoil type low leakage volume control dampers.
AHU’s with mixing box having return air ducted shall be provided Self Supporting Hollow Extruded Aluminium Profile with
thermal break profile to avoid any condensation on air handling unit body.
Dampers shall be opposed blade low leakage type. Blades shall be made of 16 gauge double skinned aerofoil aluminum
sections with integral gasket and assembled within a rigid extruded aluminium alloy frame. All linkages and supporting
spindles shall be made of aluminium or nylon, turning in Teflon bushes. Manual dampers shall be provided with a
bakelite knob for locking the damper blades in position. Linkages shall be extended wherever specified for motorised
operation. Damper frames shall be sectionalised to minimise blade warping. Air leakage through dampers when in the
closed position shall not exceed 1.5% of the maximum design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total
pressure. Damper construction shall be such that there is no rattling noise when damper is partially closed & air handling
unit fan is ON.
In addition, fusible link type Fire and Smoke Damper as per UL555S-Class II rating for fire and smoke management, rated
for 90 min. as tested by CBRI Roorkee should be provided at outlet of the AHU. Fusible link should be rated for 72 Deg
C and UL Stamp. Each FSD Shall be of multi leaf type low leakage and shall be tested in factory & will be certified by
manufacture in the form of certificate.
Fan motors shall be energy efficient EFF-1 and shall be 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, three phase, totally enclosed fan-
cooled class F, with IP-55 protection. Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation and motor speed shall not
exceed 1440 rpm. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt-drive arrangement. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type.
Fan Motor Base shall be of Extruded Aluminium. Limit switch arrangement along with wiring shall be provided for air
handling unit doors, so that when door opens, fan stops.
Fans shall be centrifugal, forward inclined blades. For total static pressure above 4 in WG, backward curved fan shall
be used. Fan casing shall be made of galvanised steel sheet. Fan wheels shall be made of galvanised steel. Fan
shaft shall be grounded C40 carbon steel and supported in self-aligning Plummer block operating less than 75%
of first critical speed, grease lubricated bearings. Fan wheels and pulleys shall be individually tested and precision
balanced dynamically. Complete air handling unit assembly shall be dynamically balanced to grade G 6.3 as per ANSI /
AMCA 204-96 in the factory.
Motors shall be mounted inside the AHU casing on slide rails for easy belt tensioning, and be totally enclosed, fan
cooled, to be class `F’ insulation. Motors shall drive heavy duty V-belt, constant pitch, drive selected at 110% of motor
horsepower.
Both fan and motors assemblies shall be mounted on a deep section aluminium alloy or galvanised steel (depending
on size) base frame. For fan above 300 mm dia, maximum speed shall not exceed 1000 rpm and for Fans upto and
including 300 mm dia maximum speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. Combination spring and rubber anti vibration mounts
shall be provided for isolating the unit casing from fan - motor assembly. Flame retardant, waterproof silicone rubber
impregnated or neoprene impregnated flexible connection shall be provided at the fan discharge & return air connection.
Chilled Water / Direct Expansion (Dx) coils shall have 12.5 to 15 mm dia tubes minimum 0.4 mm thick with sine
wave aluminium fins firmly bonded to copper tubes assembled in zinc coated steel frame. Face and surface areas
shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and such that the air velocity across the coil shall not
exceed 150 meters per minute. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The coil shall have copper
header with refrigerant / Chilled water supply & return connections protruding out of AHU casing by minimum 150 mm
and fitted with dielectric coupling for connection with Copper / MS pipes. Each coil shall be factory-tested at 21 kg per
sq. m / 300 psig nitrogen pressure under water. Test certificate shall be produced with reset to the testing of eh coil.
Tube shall be hydraulically / mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Fin spacing
shall be 4 - 5 fins per cm. The coil section should have coil bypass with aluminium aerofoil type low leakage volume control
damper. Computer generated cooling coil selection shall be submitted for approval. The coil shall be multicircuit with
intertwined coils.
All public area AHUs shall be provided with minimum 6/8 Row Cooling Coil.
Fan section should be complete with centrifugal belt driven backward curved DIDW fan, TEFC Squirrel cage induction
motor (EFF 1) suitable for 415 + 10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase AC supply and drive set. Fan Section shall have viewing
glass, marine light inside the fan section with switch, safety switch to put off the motor in case door opens accidentally,
belt guard, vibration solators, etc. Fan should generate minimum 150 mm of water static or higher if required to overcome
actual pressure drop.
Each unit shall be provided with a factory assembled filter section containing washable synthetic type air filters having
anodised aluminium frame. The filter shall have minimum 90% efficiency down to 10 microns . The media shall be
supported with HDP mesh on one side and aluminium mesh on other side. Filter banks shall be easily accessible
and designed for easy withdrawal and renewal of filter cells. Filter framework shall be fully sealed and constructed from
aluminium alloy.
In addition, the AHU should be also provided with plenum mounted EU 7 (5 Micron) Microvee Filters and EU 13 HEPA
Filters(0.3 micron).

Maintenance of the AHUs should be done on weekly, fourth nightly & monthly basis.
All filters should have Magnehelic Gauge, of proper scale, across the filter bank. Face and surface areas shall be such
as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and such that the air velocity across the filter bank shall not exceed 150
meters per minute.
Vibration isolators shall be provided with all air handling units. Vibration isolators shall be cushy foot mounting type.
Air handling unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the equipment. Fan performance
rating and power consumption data, with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted and verified at the time
of testing and commissioning of the installation.
Cooling capacity of various air handling unit models be computed from the measurements of air flow and dry and
wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow measurements shall be by an anemometer and
temperature measurements by accurately calibrated mercury-in-glass thermometers. Computed results shall
conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements
of incoming voltage and input current.
4.1.4 Specification for Controls System for VRF air conditioning system:
a) Wired/Wireless Remote Controller:
Wired/Wireless remote controller shall be supplied as specified in the “Bill of Quantities”
The controller must have large crystal display screen, which displays complete operating status.
The digital display must allow setting of temperature with 1 Deg C interval.
Remote shall be able to individually program by timer the respective times for operation start and stop for a period of 1
week.
Remote shall have 24 hrs. Clock function.
Programming can be enabled or disabled. Provide scheduling of start / stop and temperature limit – 5 settings per day.
Remote must be equipped with thermostat sensor in the remote controller that will make possible more comfortable room
temperature control
The remote shall be able to monitor room temperature & preset temperature by microcomputer & can select cool/ heat
operation mode automatically.
The remote must constantly monitor malfunctions in the system & must be equipped with a “self diagnosis function” that
let know by a message immediately when a malfunction occurs.
It shall be possible to wire the remote up to 500 RMT in case of wired remote controller.
Compact light receiving unit to be mounted into wall or ceiling shall be included in case of wireless remote controller if
applicable.
b) Intelligent Control system:
Intelligent control system controller shall be supplied as specified in the “Bill of Quantities”.
The System supplied must integrate with the VRV system.
The VRV system supplied must be provided with a control system, from the supplier of VRV equipments. The required
hard ware must be selected, suitable for up to minimum 128 indoor units.
Complete operation & monitoring of VRV air conditioning system shall be possible through the control system.
Following functions shall be possible
Controlling 128 indoor units

Zone control
Malfunction code display
All the functions available with wired remote controller
It should be possible to wire the remote to 1000m
Scheduling of indoor units, 24 hrs. Clock & programming.
Remote start / stop of indoor units
Graphical report
Energy saving function
Mal function report.
Monitor and report from remote side.
Interface for using Bacnet or Lon works at Client’s option.
Colour LCD touch panel icon display
Multi language (English, French, Italian, German, Spanish & Chinese)
Yearly schedule
P.P.D. (Power Proportional Distribution function)
History of 500 actions
Simple Interlock Function
Fire Alarm System interface
Following major functions shall be provided:
Monitoring Air conditioning status monitoring

Indoor unit error monitoring
Indoor air inlet temperature monitoring
Filter choke sign monitoring
Control, Operation & Start/ Stop control
Setting Temperature adjustment mode setting
Remote control setting
Temperature setting
Filter sign reset
Display Air conditioner operation setting & status
Set temperature
Indoor unit error
Indoor air inlet temperature
Filter sign
Measurement Accurate operation time
Number of switching times
Power consumption with KWH meter
Room temperature
Outdoor temperature
Alarm Fire Alarm interface
Necessary data cabling and connections shall be provided for remote monitoring and control of the complete VRV System.
Remote monitoring of the complete HVAC system shall be possible.
System shall be capable to take external signal like Security/ Fire for forced shut off.
Required hardware shall be suitable for operation between -10 Deg C to 50 Dg C & humidity range, of 0% to 98%, without
condensation.
c) CRC :
Maximum groups are controllable (128 indoor units).

Acting as a zone control. Having Malfunction code display.
Maximum wiring length is 1000m.
Connected with Unified ON/OFF controller, schedule timer & BMS System.
Airflow volume & direction can be controlled individually for indoor units in each group operation.
Up to 4 ON/OFF pairs can be set per day by connecting a schedule timer.
4.2 FAN
4.2.1 Cabinet Type Supply & Exhaust Fan:
Cabinet type Centrifugal fan shall be DIDW / SISW Class I construction arrangement 3 (i.e. bearings on both the
sides) for DWDI fans complete with access door, squirrel-cage induction motor, V-belt drive, belt guard and
vibration isolators, direction of discharge / rotation, and motor position shall be as per the Approved-for-Construction
shop drawings.
Housing shall be constructed of 14 guage sheet steel welded construction. It shall be rigidly reinforced and supported by
structural angles. Split casing shall be provided on larger sizes of fans, however neoprene / asbestos packing should be
provided throughout split joints to make it air-tight.
18 gauge galvanized wire mesh inlet guards of 5 cm sieves shall be provided on both inlets. Housing shall be
provided with standard cleanout door with handles and neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on
the housing.

Fan Wheel shall be backward-curved non-over loading type. Fan wheel and housing shall be statically and dynamically
balanced. For fans upto 450 mm dia, fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10 m/s and maximum fan speed shall not
exceed 1500 rpm. For fans above 450 mm dia, the outlet velocity shall be within 700 meter/minute and maximum fan
speed shall not exceed 1000 RPM. High static pressure fan speed shall be as per manufacturer.
Shaft shall be constructed of steel, turned, ground and polished.
Bearings: shall be of the sleeve / ball-bearing type mounted directly on the fan housing. Bearings shall be designed
especially for quiet operation and shall be of the self-aligning, oil / grease pack pillow block type.
Motor : Fan motor shall be energy efficient and suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase AC power supply,
squirrel-cage, totally enclosed, fan-cooled motor, provided with class F insulation, and of approved make.
Motor name plate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 10%. Motor shall be designed
specially for quiet operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm. The fan and motor combination selected
for the particular required performance shall be of the most efficient (smallest horse power), so that sound level is
lowest.
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following cabinet type
centrifugal fans suitable To installation with backward/forward curved inclined type

DWDI/SWSI centrifugal fans with 3 Phase TEFC
and complete with base frame to mount fan motor with
adjusting brackets, vee drive belt and belt guard, vibration spring isolators,
washable filters having efficiency 90% down to 10 micron, canvas
Connection and epoxy painted.
Push button electrical panel for on/off
For maintain the Negative Pr. In Critical zone we are proposing the double skin ahu for exhaust by
considering the noise level.
To be fixed in exhaust air duct to exhaust air from Isolation room ceiling
suspended Double SKIN.
DIDW cabinet type centrifugal fan for exhaust system complete with starter
panel, control cable
filter section with micro-vee - for DOUBLE FILTERATION
TEFC motor, Direct driven centrifugal blower, VCD & flexible connection at fan
outlet and vibration isolator
Fan static pressure shall be minimum 80 mm WG. Outlet velocity not
exceeding 10 m/s and fan motor speed not exceeding 1500 RPM.
marine light shall be provided in the cabinet.
4.2.2 INLINE FANS
Inline fan shall incorporate SISW direct driven centrifugal fan with TEFC (IP-44) motor. The fan assembly shall be
encased in sheet metal housing of 22G GSS and with necessary inspection cover with proper gasket assembly. The fan
material shall be of galvanized sheet. Flanges shall be provided on both side of the inline fan to facilitate easy
connection. Flexible anti-vibration joints shall be provided to arrest vibration being transformed to other equipment

connected to inline fan. Motor shall be single phase/3 phase shall be mentioned in technical specification attached in
tender.
All single phase shall be provided with speed regulator while all three phase fans shall be provided with opposed blade
dampers in GSS construction at fan outlet for air balancing.
4.2.3 Performance Data
All fans shall be selected for the middle range & lowest operating noise level. Capacity ratings, power consumption, with
operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the
installation.
4.2.4 Testing
Capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer. Measured air flow capacities shall confirm to the specified
capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input
current
4.3 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
4.3.1 Scope
The scope of this section comprises supply fabrication, installation and testing of all sheet metal ducts, supply, and
installation, testing and balancing of all grilles, registers and diffusers. All to be in accordance with these specifications
and the general arrangement shown on the drawings.
4.3.2 Duct Materials
Galvanizing shall be Class VII – light coating of zinc, nominal 180gm/sq.m surface area and Lock Forming Quality prime
material along with mill test certificates. In addition, if deemed necessary, samples of raw material, selected at random
by owner’s site representative shall be subject to approval and tested for thickness and zinc coating at contractor's
expense.
Application Material
1) Ducting for HVAC work. Cold rolled sheets continuous galvanised with zinc
coating as per class VII - Light Coating of zinc, Nominal
180 gm/Sq. m surface area.
2) Supports & duct flanges Mild steel structural steel sections
3) Gasket Foamed/neoprene rubber 3.2 mm (1/8”) min.
4) Bonding/sealant Mastic sealant
4.3.3 Gauges, Bracing by Sizes of Duct
All ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel of the following thickness as per IS - 655, as indicated as below:
Longer Side (mm) Minimum Sheet Thickness(mm) Minimum Sheet Thickness(Gauge)
GI Aluminium GI Aluminium
750 and below 0.63 0.80 24 22
751 to 1500 0.80 1.00 22 20

1501 to 2250 1.00 1.25 20 18
2251 & above 1.25 1.60 18 16
4.3.4 Fabrication Standards & Equipments
All duct construction and installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA/ IS - 655 standards. In addition ducts shall be
factory fabricated utilizing the following machines to provide the requisite quality of ducts.
A coil (Sheet metal in Roll Form) line to facilitate location of longitudinal seams at corners/folded edges only, for required
duct rigidity and leakage free characteristics. No longitudinal seams permitted along any face side of the duct.
All ducts, transformation pieces and fittings to be made on CNC profile cutter for requisite accuracy of dimensions, location
and dimensions of notches at the folding lines.
All edges to be machine treated using lockformers, flangers and rollers for turning up edges.
4.3.5 Duct Construction
Girth angles and companion flanges shall be mitered and welded at corners and riveted to duct sheets at 75 mm (3”)
centers. Flanged joints shall be made with 9.5 mm (3/8”) GI bolts spaced at 100 mm (4”) centers and provided with 3.2
mm (1/8”) foamed/neoprene rubber gasket. All joints and seams shall be rendered air tight with mastic sealant.
Longitudinal scams shall be inside groove of Pittsburgh type.
Standard elbows with a R/D ratio of not less than 1.25 shall be used as far as possible. Where space restrictions do not
permit use of standard radius elbow with less R/D ratio square elbow with equally space double thickness vanes may be
used. Length of tape ducts shall be at least four times the maximum size difference between the ends.
All duct lining for acoustic insulation shall be carried out as specified under sec “NOISE & VIBRATION” before the duct is
installed in position.
Samples of sheet from each lot selected at random by Engineer’s site representative shall be subject to approval & gotten
tested for thickness and zinc coating at Contractor’s expenses.
All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workmanlike manner, generally conforming to relevant BIS Codes.
All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workmanlike manner, conforming to relevant SMACNA/IS codes.
Ducts so identified on the Drawings shall be acoustically lined and insulated from outside as described in the section
“Insulation” and as indicated in schedule of Quantities. Duct dimensions shown on drawings, are overall sheet metal
dimensions inclusive of the acoustic lining where required and indicated in Schedule of quantities.
The fabricated duct dimensions should be as per approved drawings and care should be taken to ensure that all connecting
sections are dimensionally matched to avoid any gaps.
Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with longitudinal seams shall be airtight and at corners only which shall
be either Pittsburgh or snap button as per SMACNA/IS practice, to ensure air tightness.
All exposed ducts upto 60 cm width within conditioned spaces shall have slip joints - or flanged joints. The internal ends
of slip joints shall be in the direction of air flow. Ducts and accessories within ceiling spaces, visible from air conditioned
areas shall be provided with two coats of mat black finish paint.
Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual (between 1:4 and 1:7). Air-turns (vanes) shall be installed
in all bends and duct collars designed to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable turbulence.
Ducts shall be fabricated as per details shown on Drawings. All ducts shall be rigid and shall be adequately supported
and braced where required with standing seams, tees, or angles, of ample size to keep the ducts true to shape and to
prevent buckling, vibration or breathing.
All sheet metal connection, partitions and plenums, required to confine the flow of air to and through the filters and fans,
shall be constructed of 18 gauge GSS / 16gauge aluminum, thoroughly stiffened with 25mm x 25mm x 3mm galvanized
steel angle braces and fitted with all necessary inspection doors as required, to give access to all parts of the apparatus.
Access doors shall be not less than 45cm x 45cm in size.
Plenums shall be shop/factory fabricated panel type and assembled at site. Fixing of galvanized angle flanges on duct
pieces shall be with rivets heads inside i.e. towards GS sheet and riveting shall be done from outside.
Self adhesive Neoprene rubber / UV resistant PVC foam lining 5mm nominal thickness instead of felt, shall be used
between duct flanges and between duct supports in all ducting installation.

All ducts shall be installed generally as per tender Drawings, and in strict accordance with approved shop drawings to be
prepared by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as may be required to carry out the intent of these
Specifications and Drawings. The work shall meet with the approval of Engineer’s site representative in all its parts and
details.
All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by the Contractor for beams, pipes, or other obstruction in the
building, whether or not the same are shown on the Drawings. Where necessary to avoid beams or other structural work
plumbing or other pipes, and conduits, the ducts shall be transformed, divided or curved to one side (the required area
being maintained) all as per the site requirements.
If a duct cannot be run as shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall install the duct between the required points by
any path available, in accordance with other services and as per approval of Engineer’s site representative.
All duct work shall be independently supported from building construction. All horizontal ducts shall be rigidly and securely
supported, in an approved manner, with trapeze hangers formed of galvanized steel rods and galvanized steel
angle/channel under ducts at no greater than 2 meter centre to centre distance. All vertical duct work shall be supported
by structural members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized steel insert plates left in slab at the
time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with a hole for passing the hanger rods shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze
hanger formed of galvanized steel rods and angles/ channels shall be hung through these cleats. Wherever use of metal
insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash/anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically
operated gun. Hanger rods shall then hang through the cleats.
Ducting over furred ceiling shall be supported from the slab above, or from beams, after obtaining approval of Owner’s
site representative. In no case shall any duct be supported from false ceiling hangers or be permitted to rest on false
ceiling. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in time to occasion no delay to other Contractor’s
work in the building.
Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, it shall be provided with 25 mm thick TF quality expanded
polystyrene around the duct and totally covered with fire barrier mortar for complete sealing.
All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever ductwork is connected to fans,
ductable units that may cause vibration in the ducts, ducts shall be provided with a flexible connection, located
at the unit discharge. Flexible connections shall be constructed of fire retarding flexible heavy canvas sleeve atleast 10
cm long securely bonded and bolted on both sides. Sleeve shall be made smooth and the connecting ductwork rigidly held
by independent supports on both sides of the flexible connection. The flexible connection shall be suitable for pressure at
the point of installation.
Duct shall not rest on false ceiling and shall be in level from bottom. Taper pieces shall taper from top.
4.3.6 Duct Supports
Duct supports shall be as follows:
Duct perimeter
Supporting Angle/ rod Location
(mm)
Up to 1500 40 x 40 x 5 mm At Transverse Joints

(1’ F x 1’ F) x (5¼”) MS angle with 9
mm (3/8” tie rod)
From 1500 to 2500 40 x 40 x 6 mm At Transverse Joints

(1 ½ x 1 ½ x ¼”) MS angle with 12.5
(½” ) mm tie rod
Over 2500 50 x 50 x 6 mm At Transverse Joints

(2 x 2 x ¼”) MS angle with 15 mm
(5/8”) tie rod
Additional supports should be taken wherever the engineer-in-charge instructs. The tendered has to include the price of
supports in ducting rates even if he has to take the supports from purlins. The supports from purlins should be taken
without making holes by drilling/gas cutting the purlin/main frame. Additional purlins if required by HVAC contractor will
be in HVAC contractor’s scope of works.
All duct supports, flanges, hangers shall be painted with red oxide and black enamel paint after installation.
Ducts connecting to air moving apparatus shall be through fire resistant double canvas cloth. The flexible connection shall
not be less than 75 mm and not more than 200 mm

4.3.7 Dampers
Dampers shall be multi-blade type with opposed blades or parallel blades of Aluminium Aerofoil construction rotating in
permanently lubricated ball/roller bearings. Blades shall be 250 mm (10”) max. Width and 1200 mm (48”) maximum
length mounted in a 50 mm (2”) channel frame. Blades shall be connected with suitable linkage for gang operation by
an operating rod extending beyond the frame and insulation if any and terminating in a locking quadrant with damper
position indicator. Damper larger than 1200 mm (48”) in width shall be furnished in multiple sections. Dampers should
be located in branch ducts to facilitate balancing of the system.
Dampers shall be manual or motorized as shown on drawings and BOQ. All actuators shall be rated for actual duty
conditions. The selection of same shall be submitted by contractor for approval.
All the dampers shall be of Min.18 G GI Frame with 18 G extruded Aluminium blades.
Fire damper blades and outer frames shall be of 16G galvanized steel construction fitted with 18 gage extended sleeves
on both sides. The damper blade shall be pivoted on both ends using chrome plated spindles in self lubricated bronze
bushes. Stop seals shall be provided on top and bottom of the damper housing made of 16G galvanized sheet steel.
For preventing smoke leakage metallic compression seals will be provided.
All supply air ducts of AHU shall be provided with Motor operated Fire & smoke damper of at least 90 minutes rating as
per UL555/1995 tested by CBRI. These shall be of multi-leaf type and provided with Spring Return electrical actuator
having its own thermal trip for ambient air temperature outside the duct and air temperature inside the duct. Actuator
shall have Form fit type of mounting, metal enclosure and guaranteed long life span.
The electric actuator shall be energized either upon receiving a signal from smoke detector installed in AHU room
supply air duct / return air duct or temperature sensor. The fire damper shall also close upon sensing temperature
rise in supply air ducts thru the electronic temperature sensor.
Each damper shall be provided with its own control panel, mounted on the wall and suitable for 240 V AC supply. This
control panel shall be suitable for spring return actuator and shall have at least the following features:
Potential free contacts for AHU fan ON/ Off and remote alarm indication.
Accept signal from external smoke / fire detection system for tripping the electrical actuator.
Test and reset facility.
Indicating lights / contacts to indicate the following status.
Power Supply On.
Alarm.
Damper open and close position.
It shall be HVAC Contractor’s responsibility to co-ordinate with the Fire Alarm System Contractor for correctly hooking
up the Motor Operated Damper to Fire Detection / Fire Management System. All necessary materials for hooking up
shall be supplied and installed by HVAC Contractor under close co-ordination with the fire protection system contractor.
4.3.8 Supply and Exhaust Air Terminals:
Finish of all the air diffusing equipment shade shall be approved by architect before installing. Supply and return air
terminals shall be made of Min 20 G extruded aluminum section as mentioned in BOQ.
Supply air grilles shall be double deflection type with horizontal face bars and vertical rear bars placed in a rigid marginal
frame. Bars shall be shaped and paced at 18 mm (3/4”) centers with swaged pivot pins positively holding the deflection
setting under all conditions of velocity and pressure. All grilles shall be provided with integral opposed blade, grille face
key operated dampers.
Return grilles shall have fixed face bars shaped and set at 18 mm (3/4) centers. Bars shall be set at suitable deflection
for vision proof installation. The grilles shall be complete with rigid marginal frames and shall be matching with the supply
grilles.
Ceiling diffusers shall be round/square/rectangular face flush type horizontal air diffusion pattern. Diffusers shall have
ample margins to minimize ceiling smudge. All supply air diffusers shall be provided with face operated volume control
dampers.
Linear diffusers/grilles shall be die formed, flush mounted type with single or double directional air flow. The diffuser/grille
shall be in a mild steel frame with minimum 20 mm margin. All linear air diffusing equipment shall be fitted with a
distribution sheet metal plenum. The ends of all linear grilles/ diffusers should be with end flanges.
Mild steel grilles and diffusers shall be fabricated out of 1.0 mm mild steel and painted with two coats of red oxide. All
duct collars terminating on to a grille or diffuser shall be given two coats of black paint for a length of 300 mm from inside.
Grilles and diffusers shall be selected for an aerodynamic noise power not in excess of NC 30.
4.3.9 VAV:

Precisely design flow sensor grid.
A wide variety of sizes result in total flow range of 45to 7100 CFM.
Heavy duty 22 gauges casing construction.
Industry standard round inlet collars sized to accept either flexible or rigid duct.
Internally lined casing utilising open cell elastomeric nitrile foam rubber, fiber free, super silent & micron ban resistant.
Round damper blade constructed of electrometric gasket sandwiched between two heavy duty 22 gauges galvanized steel
plates, resulting in low air leakage.
4.3.10 Louvers:
a. Materials of Construction / Fabrication: Louvers shall generally be fabricated from

Extruded aluminum sections with mitered joints; unless otherwise stated or dictated by Selection with minimum free
area of 60%.
b. Finishing:
Louvers shall have anodized / polyester powder coated colored finish, selected to
Match with the surrounding architectural finishes.
c. Manufactures to submit performance data based on AMCA 500 _ Test Method for
Louvers, Dampers and Shutters
d. Construction:
Single angled louvers of 2.5 mm (12 gauge) thick, 100 mm (4 inch) deep blades set at
45° slope with centre baffle and return bend; set in heavy channel frame.
e. Accessories (for air intake):
i) Exterior flat flange for installation on walls
ii) 19 mm (3/4 inch) square mesh, bird screen; opposed blade, gang operated,
Volume control damper with removable key operator, adjustable from the grill face
iii) 100 mm (4 inch) panel type washable air filter
f). Accessories (for exhaust):
i) 13 mm (½ inch) square mesh, bird screen
4.3.11 Riser:
Riser should be of 18G & Aluminim powder coated. Having flange at the end for proper connection with Ducting along
with gasket. Grille should be provided in riser, 100mm above from the bottom. Grille should be aluminium powder coated.
Supporting arrangement for riser with necessary angle frame etc & it should be epoxy painted to avoid corrosion.
4.3.12 Laminar Air flow Unit:
Laminar air flow unit shoud be of size as mentioned in the drawings. It should be made of thick aluminium sheets of
thickness 1.2mm. Stiffner should be provided for proper installation. HEPA filter section should be in the center of the
unit. HEPA filter should be provided along with that unit as per the requirement. Contractor should provide the test
certificate along with the HEPA filters. HEPA filter section should be flush along with the perforated grille.
Laminar air flow unit should have necessary flange end at all the side of unit for duct connection along with the necessary
gasket.
4.3.13 Flexible Canvas:
There should be a arrangem,ent of canvass connection between unit & duct connection to avoid vibration. Canvass should
be fire retardant to avoid any damage in case of fire.
4.3.14 Static pressure sensor:
DPS should be installed in the duct to measure the static. Sensor should have the arrangement for interlocking with VFD.
According to the sensor input speed of the AHU will be madulate through the VFD.
4.3.15 Measurements For Ducting
Unless otherwise specified, measurements for ducting for the project shall be on the basis of centre-line measurements
described herewith:
a) Duct Work shall be measured on the basis of external surface area of ducts. Duct measurements shall be taken before
application of the insulation. The external surface area shall be calculated by measuring the perimeter comprising
overall width and depth, including the corner joints, in the centre of each duct section, multiplying with the overall
length from flange face to flange face of each duct section and adding up areas of all duct sections. Plenums shall
also be measured in similar manner.
For tapered rectangular ducts, the average width and depth shall be considered for perimeter, whereas for tapered
circular ducts, the diameter of the section midway between large and small diameter shall be adopted, the length of
tapered duct section shall be the centre line distance between the flanges of the duct section.
For special pieces like bends, tees, reducers, branches and collars, mode of measurement shall be identical to that
described above using the length along the centre line.

The quoted unit rate for external surface of ducts shall include all wastage allowances, flanges and gaskets for joints,
nuts and bolts, hangers and angles with double nuts for supports, rubber strip 3 mm thick between duct and support,
vibration isolator suspension where specified or required, inspection chamber / access panel, splitter damper with
quadrant and lever for position indication, turning vanes, straightening vanes, and all other accessories required to
complete the duct installation as per the Specifications. These accessories shall NOT be separately measured nor paid
for.
b) Special Items for Air Distribution shall be measured by the cross-section area perpendicular to air flow, as identified
herewith:
i) Grilles and registers - width multiplied by height, excluding flanges. Volume control dampers shall form part of
the unit rate for registers and shall not be separately accounted.
ii) Diffusers - cross section area for air flow at discharge area, excluding flanges. Volume control dampers shall form
part of unit rate for supply air diffusers and shall not be separately accounted.
iii) Linear diffusers - shall be measured by cross-sectional areas and shall exclude flanges for mounting of linear
diffusers. The supply air plenum for linear diffusers shall be measured with ducting as described earlier.
iv) Fire dampers - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular to the direction of air flow. Quoted
rates shall include the necessary collars and flanges for mounting, inspection pieces with access door, electrical
actuators and panel. No special allowance shall be payable for extension of cross section outside the air stream.
v) Flexible connection - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular to the direction of air flow.
Quoted rates shall include the necessary mounting arrangement, flanges, nuts and bolts and treated-for-fire
requisite length of canvas cloth.
4.3.12 Testing & Balancing
After the installation of the entire air distribution system is completed in all respects, all ducts shall be tested for air
leaks by smoke tes as per standards.
The entire air distribution system shall be balanced using an anemometer. Measured air quantities at fan discharge, at
various outlets and return air shall be identical to or less/excess than 5 percent in excess of those specified and quoted.
Branch duct adjustments shall be permanently marked after air balancing is completed so that these can be restored to
their correct position if disturbed at any time.
Complete air balance report shall be submitted for scrutiny and approval, and four copies of the approved balance
report shall be provided with completion documents.
4.4 INSULATION
4.4.1 Scope
The scope of this section comprises the supply and application of insulation conforming to these specifications.
4.4.2 Material
Thermal Insulation
Insulation material for Duct & Pipe insulation shall be closed cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber. Thermal conductivity
of the insulation material shall not exceed 0.038 W/moK or 0.212 BTU / (Hr-ft2-oF/inch) at an average temperature of
30oC. Density of the nitrile rubber shall be 40-60 Kg/m3. The product shall have temperature range of –40 oC to 105oC.
The insulation material shall be fire rated for Class 0 as per BS 476 Part 6: 1989 for fire propagation test and for Class 1
as per BS 476 Part 7:1987 for surface spread of flame test. Water vapour permeability shall be not less than 0.024 perm
inch (2.48 x 10-14 Kg/m.s.Pa i.e. µ=7000: Water vapour diffusion resistance). The material shall have approval from the
Chief Fire Officer if required. Material shall also be FM global approved.
Ducting insulation thickness shall be as per table below.
Ducting position Thk. for non-coastal places Thk. for coastal places
SA duct in RA path 13mm 19mm

Ducted return air system SA duct: 19mm SA duct: 25mm
RA duct: 13mm RA duct: 19mm
Both SA& RA exposed Both 25mm Both 25mm

Acoustic Insulation
Internal Insulation material for Duct insulation shall be open cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber. Density of the nitrile rubber
shall be Min 120 Kg/m3, NRC 0.6. The product shall have temperature range of –20 oC to 85oC. The insulation material
shall be fire rated for Class 0 as per BS 476 Part 6: 1989 for fire propagation test and for Class 1 as per BS 476 Part
7:1987 for surface spread of flame test. The material shall have approval from the Chief Fire Officer if required. Material
shall also be FM global approved.
Underdeck Insulation
The insulation material shall satisfy the following requirements: -
Thickness Density
Material
(mm) (Kg/cu.m)
For Underdeck Insulation on exposed Roof
TF Quality EPS 50 16
Insulation material for under deck insulation of exposed concrete slab shall be 50mm thick TF quality Expanded
Polystyrene of 16 Kg/m3 fixed to slab with 8 5/20 grade hot bitumen and mechanically fastened at suitable intervals
using GI screw washer & GI diagonal wires. The insulation shall be covered with 36 G Aluminium Foil. Insulation work to
be coordinated with other agencies and repair to be included by contractor as per site requirement.
Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application. Each lot of insulation material delivered at
site shall be accompanied with manufacturer’s test certificate for thermal conductivity values, density, water vapour
permeability and fire properties. Samples of insulation material from each lot delivered at site may be selected by Owner’s
site representative and gotten tested for thermal conductivity and density at Contractor’s cost. Adhesive used for sealing
the insulation shall be non-flammable, vapour proof adhensive strictly as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.4.3 Application of Insulation
Application of Duct Thermal Insulation
External thermal insulation shall be provided as follows:
The thickness of nitrile rubber shall be as shown on drawing or identified in the schedule of quantity. Following
procedure shall be adhered to:
Duct surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all grease, oil, dirt, etc. prior to carrying out insulation work. Measurement of
surface dimensions shall be taken properly to cut closed cell elastomeric rubber sheets to size with sufficient allowance
in dimension. Cutting of nitrile rubber sheets shall be done with adjustable blade to make 900 cut in thickness of nitrile
rubber sheet. Hackshaw or blades are not acceptable tools for cutting the insulation.
Material shall be fitted under compression and no stretching of material shall be permitted. A thin film of adhesive shall
be applied on the back of the insulating material sheet and then on to the metal surface. When adhesive is tack dry,
insulating material sheet shall be placed in position and pressed firmly to achieve a good bond. All longitudinal and
transverse joints shall be sealed by providing 6 mm thick 50 mm wide nitrile rubber tape. The adhesive shall be strictly
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Application of Duct Acoustic Insulation
Internal Acoustic insulation shall be provided as follows:
The thickness of nitrile rubber shall be as shown on drawing or identified in the schedule of quantity. Following
procedure shall be adhered to:
Duct surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all grease, oil, dirt, etc. prior to carrying out insulation work. Measurement of
surface dimensions shall be taken properly to cut open cell elastomeric rubber sheets to size with sufficient allowance in
dimension. Cutting of nitrile rubber sheets shall be done with adjustable blade to make 900 cut in thickness of nitrile
rubber sheet. Hackshaw or blades are not acceptable tools for cutting the insulation.
Material shall be fitted under compression and no stretching of material shall be permitted. A thin film of adhesive shall
be applied on the back of the insulating material sheet and then on to the metal surface. When adhesive is tack dry,
insulating material sheet shall be placed in position and pressed firmly to achieve a good bond. The adhesive shall be
strictly as recommended by the manufacturer.
Provide external thermal insulation to entire length of duct in addition to acoustic lining in accordance with the
specifications. The duct sizes shall be adjusted to compensate the thickness of internal insulation.

Application of under deck Insulation on exposed Roof:
Underdeck insulation shall be 50mm thick TF Quality expanded polystyrene (32 Kg/m3). Underdeck surface of ceiling
shall be cleaned and made dirt free. Insulation panels shall be pasted on this surface with black CPRX compound. 28g
wire net shall be tightened around insulation so as to avoid any kind of sagging. Ends of net shall be overlapping by at
least 25mm. Overlaps shall be screwed with galvanized screws to avoid rusting.
4.4.4 Protective coating over Thermal Insulation
To provide mechanical strength and protection from damage all pipe / duct insulated with nitrile rubber as indicated in
BOQ shall be covered with fibreglass fabric of 7 mil minimum thickness.
Insulated pipes & ducts exposed to UV rays shall be covered with fibreglass fabric. Over fabric one coat of fire proof
epoxy or acrylic compound shall be applied. The coat shall be allowed to cure to non stick state. Subsequently second
coat of compound shall be applied to give a tough and smooth finish to the insulated surface.
4.4.5 Measurement of Insulation
Duct insulation and acoustic lining shall be measured on the basis of surface area along the centre line of insulation
thickness. Thus the surface area of externally thermal insulated or acoustically lined duct shall be based on the
perimeter at the centre of thickness of insulation, multiplied by the centre-line length of dueling including tapered
pieces, bends, tees, branches etc. as measured for bare ducting. In the case of tapering pieces, their average perimeter
shall be considered.
4.4.6 Push Button Stations
Push button stations shall be provided for manual starting and stopping of motors / equipment Green and Red colour
push buttons shall be provided for ‘Starting’ and ‘Stopping’ operations. ‘Start’ or ‘Stop’ indicating flaps shall be provided
for push buttons. Push Buttons shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front without opening door,
Lock lever shall be provided for ‘Stop’ push buttons. The push button contacts shall be suitable for 6 amps current
capacity.
4.4.7 Cables & Cable Sizes
1100V grade Cables of sizes 25 sq. mm. and above shall be XLPE FRLS insulated aluminium conductor armoured type
and PVC insulated Copper conductor armoured cables for sizes 16 sq. mm. and below. All cables shall be conforming to
IS Codes. Cables shall be suitable for laying in trenches, ducts, and on cable trays as required. Cables shall be termite
resistant. Cable glands shall be heavy duty double compression brass glands. Control cables and indicating panel cables
shall be multi core PVC insulated copper conductor and armoured cables.
The equipment inside plant room shall be connected to the control panel by means of suitable cables of
adequate size. An isolator shall be provided near each motor/equipment (mounted within 10 ~ 15 mtr distance on
nearest wall or self supported on floor) wherever the motor/equipment is separated from the supply panel through a
partition barrier or through ceiling construction. PVC insulated copper conductor wires shall be used inside the control
panel for connecting different components and all the wires inside the control panel shall be neatly dressed and plastic
beads shall be provided at both the ends for easy identification of control wiring.
Contractor shall select suitable rating and type of starter for the motors as per directions and approval from relevant
authorities. Power cabling shall be suitable for selected rating and type of starter selected. Power cabling shall be of the
following sizes:
Power wiring, cabling shall be of the following sizes:
a) Up to 5 HP motors/ 5 KW heaters 1no. 3C x 4 sq. mm Copper

Conductor.
b) From 6 HP to 10 HP motors/ 1no.3C x 6 sq. mm Copper
6 KW to 7.5 KW heaters. Conductor.
c) From 12.5 HP to 15 HP motors 2 No. 3C x 6 sq. mm Copper
Conductor,
d) From 20 HP to 25 HP motors 2 No. 3C x 10 sq. mm Copper
Conductor,
e) From 30 HP to 35 HP motors 2no. 3C x 16 sq.mm aluminium
Conductor Armoured.
f) From 40 HP to 50 HP motors 2 No. 3.5C x 25 sq.mm
Aluminium conductor, XLPE
Insulated, armoured
g) From 60 HP to 75 HP motors 1 No. 3C x 70 sq. mm

Aluminium (Star-Delta Starter)
Conductor, XLPE insulated,
Armoured
h) 100 HP motors 1 No. 3C x 150sq. mm.
aluminium, conductor
XLPE insulated
Armoured cables on motor side.
i) 125 HP motors 1 No. 3C x 150 sq. mm.
Aluminium, XLPE insulated
Armoured cables on motor side.
j) 150 HP motors 1 No. 3C x 240 sq. mm. aluminium,
Conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured cable
k) 200 HP motors 1 No. 3.5C x 240 sq. mm. aluminium,
Conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured cable
All the switches, contactors, push button stations, indicating lamps shall be distinctly marked with a small description of
the service installed. The following capacity contactors and overload relays shall be provided for different capacity
motors or as per manufacturer’s recommendation.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TYPE OF CONTACTOR OVERLOAD
STARTER CURRENT RELAY CAPACITY RANGE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5 HP Motors DOL 16 amps 6-10 amps
7.5 HP motors DOL 16 amps 9-15 amps
10 HP Motors DOL 25 amps 9-15 amps
12.5 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 16 amps 9-15 amps
15 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 25 amps 9-15 amps
50 HP Motors VFD / soft 70 amps 30-50 amps
60 HP Motors VFD/ soft 110 amps 30-50 amps
75 HP Motors VFD / soft 110 amps 90-150 amps
100 HP Motors VFD / soft 200 amps CT operated relay
150 HP Motors VFD / soft 300 amps CT operated Relay.
Two speed motors when specified, shall be provided with DOL starter irrespective of it rating.
4.4.8 Cable Trays:
Ladder and perforated type Cable Trays shall be of Hot dip Galvanized type and factory fabricated out of CRCA sheet
with standard accessories like tee, bends, couplers etc. for different loads and number and size of cables as given below
:
Cable trays shall be galvanized as per Specifications...
a) 1500 mm wide
Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C
Suspenders 2 Nos. 40 x 40 x 5 mm GI angle 1500 mm C/C with base support of
40x 40 x 5mm GI angle.
b) 1200 mm wide
Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C
c) 1000 mm wide
Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C
d) 750 mm wide
Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C
e) 600 mm wide
Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C
f) 400 mm wide
Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C
g) Supply and fixing of perforated type cable trays of the following sizes of pregalvanized iron.
i) 600 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
ii) 400 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
iii) 300 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
iv) 150 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick
Note: Suitable length of 10 mm dia GI rod suspenders at 1800 mm interval shall be included in the item for perforated
type cable tray.
4.4.9 Specification of Hot Dip Galvanizing Process:
(for Mild Steel Used For Earthing, Cable Trays Or Junction Boxes For Electrical
Installation.)
a) General Requirements
i) Quality of Zinc
Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS: 209-1992.
ii) Coating Requirement

Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in
Accordance with IS: 6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.
The weight of coating expressed in grams per square meter shall be calculated by dividing the total weight of Zinc by
total area (both sides) of the coated surface.
The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux,
ash and dross inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs,
rust stains bulky white deposits, blisters.
Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing and then galvanizing.
4.4.10 Testing of Cables
Cables shall be tested at works for all routine tests as per IS including the following tests before being dispatched to site
by the project team.
b) Continuity resistance test.
c) Sheathing continuity test.
d) Earth test.(in armoured cables)
e) Hi Pot Test.
Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phase and earth for each length of
cable, before and after jointing. On completion of cable laying work, the following tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the Owner’s site representative.
a) Insulation Resistance Test( Sectional and overall)

b) Continuity resistance test.
c) Sheathing continuity test.
d) Earth test.
All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice
and Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, equipment and labour for conducting the
above tests and shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the
Owner’s site representative, results will be noted and signed by all present and record be maintained.
4.4.11 Earthing
Earthing shall be provided in accordance with relevant BIS Codes and shall be copper strips /wires .The main
panel shall be connected to main earthing system of the power supply. All single phase metal clad switches and control
panels be earthed with minimum 3 mm diameter copper conductor wire. All 3 phase motors and equipment shall be
earthed with 2 numbers distinct and independent copper wires / GI tapes of minimum sizes as follows:
i) Motor upto and including 2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper
10 HP rating. Wires.
ii) Motor 12.5 HP to 40 HP capacity 2 Nos. 4 mm dia copper wires
iii) Motor 50 to 75 HP capacity. 2 Nos. 6 mm dia copper
iv) Motor above 75 HP. 2 Nos. 25 mm x 3 mm

Copper tapes.
Above sizes are the minimum sizes to be provided. The contractor shall do a check for expected fault current at the
motor end and shall provide a higher size conductor if necessary in order to withstand the fault current for 1sec.
All switches shall be earthed with two numbers distinct and independent copper wires’ tapes as follows:
i) 3 phase switches 2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper

And control panels upto wires.
60 amps rating.
ii) 3 phase switches, and 2 Nos. 4 mm dia copper

Control panels 63 amps to wires.
100 amps rating.
iii) 3 phase switches and control 2 Nos. 6 mm dia copper

Panels 125 amps to wires.
200 amps rating.
iv) 3 phase switches, control 2 Nos. 3 mm x 25 mm

Panels, bus ducts, above copper tapes.
200 amps rating.
The earthing connections shall be tapped off from the main earthing of electrical installation. The overlapping in earthing
strips at joints where required shall be minimum 75 mm. These straight joints shall be riveted with brass rivets &
brazed in approved manner. Sweated lugs of adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of wires. Lugs
shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the metal body is cleaned of paint and other oily substance,
and properly tinned.
4.4.12 Drawings
Shop drawings for control panels and for wiring of equipment showing the route of conduit & cable shall be submitted by
the contractor for approval of Project Manager/Consultant before starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work.
On completion, four sets of complete “As-installed” drawings incorporating all details like, conduits routes, number of
wires in conduit, location of panels, switches, junction/pull boxes and cables route etc. shall be furnished by the
contractor.
4.4.13 Testing
Before commissioning of the equipment, the entire electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with relevant BIS
codes and test report furnished by a qualified and authorised person. The entire electrical installation shall be gotten
approved by Electrical Inspector and a certificate from Electrical Inspector shall be submitted. All tests shall be carried
out in the presence of Project Manager. Testing of the panels shall be as per relevant BIS Codes.
5. Quality Assurance, Inspection, Testing and Commissioning
Scope
The following quality assurance, inspection, testing and commissioning procedures shall be required to be carried out
upon award of work.
a) Provide quality assurance program (QAP), works quality assurance program

(WQAP), field quality assurance program (FQAP) and quality plan.
b) Tests at manufacturer’s works.
c) Perform site tests and commissioning.
Quality Assurance Concept and Control
a) Minimum requirements for establishing and implementing a quality assurance programme shall be applied to
all aspects of the work necessary for carrying out the contract. Quality assurance shall extend to material
parts, components, Systems and services as a means of obtaining and sustaining the reliability of
Critical items, operating performance, maintenance and safety.
b) Acceptance of the Contractor’s quality assurance programme does not relieve the Contractor’s obligation to
comply with the requirement of the contract document. If the programme is found to be ineffective, then the
Owner’s site representative reserves the right to request for necessary revisions of the programme.
c) The Contractor is required to produce readily identifiable documentary evidence covering the extent and details
of both his own and his sub contractor’s quality assurances system as follows :
i) Quality Assurance Program (QAP)
ii) Works Quality Assurance programme (WQAP)
iii) Field Quality Assurance Programme (FQAP)
iv) Quality Plan.
d) These documents shall be prepared separately and submitted to the Owner’s site.
Testing & Balancing
Air Handlers Performance
The TAB procedure shall establish the right selection and performance of the AHUs with the following results:
a. Air-IN DB and WB temperature.

b. Air-OUT DB and WB temperature.
c. Dew point air leaving.
d. Sensible heat flow.
e. Latent heat flow.
f. Sensible heat factor.
g. Fan air volume.
h. Fan air outlet velocity.
i. Fan static pressure.
j. Fan power consumption.
k. Fan speed.
Air distribution:
Both supply and return air distribution for each AHU and for areas served by the AHU shall be determined and adjusted
as necessary to provide design air quantities.
It shall cover balancing of air through main and branch ducts utilising telescoping probes of Electronic Rotating Vane
Anemometers and Accubalance for grilles and diffusers.
The Preparatory Work
To conduct the above test, following preparatory works are required to be carried out including the availability of approved
for construction shop drawings and submittals:
a. All outside air intake return air and exhaust air dampers are in proper position.
b. All system volume dampers and fire dampers are in full open position.
c. All access doors are installed & are air tight.
d. Grilles are installed & dampers are fully open.
e. Provision and accessibility of usage of TAB instruments for traverse measurements are
available.
f. All windows, doors are in position.
g. Duct system are of proper construction and are equipped with turning vanes and joints are
sealed.
h. Test holes and plugs for ducting.

SYSTEM READY TO BALANCE

CHECK LIST
Ready Date Ready Date
1. HVAC Units (AHU) Ye No. Correcte Yes No. Correcte
s d d
a) General e) Vibration isolation

Louvers installed Springs and compression
Manual dampers open & locked Base level and free
Automatic dampers set properly
Housing Construction-leakage 2. Duct systems
Access doors-leakage a) General
Condensate drain piping and pan Manual dampers open & locked
Free from dirt and debris Access doors closed and tight
Nameplate data Fire dampers open and
accessible
b) Filters Terminal units open and set
Type and size Registers and diffusers open and
set
Number Turning vanes in square elbows
Clean Provisions made for TAB
measurements.
Frame-Leakage Systems installed as per plans.
c) Coils (Hydronic) Ductwork sealed as required
Size and rows b) Architectural
Fin spacing and condition Windows installed and closed.
Obstructions and / or debris Doors closed as required.
Airflow and direction Ceiling plenums installed and
sealed.
Piping leakage Access doors closed and tight
Correct piping Connections and Air shafts and openings as
flow required
Valves open or set
Airvents or steam traps 3. Pumps.
Provisions made for TAB a) Motors.
measurements
d) Fans. Rotation
Rotation. Lubrication
Wheel clearance and balance Alignment
Bearing and motor lubrication Set screws tight
Drive alignment Guards in place
Belt t tension. Tank level and controls.
Drive set screws tight Starters and disconnect switches
Belt guard in place Electrical service & connections.
Flexible duct connector Nameplate data.
alignment
Starters and disconnect switches
Electrical service & connections.
Nameplate data
b) Piping 5. Refrigeration Equipment

Correct flow Crankcase heaters energized
Correct connections Operating controls and devices.
Leakage Safety controls and devices.
Valves open or set Valves open
Strainer clean Piping connections and flow

Air vented Flexible connectors
Flexible connectors Oil level and lubrication
Provisions made for TAB Alignment and drives.
measurements
c) Bases Guards in place.
Vibration isolation. Vibration isolation.
Grouting Starters, contactors and
disconnect switches.
Leveling. Electrical connectors.
Nameplate data.
4. Hydronic equipment.
a) Heat Exchangers/HW coil 6. Hydronic Piping systems.
Correct flow and connections Leak tested.
Valves open or set Fluid levels and make-up
Air vents or steam traps Relief or safety valves.
Leakage Compression tanks and air
vents.
Provisions made for TAB Steam traps and connections.
measurements
Nameplate data. Strainers clean
valves open or set
b) Cooling towers
Correct flow and connections. Provisions made for TAB
measurements.
Valves open or set Systems installed as per plans.
Leakage
Provisions made for TAB 7. Controls System
measurements
Sump water level. Data centers.
Spray nozzles. Outdoor return air reset
Fan/pump rotation. Economizer
Motor/fan lubrication. Static pressure
Drives and alignment Room controls.
Guards in place. 8. Other Checks.
a) Other trades or personnel
notified of TAB work
requirements.
b) Preliminary data complete
c) Test report forms prepared.
AIR HANDLING / EVAPORATOR EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT
PROJECT_____________________________________ SYSTEM / UNIT________________________
LOCATION___________________________________________________________________________________
UNIT DATA MOTOR DATA
Make/Model No. Make / Frame
Type/Size H.P / RPM
Serial Number Volts/Phase/cycles

Arr./Class F.L amps.
Discharge Pully Diam/Bore
Pully diam/Bore Pully /Distance.
No. Belts/make/size
No.Filters/type.size
(Pre.)
No.Filters/type/size
(secondary)
TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL
Total Cfm Discharge S.P
Total S.P
Fan RPM Cooling Coil S.P
Motor Volts. T T T T
1 2 2 3 Filters S.P
T T
3 1
Outside air Cfm
Return air Cfm
REMARKS.
TEST DATE______________________________________ READINGS BY
FAN TEST REPORT
PROJECT___________________________________________________________________________________
FAN DATA FAN NO. FAN NO. FAN NO.
Location
Service
Manufacturer
Model No.
Serial No.
Type / Class

Motor Make / Style
Motor H.P/RPM/ Frame
Volts/Phase/Cycles
F.L Amps.
Motor pully Diam./Bore
Fan pully Diam./Bore
No. Belts/ Make/Size
Pully Distance.
TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL DESIGN ACTUAL DESIGN ACTUAL
CFM
FAN RPM
S.P IN/OUT
TOTAL S.P
Voltage T T T T
1 2 2 3
T T
3 1
Amperage T1 T2 T3
REMARKS:
Check List of Existing Chillers for Testing & Commissioning

General Notes:
1. This is a generic test procedure for chillers. If the complexity, configuration, or other aspects of a specific project
require substitute tests or additional tests, explain on the comments sheets, and attach the additional test procedures
and field data. Attach all relevant functional performance verification sheets, and always attach the final signed and
dated procedure certification page.
2. In all test sections, circle or otherwise highlight any responses that indicate deficiencies (i.e. responses that don’t
meet the criteria for acceptance). Acceptance requires correction and retest of all deficiencies, as defined in each test
section under “Criteria for Acceptance” or “Acceptance”. Attach all retest data sheets. Complete the Deficiency Report
Form for all deficiencies.
3. This Commissioning Procedure does not address fire and life safety or basic equipment safety controls.
4. To ensure that this Commissioning Procedure will not damage any equipment or affect any equipment
warranties, have the equipment manufacturer’s representative review all test procedures prior to execution.
NAMEPLATE DATA (from equipment nameplates, as recorded in field):

Criteria for Acceptance: Nameplate data must be in accordance with submittals as approved by Designer and
Commissioning Vendor.
DESCRIPTION CHILLER #
Manufacturer
Model #
Serial #
Evaporator Model #, if not inc. in chiller #
Condenser Model #, if not inc. in chiller #
Chiller Type (centrifugal, screw, recip, scroll)
Condenser Type (water or air cooled)
Compressor Motor, volts
Compressor Motor, LRA
Compressor Motor, FLA or RLA
Refrigerant Type
Manufacturer’s Efficiency Rating, kW/ton @
ARI standard conditions (catalog rating)

CONTROLS CALIBRATION:
Instructions: All control points listed under each chiller refer to sensors and stats that are dedicated to that chiller
system, and for the most part physically located close to or in the chiller, not global (building-level) points. For
thermostats, slowly adjust the setpoint until the controlled response begins (i.e. contact make or break). Note the
setpoint when that occurs and the simultaneous measured value on a calibrated instrument held in close proximity to
the sensing bulb. If sensor location is improper, explain in comments. Enter other chiller control points that are critical
to the control sequence in the blank spaces for each chiller, as appropriate. It is not necessary to repeat anycalibration
that was documented in the Standard Commissioning Procedure for EMSs, but refer to that document where relevant.
Criteria for Acceptance: Temperature sensors, EMS or contact make/break values 2 F degrees from measured
values.
CONTROL TYPE SENSOR / STAT
LOCATION
CONTROL
LOCATION OK?
MEASURED
VALUE
EMS VALUE
or
MAKE/BRK
VALUE
ACCEPTABLE? / COMMENTS
Outdoor air temp.,
global (EMS)
Chiller-____:
Evap. water temp. in
Evap. water temp. out
Cond. water temp. in
Cond. water temp. out
Chiller-____:
Chiller-____:
FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION:

The following sections are a series of field tests that are intended to verify that the chillers, as installed, operate as
they were intended to operate by the manufacturer and designer. If the field observation does not correspond to the
intended design operation, write a comment number that refers to an explanatory comment in the comments
section or on attached comments sheets. If a test does not apply, write "NA" for not applicable. If you were not
able to complete a test, write "ND" for not done, and explain in a comment.
Criteria for Acceptance: All measured values must be within 15% of the design values, unless otherwise noted
under a specific test. Measured amps must be less than the rated full load amps. Measured voltage imbalance must be
less than 2%.
Full Load Test: Perform the following tests and measurements by forcing the chiller to its maximum capacity. Any false
loading should be done gradually to avoid overloading systems. Loading can be done by some combination of increasing
the
building load (lowering cooling setpoints), heating the building, manipulating cross-over valves between the chilled
water and
condenser water piping, or manipulating the chilled water mixing valve on the chilled water return line.
CHILLER #
1. Chiller FLA, design / / / / / /
2. Chiller amps, measured / / / / / /
3. Volts, phase to phase / / / / / /
4. Voltage imbalance, (max of (a,b,c - avg))/avg)
5. Is voltage imbalance < 2%?
6. Leaving chilled water (CHW) temp, design
7. Leaving CHW temp, measured
8. Entering CHW temp, design
9. Entering CHW temp, measured
10. Delta (entering - leaving) CHW temp, design
11. Delta CHW temp, measured

12. Evaporator water flow rate, design gpm
13. Evaporator water flow rate, measured P/gpm / / /
For Water-Cooled Condensers & Towers:
14. Ambient air temperature, deg F
15. Entering condenser water (CW) temp, design
16. Entering CW temp, measured
17. Leaving CW temp, design
18. Leaving CW temp, measured
19. Delta (leaving - entering) CW temp, design
20. Delta CW temp, measured
21. Condenser water flow rate, design gpm
22. Condenser water flow rate, measured P/gpm / / /
For Air-Cooled & Evaporative Condensers:
23. Ambient air temperature, deg F
TEST DATE: _________________________________

READINGS BY ____________________
6. Noise Control:
6.1 SCOPE
The scope of this section comprises of the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of noise and vibration
control equipment and accessories.
6.2 STANDARDS
The testing of all noise control equipment and the methods used in measuring the noise rating of air
conditioning plant and equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of the following British
Standards, unless otherwise stated :
BS 4718 : 1971 Methods of Test of Silencers for Air Distribution Systems.
BS 2750 :
Parts 1-9:1980 Laboratory and Field Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation of
Various Building Elements.
Recommendations for Field Laboratory Measurement of Airborne and
Impact Sound Transmission in Buildings.
BS 3638 : 1987 Methods of Measurement of Sound Adsorption in a Reverberation

Room.
BS 4773 :
Part 2: 1976 Acoustic Testing.
BS 4856 :
Part 2: 1976 Acoustic performance without additional ducting of forced fan
convection equipment.
Part 5: 1976 Acoustic performance with additional ducting of forced fan

convection equipment.
BS 4857 :
Par 2:1978 (1983) Acoustic Testing and Rating of High Pressure Terminal Reheat Units.
BS 4954 :
Par 2:1978 (1987) Acoustic Testing and Rating of Induction Units.
BS 5643 : 1984 Glossary of Refrigeration, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

Terms.
6.3 GENERAL
Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with provisions to contain noise and the
transmission of vibration, generated by moving plant and equipment at source where illustrated on the tender
drawings and plant and equipment schedules to achieve acceptable noise rating specified for occupied areas.
In addition to the provisions specified in the Specification, particular attention must be given to the following
details at time of ordering plant and equipment and their installation :-

a. All moving plant , machinery and apparatus shall be statically and dynamically balanced at
manufacturers works and certificates issued.
b. The isolation of moving plant, machinery and apparatus including lines equipment from the building
structure.
c. Where duct work and pipe work services pass through walls, floors and ceilings, or where supported
shall be surrounded with a resilient acoustic absorbing material to prevent contact with the structure
and minimise the outbreak of noise from plant rooms.
d. The reduction of noise breakout from plant rooms and the selection of externally mounted equipment
and plant to meet ambient noise level requirements of the Specifications.
e. Electrical conduits and connections to all moving plant and equipment shall be carried out in flexible
conduit and cables to prevent the transmission of vibration to the structure and nullify the provisions of
anti-vibration mountings.
f. All duct connections to fans shall incorporate flexible connections, except in cases where these are fitted
integral within air handling units.
Duct work connections to the fan inlets / outlets shall be concentricity aligned so that the flexible
connections are not subjected to any strain and not used as a means of correcting bas misalignment.
g. All resilient acoustic absorbing materials shall be non flammable, vermin and rot proof and shall not
tend to break up or compress sufficiently to transmit vibration or noise from the equipment to the
structure.
h. Where practicable, silencers shall be built into walls and floors to prevent the flanking of noise the duct
work systems and their penetrations sealed in the manner previously described.
Where this is not feasible, the exposed surface of the duct work between the silencer and the wall
subjected to noise infiltration shall be acoustically clad as specified.
6.4 SILENCERS
At tender stage all silencers as scheduled in the specification or on tender drawings will be selected based on
preliminary sound power levels obtained from fan/air handling unit manufacturers or fan duties to achieve a
noise rating in the occupied space as specified in “ Basis of Design”
All plant attenuators shall be selected to maintain noise criteria given in this Specification.
Attenuators shall be constructed from high quality pre-galvanised steel sheet casings with lock formed joints
along the casing length. Angle iron cross jointing flanges shall be fitted to silencer casings, drilled as required
and finished with red oxide primer paint.
Acoustic splitters shall be formed by chancel section pre-galvanised sheet steel framework retaining acoustic fill
of a density to attain the required performance. Splitters shall have round nose ends to give smooth entry and
exit conditions to minimise air pressure drops.
The acoustic fill shall be protected from the air flow by 22 swg minimum perforated galvanised sheet steel.
All silencers shall be selected against a maximum allowable air pressure drop of 75 a.
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor at the time of placing orders for fan equipment to obtain from the
manufacturers, certified sound power levels to enable the selected duct silencers to be checked against the
original design information, prior to orders being placed.
6.5 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS
All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the structure by the use of
anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring loaded supports fixed to either concrete bases, inertia blocks or
support steels as indicated.
Centrifugal fans and motors within air handling units shall be isolated from the frame of the air handling unit by
suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fan discharge air connections shall be fitted with approved flexible connections
internally isolating the fan scroll from the air handling unit casing.
Axial flow fans shall be mounted on steel legs as diaphragm plates supported on neoprene in shear anti-vibration
mountings, or suspended using spring loaded hangers to suite the application.
Centrifugal pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases consisting of reinforced concrete sub-base, anti-vibration
mountings and concrete filled steel upper plinth. The Contractor shall be responsible for issuing the steel upper
plinth and mountings to the Contractor for building-in.
Pipe work connections to circulating pumps, chillers, cooler coils and other equipment shall be made with flexible
connections as per Specifications.
The construction of the anti-vibration mountings shall generally comply with the following: -
Enclosed Spring Mounting (Caged or Restrained Springs)
Each mounting shall consist of cast or fabricated telescopic top and bottom housing enclosing one or more helical
steel springs as the principle isolation elements, and shall incorporate a built- in levelling device.
The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height, and be selected to have
at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound.
The bottom plate of each mounting shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate any high
frequency energy transmitted by the springs.
Mountings incorporating snubbers of restraining devices shall be designed so that the snubbing damping or
restraining mechanism is capable f being adjusted to have no significant effect during the normal running of the
isolated machine.
Restrained isolator shall be provided on chillers subject to approval by the manufacturers.
6.6 OPEN SPRING MOUNTINGS
Each mounting shall consist of one or more helical steel springs as the principal isolation elements, and shall
incorporate a built-in levelling device. The spring shall be fixed or otherwise securely located to cast or fabricated
top and bottom plates, and shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height, and
shall be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil-bound.
The bottom plate shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate any high frequency energy
transmitted by the springs.
6.7 NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR MOUNTINGS
Each mounting shall consist of a steel top plate and base plate completely embedded in oil resistant neoprene.
Each mounting shall be capable of being fitted with a levelling device, and bolt holes in the base plate and tapped
holes in the top plate so that they may be bolted to the floor and equipment where required.
6.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
Flexible connections shall be provided on all duct work connections to fans, rotating plant and equipment isolated
from structure and anti-vibration materials or mountings. Pipe work and duct work crossing building movement
or construction joints shall be installed with flexible connections.
Flexible connections on duct work to fans etc., shall be a minimum / maximum free length of 100 mm. / 200
mm. respectively to minimise noise transmission and noise breakout. They shall be completely free from stress
and shall not be required to accept any weight.
Thickness and strength of flexible connection materials shall be suitable to withstand the positive and negative
fan pressures to which they will be subjected to and shall not allow perceptible leakage. The materials shall be
durable, non flammable having food acoustical quality.
Flexible connections shall be fitted to all pump suction and discharge connections, chillers and other vibrating
equipment and where anti-vibration mounts and inertia basis are fitted.
Flexible connections shall be fitted to all cooler coil chilled water pipe work connections.
Flexible connections shall allow freedom of movement of plant in all plans.
Making flanges to pipe work flexible connections shall be of the smooth faced weld-nick type.
Rubber Bellows shall be fitted as close to the source of vibration at practicable. The pipe at the other end of the
bellows shall be a fixed point.
Rubber bellows shall be single convolution of multiply reinforced EPDM rubber with wire reinforced cuffs. Flanges
shall be able to swivel and be removable. The date of manufacture shall be moulded on the bellows. For
traceability membranes shall have an indelible identification showing manufacturer, country of origin, the type
and a batch number.
Tie bars with rubber top hat washers shall be used on bellows.

For working temperatures up to 70o C the rubber bellows shall be high tensile synthetic fibre reinforced.
For working temperature between 70oC and 100oC the bellows carcase shall be steel wire mesh reinforced
throughout. Steel reinforced bellows shall be manufactured and approved to the Standards.
For temperatures above 100oC bellow shall be multiply stainless steel with Van Stone ends swivel flanges. The
overall length shall not exceed 130 mm.
Flexible connections with screwed connections shall be reinforced EPDM rubber hoses and shall have at least one
full union to avoid torquing on installation.
Flexible pipe connections on chilled water systems shall be suitable for a working pressure of 10 bar and test
pressure of 17 bar.
LIST OF BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS CODES
IS : 277 - 1992 Galvanized steel sheet (Plain &

Corrugated) wire for fencing.
IS : 554 - 1985 (Reaffirmed 1996) Dimensions for pipe threads

Where pressure tight joints are
Required on the threads.
IS : 655 - 1963 (Reaffirmed 1991) Metal air ducts.
IS : 659 – 1964 (Reaffirmed 1991) Air conditioning (Safety Code)
IS : 660 – 1963 (Reaffirmed 1991) Mechanical Refrigeration (Safety Code)
IS : 694 - 1990 (Reaffirmed 1994) PVC insulated (HD) electric

Cables for working voltage upto
and including 1100 volts.
IS : 732 - 1989 Code of practice for electrical wiring.
IS : 780 - 1984 Sluice valves for water works purposes.
IS : 822-1970 (Reaffirmed 1991) Code of procedure for inspection

of welds.
IS : 1239 (Part - I) - 1990 Mild steel tube
IS : 1239 (Part - II) - 1992 Mild steel Tubular and other

Wrought steel pipe fittings.
IS : 1255 - 1983 Code of Practice for installation and

maintenance of Power Cables upto and
including 33 KV rating (Second Revision)
IS : 1554 - 1988 (Part – I) PVC insulated ( Heavy Duty) electric cables

for working voltages upto and including
1100 volts.
IS : 1897 - 1983(Reaffirmed 1991) copper bus bar / strip for electrical purposes
IS : 2379 - 1990 Colour code for the identification of

Pipelines.
IS : 2551 - 1982 Danger notice plate
IS : 3043 - 1987 Code of practice for earthing.
IS : 3103 – 1975 (Reaffirmed 1999) Code of practice for Industrial Ventilation.
IS : 3837 - 1976(Reaffirmed 1990) Accessories for rigid steel conduit for

Electrical wiring.
IS : 4736 – 1986 (Reaffirmed 1998) Hot-dip zinc coatings on steel tubes.
IS : 4894 - 1987 Centrifugal Fan.

IS : 5133 - 1969 (Part-I) (Reaffirmed 1990) Boxes for the enclosure of electrical
Accessories.
IS : 5216 - 1982(Part-I) (Reaffirmed 1990) Guide for safety procedure and practices
in electrical work.
IS : 5312 (Part-I) - 1984 (Reaffirmed 1990) Swing - check type reflux Non
return valves for water works
IS : 5424 – 1989 (Reaffirmed 1994) Rubber mats for electrical purposes.
IS : 5578 & 11353-1985 Marking and identification of conductors
IS : 6392 - 1971(Reaffirmed 1988) Steel pipe flanges.
IS : 8623 - 1993 Low voltage switchgear and control gear

Assemblies (Requirement for type / partly
type tested assemblies)
IS : 8623 - 1993 Bus Bar trucking system

(Part - II)
IS : 8828 - 1996 Circuit Breakers for over current protection

For house hold and similar installation.
IS : 9537 - 1981(Part II) Rigid Steel Conduits for electrical wiring
IS : 10810 - 1988 Methods of test for cables.
IS : 13947-1993 (Part-I) General rules for low voltage swtich gears

and control gears.
IS : 13947-1993 (Part-II) Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 - 2
IS : 13947 - 1993 (Part-III) Switches, disconnectors and fuse

for low voltage switch gear and control gear.
IS : 13947 - 1993 (Part-IV) Low voltage switch gear and control gear
for contactors and motor starters
IS : 13947 – 1993 (Part-V) Control Circuit Devices.
BS : EN:779 – 1993 Filters
ASHRAE Hand Books American Society of Heating Refrigeration

& Air-conditioning .
Application 2007
Fundamentals 2005
Systems & Equipment 2008
ASHRAE Indoor air quality Standard 62-1999
Refrigeration 2006
ISHRAE Hand Books Indian Society of Heating Refrigeration

& Air-conditioning .
IEC Relevant Sections.
National Building Code of India 2005

SECTION – T
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR STAGE LIGHTING SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The work under the contract shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule of items of work,
the particular specifications drawings forming part of this tender document, and the general
conditions and other provisions of the tender.
1.2. The system shall be designed in accordance with the appropriate IS, BS, DIN or IEC
recommendations.
To provide a flexible, high quality stage lighting system in the Auditorium.
3. Proposed Design Stage
Lighting
3.1. The stage lighting system in the hall is required to light the stage area for theatrical performances.
3.2. A mix of several types of theatre lights has been proposed to provide adequate lighting levels and
for colors and effects.
3.3. Lights are suspended with hangers from steel tubular supports Light bars), and side ladder frames
as shown in the drawing. The light bar and side ladders are fixed.
3.4. All light bars are provided with an adequate number of 3 pole metal clad power outlets.
3.5. Power outlets (points) from fixed light bars, foot-light points, and skirting level sockets are wired
individually to positions on the lighting patch panel.
3.6. Power outlets (points) from side ladders, are individually connected to trailing cables terminated in
metal clad plugs. Power outlets are provided on the stage walls wired individually to positions on
the patch panel. The trailing cable plugs are plugged into these power outlets on the walls.
3.7. Additional light points, also terminated in the patch panel, have been provided at skirting level.
These will serve any additional portable lighting that may be required.
3.8. Any dimmer circuit can be patched to any one light points. Each light point to be protected by a 1OA
MCB in the patch panel. All patching to be ‘soft patch’ type, with each light connected to an individual
dimmer.
3.9. Each electronic dimmer circuit to have an analogue control signal input.
3.10. Additionally halogen flood lights have been provided for general lighting of the stage. Additional
power outlets have been provided on the light bars for this purpose. These power outlets are directly
connected to mains supply via switches provided both backstage and in the control room.
3.11. All the power equipment is located on the stage as shown in the drawing. A lighting controller
console has been provided in the control room with a control cable interconnecting the control
console with the power equipment.
3.12. The controller has features of memorizing several 'scenes' and 'pages' and has facilities for 'chase',
'audio input' etc.
While offering specific equipment, the following shall be bome in mind:

4.1. The equipment and system shall be of modular design to facilitate both expansion and service, and
shall be completely solid state. The equipment shall be of simple and sturdy design, chosen with long
term reliability in mind and corresponding parts shall be made interchangeable wherever possible
having flexibility of design.
4.2. Safety is of the utmost importance and all equipment shall be solidly grounded with a separate
identifiable earth conductor to an earth bus in the dimmer rack.
4.3. All terminations at any point of the system will be with crimped terminals on terminal strips.
4.4. All cables will be laid in steel trunking or conduits. The use of flexible conduits will not be permitted. All
cable entries to equipment will be property glanded to relieve any stress from the conductors and to
prevent any vemin or insects from entering the equipment. All ventilation openings in equipment shall
be backed by fine steel wire mesh.
4.5. All single phase circuits will be 3 wire - Phase, Neutral and Earth. The Earth conductor will be PVC
insulated, Green in colour, and at least 1.5 sq mm stranded copper.
5. Performance
A high quality lighting system has been proposed. The performance of the system after installation must meet
the following specifications.
5.1. Insulation resistance of lighting circuits not less than 20 Megohm..
5.2. No audible RFI when tested with a portable AM/FM receiver.
5.3. No interference in audio or video circuits at any dimmer setting.
Complete system control to be demonstrated for all functions.
6. Scope work
6.1. The contract is for the supply of all necessary materials and new equipment, detailed design and
preparation of all necessary drawings, and the testing, installation, and commissioning of the stage
lighting systems along with the wiring of the equipment in the existing conduits.
The contract shall include the following:

6.2. All necessary materials and equipment and the installation, testing and commissioning of the equipment
as specified complete with all necessary electric wiring to connect the sources of power supply to the
equipment.
6.3. Spares as listed plus any additional spares recommended by the manufacturers for five years operation.
7.1. It is the intention of the specifications to specify the principal performance and requirements for the
stage lighting systems.
7.2. It is not the intention of this part of the specifications to cover in detail type, makes and design of the
different equipment components. It shall be entirely the responsibility of the tenderer to design the
equipment for the stage lighting systems which shall meet all the specified requirements and to select
different components which are adequate in capacity and of the best available quality.
7.3. In addition to submitting his drawings for approval, the contractor shall, whenever called upon to do so,
submit for the approval of the Engineer his calculations justifying his various proposals together with
such explanations, substantiations, and other data that may be necessary. If required to do so by the
Engineer, he shall amend the basis of his calculations and shall resubmit them together with fresh
proposals based on the revised calculations.
7.4. The tenderer shall be required to submit basic system drawings with control philosophy and system
description alongwith there offer.
7.5 Integration of the complete system shall be the responsibility of the tenderer. Tender shall supply all
required compatible items to make system complete for successful integration & operation.
All special fixtures, control devices etc. not specifically mentioned but that are usual for the safety and efficiency
of the lighting equipment shall be included in the supply without any extra cost to the contract.
The work shall be carried out according to specifications. Any deviation from these specifications either on account
of manufacturing practices or for any other reason including the measures for additional efficiency and/or safety
of the equipment shall be clearly stated in a covering letter explaining in detail each and every departure the
contractor proposes to make from the tender giving reasons thereof. Unless specifically mentioned it will be
assumed that the tenderer agrees to supply all equipment and complete the work exactly as specified therein
and as shown in the drawings in its entirety. All deviations shall be subject to the approval of the engineer.
10. Installation of Equipment
The layout and installation of the equipment shall be planned and carried out conforming to the best engineering
and international practices. The successful tenderer shall furnish drawings showing complete layout of the
equipment as also layout showing the location of the consoles etc. The installation of the various equipment and
wiring of these units shall be such that these are easily accessible for maintenance and routine check-up.
11. Wiring of the Entire System
11.1. The wiring of the entire system shall be neat and conforming to good engineering practices. The
successful tenderer shall furnish wiring layout scheme (conforming to layout of conduits already laid)
including specifications for wires and cables he proposes to use for -
11.1.1. Power wiring for light points,

11.1.2. Power wiring for main incomers
11.1.3. Control wiring
11.1.4. Earthing system.

The tenderer shall supply a complete list with quantities of major items of equipment together with detailed
descriptive literature including photographs and performance characteristics pertaining to the equipment
offered.
13. Training/Technical Data

The successful tenderer shall be required to impart training in the use and maintenance of equipment as also
furnishes the following data:
13.1 Overall lighting system design offered including jack/patch points.

13.2. Detailed shop drawings and wiring installation scheme for all equipment and entire system.
13.3. Detailed circuit diagrams of individual equipment
13.4. Factory test reports.
13.5. Manuals and instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of all equipment and the stage
lighting system. Minimum of four sets of such manuals and instructions are required for each
equipment, to be furnished in bound volumes.
13.6. A final drawing showing layout of the equipment with a soft copy of the same

All equipment should be capable of performing satisfactorily in an ambient temperature of 45 deg C and 60%
humidity.
15. Standards
The materials used in the equipment shall conform to and be supplied in accordance with the latest revision
of relevant IS, BS, DIN or IEC standards or equivalent current at the time of tender. All the work shall also
conform to the requirements of local codes and regulations. Tenderers should justify the particular standard
chosen with reference to the operating context.
16. Name Plates

Instruction plates, name plates and labels shall be provided before commissioning of all equipment requiring
indication of operation and should be such size as to be readable at operational levels. The language of all
such plates shall be in English. Plastic or screen printed labels shall not be acceptable.
17. Technical Specification

2000W Planoconvex Spot Light complete with 2000W Halogen Bipin CP-41 lamp, G-38 base socket, spherical
anodized reflector, 200 mm dia Planoconvex lens, rear sliding knob, yoke, color frame & suitable clamp
1000W Halogen Planoconvex spot light complete with1000 W Halogen Bipin T-11 lamp, spherical anodised
reflector, imported socket, 150mm dia plano-convex lens, bottom sliding knob, yoke, colour frame & suitable
clamp
1000W Halogen Fresnel light consisting of 1000W Halogen Bipin T-11 lamp, 150mm dia imported Fresnel lens,
Imported socket, bottom sliding knob, yoke, colour frame & suitable clamp.
1000 W Halogen profile light consisting of 2 nos. 150mm dia PC lenses, imported socket, ellipsoidal anodized
aluminum reflector, 1000W halogen BipinT-11 lamp, yoke color frame & suitable clamp
1000W, 240 Volt, PAR Sealed Beam Light with CRC Sheet Metal and aluminum die casting, mat black color,
yoke & clamp
1000W Halogen Cyclorama Flood Light with 1000W Halogen tube. Aluminum anodized reflector, 2 nos
compressible recessed single contact holders, color frame & suitable clamp
1000 W Halogen light with mash & barndoor consisting of 2nos. single contact compressible holders, yoke,
1000W halogen tube & suitable clamp
50mm dia B class GI pipe to be hung from existing grid or roof structure for side wings, lighting bars.
M.S. Pipe Ladders to be provided on sides of the Stage to be fixed on the existing GI pipe or top grid. Made of
50mm x 25mm MS pipe of following Size: -
Size: 600 x 2400
THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
The contractor should note the following requirements and implement the same before, during and after installation
of the system as may be applicable.
1.1 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 – General Requirements apply.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire curtains.
B. Counterweight lineset rigging.
C. Motorized lineset rigging.
D. Rope rigging linesets.
E. Dead-hung lineset rigging.
F. Drapery and track package.
G. Pipe grid.
H. Wire rope tension grid.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: Supporting framework for theater and stage equipment.
B. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical systems and components.
C. Section 26 55 61 - Theatrical Lighting.
D. Section 26 09 61 - Theatrical Lighting Controls.

E. Section Title: Include brief description of work specified in another section that is related to the work of
this section.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, 6th Edition.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI B17.1, Keys and Keyseats.
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ASME International (ASME):
1. ANSI/ASME B106.1M, Design of Transmission Shafting.
D. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

2. NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
3. NFPA 701, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films.
F. Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA):
1. OSHA 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry.
2. OSHA 1926, Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
G. PLASA (formerly Entertainment Services and Technology Association):
1. ANSI E1.4, Entertainment Technology Manual Counterweight Rigging Systems.

2. ANSI E1.22, Entertainment Technology Fire Safety Curtain Systems.
H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. Listing Directory.
I. Wire Rope Technical Board (WRTB):
1. Wire Rope Users Manual, Fourth Edition, December 2005.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design rigging, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, licensed in the state where the project is located, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Rigging shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Design Loads: Weight of curtains and [Insert loads].
C. Seismic Performance: Provide theater and stage equipment capable of withstanding the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE 7, Chapter 11, "Seismic Design Criteria"] [Insert applicable code
requirement].
D. Minimum Standards: Comply with the following:
1. Tension Load Path Components and Systems: Design factor of eight (8).
2. Cable Bending Ratio: Minimum of 29 times the rope diameter.
3. Steel: 1/5 of stress yield.
4. Maximum Fleet Angle: Two (2) degrees for grooved drums and blocks.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section.

B. Prepare submittals under the supervision of a Registered Design Professional licensed in the state where
the project is located.
1. Shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Registered Design Profess ional.
2. Registered Design Professional’s responsibility shall include all elements related to overhead lifting, support
of elements provided by the stage rigging contractor, and all overhead suspended elements.
C. Product Data: For each product specified, provide details, dimensions, anchoring and mounting
requirements, material and finish descriptions, electrical requirements, and manufacturer's warranty.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate plans, elevations, and detailed sections of typical stage equipment systems and
elements, electrical riser diagrams, schematics, loads and panel details, estimated building loads imposed by
furnished equipment, anchor and fastening details, drapery and lineset schedules, miscellaneous equipment details
and any additional information required to evaluate the completeness and correctness of the rigging systems.
Highlight any deviations from specified equipment.
E. Samples: For each type of curtain specified, including color charts illustrating the manufacturer’s full ra nge
of colors, textures, and patterns. Provide a 12-inch square sample of each type of fabric in any color.
F. Samples: For any equipment or component when requested by the Architect.
G. Product Certificates: Provide name of flame-retardant chemical used, identification of applicator, treatment
method, application date, allowable life span for treatment, and details of any restrictions and limitations.
H. Warranty: Provide sample of manufacturer’s standard warranty for materials and parts.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section [01 33 00] [ ].

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide three (3) sets of data including parts list for fire curtains, rigging
and each piece of equipment provided or installed to include in the operation and maintenance manuals.
C. Receipts for delivery of turnover items designated as “Deliver to Owner.”

D. Record Drawings: Provide three (3) sets of “as-built and approved” shop drawings and wiring diagrams
indicating systems and components as installed including field modifications.
E. Test Certificates: Provide three (3) sets of flame retardant test certificates for each type of fire curtain
installed.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A company that has successfully completed at least 10 similar projects with the
last five (5) years. Furnish project location, completion date, scope of work, and Owner and Architect contact names
if requested.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each item of theater and stage equipment through one (1) source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide curtains with flame-resistance ratings that pass NFPA 701, as
determined by testing identical products by UL or a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to a uthorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Installer must maintain a fully equipped field service organization capable of providing prompt inspection,
service and repairs of the installed equipment and system.
1. Provide only expert installation personnel on the Work. Ensure that an experienced Entertainment
Technician Certification Program (ETCP) Certified Theatre Rigging Technician installation supervisor is present
throughout the entire installation.
E. Maintain availability of replacement parts for equipment and components for a minimum of 10 years after
final acceptance of the Work.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings and construction contiguous with theater and
stage equipment by field measurements before fabrication begins. Indicate measurements on shop drawings.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store theater and stage equipment on job site prior to their installation in a clean area.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate locations of theater and stage equipment with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair,
restore, or replace defective theater and stage equipment components that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One (1 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stage curtains and rigging
equipment by approved manufactured.
B. Substitutions will not be considered.
C. Substitutions will be considered, subject to compliance with requirements of this section.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Shop Primer: Manufacturer’s standard primer.

B. Finish Paint:
1. Metal Components: Paint in semi-gloss black.

2. Special Markings: Same quality and type in colors as specified.
3. Special Finishes: As specified.
C. Miscellaneous Hardware, Cable Fittings, Clips and Chain, and Hardware: Painted, galvanized or cadmium
plated as required.
2.3 BRAIL FIRE SAFETY CURTAINS

A. Operation:
1. Meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the Building Code for any proscenium measuring 50 -feet or
less in width and 30-feet or less in height.
2. Raising and lowering of the fire safety curtain is normally operated electrically, using a winch. In an
emergency, a release system will cause the curtain to lower by gravity. An emergency release will close the curtain
with an average closing speed of not less than six (6) inches per second and not more than 24 inches per second.
The last eight (8) feet shall not require less than five (5) seconds.
3. The rigging equipment supplied for the fire safety curtain shall in all respects meet the quality standards
established for the theater and stage equipment specified.
B. Fabric: 2-1/2-lb per sq yd, stainless steel wire inserted, 100 percent glass yarn fabric, coated on both sides
with special high temperature coating.
1. Meet or exceed building code requirements for proscenium theatre fire curtains in the United States.
C. Construction:
1. Fabricate curtain in finished size that will overlap the proscenium opening 18 inches on each side and store
above the proscenium opening in a minimum amount of space.

2. Install 3-inch yielding pad of non-combustible material at base of curtain to form a seal against stage floor.
Provide smoke seal “flap” at curtain top edge to bridge gap between curtain top and proscenium wall. Curtain top
edge to be dead hung from overhead roof steel.
3. Provide curtain with vertical rows of “D” rings, sewn 18-inches on center, at each lift line location. Pass lift
cables through “D” rings and attach to bottom pipe, allowing curtain material to “stack” upon itself and store above
the proscenium opening.
4. Horizontal spacing between vertical rows of “D” rings shall be no greater than 8’-0” on center.
5. Provide each side of the curtain with bronze spool guides spaced no more than 18 inches on center for the
height of the curtain.
D. Rigging:
1. Provide one (1) heavy-duty head block with lathe-turned and polished, ASTM A48 Class 30-34 gray iron
casting, minimum 12-inch diameter sheave, with one (1) groove for 1/4-inch cable for each lift line. Include
provisions for attachment of clew guide cables.
2. Provide one (1) heavy-duty loft block for each lift line grooved for 1/4-inch cable with lathe turned and
polished, ASTM A48 Class 30-34 gray iron casting, minimum 8-inch diameter sheave.
3. One (1) multi-line guided cable clew to transition lift lines into a single 1/4-inch drive line at winch.
4. One (1) electrically operated brail winch assembly with centrifugal descent governor to control curtain
descent. Winch shall be a “Standalone Motorized Fire Safety Curtain Winch” as described below. Winch to have
metal safety enclosure and provisions for attachment of clew guide cables. Winch to hold curtain in storage position
by means of a brake, attached to the emergency release line.
5. Stay Chains: SECOA Theatrical Chain (hereinafter referred to as “STCTM”) chain. There shall be one
(1) more stay chain than the number of supporting cables. Attach stay chains to the top batten of the curtain and
to the overhead steel.
a. Specifically designed STCTM chain for overhead lifting applications.

b. The STCTM chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000 lbs and a working load limit of 3,250
lbs. Each link of the chain shall be proof tested to twice the working load limit.
c. The STCTM chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Individual link size shall
match the National Association of Chain Manufacturers, Welded Steel Chain Specifications for Grade 30 Proof Coil
Chain.
d. The STCTM chain shall be easily recognizable.
1) Stamp each link of the chain with the manufacturer’s identifying mark.
2) The chain shall be lot traceable, with a coded date stamp on every tenth link of chain.
3) The finish applied to the chain shall be per ASTM B633 FE/ZN 5, Yellow Iridescent.
e. [Make the STCTM chain OSHA 29 CFR 1910.184 Compliant.]
6. Lift Lines: 1/4-inch diameter 7x19 small diameter specialty cord impregnated with a dry lubricant. Attach
each cable to its clew with one (1) 1/4-inch thimble and one (1) 1/4-inch copper oval sleeve, and attach to curtain
bottom pipe batten by wrapping and two (2) drop forged cable clips.
7. Pipe Battens for Fire Curtain Set: Two-inch I.D., Schedule 40, black iron pipe.
8. Winch Driveline: Minimum 1/4-inch, 7x19 small diameter specialty cord impregnated with dry lubricant
with appropriate fittings.
9. The emergency release system must effectively lower the curtain in the event of fire with or without human
intervention.

a. Emergency Release Line: Construct of 1/8-inch small diameter specialty cord impregnated with a dry
lubricant, fitted with not less than six (6) 165 degree F fusible links. Install one (1) fusible link for every 15 lineal
feet of emergency release line and one (1) fusible link no more than 7’-6” from the vertical rise of the release line.
When a link separates, the fire curtain will automatically lower.
b. Manual emergency deployment of the fire curtain shall be accomplished by the activation of one (1) of two
(2) quick-release assemblies, one (1) located at each side of the proscenium. Activation shall be by lifting a lever
to release the 1-1/2-inch diameter red ring attached to the emergency release line.
10. Smoke Pockets: Construct of 9-inch structural channel and 1/4 x 18-inch steel plates mounted on each
side of the proscenium arch. The front edge of the pocket is set six (6) inches back from the proscenium opening.
The smoke pocket extends from the stage floor to a height 2’-0” above the top of the fire safety curtain.
a. Provide a guide cable inside of each smoke pocket to engage the bronze spool guides along the side of the
curtain.
b. Size and anchor guide cable to resist a load of two (2) psf of pressure differential as appropriate for the
size of the proscenium opening.
E. Provide one (1) fire safety curtain.
2.4 STRAIGHT LIFT FIRE SAFETY CURTAIN
A. Operation:
1. Meet or exceed the requirements set forth in the Building Code for any proscenium of less than 850 sq ft.
2. Raising and lowering of the fire safety curtain is normally operated manually, using a hand line. In an
emergency, a release system will cause the curtain to lower by gravity. An emergency release will close the curtain
fully with an average closing speed of not less than six (6) inches per second and not more than 24 inches per
second. The last eight (8) feet shall not require less than five (5) to close (dashpot required).
a. Manual operation of the fire safety curtain shall not disable the emergency operation.
B. Fabric: 2-1/2-lb per sq yd, stainless steel wire inserted, 100 percent glass yarn fabric, coated on both sides
with special high temperature coating.
1. Meet or exceed building code requirements for proscenium theatre fire curtains in the United States.
C. Curtain Construction:
1. The fire safety curtain must have a finished size so that it will overlap the proscenium opening 18 inches
on each side and 24 inches at the top.
2. Install a 3-inch yielding pad of non-combustible material at base of curtain to form a seal against stage
floor.
3. Steel Roller Guides: Supply at each side of curtain to guide curtain along guide track installed in the smoke
pocket. Attach guides 18-inch O.C. to sheet metal reinforced curtain edges. Guide tracks must run within the entire
length of the smoke pockets.
D. Rigging:

1. The rigging equipment supplied for the fire safety curtain must in all respects meet the quality stan dards
established for counterweight systems.
2. 12” Head Block:
a. Construct heavy-duty sheaves of ASTM A48, Class 30-35 gray iron castings, minimum 12 inches in diameter.
Each sheave must be concentrically bored, machine faced and grooved for the requi red number of 1/4-inch wire
rope lift lines, and one 3/4-inch purchase line.
b. Hand line rope grooves must be shallow; assuring that the pitch diameter is equal to the pitch diameter of
the wire rope lines. Spacers must be installed to allow passage of the purchase line and prevent the wire rope from
jumping grooves. Wire rope cable grooves must have no more than 1/64 -inch tolerance.
c. Sheave to operate on a one-inch diameter cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) tapered roller bearings. Each
bearing must have radial load capacity of 2,580 lb at 75 RPM (225 FPM). Other bearings rated at lower capacity at
the specified RPM are not acceptable.
d. Accomplish proper adjustment of the bearings by means of a "Nyloc" self -locking nut on one (1) end of the
shaft and a keeper pin on the other end.
e. Sheave Side Plates: Minimum 10-gage steel. Miter, trim and grind corners and edges and bead weld to
the base at three (3) locations.
f. Base: Construct from minimum 2 inch by 1-1/2 inch by 1/4-inch steel angle. Angles must be turned to
face each other.
g. Attach block to building structural steel by means of a minimum of two (2) 3/8 -inch steel clips and a
minimum of four (4) 1/2-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts. Size clips as appropriate for the actua l flange with
this specification reflecting minimum acceptable size.
h. Provide one (1) head block.
3. Loft Block: Heavy-duty sheaves constructed of ASTM A48, Class 30-35 gray iron castings, a minimum 8-
inch in diameter. Groove the sheave for 1/4-inch cable with no more than a 1/64-inch tolerance.
a. Concentrically bore the sheave for an 11/16-inch cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 11/16-inch tapered
bearings, each having a radial load capacity of 1,945 lb at 100 RPM (200 FPM). Other bearings rated at a lower
capacity for the specified RPM are not acceptable. Accomplish proper adjustment of the bearings through use of a
"Nyloc" self-locking nut on one (1) end of the shaft a keeper pin on the other end.
b. Side Plates: Manufacture from minimum 10-gage steel. Miter, trim and grind corners of side plates. Hold
side plates together by minimum five (5) 5/16-inch bolts and spacers. Locate spacers to retain cable in sheave
groove.
c. Manufacture base angles from minimum 3/16-inch x 1-1/4-inch x 1-1/4-inch steel angle welded to side
plates in three (3) places at each angle.
d. Provide each loft block with a series of nylon idler sheaves to support the lift cable of each successive loft
block. Idler sheaves to be minimum 2-7/16-inch in diameter and operate on engineered plastic bearing hubs.
e. Attach block to building structural steel by means of a minimum of two (2) 3/8 -inch steel clips and a
minimum of four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts. Size clips as appropriate for the actual flange with
this specification reflecting minimum acceptable size.
f. Provide one (1) loft block at each lift line point.
4. Arbor:
a. Fabricate counterweight arbor tops from 5/16-inch thick steel plate formed into a channel with 2-1/2-inch
high legs. Punch the legs to receive eight (8) lift lines and one (1) 5/8-inch bolt with half-height "Nyloc" self-locking
nut in the center to receive 3/4-inch purchase line. Cast grey or malleable iron arbor tops are not acceptable.

b. Fabricate arbor bottom from 3/8-inch by 3-inch flat steel bar. Thread arbor bottom to accept 3/4-inch arbor
rods. Provide arbor bottom with one (1) 1/2-inch drop-forged eyebolt welded in the center to receive 3/4-inch
purchase line. Cast grey or malleable iron arbor bottoms are not acceptable.
c. Join the arbor top and bottom with two (2) 3/4-inch threaded steel rods and one (1) 3/8-inch by 3-inch flat
bar backbone. Rod length shall be adequate to accommodate specified counterweight load.
d. Utilize three (3) 3/4-inch nuts at top of each threaded steel rod; utilize one (1) 3/4-inch nut at bottom of
each threaded steel rod.
e. Provide two (2) sets of UHMW guide assemblies, consisting of two (2) UHMW outer shoes, one (1) UHMW
spacer and one (1) 3/16-inch steel back-up plate for each side of the guide shoe assembly. Bolt each guide assembly
to the arbor with two (2) 3/8-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts.
f. Provide arbor with 1/8-inch by 2-inch wide steel flat bar spacer plates, one (1) for every two (2) feet of
arbor length and two (2) locking collars equipped with thumb screws, weld one (1) locking collar to the top spacer
plate.
g. Provide one (1) counterweight arbor and associated counterweights to properly counterbalance the fire
curtain.
5. Lattice Track: Provide one (1) wall mounted lattice track assembly to guide the counterweight arbor along
its full travel. Alternate arbor location at the first tee wall slot is also acceptable.
a. Provide a spring bumper assembly as the bottom stop of the lattice track to prevent the arbor from leaving
its guides.
6. Tension Block:
a. The sheave is to be a smooth iron casting, a minimum of 11 inches in diameter and designed for 3/4 -inch
purchase line.
b. Concentrically bore the sheave for a 3/4-inch cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 3/4-inch flange ball
bearings. Provide a half-height "Nyloc" self-locking nut at one (1) end of shaft and a keeper pin at other end.
c. House sheave in side plates guided by four (4) 1/2-inch steel rods.
d. Provide one (1) floating 11-inch tension block mounted at the floor to maintain tension in the operating
line.
e. Standard floor block specified below is acceptable for tee wall mounted arbor.
7. Wire Rope Lifting Line and Hardware:
a. Lift Line: 1/4-inch 7x19 preformed small diameter specialty cord impregnated with a dry lubricant.
b. Finish cable termination points with HD galvanized cable thimbles and one (1) Nicopress® oval sleeve
applied per manufacturer’s written instructions.
c. Tape cable ends with black self-fusing silicone tape to prevent unraveling and snagging.
d. Provide one (1) 3/8-inch diameter drop-forged type turnbuckle for each lift line, installed at the batten end
attached to an appropriately sized pipe clamp. Mouse after final adjustment.
8. Stay Chains: SECOA Theatrical Chain (hereinafter referred to as “STCTM”). There shall be one (1) more
stay chain than the number of supporting cables. Attach stay chains to top batten of curtain and to overhead steel.
a. Specifically design STCTM chain for overhead lifting applications.

b. The STCTM chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000 lbs; a working load limit of 3,250 lbs.
Each link of the chain shall be proof tested to twice the working load limit.

c. The STCTM chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Individual link size shall
match the National Association of Chain Manufacturers, Welded Steel Chain Specifications for Grade 30 Proof Coil
Chain.
d. The STCTM chain shall be easily recognizable.
1) Stamp each link of the chain with the manufacturer’s identifying mark.
3) Apply finish to the chain per ASTM B633 FE/ZN 5, Yellow Iridescent.
e. [Make the STCTM chain OSHA 29 CFR 1910.184 Compliant.]
9. Hand Line:
a. Hand lines for operating the counterweight sets must be 3/4-inch Multi-Line II rope as manufactured by
New England Ropes.
b. Heat seal and tape rope ends with black self-fusing silicone tape.
c. Terminate hand lines with two (2) half hitches and two (2) nylon zip ties to attach rope end to the standing
part of the rope.
10. Pipe Battens: Construct from 2-inch I.D. Schedule 40, black iron pipe. Minimize pipe joints and use a drive
fit pipe sleeve at least 18 inches long; secure with four (4) plug welds. Paint pipe batten with high quality paint.
a. Provide one (1) batten the width of the fire curtain for the upper and lower pockets of the curtain.
11. Emergency Release:
a. Emergency release system must effectively lower curtain in event of fire with or without human intervention.
b. Incorporate an emergency release line constructed from 1/8-inch small diameter specialty cord impregnated
with dry lubricant, fitted with not less than six (6) 165 degree Fahrenheit fusi ble links. Install one (1) fusible link
for every 15 lineal feet of emergency release line and one (1) fusible link no more than 7’ -6” from the vertical rise
of the release line. When a link separates or the manual pull pin is removed from the manual rel ease station the
fire curtain will lower automatically.
c. Manual emergency deployment of the fire curtain shall be accomplished by the activation of one (1) of two
(2) quick-release assemblies, one (1) located at each side of the proscenium. Activate ei ther assembly by lifting a
lever to release the 1-1/2-inch diameter red ring attached to the emergency release line.
d. Normal operation of the fire curtain shall not disable the emergency operation of the fire curtain system.
12. Overbalance and Hydraulic Dashpot Checking:
a. Furnish and install an overbalance arbor, which must cause the normally balanced fire curtain to descend
in the event the emergency release system is activated. Provide a hydraulic dashpot to slow the curtain descent in
its last eight (8) feet of travel.
b. In an emergency, the fire curtain must have an average closing speed of not less than six (6) inches per
seconds and not more than 24 inches per second. The last eight (8) feet shall not require less than five (5) seconds
to close.
c. Size and valve the hydraulic dashpot to full decelerate the free-falling fire curtain.
d. Construct the heavy-duty sheave of ASTM A48 Class 30-35 gray iron casting with a minimum 12-inch
diameter and groove for the required cable diameter. Grooves shall have sloped sides and conform to the cable
manufacturer’s standards for groove shape.
e. Concentrically bore the sheave for a one (1) inch cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 1 -inch tapered roller
bearings. Each bearing shall have a radial load capacity of 2580 lbs at 75 RPM (225 FPM) for a minimum of 4000
hours. Other bearings rated at a lower capacity for the specified RPM are not acceptable. A bent keeper pin shall
retain the shaft on one (1) end. Set proper preload on the bearing by adjusting a fine threaded "Nyloc" self- locking
nut on the other end of the shaft. Each sheave shall run plumb and true without rubbing side plates when rotated.
f. Attach the sheave to a one (1) inch diameter CRS cylinder piston rod with five (5) feet of to tal travel.
g. Fabricate cylinder from 1026 DOM tubing.
h. The fire curtain’s rate of descent shall be adjusted with an integral bonnet globe valve metering fluid flow
from the rod end of the cylinder as the dashpot extends under normal operation. Globe valve shall have renewable
seat and disc.
13. Smoke Pockets: Construct of 6-inch structural channel and 1/4 by 18-inch steel plate mounted to each side
of the proscenium arch. 1/4-inch steel plate forming a C-shape is also acceptable.
a. Set the front edge of the pocket six (6) inches back from the proscenium opening. The smoke pockets
extend from the stage floor to a height of 1'-0" above the top of the raised fire safety curtain or to the grid or roof
steel whichever is less.
b. Incorporate a steel track channel into the smoke pocket for the fire curtain roller guides engage.
c. Secure smoke pocket to proscenium wall with construction appropriate minimum 1/2 -inch diameter grade-
5 fasteners spaced 4-feet on center or 3/8-inch diameter grade-5 fasteners spaced 2-feet on center to secure the
smoke pockets to the proscenium wall.
d. Provide one (1) smoke pocket at each side of the proscenium arch.
2.5 STANDALONE MOTORIZED FIRE SAFETY CURTAIN WINCH
A. Motorized winch assembly with integrated centrifugal speed governor to control curtain descent. Winch to
have built-in metal safety enclosure, basic control station and provisions for attachment of clew guide cables. Winch
shall hold curtain in storage position by means of a brake release attached to the emergency release line. Drive
line shall be 1/4-inch 7x19 Small Diameter Specialty Cord Impregnated with a Dry Lubricant. No other steel cables
are acceptable.
1. Winch shall be virtually maintenance free for the user’s ease of operation.
2. A/C Brake Motor: 1725 RPM, three-phase, [Insert voltage] volts, 60 Hz motor with an integral brake.
Automatically apply brake in case of power failure. Motor must have 1.0 service factor.
3. Overload protection for the motor is required.
4. Provide with four (4) total factory-wired and tested limit switches for both normal operational and over
travel limits.
5. Winch shall be operable for either straight lift or brail situations. Brail winch configuration shall
accommodate variable clew guide cable spacing.
6. Winch shall be suitable for new construction, renovation, re-rig or integration with existing straight lift or
brail fire curtain system. Brail winch configuration, shall accommodate variable guide cable spacing.
7. Provide with winch stand as standard equipment.
8. Hydraulic descent governor is not acceptable.
9. Motor shall have a 750 lb standard capacity. If additional capacity is necessary for the fire curtain system,
augment the motor with a counterweight arbor.
B. Control System: Basic “push-and-hold-to-operate” style system, attached directly to the winch enclosure.
Works in tandem with manual wall mount emergency release boxes and fusible link system.
1. Maintained E-stop button shall operate a line contactor, which removes power completely from the reversing
contactor and controls. Other control methods are not acceptable.
2. Factory-wire and test low voltage controls. Furnish with a UL label.
3. Key Switch: Prevents unauthorized usage and provides system security.

4. Power shall not be require for emergency operation of fire curtain release system.
2.6 MOTORIZED STRAIGHT LIFT LINE SHAFT WINCH FIRE SAFETY CURTAIN
A. Operation:
1. Furnish and install a motor of adequate capacity to safely and efficiently raise and lower the fire safety
curtain. Raising and lowering of the fire safety curtain is normally performed manually using the motor control
panel.
2. In an emergency, the release system causes the curtain to lower by gravity. An emergency release will
close the curtain fully in less than 30 seconds. The last eight (8) feet of curtain travel will require a minimum of
five (5) seconds, as a safety measure.
3. Power shall not be required for emergency operation of fire curtain release system.
B. Line shaft winch must have one (1) cable drum for each lift line. Alternately groove drums for right and
left hand winding to prevent the batten from traveling side to side.
C. Gear Motor Reducer: Combination right angle helical bevel gear reducer with a minimum ser vice factor of
1.0.
D. AC Brake Motor: 1725 RPM, three-phase, [Insert voltage] volts, 60 Hz motor with an integral brake. Size
motor to stop and hold moving load within four (4) inches. Automatically apply brake in case of power failure. Motor
must have 1.0 service factor.
E. Cable Drum: Drum diameter must be a minimum of 32 times cable diameter. Machine drums for right or
left hand single helical groove a required. Make cable drum of proper length to hold all of the cable in one (1) layer;
rope piling is not acceptable. Support drums on each side with a flange block assembly. Drum must hold minimum
amount of cable required for fire curtain travel plus three (3) dead wraps.
1. Provide drums with a single helical groove and size appropriately for cable used.
Drums shall have key-slots for easy connection of cables.
2. Groove winch drum to accept one (1) line of minimum 1/4-inch - 7x19 small diameter specialty cord
impregnated with a dry lubricant.
3. Key drum hub directly to output shaft of reducer.
4. Chain or belt drives are not acceptable.
F. Frame:
1. Construct the winch frame of structural steel members, compactly designed to support the winch
components and load in a minimum amount of space.
2. Run structural support continuous for the entire length of the system.
3. Incorporate a cable keeper bar in the frame that is located next to the grooves in the drum to prevent lift
lines from jumping grooves and slack lines from unwinding.
G. Limit Switches:

1. Provide each winch with an adjustable four (4) element limit switch that stops the winch at the upper and
lower normal extremes of travel.
2. Two (2) of the elements must be backup or over travel limits, wired such that the winch cannot be operated
until the cause of normal limit failure is determined and repaired.
H. Motor Starter:
1. The motor starter must be UL Listed in a NEMA 1 enclosure attached to the winch frame. Provide NEMA 12
enclosures for outdoor or wet locations.
2. If the system is 480V, provide the enclosure with a through-the-door disconnect.
3. Overload protection for the motor is required.
I. Control Panel:
1. Provide a wall mounted, UL Listed, NEMA 1 control enclosure that contains UP and DOWN push buttons for
each winch. Provide NEMA 12 enclosures for outdoor or wet locations.
2. The push buttons must require continuous pressure to operate the fire curtain.
3. Provide a key switch to prevent unauthorized personnel from operating the fire curtain. The key switch
must not disable the emergency operation of the fire curtain.
4. Provide the control panel with an on-off key switch, mushroom head push-pull maintained emergency stop,
up and down push buttons, and a system monitor lamp.
5. Typical operation would be to turn the system on and press the UP or DOWN push button for direction of
travel.
6. Emergency stop push button will disconnect all power to the entire system assembly and halt operation at
any position. Maintained emergency stop button operates a line contactor which removes completely from the
reversing contactor and controls. Other control methods are not acceptable.
7. Engaging the emergency stop will not affect the emergency operation of the system.
8. The system monitor lamp indicates system trouble by monitoring power, ultimate limit switches, motor
overloads and the hydraulic descent governor system.
J. Wire Rope Cable Used for Lift Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch 7x19 small diameter specialty cord impregnated
with dry lubricant. Terminate the cable at the drum with a Nicopress® stop fitting. Terminate the cable at pipe
batten with a thimble, two (2) drop forged cable clips (or one (1) copper oval sleeve swage fitting), applied per
manufacturer’s written instructions, a 6-inch jaw & eye turnbuckle sized one (1) trade size larger than the lift cable
diameter, and a full batten clamp. Neatly tape all loose ends with self -fusing silicone tape to prevent catching.
Mouse turnbuckle after final adjustment.
K. Fire Curtain:
1. Fabric: 2-1/2-lbs per sq yd, stainless steel wire inserted, 100 percent glass yarn fabric, coated on both
sides with a special high temperature coating. Fabric must meet or exceed applicable building codes for proscenium
theatre fire curtains.
2. Curtain Construction:
a. Finished size of fire safety curtain must be such that it will overlap the proscenium opening 18 inches on
each side and 24 inches at the top.
b. Install a 3-inch yielding pad of non-combustible material at the base of the curtain to form a seal against
the stage floor.

c. Provide with roller guides at each side of curtain to guide the curtain along the guide track. Attach guides
at 18-inch O.C. to sheet metal reinforced curtain edges. Run guide tracks within the entire length of the smoke
pockets.
L. Rigging: The rigging equipment supplied for the fire safety curtain must in all respects meet the quality
standards established for counterweight systems.
1. Wire Rope Lifting Line and Hardware:
a. Lift Line: Minimum 1/4-inch 7x19 small diameter specialty cord impregnated with dry lubricant.
b. Finish cable termination points with HD galvanized cable thimbles and one (1) Nicopress® oval sleeve
installed per manufacturer’s written instructions.
c. Tape cable ends with self-fusing silicone tape to prevent unraveling and snagging.
d. For each lift line, provide one (1) drop-forged type turnbuckle one (1) trade size larger than the diameter
of the lift line, installed at batten end attached to an appropriately sized pipe clamp. Mouse turnbuckle after final
adjustment.
2. Stay Chains: SECOA Theatrical Chain (hereinafter referred to as “STCTM”) chain. Provide one (1) more
stay chain than the number of supporting cables. Attach stay chains to top batten of curtain and to overhead steel.
a. Specifically design STCTM chain for overhead lifting applications.

b. STCTM chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000 lbs; a working load limit of 3,250 lbs.
Proof-test each link of the chain to twice the working load limit.
c. STCTM chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Individual link size shall match
the National Association of Chain Manufacturers (NACM) "Welded Steel Chain Specifications" for Grade 30 Proof Coil
Chain.
d. STCTM chain shall be easily recognizable.
1) Stamp each link of the chain with manufacturer’s identifying mark.

3) Finish applied to chain shall be per ASTM B633 FE/ZN 5, Yellow Iridescent.
4) [Make the STCTM chain OSHA 29 CFR 1910.184 Compliant.]
3. Pipe Battens:
a. Construct from 2-inch I.D. Schedule 40, black iron pipe. Minimize pipe joints and use a drive fit internal
pipe sleeve a least 18 inches long, secured with four (4) plug welds. Paint pipe batten with recognized high quality
paint.
b. Provide one (1) batten equal to the width of the fire curtain for upper and lower pockets of curtain.
4. Emergency Release System:
a. The emergency release system must effectively lower the curtain in the event of fire with or without human
intervention.
b. Incorporate an emergency release line constructed from 1/8-inch small diameter specialty cord impregnated
with dry lubricant, fitted with not less than six (6) 165 degree F fusible links. Install one (1) fusible link for every
15 lineal feet of release line, one (1) fusible link no more than 7’-6” from the vertical rise of the release line. When

a link separates or the manual pull pin is removed from the manual release station the fire curtain will lower
automatically.
c. Manual emergency deployment of the fire curtain shall be accomplished by the activation of one (1) of two
(2) quick-release assemblies, one (1) located at each side of the proscenium. Activation of either assembly shall be
by lifting a lever to release the 1-1/2-inch diameter red ring attached to the emergency release line.
5. Descent Control:
a. Provide with a hydraulic descent governor to slow the curtain descent.

b. The fire curtain must close in not more than 30 seconds, with the last eight (8) feet requiring n ot less than
five (5) seconds.
6. Smoke Pockets/Side Guides:
a. Construct of 6-inch structural channel and 1/4-inch by 18-inch steel plate mounted to each side of
proscenium arch. A formed 1/4-inch steel plate creating a C-shape is also acceptable.
b. Set front edge of pocket is six (6) inches back from proscenium opening. Extend smoke pockets from stage
floor to a height of 2'-0" above top of raised fire safety curtain.
c. Smoke pocket must incorporate a 14 gage galvanized steel track channel, approximately 2-5/8-inch wide
by 2-3/4-inch high in which the fire curtain side roller guides engage.
d. Use construction appropriate minimum 1/2-inch diameter Grade 5 fasteners spaced 4-feet on center or 3/8-
inch diameter Grade 5 fasteners spaced 2-feet on center to secure smoke pockets to proscenium wall.
e. Provide one (1) smoke pocket/side guide systems at each side of proscenium arch.
2.7 RATE-OF-RISE RELEASE SYSTEM
A. Emergency release system must interface with building’s fire alarm panel (provided by others) and
effectively lower curtain in event of fire with or without human intervention.
2.8 COUNTERWEIGHT RIGGING
A. Lineset Components (Typical) (Refer to Drawings and Schedule for Quantities):
1. 12" diameter head block

2. Eight (8) inch diameter nylon loft blocks with incremental idlers
3. T-Bar Counterweight Arbor
4. 11" diameter floor block
5. Rope Lock
6. STC™ Trim Chains, with one (1) 5/16-inch screw pin shackle
7. 1/4-inch Nicopress® oval sleeve.
8. 1/4-inch Cable Thimbles
9. 3/4-inch Multi-Line II Handline
10. 1-1/2-inch I.D. Schedule 40 Steel Pipe Batten
11. Flame-cut Counterweights
12. 1/4-inch 7x19 small diameter specialty cord impregnated with dry lubricant
13. [One (1) Each Additional - 1-1/2-inch diameter pipe, for each electric batten]
14. [Two (2) feet Additional Arbor length for each electric batten]
15. [Four (4) feet Additional Arbor length for each Orchestra Shell Ceiling]

B. 12" Head Block:
1. Heavy-Duty Sheaves: Construct of ASTM A48, Class 30-35 gray iron castings or smooth Polyamide Nylon
casting 12" in diameter. Concentrically bore, machine face and groove each sheave for the required number of 1/4 -
inch wire rope lift lines, and one (1) 3/4-inch purchase line.
2. Hand line rope grooves must be shallow to assure that the pitch diameter is equal to the pitch diameter of
the wire rope lines. Install spacers to allow passage of purchase line and prevent wire rope from jumping grooves.
Wire rope cable grooves must have no more than 1/64-inch tolerance.
3. Sheave to operate on a one-inch diameter cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) tapered roller bearings. Each
bearing must have radial load capacity of 2580 lbs at 75 RPM (225 FPM). Other bearings rated at lower capacity at
the specified RPM are NOT acceptable.
4. Accomplish proper adjustment of bearings by means of a "Nyloc" self -locking nut on one (1) end of the
5. Sheave Side Plates: No less than 10-gage steel; miter, trim and grind corners and edges and bead weld to
base at three (3) locations.
6. Base: Construct from minimum 2-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 1/4-inch steel angle. Turn angles to face each
other.
7. Attach block to building structural steel by means of a minimum of two (2) 3/8 - inch steel clips and a
minimum of four (4) 1/2-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts. Size clips appropriately for actual flange with this
specification reflecting minimum acceptable size.
8. Provide one (1) head block for each single purchase line set.
C. Double Purchase 12" Head Block:
1. Heavy-Duty Sheaves: Construct of ASTM A48, Class 30-35 gray iron castings or smooth Polyamide Nylon
casting 12" in diameter. Concentrically bore, machine face and groove each sheave for the required number of 1/4 -
inch wire rope lift lines, and one (1) 3/4-inch purchase line.
2. Hand line rope grooves must be shallow to assure that the pitch diameter is equal to the pitch diameter of
the wire rope lines. Install spacers to allow passage of purchase line and prevent wire rope from jum ping grooves.
Wire rope cable grooves must have no more than 1/64-inch tolerance.
3. Sheave to operate on a one-inch diameter cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) tapered roller bearings. Each
bearing must have radial load capacity of 2580 lbs at 75 RPM (225 FPM). Other bearings rated at lower capacity at
the specified RPM are NOT acceptable.
4. Accomplish proper adjustment of bearings by means of a "Nyloc" self -locking nut on one (1) end of the
5. Sheave Side Plates: No less than 10-gage steel; miter, trim and grind corners and edges and bead weld to
base at three (3) locations.
6. Base: Construct from minimum 2-inch by 2-1/2-inch by 5/16-inch steel angle. Turn angles to face each
other.
7. Attach block to building structural steel by means of a minimum of two (2) 3/8- inch steel clips and a
minimum of four (4) 1/2-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts. Size clips appropriately for actual flange with this
specification reflecting minimum acceptable size.
8. Provide double purchase tie-off bracket at appropriate position on the block.
9. Provide one (1) head block for each double purchase line set.
D. Eight (8) Inch Multi-line Loft Block:

1. Heavy-Duty Sheaves: Construct of ASTM A48, Class 30-35 gray iron castings or smooth Nylon casting eight
(8) inches in diameter. Groove sheave for 1/4-inch cable with a 1/64-inch tolerance. Provide one (1) groove for
each lift line.
2. Concentrically bore sheave for 11/16-inch cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 11/16-inch tapered roller
bearings, each having a radial load capacity of 1945 lbs at 100 RPM (200 FPM). Other bearings rated at a lower
capacity for the specified RPM are not acceptable. Accomplish proper adjustment of bearings by means of a "Nyloc"
self-locking nut on one (1) end of shaft and a keeper pin on the other end.
3. Side Plates: No less than 10-gage steel; miter, trim and grind corners of side plates. Hold side plates
together by a minimum of five (5) 5/16-inch bolts and spacers. Locate spacers to retain cable in sheave groove.
4. Make base angles from minimum 3/16-inch by 1-1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch steel angle welded to side plates
in three (3) places at each angle.
minimum of four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts. Size clips appropriately for actual flange, with this
specification reflecting minimum acceptable.
6. Groove each loft block to support the lifting line and all passing lift lines.
7. For electric sets provide one (1) additional groove.
8. Provide one (1) multi-line loft block at first position of each line set.
E. Eight (8) Inch Upright Loft Block:
(8) inches in diameter. Groove sheave for 1/4-inch cable with a 1/64-inch tolerance.
Make base angles from minimum 3/16-inch by 1-1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch steel angle welded to side plates in three
(3) places at each angle.
minimum of five (5) 5/16-inch bolts and spacers. Locate spacers to retain cable in sheave groove. Fabricate base
angles from 3/16-inch by 1-1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch steel angle welded to side plates in three (3) places at each
angle.
5. Sag bars may be provided at full stage depth at a minimum of three (3) positions along the line sets.
6. Provide one (1) loft block at each lift line point.
F. Eight (8) Inch Underhung loft Block:
Make base angles from minimum 3/16-inch by 1-1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch steel angle welded to side plates in three
(3) places at each angle.
minimum of four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts. Size clips appropriately for the actual flange, with
this specification reflecting the minimum acceptable.
5. Every loft block shall contain a series of nylon idler sheaves to support the lift cable of each successive loft
G. Eight (8) Inch Loft Block for Underhung Use:
3. Side Plates and Mountings: One-piece formed steel member having a minimum thickness of 3/16-inch;
miter, trim and grind corners of side plates. Hold side plates together by a minimum six (6) 5/16 -inch bolts and
spacers. Locate four (4) spacers to retain cable in sheave groove. Provide loft block with a series of punched holes
to facilitate mounting of loft block to a wide variety of buildings’ structural steel widths.
minimum of four (4) 3/8-inch Grade 5 bolts with flat washers, lock washer and nut to secure the loft block to its
mounting beam.
5. Every loft block shall contain a series of nylon idler sheaves to support the lift cable of each successive loft
H. Eight (8) Inch Underhung Throat Cut Loft Block:
3. Side Plates: No less than 10-gage steel, throat cut to latch over one (1) side of structural member; miter,
trim and grind corners of side plates. Hold side plates together by a minimum of five (5) 5/16 -inch bolts and
spacers. Locate spacers to retain cable in sheave groove.
4. Every loft block shall contain a series of nylon idler sheaves to support the lift cable of each succes sive loft
5. Attach loft block to building structure by means of a 5/8-inch steel draw bolt and 1/4-inch thick formed
metal clip.
I. Tension Block:
1. Sheaves: Construct of smooth iron casting, a minimum of 11 inches in diameter and design for 3/4 -inch
purchase line.

2. Concentrically bore sheave for a 3/4-inch cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 3/4- inch flange ball bearings.
Accomplish proper adjustment of bearings by means of a “Nyloc” self-locking nut on one (1) end of shaft and a
keeper pin at other end.
3. Construct block of seven (7) gage steel plate. Cast iron block housings are not acceptable.
4. Provide each block with two (2) sets of vulcanized fiber guide shoes with a minimum 3/16 -inch steel back-
up plate to fit "T"-Bar Guides. Bolt to the tension block with four (4) 3/8-inch Grade 5 bolts, lock washers and nuts.
5. To insure proper tautness of purchase lines, minimum weight of each block must be 40 lbs.
6. Provide one (1) tension floor block for each line set.
J. Counterweight Arbor (Single Purchase):
1. Counterweight Arbor Tops: Form from 5/16-inch thick steel plate into a channel with 2-1/2-inch high legs.
Punch the legs to receive eight (8) lifting cables and one (1) 5/8-inch bolt with a half-height “Nyloc” self-locking
nut in the center to receive a 3/4-inch purchase line. Cast grey or malleable iron arbor tops are not acceptable.
2. Arbor Bottoms: Fabricate of 3/8-inch by 3-inch flat steel bar. Thread arbor bottom to accept 3/4-inch
arbor rods. Provide arbor bottom with one (1) 1/2-inch drop-forged eyebolt welded in the center to receive 3/4-
inch purchase line. Cast grey or malleable iron arbor bottoms are not acceptable.
3. Join arbor top to arbor bottom with two (2) 3/4-inch threaded steel rods and one (1) 3/8-inch by 3-inch flat
bar backbone. Rod length shall be adequate to accommodate specified counterweight load.
4. Utilize three (3) 3/4-inch nuts at top of each threaded steel rod; utilize one (1) 3/4-inch nut at bottom of
each threaded steel rod.
5. Provide arbor with 1/8-inch by 2-inch wide steel flat bar spacer plates, one (1) for every two (2) feet of
arbor length. Provide two (2) locking collars equipped with thumb screws at top of the stack of steel plates. Weld
front locking collar to top spacer plate.
6. Backer Plate: Fabricate from 3/8-inch by 3-inch steel bar.
7. Provide two (2) UHMW guide assemblies consisting of two (2) UHMW outer shoes, one (1) UHMW spacer
and one (1) 3/16-inch steel backup plate for each side of the guide shoe assembly. Bolt each guide assembly to
the arbor with two (2) 3/8-inch bolts with lock washers and nuts.
8. Provide one (1) arbor for each single purchase line set.
K. Double Purchase Counterweight Arbor:
1. Arbor Top: Form from 3/8-inch thick steel plate. Attach an 8-inch diameter semi- steel sheave grooved
for the required number of 1/4-inch lift lines and one (1) 3/4-inch hand line to the arbor top. The sheave shall
operate on a one-inch diameter cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) tapered roller bearings. Proper adjustment of
bearings is to be accomplished through the use of a “Nyloc” self- locking nut at one (1) end of the shaft and a keeper
pin at the other end. Make side plates from no less than seven (7) gage steel. Install spacers to allow passage of
hand line and to prevent wire rope from jumping grooves. Weld side plate assemblies directly to arbor top plate.
2. Arbor Bottom: Fabricate from of 3/8-inch by 3-inch flat steel bar. Tap arbor bottom to accept 3/4-inch
arbor rods. Attach an 8-inch diameter semi-steel sheave grooved for one 3/4-inch hand line to arbor bottom plate.
Sheave shall operate on a 3/4-inch diameter cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 3/4-inch flanged ball bearings.
Accomplish proper adjustment of the bearings by a “Nyloc” self- locking nut on one (1) end of the shaft and a keeper
pin at the other end. Make side plates from minimum 10 gage steel. Install spacers to prevent the hand line from
jumping the groove. Weld side plate assembly directly to arbor bottom plate.
3. Join arbor top and bottom with two (2) 3/4-inch threaded steel rods. Make rod length adequate to
accommodate specified counterweight load. Use three (3) 3/4-inch nuts at the top of each threaded steel rod and
one (1) 3/4-inch nut at the bottom of each threaded steel rod.

4. Provide arbor with 1/8-inch by 2-inch steel flat bar spacer plates, three (3) per arbor or one (1) for every
two (2) feet of arbor length. Locate two (2) locking collars at top of this stack of plates and equip with thumb
screws. Weld front locking collar to top spacer plate.
5. Backer Plate: 3/8-inch by 3-inch steel bar.
6. Provide two (2) UHMW guide assemblies, consisting of two (2) UHMW outer shoes, one (1) UHMW spacer
and one (1) 3/16-inch steel backup plate for each side of guide shoe assembly. Bolt each guide assembly to arbor
with two (2) 3/8- inch bolts with lock washers and nuts.
7. Provide one (1) arbor for each double purchase line set.
L. Counterweights:
1. Counterweights shall be 13-5/8 inches long with a U-shaped cutout for arbor rods. Counterweights shall
be fabricated from flame or laser cut steel. Each piece shall be free from sharp edges, burrs and slag. The
dimensions of each piece of counterweight shall not vary by more than 3/16 -inch.
2. Paint top weight on each counterweight Chrome Yellow, indicating arbor is in normal balance.
3. Counterweights shall be approximately one (1) inch thick.
4. Furnish 800-lbs of counterweight per rigging set. Furnish 200-lbs of additional counterweight for each
lighting batten. Furnish 700-lbs of additional counterweight for each orchestra ceiling truss batten.
5. Mechanically fasten counterweight base weights to bottom of arbor with two (2) steel straps and seals.
M. Rope Locks:
1. Construct from one-piece casting of ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. Each rope lock shall use
ductile or malleable iron jaws for clamping rope. Grey iron jaws or housings are not acceptable.
2. The rope lock hand lever shall be a minimum of nine (9) inches long to provide required leverage and cut
from 1/2-inch steel plate. Cast iron rope lock handles are not acceptable. Encapsulate hand levers in red poly-vinyl
chloride, 25 mils thick and testing between 50 and 60 on a durometer.
3. Provide each rope lock with steel oval-shaped rope ring. Oval rings shall be plastic dipped as above, to
quiet operation.
4. Provide each rope lock with a nylon tipped adjustment bolt and locknut for adjusting the compression of
the locking shoes.
5. Rope lock housings shall incorporate nylon washers, rubber mushroom bumper and nylon-tipped locking set
screw to quiet operation.
6. Rope locks shall have the ability to add a padlock to the housing at time of purchase or any time in the
future, for lockout.
7. Bolt rope lock to locking rail using four (4) 3/8-inch bolts, lock washers and nuts.
8. Provide one (1) rope lock for each line set.
N. Steel Tee-Bar Guide System:
1. Construct from 3/16-inch by 1-1/2-inch by 1-1/2-inch steel tee bar, spaced 8- inches on center. Hold tee
bars plumb and true by means of 3/16-inch by 1-inch steel u-clips fastened to tee bar with 5/16-inch bolts, lock
washers and huts. Provide u-clips for each side of every tee bar with exception of end tee bars.
2. Mount tee bar to horizontal wall battens at five-foot vertical intervals. Construct wall battens from 2-inch
by 2-inch by 3/16-inch steel angle. Bolt horizontal wall batten to u-clips with 5/16-inch bolts, lock washers and
nuts.
3. Install a complete tee bar guide system whether there is an arbor positioned at initial installation or not.
This shall increase the usability of the space in the future.

4. Run the tee bar vertically and plumb. Perfectly align butt joints, providing a continuous guide from the
stage floor to the underside of the head block beams.
5. Secure wall battens to stage wall with 1/4-inch by 2-inch flat bar wall knees, located five (5) feet on center,
in both vertical and horizontal dimensions. Secure wall knees to stage wall using construction appropriate 3/8 -inch
fasteners.
6. Locate 3/16-inch by 2-inch by 2-inch steel stop battens, one (1) at top and one (1) at bottom of the battery.
Bolt 2-inch by 2-inch continuous hardwood strips to both stop battens.
7. Steel tee bar guide system shall include steel floor batten to attach lower tee sections to stage floor.
Construct floor battens from 2-inch by 2-inch by 3/16-inch steel angle attached to floor using construction
appropriate 3/8-inch fasteners.
O. Locking Rail:
1. Construct rope-locking rail sturdily and securely brace; able to withstand an upward force of 300 -lbs per
linear foot.
2. Mount rope locks on a one-piece formed locking rail. The rail consists of 1/4-inch thick plate, at a total
overall height of 3-inches, a horizontal run of approximately 2-1/2-inches, and a 3-inch integral index card strip
located at 45-degrees to the top. Drill the angle to receive rope locks at intervals of 8-inches.
3. Locking rail is to include an index cardholder strip and sequence numbered cards, indicating rigging set
number, function and capacity. Provide drilled and bolted index card clips to hold the numbered cards to the index
cardholder strip. The cards do not need to be engraved Lamicoid unless specifically noted.
4. Attach locking rail to stanchions fabricated from 3/8-inch by 3-inch steel with two (2) 1/2-inch Grade 5
bolts, lock washers and nuts per stanchion. Provide stanchions on 4’-8” maximum spacing. Attach each stanchion
to floor using a minimum of three (3) each 1/2-inch diameter construction appropriate fasteners, lock washers and
nuts.
5. Locking rail shall run, at minimum, full length of tee bar guide system.
6. If additional upward force is probable on the system, design the locking rail to withstand those forces, with
only supplemental accessories, like stanchions and braces.
P. Pipe Battens:
1. Construct from 1-1/2-inch I.D. Schedule 40, Black iron pipe. Paint pipe batten with high quality black paint.
2. Pipe battens shall have a minimum number of splices with sections smaller than 21 feet being in the center
of the assembly.
3. Splices shall use an internal sleeve at least 18 inches long with minimum wall thickness of 5/32-inch.
4. Secure splice with four (4) plug welds or four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with half-height “Nyloc” nuts.
5. Lengths as indicated on Drawings and schedules.
6. Provide one (1) batten for each line set and one (1) additional batten for each electrical lighting position.
Provide dedicated orchestra shell linesets with a three (3) pipe truss batten to prevent bowing.
Q. Three Pipe Truss Battens:
1. Construct with a top, bottom and front chord of 1-1/2-inch I.D. Schedule 40, black iron pipe. Continuously
weld a 12-inch long, 1/4-inch by 2-inch steel strap at the centerline of the pipe battens at maximum spacing of 5 -
foot on center. Drill the vertical strap to accept the included electrical wire -way bracket. Attach the front pipe to
top and bottom pipes with a formed 1/4-inch by 2-inch steel strap and three (3) 3/8-inch U-bolts, lock washers and
nuts.

2. Pipe battens shall have minimum number of splices with sections smaller than 21 feet being in the center
of the assembly.
3. Splices shall use an internal sleeve at least 18 inches long with minimum wall thickness of 5/32 -inch.
4. Secure splice with four (4) plug welds or four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with half-height
“Nyloc” nuts.
5. Paint the pipe batten with high quality black paint.
6. Lengths as indicated on Drawings and schedules.
7. Provide one (1) three-pipe truss batten for each orchestra ceiling line set.
R. Trim Chain:
1. Fabricate each 36-inch long chain from 1/4-inch alloy SECOA Theatrical Chain (hereinafter referred to as
“STC™”), specifically designed for theatrical overhead lifting applications.
a. The STC™ Chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000-lbs; a working load limit of 3,250-lbs.
Proof-test each link of the chain to twice the working load limit.
b. The chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Match individual link size to the
National Association of Chain Manufacturers (NACM) "Welded Steel Chain Specifications" for Grade 30 Proof Coil
Chain.
c. The STC™ Chain shall be easily recognizable.
1) Stamp each link of chain with manufacturer’s identifying mark.

2) Chain shall be lot traceable, with a coded date stamp on every tenth link of chain.
3) Finish applied to chain shall be per ASTM B633 FE/ZN 5, Type II Yellow Iridescent.
2. STC™ Chain, as manufactured by SECOA.

3. Terminate one (1) end of trim chain at wire rope thimble.
4. Wrap trim chain 1-1/2 times around stage batten and terminate with single 5/16- inch screw pin shackle.
a. Terminate bow of this shackle at wire rope thimble.

b. Place pin of this shackle through fifth link from free end of chain, leaving approximately 5 -inches of chain
hanging free for trim adjustment.
c. “Mouse” shackles shut with wire, after proper installation.
5. Attach and terminate one (1) trim chain at stage end of each lifting line.
6. Make the STC™ Chain OSHA CFR1910.184 compliant with the addition of a sling identification tag.
S. Shackles:
1. Screw pin type (Class 2) drop forged and galvanized conforming to RR -C-271D Type IVA.
2. After final adjustment, mouse shackles with wire to prevent loosening.
T. Turnbuckles:
1. Fabricate from forged and galvanized steel conforming to ASTM F1145, Type 1, Grade 1.
2. After final adjustment, mouse turnbuckles with wire to prevent loosening.
U. Pipe Clamps:
1. Two-piece construction fabricated from two (2) strips of 7-gage by 2-inch hot rolled steel formed to
encompass and clamp pipe batten to prevent rotation. Round corners to prevent snapping on adjacent curtains.
2. Provide a 3/8-inch Grade 5 hex bolt, lock washer, and hex nut above and below batten.
3. A 17/32-inch hole at top of clamp shall allow for attachment of rigging hardware.
4. Each pipe clamp shall have a recommended working load of 750 lbs.
V. Pipe Clamp and Turnbuckle:
1. Utilize an alternative method of termination at the batten with the following:
a. One (1) 3/8-inch by 6-inch jaw and eye forged turnbuckle; mouse after final adjustment.
b. One (1) 2-piece pipe clamp, where the clamp is appropriately sized for 1-
1/2-inch pipe and the clamp completely encloses the pipe.
W. Wire Rope Lifting Lines:
1. Lift Line: 1/4-inch 7x19 preformed small diameter (galvanized) specialty cord, impregnated with dry
lubricant, conforming to ASTM A1023/A1023M.
2. All small diameter specialty cord must have Lot Testing Certificates, completed by an outside party, available
from the manufacturer.
3. Damaged or deformed cables shall not be used. All wire rope rigging shall be installed so as to prevent
abrasion of wire rope against any part of building construction or other equipment.
4. Finish cable termination points with HD galvanized cable thimbles and one (1) Nicopress® oval sleeve
installed per manufacturer’s written instructions.
5. Tape cable ends with self-fusing silicone tape to prevent unraveling and snagging.
X. Hand Line:
1. 3/4-inch Multi-Line II rope as manufactured by New England Ropes.

2. Heat-seal and tape all rope ends with self-fusing silicone tape.
3. Terminate hand lines with two (2) half hitches and two (2) nylon zip ties to attach rope end to standing part
of the rope.
Y. Outrigger Pipe for Index Strip Light: 1-1/2-inch Schedule 40 outrigger pipe to run full length of locking rail.
1. Outrigger pipe shall have same construction as pipe battens.

2. Support outrigger pipe from tee bar battery at 10' O.C. maximum spacing by 3/16 -inch by 4-inch flat steel
brackets and appropriately sized U-bolts with lock washers and nuts.
3. Alternate: Support outrigger pipe from two (2) wall battens at 10 feet O.C. maximum spacing by 2-inch by
3/16-inch steel angle brackets bolted to two (2) wall battens with 5/16-inch Grade 5 bolts, lock washers and nuts.
Support pipe by appropriately sized 3/8-inch U-bolts with lock washers and nuts.
Z. Index Strip Light (Single Circuit Option):
1. Furnish and install an index light strip the full length of the locking rail and support from the outrigger pipe.
Construct housing to adequately light the locking rail without spilling onto the stage.

2. Construct light strip from 20-gage steel with lamp sockets spaced 24 inches O.C. and wired in parallel to a
common circuit. Provide 40-watt lamps for all sockets.
3. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish power connection and a 1000W rotary dimmer switch.
AA. Index Strip Light (Two Circuit Option):
1. Furnish and install an index light strip for full length of locking rail and support from the outrigger pipe.
Construct housing to adequately light the locking rail without spilling onto the stage.
2. Construct light strip from 20-gage steel with lamp sockets spaced 24 inches O.C. and wired in parallel
alternately to two (2) circuits. Provide 40-watt frosted lamps for all sockets on first circuit and 40-watt blue colored
lamps for all sockets on second circuit.
3. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish power connections and two (2) 1000W rotary dimmer switches.
2.9 MOTORIZED LINESETS
A. Counterweight Assist Operation:
1. System Requirements:
a. Design winch to operate the arbor at a fixed batten speed of approximately 20 feet per minute.
b. Winch system must have, as a minimum, 1000 lbs lifting capacity or 50 percent of the total arbor capacity;
whichever is greater.
2. Gear Reducer:
a. Combination right angle helical worm gear reducer.

b. Reducer must have a minimum service factor of 1.0.
3. Frame:
a. Construct winch frame from structural steel members, compactly designed to support winch components
and load in a minimum amount of space.
b. Securely mount structural support to floor below arbor assembly with construction appropriate fasteners.
A chain idler sprocket, as required, will deflect chain around arbor to prevent contact with any part of the system.
4. Brake Motor:
a. The AC brake motor must be 1725 RPM, three-phase, 60 Hz with an integral brake.
b. Size integral brake to stop and hold moving load within four (4) inches. Brake must automatically be applied
in case of power failure.
c. A high inertia flywheel is required.
d. Motor must have 1.0 service factor.
e. Verify availability of 3-phase voltage.
5. Motor Starter:
a. Provide a UL Listed motor starter in a NEMA 1 enclosure attached to winch frame or location indicated on
Drawings. Provide a NEMA 12 enclosure for outdoor or wet locations.
b. Motor overload protection is required.
c. If the system is 480V, provide the enclosure with a though the door disconnect.
d. If required, provide local control push buttons for UP/DOWN operation. Push buttons must require
continuous pressure to operate the set. If local control is required provide a local Emergency Stop.
6. Limit Switches:
a. Equip each piece of motor-operated equipment with four (4) limit switches. Provide with two (2) normal
travel limit switches to stop motion at each end of travel and to provide redundancy two (2) over travel limit switches
that removes power from the motor, through either a line contactor or other secure disable device and also remove
power from the starter control circuit when activated. Furnish limit switches with rotary, lever arm, cam, or plunger
style operators.
b. Provide limit switches with a minimum NEMA 1 surface mounting enclosure with provisions for conduit fitting
mounting. Actuate each circuit by means of an individually adjustable operator.
c. Provide limit switches with sufficient liquid-tight, flexible conduit or flexible cable. Provide limit switches
with a grounding conductor.
d. Failure of a limit switch shall fail to safe state.
e. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
7. Chain Sprocket:
a. Sprocket must be size and pitch matched to double roller drive chain.
b. Key sprocket hub directly to output shaft of reducer.
8. Slack Chain Idler:
a. Design idler to maintain maximum chain contact with drive sprocket in both directions of arbor travel.
b. Design idler assembly to shuttle to tensioned side of chain.
9. Drive Chain:
a. Fabricate from minimum 3/4-inch pitch double roller chain (RS60-2).

b. Maintain minimum bending radius, as recommended by the manufacturer.
10. Drive Cable:
a. Minimum 1/2-inch 6 by 36 XIPS IWRC.

b. Cable connections must conform to best practices and manufacturer’s written instructions.
c. Maintain minimum bending radius, as recommended by manufacturer.
11. Drive Chain Connections:
a. Chain to cable connection must allow cable to pivot around its axis to prevent chain rotation.
b. Chain to cable and chain to arbor connection must maintain 100 percent of chain strength capacity.
12. Headlock:
a. Headlock must conform to rigging specification listed above.

b. Drive cable groove must be shallow; assuring that pitch diameter is equal to pitch diameter of wire rope lift
lines.
c. A separate sheave for the drive cable may be used. Sheave must have bearings rated for safe and reliable
operation under the maximum design load.
13. Loft Blocks: Conform to rigging specification listed above.

14. Arbor: Conform to rigging specification listed above, and have appropriate fabrication alterations and
termination hardware to attach to drive chain.
15. Pipe Battens, Aircraft Cable, Termination Hardware and Methodology: Conform to rigging specifications
listed above.
B. Line Shaft Winch Rigging System:
1. Furnish and install [Insert capacity] lb capacity, motorized lineshaft winches to raise and lower specified
battens. Each winch must operate at a fixed speed of approximately 20 feet per minute. Batten must travel from
a low trim of 4'-0" above stage floor to approximately 2'-0" below winch assembly. Provide each lineshaft winch
with one (1) cable drum for each lift line grooved for minimum 1/4- inch cable. Alternately groove drums for right
and left hand winding to prevent batten from traveling.
2. Gear Motor Reducer: Combination right angle helical worm gear reducer with a minimum service factor of
1.0.
3. AC Brakemotor: 1725 RPM, three-phase, 60 Hz with an integral brake.
a. Size brake to stop and hold moving load within four (4) inches. Automatically apply brake in case of power
failure.
b. Motor must have 1.0 service factor.
c. Verify availability of 3-phase voltage.
4. Cable Drum: Machine for right or left hand winding as required. Drum diameter must be a minimum of 32
times the cable diameter.
a. Make cable drum of sufficient length to hold all of the cable in one (1) layer; rope piling is not acceptable.
b. Support drums on each side with a flange block assembly.
c. Drums must hold a minimum of cable required for the batten travel plus three (3) dead wraps.
d. Helically groove drums for the appropriately sized cable and provide with key-slots for easy connection of
cables.
e. Groove winch drum to accept 1-line of minimum 1/4-inch cable.
f. Key drum hub directly to output shaft of reducer.
g. Chain or belt drives are not acceptable.
5. Secondary Brake:
a. Use a secondary over-speed sensitive inertia brake at each significant shaft section.
b. Each inertia brake must be capable of stopping and holding maximum designed load.
6. Shafts, Keys and Couplings:
a. Design shafts to accommodate all applied loads in accordance with ANSI/ASME B106.1M.
b. Key all connections using keys designed to accommodate applied loads. Keys shall be in accordance with
ANSI B17.1.
c. Couplings shall accommodate possible parallel and angular misalignments caused during manufacturing,
assembly, and installation of winch. Use only couplings made of steel and with steel to steel contact surfaces.
7. Frame: Construct winch frame from structural steel members, compactly designed to support winch
components and load in minimum amount of space.
a. Run structural support for entire length of system.

b. Incorporate a cable keeper bar in the frame that is located next to grooves in the drum to prevent lift lines
from jumping grooves and slack lines from unwinding.
8. Limit Switches: Provide each winch with an adjustable four-element rotary limit switch driven by roller
chain. Key sprockets to prevent slippage and size for maximum usable rotation of switch cams. Appropriately guard
input shaft and drive chain.
a. Equip each motor-operated piece of equipment with normal travel limit switches to stop motion at each end
of travel and provide redundancy to over travel limit switches that removes power from motor, through either a line
contactor or other secure disable device and also remove power from starter control circuit when activated.
b. Provide limit switches with minimum NEMA 1 surface mounting enclosure with provisions for conduit fitting
mounting. Actuate each circuit by means of an individually adjustable operator.
c. Provide limit switches with sufficient liquid-tight, flexible conduit or flexible cable. Provide limit switches
with a grounding conductor.
d. Failure of a limit switch shall fail to a safe state.
e. Switches shall have snap acting contacts.
9. Motor Starter: UL Listed in a NEMA 1 enclosure attached to winch frame or location indicated on Drawings.
Provide NEMA 12 enclosure for outdoor or wet locations.
a. If system is 480V, provide enclosure with a though the door disconnect.

b. Motor overload protection is required.
c. If required, provide local control push buttons for UP/DOWN operation. Push buttons must require
continuous pressure to operate the set. If local control is required provide a local Emergency Stop.
10. Pipe Battens, Aircraft Cable, Termination Hardware and Methodology: Conform to rigging hardware
specifications listed above.
C. Basic Control Panel:
1. Provide wall mounted, UL Listed, NEMA 1 control enclosure that contains UP and DOWN push buttons for
each winch. Provide NEMA 12 enclosure for outdoor or wet locations.
2. Provide continuous pressure type (hold-to-run) push buttons to operate the set.
3. Use a key switch to prevent unauthorized personnel from operating system.
4. Control panel to contain an ON-OFF key switch, controls on lighted push button, mushroom head push-pull
emergency stop, winch selector switch, if than one (1) winch is provide, and UP -DOWN push buttons.
5. Typical operation would be to select winch and press UP-DOWN push button for direction of travel.
6. Emergency stop push button disconnects power to entire system assembly and halts operation at any
position. Maintained emergency stop button operates a line contactor, which removes power completely from
reversing contactor and controls. Other control methods are not acceptable.
7. There shall be an option to make controller with a detachable control pendant. Provide a shorting plug to
allow for operation of the system with the pendant removed from the system. Pendant shall include UP and DOWN
push buttons and a maintained emergency stop push button.
8. There shall be an option to make each motor’s controller mountable directly to lockrail at lineset position.
D. Target V Control Panel:
1. General System and Operation Description:
a. Control system to use industrial grade PLC and automation controls. Add these to motor above.
b. System allows complete programming and configuration setup of fixed and variable speed winch units.
c. Incorporate record function to read, store and recall information of a manually established batten height.
d. Winch units must be individually addressable and programmable.
e. Individual winch units must provide elevation feedback in feet and inches and be programmable to stop
anywhere along the travel between normal limits.
f. System must offer recording of multiple targets for repeatable positioning.
g. Furnish a single analog phone line, by others, to enable remote programming, software upgrades, system
manufacturer troubleshooting and monitoring.
2. Central Operator Station:
a. General: Output display must include numeric positions for each motorized set. Information includes
actual, target and present position; fault and emergency stop conditions, and allows input of necessary user
information.
b. Display shows current position in feet and inches.
c. Provide a CPU processor with a minimum clock speed of 200 MHz and 32MB SDRAM of main memory and
16MB of flash ROM. CPU includes a graphics accelerator and 1MB of graphics memory.
d. Interface allows Serial I/F, LAN I/F, CF Card I/F, USB and PS/2 I/F.
3. Operator Control Stations (OCS):
a. Motor logic controller: Provide with an operator interface (text based or graphical), I/O, and networking
utilizing an Intel® processor.
b. Faceplate: Provide with 10 function keys and four (4) system keys.
c. OCS must allow for digital and analog input and output and power monitoring and high -speed counters.
d. Communications between system components to be accomplished by an Ethernet interface operating at
10Mbaud with a 10base T connection that supports both half and full duplex modes.
e. Provide motor control panel with an OCS capable of sharing data and accessing programming of its
respective motor.
f. Make controller a pedant with wall plug.
g. Make each motor’s controller mountable directly to lockrail at lineset position.
h. Provide each control panel location with a mushroom head push-pull emergency stop switch to disengage
power to all winch units. Emergency stop push button disconnects power to entire system and halts operation at
any position.
i. Acceptable Product: Target V as manufactured by SECOA, Inc., Champlin, MN.
4. Wireless Radio Remote Control System:
a. General: Provide a FCC approved unlicensed radio remote control system complete with a hand-held
transmitter and a microprocessor based receiver/decoder that will connect in parallel to the winch control system.
b. Receiver/Decoder:

1) Decode data sent from transmitter and verify data accuracy.
2) Include diagnostic indicators for mainline contactor (emergency stop), power supply, transmitter data
stream reception, warning status and control relays.
3) Provide an antenna with an operational distance of 200 ft minimum.
c. Transmitter:
1) Design transmitter to operate in user selectable frequency band range of 433.87-434.65 MHz
2) Provide with eight (8) control and one (1) mushroom-head E-stop buttons.
3) Equip with LED status indicators.
4) Furnish with built-in rechargeable NiCad batteries and an external charging unit.
5) Enclose transmitter in impact resistant polymer enclosure with removable rubber boot.
6) Maximum Weight: 13 oz.
2.10 ROPE RIGGING LINESETS AND/OR EQUIPMENT
A. Eight (8) Inch Rope Spot Block:

1. Heavy-duty Sheaves: Construct of ASTM A48, Class 30-35 grey iron castings or smooth Nylon casting,
minimum 8-inches in diameter. Groove sheave for 3/4- inch rope.
a. Concentrically bore sheave for a 3/4-inch cold rolled steel shaft and two (2) 3/4-inch flange bearings.
Accomplish proper adjustment of bearings by means of a "Nyloc" self-locking nut on one (1) end of shaft and a
keeper pin on the other end.
2. Side Plates: Fabricate from minimum 10-gage steel, welded in three (3) places to minimum 3/16-inch by
1-1/4-inch by 1-1/4-inch base angle. Miter, trim and grind corners of side plates. Hold side plates together by
means of a minimum of five (5) 5/16-inch bolts and spacers. Locate spacers to retain rope in sheave groove.
3. Provide a method to positively stop block from shifting laterally along grid. Locking attachment shall consist
of two (2) 1/4-inch steel clip; 3/8-inch J-bolts, lock washer and 3/8-inch nut.
a. Provide a single spot block with multiple single grooved sheaves.

b. Provide [Insert Quantity] number of sheaves per block.
c. Provide quantities as shown on Drawings and as scheduled.
4. Pin Rail: Fabricate from 4-inch Schedule 40 pipe.
a. Drill 1-3/16-inch diameter holes through pipe on 1-foot centers.

b. Provide with vertical legs to support pipe to allow for 500-lb/lineal foot uplift.
c. Provide pin rail(s) as indicated on Drawings and one (1) hickory belaying pin per pin rail hole.
5. Belaying Pin: Fabricate from first grade Hickory.
a. Design to allow use in a 1-3/16-inch pin rail hole.

b. Provide as shown on schedule.
6. Two Piece Trim Clamps: Two-piece cast body with spring inserts to hold up to five (5) lines.
a. Design to allow drop to be trimmed without removing sandbags.

b. Provide as shown on schedule.
7. Sandbag: Canvas or nylon bag sewn with nylon support straps and a drop- forged snap hook. Bag shall
be available in saddle-style or bullet-style, as specified for the application.
a. Provide each sandbag filled to capacity with clean dry coarse sand.
b. Provide quantities and capacities as shown on schedule.
2.11 DEAD-HUNG GENERAL PURPOSE (DRAPERY, SCENERY OR ELECTRICS) BATTENS
A. Pipe: Construct from 1-1/2-inch Schedule 40 black iron pipe. Paint pipe with high quality black paint.
B. Pipe batten shall have minimum number of splices with sections smaller than 21’-0” to be in the center of
the assembly.
C. Splices shall use an internal sleeve at least 18 inches long with a minimum wall thickness of 5/32 -inch.
D. Secure splice with four (4) plug welds or four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with half-height “Nyloc” nuts. Lengths as
indicated on Drawings and as scheduled.
E. Provide one (1) batten for each line set and one (1) additional batten for each electrical lighting position.
F. Threaded and coupled connections are not acceptable.
G. Battens shall be dead hung from structure provided by others at no greater than 10’-0” on center spacing
and no further than two (2) feet from either end.
1. Hanging methodology shall be by either method below:
a. Beam clamp and cable.
1) Beam clamps fabricated from appropriately sized steel angle iron with two (2) 3/8-inch steel clips and 1/2-
inch bolts, lock washers and nuts, attached to support structure, connected to 1/4 -inch small diameter specialty
cord impregnated with dry lubricant, with Copper Oval Nicopress® Sleeves installed per manufacturer’s written
instructions. Provide with 1/4-inch heavy-duty thimbles at top and bottom connection. Provide with 36-inches of
SECOA Theatrical Chain (hereinafter referred to as “STCTM”) chain for adjustment. Terminat e one (1) end of trim
chain at wire rope thimble.
2) Wrap trim chain 1-1/2 times around stage batten and terminate with single 5/16-inch screw pin shackle.
3) Terminate bow of this shackle at wire rope thimble.
4) Place pin of this shackle through fifth link from free end of chain, leaving approximately 5-inches of chain
a) STCTM chain shall be specifically designed for overhead lifting applications.

b) The STCTM chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000 lbs; a working load limit of 3,250 lbs.
Proof-test each link of chain to twice the working load limit.
c) The STCTM chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Individual link size shall
match the National Association of Chain Manufacturers (NACM) "Welded Steel Chain Specifications" for Grade 30
Proof Coil Chain.
d) The STCTM chain shall be easily recognizable.
aa) Stamp each link of the chain with the manufacturer’s identifying mark.
bb) The chain shall be lot traceable, with a coded date stamp on every tenth link of chain.
cc) The finish applied to the chain shall be per ASTM B633 FE/ZN 5, Yellow Iridescent.

dd) Make the STC™ Chain OSHA CFR1910.184 compliant with the addition of a sling identification tag.
b. Beam clamp and chain
1) Fabricate beam clamps from appropriately sized steel angle iron with two (2) 3/8-inch steel clips and 1/2-
inch bolts, lock washers and nuts, attached to steel, connected to 1/4 -inch STCTM chain with 5/16-inch screw-pin
shackle. Wrap trim chain 1-1/2 times around stage batten and terminate with single 5/16-inch screw pin shackle.
Mouse all shackles.
2) Terminate bow of this shackle at wire rope thimble.
3) Place pin of this shackle through fifth link from free end of chain, leaving approximately 5-inches of chain
a) STCTM chain shall be specifically designed for overhead lifting applications.

b) The STCTM chain shall have a minimum breaking strength of 13,000 lbs; a working load limit of 3,250 lbs.
Proof-test each link of chain to twice the working load limit.
c) The STCTM chain shall be compatible with industry-recognized chain hardware. Individual link size shall
match the National Association of Chain Manufacturers (NACM) "Welded Steel Chain Specifica tions" for Grade 30
Proof Coil Chain.
d) The STCTM chain shall be easily recognizable.
aa) Stamp each link of the chain with the manufacturer’s identifying mark.
bb) The chain shall be lot traceable, with a coded date stamp on every tenth link of chain .
cc) The finish applied to the chain shall be per ASTM B633 FE/ZN 5, Yellow Iridescent.
dd) Make the STCTM Chain OSHA CFR1910.184 compliant with the addition of a sling identification tag.
2.12 STAGE CURTAIN TRACKS (STRAIGHT OR ON-STAGE APPLICATIONS)
A. Front Curtain Traveler and Upstage Travel Curtain Tracks:

1. Heavy-duty enclosed type, approximately 2-5/8 by 2-3/4 inches, 14-gage steel formed to provide parallel
double tracks for carrier wheels and totally enclosed except for bottom carrier slot.
2. Traveler track assemblies shall be free of burrs, dents, and irregularities.
3. Each section of track less than 20 feet in length shall be in one (1) continuous piece.
4. Splice clamps shall be permitted for section lengths over 20 feet.
5. Splice clamps shall provide positive alignment of sections with at least two (2) lap clamps to join halves
where required.
6. Single carriers to have two (2) urethane or neoprene wheels with ball bearings.
7. Single carriers to have single-plated swivels with three (3) to six (6) inch trim chains and rubber spacers
and back packs.
8. Provide five (5) percent spare single carriers.
9. Provide dead end pulleys with a 45-degree downward incline.
10. Firmly bolt housings to the track; pressure fitting is not acceptable.
11. Acceptable Products: The complete track assembly with all necessary parts shall be ADC 283 or H&H
Specialties 418P or Triple E Limited Unitrack.
B. Traveler curtains on motorized or counterweight line sets shall include a sandb ag tension pulley.
C. Support curtain tracks rigidly from pipe battens using 2-piece, bent steel pipe clamps. Clamp spacing is
not to exceed manufacturer’s written instructions.
D. Track and Components Finish Color: [Mill] [Black].

E. Quantities, sizes and lengths per Drawings and schedules.
2.13 STAGE CURTAIN TRACKS (CURVED OR STUDIO/CCTV APPLICATIONS)
A. Curve-able Track:
1. Aluminum I-Beam track, approximately 2-1/2 by 1-inch top, intermediate and bottom flanges.
2. Traveler track assemblies shall be free from burrs, dents, and irregularities.
3. Each section of track less than 20 feet in length shall be one (1) continuous piece.
4. Splice clamps shall be permitted for section lengths over 20 feet.
5. Splice clamps shall provide positive alignment of track sections.
6. Single carriers shall have two (2) nylon wheels with ball bearings.
7. Single carriers to have single-plated swivels with three (3) to six (6) inch trim chains and two (2) rubber
bumpers.
8. Provide five (5) percent spare single carriers.
9. All track carriers, clamps, ropes, chains, hangers, etc. except operating surfaces of pulleys and wheels shall
be mill finish.
10. Acceptable Products: The complete track assembly with all necessary parts shall be ADC 141 custom or
H&H Specialties 316A.
11. Wall mounted track support brackets shall use ceiling clamps and be painted the same color as the wall to
which they are attached.
12. Wall mounted track support brackets shall use wall construction appropriate fasteners for wall attachment.
B. Track and All Visible Track Components Finish Color: [Mill] [Black].
C. Quantities, sizes and lengths per Drawings and schedules.
2.14 STAGE DRAPERY AND DROPS (ALL FLAME RETARDANT)
A. Stage Curtain Construction:
1. Treat materials to be flame retardant or materials shall be inherently flame retardant and tested in
accordance with NFPA 701.
a. Sew certification label on back of each curtain at bottom of stage hem, off stage or, for side masking,
upstage.
b. Provide certificates as required.
2. Produce fabrics from one (1) dye lot per color. Color quality shall be consistent throughout, with no visible
streaking, striping, or spotting.
3. Attach by sewing at webbing to rear of each curtain a piece of curtain fabric of sufficient material for a
minimum of four (4) tests per NFPA 701.
4. Velour Drapery:
a. Curtains shall be of quantities, sizes, and fullness per the Schedule and Drawings.

b. Pile fabric shall have pile running up. Run fabric full height with no horizontal seams. Thread colors shall
match face colors. Thread shall conform to shrinkage characteristics and composition of fabric. Reinforce top hems
with 3-1/2-inch jute or nylon webbing. Install black grommets on webbing at pleats and at ends of curtain piec es.
Provide six (6) inch double-turned hem at bottom with separate heavy canvas chain sleeve with galvanized or plated
No. 6 jack chain in separate sleeve held four (4) inches above bottom of curtain.
c. Sew a test piece of curtain fabric to the webbing on the back of each curtain. Fabric shall be of sufficient
size for a minimum of six (6) tests per NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles
and Films.
5. Main Curtain and Valance Drapery: Fabricate from minimum 24 oz 100 percent polyester IFR Velour in
standard colors.
a. Acceptable Products: Charisma by KM Fabrics, Alicante by Gerriets International, or Dante by J.B. Martin
Ltd.
6. Other Velour Drapery: Fabricate from minimum 20 oz 100 percent polyester IFR Velour in standard colors.
a. Acceptable Products: Crescent by KM Fabrics.
7. Any fabric sections with visible streaking or spotting must be cut from bolt and discarded.
8. Box-pleat stage curtains with sewn fullness on 12-inch centers.
9. Furnish top hems with heavy-duty jute webbing double stitched at the top with machine set brass grommets
one (1) foot on center with tie lines or CCF-2 snap hooks as required.
10. Draperies must have, as a minimum, 50 percent fullness unless otherwise specified.
11. Double-turn hems with no visible selvage edges.
12. Vertical hems of on-stage and off-stage house curtain and traveler curtains to have 1/2 bolt width turned
back hems. Make all other vertical hems eight (8) inches.
13. Make bottom hems of border curtains four (4) inches.
14. Weight bottom of curtains with No. 8 jack chain contained within a canvas sleeve.
15. Construct main curtain and front valance from a single color, as selected by Architect, chosen from
manufacturer’s standard color card, unless noted otherwise.
16. Construct on-stage masking draperies from a single dye lot of black velour, unless noted otherwise.
B. Scenery Drop and Scrim Construction:
1. Vat dye fabrics unless specified as a natural color.

2. Flameproof cotton fabrics using an immersion process complying with the requirements of NFPA 701.
3. Make fabric cuts full width with no splices.
4. Sew cuts horizontally unless otherwise specified. Use seamless fabrics.
5. Sew a test piece of curtain fabric to the webbing on the back of each curtain. Fabric shall be of sufficient
size for a minimum of six (6) tests per NFPA 701: Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles
and Films.
6. Reinforce top hem with heavy jute webbing double stitched with No. 4 machine set brass grommets one-
foot on center with 36-inch tie lines. Tie lines shall be black or white to best match drop or scrim color.
7. Make side hems three (3) inch double turned without any selvedge.
8. Provide bottom hem with a suspended inner 6-inch heavy canvas lined pipe pocket with an opening 10’-6”
on center for inserting pipe weight.
9. Furnish and install 3/4-inch galvanized Schedule 40 pipe batten in bottom pocket.

Pipe is to be 10’-6” long, threaded on each end. Provide one (1) coupler per pipe section. Tape leading and tailing
end of pipe to prevent snags and tearing of soft goods.
10. Quantity and size per schedule and Drawings.
C. Acceptable Fabric Manufacturers:
1. Velour Fabrics (weights and colors as specified):
a. J.L. DeBall
b. KM Fabrics
c. Piedmont Plush Mills
2. Muslin, Canvas and Scrim (type, weight and color as specified):
a. Dazian Fabrics
b. Frankel Associates
c. Gerriets International
2.15 PIPE GRID
A. Pipe Grid: Construct from 1-1/2 inch I.D. Schedule 40 black iron pipe.
B. Live Load Capacity: 30 lbs/lineal foot.
C. Fabricate pipe with a minimum number of splices with sections shorter than 21’ -0” to be located in center
of batten.
D. Use an internal sleeve for splices with sleeve at least 18 inches long and secured with four (4) plug welds
or four (4) 3/8-inch bolts with half-height "Nyloc" nuts. Threaded and coupled connections are not acceptable.
E. Paint pipe grid with recognized high quality paint.
F. Install pipe grid battens in a crossing pattern 90 degrees to each other in four (4) foot by four (4) foot bays.
G. Join intersecting pipes with a 1/8-inch ASTM A36 HR steel formed intersection plate and two (2) 5/16 -inch
U-bolts, lock washers and hex nuts.
H. Fabricate support hangers from 1/2-inch ASTM A193 Grade B7 threaded rod. Make connection of the hanger
to the pipe grid by means of drop forged yoke end with a clevis pin and cotter pin to a two -piece pipe clamp. Form
pipe clamp from 7-gage x 2- inch ASTM A36 HR steel joined with two (2) 3/8-inch Grade 5 hex bolts, lock washers
and hex nuts.
I. Rigidly mount support hangers to building’s support structure. Maximum spacing between hangers not to
exceed 10’-0” in either direction and no more than 24-inches from a wall.
J. Attach support hangers to lower pipes of grid.
K. Support hangers shall have a 750 lb load capacity.
L. End pipes two (2) inches off wall. Install internally sleeved wall flanges to prevent lateral movement of
pipe grid. Attach wall flanges to building using construction appropriate fasteners for type of wall construction
encountered.
M. Size per Drawings and schedules.
2.16 WIRE ROPE TENSION GRID
A. Summary: System shall be one (1) system designed to provide a safe and resilient walking surface with
light-transparent properties. The wire rope tension grid shall consist of a suspended steel frame with wire rope
woven in an over-and-under pattern to create a two (2) inch mesh. Terminate each length of wire rope at each end
along the perimeter of the framing members. Construct hangers of 1-1/2-inch nominal diameter (1.9-inch O.D.)
Schedule 80 black iron pipe.
B. System Description:
1. Design Requirements: Tension grid shall be constructed so that the maximum live load is transferred to
the frame assemblies.
a. The maximum live load for the system is 15,000 lbs.

b. The live load on any one (1) grid hanger pipe shall not exceed 2,880 lbs.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Install tension grid system at height above finished floor as shown on Drawings.
b. System shall be capable of supporting a uniform load of 20 psf with a less than two (2) inch deflection at
250 lbs over two (2) feet.
c. System service life shall be concurrent with the projected life of the building in which it is installed,
dependent on appropriate use and maintenance by the facility’s personnel.
C. Coordination:
1. Coordinate with all necessary trades doing adjoining or essential work to assure proper fit and installation
for the safety of the users.
a. Grid Panels: Provide by this section including installation.

b. System Hangers, Sway Braces and Mounting Plates:
1) Provided by this section including installation.

2) Provided by Division 05 including installation.
3) Provided by Division 05, provided to the steel erector, and coordinated by this section through the
Construction Manager.
c. Lighting Pipes (Permanent or Demountable):

4) Provided by Division 26, installed by this section.
d. Handrails:

e. Walkway Platforms: Provided by Division 05 including installation.
f. Access Bridges and Ladders: Provided by Division 05, including installation.

2. Provide shop and as-built drawings for approval, coordination and record as part of the system
requirements.
a. Submittals shall include design calculations that have been reviewed and signed and sealed by a Professional
Structural Engineer. Include tension grid panels, connection to hangers (whether furnished under this section or
Division 05), and connections to the structural steel.
3. Components, construction and installation shall allow for a minimum design factor of eight (8).
4. Warrant wire rope tension grid system for a period of one (1) year following final acceptance of the system.
5. Follow applicable trade standards, including basic engineering standards, welding standards and steel
construction standards.
D. Component Wire Rope Walking Surface:
1. Each tension wire cable shall be 1/8-inch 7x19 small diameter specialty cord impregnated with dry lubricant
with breaking strength of 2,000 lbs. [Mill] [Black] finish.
2. Secure ends of each length of wire rope with a factory-swaged stud and appropriately sized NF thread stud
and two (2) nuts.
a. Fittings and hardware shall conform to the wire rope manufacturer’s recommendations. All fittings shall
have 100 percent of the ultimate cable strength.
E. Frame: Construct from “U” shaped steel with holes appropriately drilled for connection of wire rope.
F. Walk-able Checker Plates: If necessary, connect individual platforms by checker plates f abricated from 1/4-
inch steel, framed to match the elevation of the wire rope tension grid panels. Provided and installed by Division
05.
G. Hand Railings:
1. Construct pipe handholds from 1-1/2 inch I.D. Schedule 40 black iron pipe. Minimize pipe joints, if
necessary. Connect using a drive fit pipe sleeve at least 18 inches long, secured by plug welds. Attachment to
uprights as noted. Paint pipe with recognized high quality paint. Construct chain mid -rail from 1/4-inch STCTM
chain, connected to uprights with rated shackles and eyebolts per Drawings.
H. Lighting Positions:
1. Construct pipe positions from 1-1/2 inch I.D. Schedule 40 black iron pipe. Minimize pipe joints, if necessary.
Connect using a drive fit pipe sleeve at least 18 inches long, secured by plug welds or four (4) 3/8-inch bolts and
half height Nylock nuts. Paint pipe with recognized high quality paint. Attachment to uprights with fixed “Rota -
lock” pipe clamps or approved equal.
2. Attachment to uprights with swivel or rigid “Rota-lock” pipe clamps or approved equal.
3. Provide quantities as indicated on Drawings and schedule.
I. Hanging Points:
1. Hang wire rope tension grid panels from support structure in an approved method in approximately 96 inch
bays, not to exceed 10 feet. Coordinate bays and hanger locations with other trades.
2. Support hangers must have a 2,880 lb live load capacity.
3. Coordinate spacing between hangers with tension grid panels not to exceed 10’ -0” in both directions and
no more than 24-inches from a wall.

4. Tension Grid Support Plates: 1/2-inch steel drilled for attachment of tension grid modular panels. Weld
support plates to tension grid hangers.
5. Attach support plate to each tension grid panel with one (1) 1/2-inch hex bolt, flat washers, lock washers,
and hex nut in each corner.
J. Wire Rope Tension Grid Panel: Quantities and sizes as indicated on Drawings and Schedules.
K. Paint components other than cables satin black prior to installation with touchup in the field if necessar y.
L. Metal work shall be free of all extraneous markings, scars and abrasion. Finish edges smooth to the touch.
Execute welds in accordance with the standards of the American Welding Society. Welding shall be completed in a
manner so as not to add secondary stresses and create distortion.
2.17 FABRICATION
A. Give all fabricated metal items minimum one (1) coat of primer and one (1) coat of finish paint. Color:
Satin black.
B. Fabricate and install equipment to facilitate maintenance and future r eplacement.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for supporting members, blocking,
installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of theater and stage equi pment.
B. Notify of Architect of any conditions, measurements, quantities, or other data, required for proper execution,
fit and completion of the Work, and for safe and proper operating clearances.
C. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stage rigging contractor is responsible for becoming familiar with and verifying pertinent dimensions and
conditions, both on Drawings and in the field, before proceeding with the Work.
B. Fully assemble and internally wire electrical components with terminals of the proper rating and clearly
labeled, provided for external feeder and control wiring.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and sho p drawings, as
indicated.
B. Install equipment square, plumb and true to adjacent work.
C. Position equipment accurately as indicated on Drawings. Note any deviations required to adjust for field
conditions. Incorporate deviations on as-built drawings.
D. Coordinate Work with trades performing adjoining work.
E. Use only qualified riggers for installation, trim and adjustment.
F. Protect stage flooring, regardless of whether flooring has been stained or sealed. Protect flooring from both
structural damage and cosmetic damage.
G. Clean and touch up field welds and abraded paint work with matching finishes.
H. Wire turnbuckles and screw pin shackles shut after adjustment.
I. Fabricate and install operating equipment to minimize operating noise levels for live performances.

J. Hang and trim curtains only after construction is completed and final building cleaning has been
accomplished.
K. No personnel will be allowed on the wire rope tension grid surface until installation is complete and the
installation supervisor has deemed that the system is safe for use. Preliminary inspections will be at the discretion
of the Installation Supervisor based on life safety concerns.
L. No use of the wire rope tension grid system, including lighting pipes, will be allowed until demonstration
and checkout has occurred.
M. Remove all construction rubbish and spare materials at project completion.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During installation of equipment arrange for access to equipment by Architect.

B. After completion of installation, notify Architect that equipment is ready for review.
C. Provide necessary personnel required to operate equipment and assist Architect with review process.
D. Repair or replace any equipment that does not meet requirements of Drawings or specifications with suitable
equipment.
E. Final acceptance of equipment will be withheld until all equipment has been reviewed, tested, and found to
be in conformance with Drawings and specifications.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Furnish a rigging operation and safety class to Owner’s representatives. Make class of sufficient length to
cover all work of this section.
B. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain theater and stage equipment.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Prior to expiration of warranty the contractor should arrange performance of the following services at the
Owner’s convenience:
1. Complete inspection of rigging system
2. Adjustment of equipment as required.
3. Correction of defective work covered by warranty.
4. Provide written recommendations for required repairs or changes that are not covered under the warranty.
5. One (1) hour rigging operation and safety class. Provide a written proposal for next year’s inspection and
maintenance visit.
SECTION-V
CCTV Surveillance System
Objective
To achieve an Enterprise Level Surveillance & Security System, the vendor shall supply and commission an IP
based CCTV system with the objective to provide high degree of surveillance system for the entire site.
The purpose is to monitor & supervise the entire area for security purpose, as well as record and inform officials
on unwanted, untoward incidents. The hardware required for the system including servers, workstations, monitors,
networking components, cables, connectors, conduits, power supplies etc. will be in the bidder’s scope. It will be
the responsibility of the vendor/bidder to make the entire system fully functional as per the specifications.
Vendor/bidder shall consider any equipment/devices required to make the system functional if not mentioned
herewith.
Scope of Work
The scope of work under this tender shall consist of design, supply, installation, testing, training & handing over
of all materials, equipment, hardware, software applications and necessary workmanship to commission said
system with all the required components strictly as per the enclosed tender specifications, design details. The
scope also include the supply, Installation & commissioning of any material or equipment including civil works
that are not specifically mentioned in the specification.

System Architecture:
Video Management System (VMS) shall be a fully digital IP-based video surveillance system that brings together
in one system a network video recorder (NVR) with unlimited storage capacity. As a software-based enterprise-level
video and data management system, VMS shall provide a single GUI that monitors, records, and offers functionality to
deliver the timely, accurate information required for effectively responding to any challenge. VMS shall be a fully
scalable enterprise-class system with centralized management capability. VMS shall be a fully scalable enterprise class
media management system. This advanced network-based system architecture enables simultaneous live
monitoring from multiple stations and is easily configurable for storage both on and off site. The software can be
configured to store and to view images captured by one camera or thousands of cameras and monitor connections
across an unrestricted number of servers. VMS can be designed to effectively integrate with video equipment including
NVRs, keyboards, and cameras to leverage and protect investments in legacy infrastructure and equipment.
System Components
VMS-Client Application shall provide live video view, various video playback support, historical video search
and playback, alarm management, Map integration and front end control features to an operator. Client
Application shall also able to manage & control all devices depending on the user access privileges. System
should support virtually unlimited VMS Clients and the licenses for the same shall be included in the VMS
Software.
VMS Database Server contain a web based data management center includes user management, facility
management system logs etc. and event & control service which receives and controls events and commands of
various formats via different communication modes, integrating video and access control devices. The System
shall able to support upto 1000 cameras. However the system should be capable to expand virtually upto
unlimited number of cameras by incorporating multiple servers to make a complete enterprise security systems.
Network Video Recorder (NVR) shall able to receive and store videos from various front end devices and
forward to various decoders, clients applications connected to the enterprise security system; ensuring a smooth
transmission when transmitting mass videos in various bandwidth levels. Each NVR server shall able to support
upto 256Mbps data throughput which can take upto 128 cameras recording @ D1 resolution. Each NVR shall be
provided with a storage chassis which should able to expand upto 20TB RAID 5 applied and can be further
expanded upto 120 TB RAID 5 by incorporating the additional storage chassis.
System Component Description & Integration

System shall support integration of various system components as detailed below as a minimum to create an
enterprise level Security Management System.
A. Recorders: Video Management System (VMS) shall support integration with digital and network video
recorders (NVRs). VMS shall have the ability to access and manage necessary functions of the recording
devices through the VMS client interface, such as live video, recorded video, playback, camera configuration
and other associated functions. The system shall support 64 Channel NVR at 25 fps @ D1 resolutions as a
minimum.
B. Cameras: VMS shall be able to support Dome, PTZ and Bullet/Box cameras for its functionality.
C. VMS shall have the capability to integrate with Access control system and Intrusion systems in future.
Optionally VMS shall provide SDK for 3rd Party Systems to develop integration with VMS.
Operational Requirements
A. VMS shall provide a single graphical user interface (GUI) to monitor, control and administer digital video
surveillance equipment from multiple systems and platforms
B. VMS shall be configured to store and view images captured by one camera or numerous cameras and monitor
connections across an unrestricted number of servers.
C. All the Software & hardware equipments for CCTV shall be of same make/manufacturer.
VMS Software Features:

The VMS application software shall have following major features:
Scalability: System shall be enterprise level system so that increase in the number of cameras; number of servers
& number of Clients shall not affect the currently running system operations & functionality.
Multi-location: System shall work on an enterprise class environment over the TCP/IP network. The system shall
be designed on central site connected with multiple remote sites along with the following required conditions /
aspects:
System shall be capable of local recording, local monitoring and video management at each local site. The
system ideally shall not transmit any video through remote VMS Database Server (to optimize the WAN
bandwidth) for any local access to videos (LIVE and recorded). System shall be capable of Video monitoring
(LIVE / Recorded), system & user management through a master central location.
The system shall be designed & proposed in a way that in the event of connection failure between central
VMS Database Server & local location, system shall continue to work & deliver the key functions at local site
i.e. local monitoring and local recording.
Open Standard Support: VMS Software shall be ONVIF compliant so that it can integrate with multiple digital
IP cameras, multiple digital and network video recording devices.
System Integration: System shall have Integration capabilities with electronic access control system or vice
versa.
Compression Techniques: System shall use various compression techniques simultaneously to utilize storage and
network bandwidth effectively. Video compression techniques shall including H.264, MPEG-4 and M-JPEG as
minimum.
Multi Operations: Managing pentaplex user operations of attached recording devices simultaneously, including
live viewing, recording, playback, and handling the exchange of data between the server and a remote
workstation.
Live View: Live viewing of up to 64 cameras on a single VMS-Client up to D1 resolution. VMS-Client

application shall have capability to connect to 4 monitors & 16 cameras can be viewed on one Monitor.
Alarm Management: System shall receive alarms & events from multiple video, access and alarm devices. It
shall provide capability of Alarm & event viewing, management and interlocking. Alarm interlock logic shall
reside in VMS Server which will trigger device to execute preset operations on receiving of an alarm.
Reports: Log Report shall be used to search the device alarm events, device operations, user login, and web
operation. It shall also be used to set queries to get results quickly. Log reports shall be exported in XML, CSV,
TIFF, PDF, Web Archive and Excel file formats.
User Rights: System shall provide multi-level user access rights for viewing and managing access to the recorder
functions.
Recording Modes: System shall support recording modes of continuous, scheduled, manual, event and alarmbased
recording.
Network: System shall support for both multicast and unicast network topologies and communication protocols.
Rule engine: This capability shall allow for custom scripts and to provide both customization and third party
integration. Rules Engine Service shall provide functions such as rules analysis, state monitoring and rules
management. By way of logical programming for various devices and event alarms in graphical editing interface,
Rules Engine Service shall perform automatic execution of rules when emergency occurs. The visual dynamic
user interface shall make it easy to acknowledge alarm circumstances and allows prompt response in case on
emergency.
Client Application: VMS shall provide at least Unlimited licenses as inbuilt. System shall provide unified
VMS-Client login to users. User shall be able to login from any PC loaded with VMS-Client application.
Hardware: System shall utilize off-the-shelf computer workstations, servers, networking and storage equipment.
No proprietary hardware shall be acceptable.
VMS OPERATOR FEATURES:
VMS shall provide the following operator functions:
Configuration: The operator (with Administrator privileges) shall have the option to configure the system. It
shall support live updates of all configurations. The configurations shall provide the option to add/edit/delete
recorders, cameras, switchers, keyboards, users and roles, sites, recording rule, rule engine service etc.
Configuration of video recording trigger service and device recovery service parameter shall be basic feature of
VMS.
Data Dynamic Synchronization: The configuration data in VMS shall be able to synchronous to all connected
VMS-Clients and NVR services.
Log Report: The operator shall be able to view the log reports.
VMS-CLIENT FEATURES:
VMS-Client Application shall have below mentioned features:
Live View: Main video viewing screen capable of showing 1, 4, 9, 16 and other customized split layout of live or
recorded video. Standard presets may be customized to the user preferences.
Scenarios: Current view can be saved as scenario and allowing the user to restore this view at any later point in
time. These scenarios shall be modified, overwrite or deleted as and when ever required.
Drag and Drop: VMS-Client application shall provide drag and drop functionality. Particular video device can
be dragged onto main video viewing screen to view live video.
PTZ Control: Support both analog and digital PTZ through GUI and the keyboard. PTZ control shall be used for
adjusting PTZ movement and setting the focus, aperture and preset bit of the camera.
Snapshot: Capable of capturing snapshot of live video and allowing user to export snapshot. Snapshot tool shall
be available in video window itself. Only the authorized users shall have snapshot functionality.
Video Export: VMS-Client shall have capability of download and export recorded video from recorders.
Exported video clip shall be in OEM’s native format to ensure data integrity. . However there should be the
provision in the system to export in other formats such as JPEG Images, AVI, pdf etc.
Playback: VMS-Client shall be able to playback recorded video from recorders. Different playback modes shall
be there as forward and backward playback.
NVR CAPABILITIES:
NVR shall have below mentioned capabilities
Video Streaming: NVR shall relay the real-time streaming to the VMS-Client.
Recording: NVR shall store the real-time streaming for a certain period of time when it receives the storage
command from Trigger Service.
Each individual camera can be set a different preset recording frame rate .Camera recording There shall be a
provision to set motion based/scheduled recording.
Video playback and download: NVR shall allow the user to playback and download video records from NVRClient.
It shall also allow the user to configure the storage locations.
Pre-alarm Recording: NVR shall be capable to cache the real-time streaming for a certain time (no longer than
10 minutes). When there is an event or alarm triggering recording, prerecording can help trace the situation before
the event or alarm occurs.
Remote Upgrade: NVR shall be able to be upgraded without sending device back to factory. It shall be remotely
upgraded from VMS-Client.
Specification of NVR
o Supply installation, Testing and Commissioning of adequate qty. of NVRs which shall include the
required hardware & software as per the system requirement.
o The hardware shall eliminate single point of failure, by including redundant power supplies and RAID 5
storage to optimize reliability. The System shall have a storage capacity so as to record all cameras at
1080P/2MP resolution, H.264 compression and 12 fps/10fps for multi sensor cameras and complying
with below mentioned details:
o Lifetime Licensed software to support minimum of 64 cameras having base for fixing 4TB hard disk.
o 30 days Storage. The Bidder is to submit the Storage Calculations with the offer. Comprehensive &
Integrated Software platform to handle Surveillance System.
o H.264 profile, multicasting & Dual Streaming features to make the best use of the network and storage
resources. Mapping feature to enable for the quick identification of the emergencies and response.
o Complete hardware & software are of factory fitted, qualified and tested.
o Capability to search the devices in the network, their configuration and their addition to the platform &
maintain database for the Alarms, errors, System health for easy diagnostic & System health
o Multi-layer Map Support. Supports BMP & JPEG Map Import. Hot swappable Disc storage enable for
hot rebuild & replacement. Software shall be scalable to add multiple ( min. 70 or more ) NVRs in a site
and there shall be a provision in the client to connect multiple sites/NVRs for displaying the combination
of cameras from any of the sites.
o ONVIF compliant, 3 Years Warranty.
VMS Software
o VMS Software to provide data management center\tool includes user management, system logs etc. and
event & control service which receives and controls events. However, the system should be capable to
expand virtually up to unlimited number of cameras, access points by incorporating multiple servers to
make a complete enterprise security system. System shall be capable of local recording, local monitoring
and video management. Licensed to support a minimum of 64 cameras and shall be licensed to support
unlimited clients. VMS shall have the capability to integrate with Access control system and Intrusion
systems if required in future. 3 Years Warranty & Support
o VMS-Client Application to provide live video view, various video playback support, historical video search
and playback, alarm management, Map integration and front end control features to an operator. Client
Application shall also able to manage & control all devices, PTZ Camera depending on the user access
privileges. System should support virtually unlimited VMS Clients. 3 Years Warranty & Support.
Cameras
The proposed system shall be able to support the below mentioned types of cameras and the specifications
specified for each.
IP fixed dome camera:

S No Parameter Specification
1 Sensor 1/3'' Progressive Scan CMOS Sensor
2 Effective Pixels 2048(H) x 1536(V)
3 Compression H.264 Main Profile (MPEG-4 part 10/AVC) and
Motion JPEG simultaneously
4 Dual Streaming Multiple, individually configurable streams in H.264
and Motion JPEG Controllable frame rate and
bandwidth. VBR/CBR H.264
5 Resolution 1.3 mega Pixel
6 Image Frame Rate Up to 25 fps at 50 Hz
7 Sensitivity Color 0.5 Lux , B/W 0.05
8 Automatic Lens Control Automatic/Manual Iris Control
9 Lens 3 mm fixed Remote Focus & Zoom
10 WDR ON/OFF
11 Sync System Internal
12 Security Password protection, user access log
13 Data Storage Video or Snapshot
14 White Balance Automatic , Manual
15 Electric Shutter 1/10 to 1/6000
16 Bit Rate 32Kbps-16Mbps continuously adjustment ;
CBR/VBR
17 Audio Compression G.711
18 Motion Detection 4 zones
19 Alarm Trigger Intelligent video motion detection and external input
20 Supported Protocol TCP/IP, UDP, RTP, RTSP, RTCP, HTTP, DNS,
DHCP,
21 Network Video Interface ONVIF
22 Local Storage SD/SDHC/SDXC Slot
23 Power Supply 12V DC / 24V AC
24 PoE IEEE 802.3af
25 Operating Temperature -10°C to +55°C
26 Operating Humidity 10 to 90% (non-condensing)
27 Power Consumption < 10W
28 Certification UL ,CE, FCC, EN, IEC/EN
IP PTZ Camera:
1 Sensor 1/3” or 1/2.8” or better Progressive scan CMOS
2 Lens F=4.7 – 94mm, autofocus, automatic day/night.
3 Compression H.264, MJPEG
4 Dual Streaming Multiple, individually configurable streams in
H.264 and Motion JPEG Controllable frame rate
and bandwidth. VBR/CBR H.264
5 Resolution 2 MP ( 1980(H)X1080(V)
6 Image Frame Rate Up to 30/25fps
7 Sensitivity Color 0.5 Lux Monochrome 0.05 Lux with IR LED(20-25 metre)
8 Automatic Lens Control Automatic/Manual Iris Control
9 Pan /Tilt / Zoom E-flip, 100 preset positions
Pan: 360deg endless, 0.05 deg to 450 deg / sec
Tilt : 180 deg, 0.05 deg to 450 deg /sec
20Xoptical zoom and 12x digital zoom ,
11 Auto Gain Control On
12 S/N Ratio 50dB
13 Gamma Correction 0.45/1
14 White Balance Automatic, Manual
15 Electric Shutter 1/10 to 1/6000
16 BLC Off/On ( Ajustable)
17 Audio/Two-way Audio Input/Output
18 Video Output NTSC/PAL
19 Alarm 1 in / 1 out
20 Supported Protocol HTTP, TCP, RTSP, RTP, ICMP, UDP, IGMP ,
RTCP, DNS, DHCP, ARP, NTP
22 Alarm Trigger Intelligent video motion detection and external
input
23 PoE IEEE 802.3at
24 Power 24VAC or 24 VDC Option shall be available
25 Operating Temperature - 30°C ~ 50°C
26 Operating Humidity 0% ~ 90% (non-condensing)
27 Housing IP 66 weatherproof Housing
28 Certification UL,CE/EN, FCC
IP Box/Bullet Camera:
1 Sensor Progressive scan CMOS 1/3”or better progressive scan
2 Lens Auto Iris Varifocal 3-12 mm Remote Focus &
Zoom
3 Compression H.264, MJPEG
4 Dual Streaming Multiple, individually configurable streams in
H.264 and Motion JPEG Controllable frame rate
and bandwidth. VBR/CBR H.264
5 Resolution 2 Mega Pixel ( 1980(H)X1080(V), Min 20 frames
6 Image Frame Rate Up to 30/25fps
7 Sensitivity Color 0.5 Lux Monochrome 0.05 Lux with IR LED(20-25 metre)
8 Automatic Lens Control Automatic Iris Control
9 Image Settings Compression, Colour, brightness, sharpness,
contrast, white balance, exposure control, back
light compensation, fine tuning of behavior at low
light, WDR
11 Auto Gain Control On
12 S/N Ratio 50dB
13 White Balance Automatic, Manual
14 BLC Off/On (Adjustable)
15 Audio/Two-way Audio Input/Output
16 Video Output NTSC/PAL
17 Alarm 1 in / 1 out
18 Supported Protocol HTTP, TCP, RTSP, RTP, ICMP, UDP, IGMP ,
RTCP, DNS, DHCP, ARP, NTP
20 Alarm Trigger Intelligent video motion detection and external
input
21 PoE IEEE 802.3af
22 Power
23 Operating Temperature -10°C ~ 50°C
24 Operating Humidity 0% ~ 90% (non-condensing)
25 Housing IP 66 weatherproof Housing
26 Certification UL,CE/EN, FCC
Screen Size 40-inch or bigger
Type LED TV
Aspect Ratio 16:09
Resolution (H x V) 1,920 x 1240 pixels
Moving Picture Resolution 720 lines or more
HDTV Display Capability 1080p, 1080i, 720p
Power supply 180-230v AC
Interface VGA interface, HDMI, NVR
LED Display Monitor
CAT 6 UTP cable Make: AMP / Finolex/ Polycab

· Pair Cable, 23 AWG Copper with integral cross -member pair separator for uniform characteristic impedance.
· Standardization ISO/IEC 11801 2nd Ed.; IEC 61156-5 2nd Ed.; EN 50173-1; EN 50288-6-1; • EIA/TIA
568B.2.1
· Cable overall diameter: Ø 6.3 mm.
· Cable jacket characteristics: zero-halogen
· Cable jacket characteristics: flame-retardant
· Should have tensile strength of 100N.
· The cable should have 100ohm impedance and data transmission frequencies up to 250MHz.
· It should be certified by independent test labs like 3P/Delta to meet Cat -6 Standards.
PVC flat conduit – casing capping

· Made of PVC
· 25 mm size
· Including supply of screw, band, elbow and all accessories etc.
POWER SUPPLY :

230 V + 10 % , 50 Hz + 5% shall be made available for UPS input. Bidder’s scope shall include complete power
distribution for IP CCTV system, including complete cabling work, DBs and required electrical accessories with suitable
protection devices from UPS (in bidder’s scope) and UPS output to IP CCTV cameras.
Component- Connector
All connector like RJ-45, LC connector patch cord etc required to complete the system is in
supplier’s scope.
Inspection, testing and commissioning:

The purchaser or his authorized representative shall have access to the supplier's premises at all
reasonable times to the extent necessary to assess compliance with the provisions of this specification.
All the constituent units of IP based CCTV system equipment supplied to the provisions of this
specification shall be subjected to visual, dimensional and functional inspection and testing to the
satisfaction of the purchaser. Where functional and operating tests are performed, the equipment shall
comply with all the provisions of this specification at the conclusion of such tests. To this effect written
procedures describing the stepwise inspection and testing procedures in-detail shall be submitted to the
purchaser for approval, prior to the commencement of such tests.
Test at site
After acceptance at the factory all the equipment shall be packed and transported to the site. After
delivery all the tests for hardware and software shall be repeated at the site. After the acceptance of the site
test report, installation and commissioning shall be carried out.
Real plant test (Semi industrial run)
Extensive testing of installed system at site for a period not less than 2 months under real plant
conditions shall be carried out to remove any hardware/software bugs
Commissioning
After successful completion of the semi-industrial run as per technical requirement and to the
satisfaction of purchaser, the equipment will be considered as commissioned. After it is commissioned, the
system shall be handed over to the purchaser. The supplier shall prepare a commissioning document
containing all the tests and other details. Commissioning shall be competed with 6 months from the date of
purchase order.
Guarantee
The equipment supplied shall be guaranteed for a period of 12 months from the date of commissioning
Documentation
The supplier shall provide complete details of wiring, cable routing and all necessary documents after
installation as directed by purchaser.
Cable Tags
All the cables are to be tagged as per drawing or as guided by engineer in charge with metallic tag. All
the termination of cables shall have necessary markers /ferrules and terminated through metallic ferrules by
crimping only (Industrial type).

SECTION – W
AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEM
1. General
1.1. The work under the contract shall be carried out in accordance with the schedule of items of work, the particular
specifications drawings forming part of this tender document, and the general conditions and other provisions of the
tender.
1.2. The system shall be designed in accordance with the appropriate BS, DIN or IEC recommendations.
2.1 To provide a high quality sound reinforcement system in the auditorium, for the reinforcement of ‘live’ programs on
stage, which will include but not be restricted to seminars, conferences, theatrical productions, choreography, dance and
musical shows, and possible screening of documentaries and other AV media..
2.2 To provide playback of pre-recorded material from DVD/CD/Pen drive, and recording of ‘live’ stage programs.
3. Proposed Design
3.1. The sound reinforcement system In the hall is required to serve the requirements for theatre, speech and music
sound reinforcement. The specifications call for several microphones, signal conditioning and processing, power amplifiers
and loudspeakers suitable for speech and music reinforcement chosen for adequate coverage of the seating areas.
3.2. Several microphone points to be provided in wall and floor boxes for microphones. Contractor should submit the
drawing for the same. Approval should be taken from the engineer.
3.3. All microphone points to be wired to jack strips (patch bays). Microphone points will be assigned in a completely
flexible manner to the input of the console by appropriate patching. Selected jack points to be normalled through as
required by the Owner/ engineer.
3.4. 48 channel or better mixing console should be used. The various outputs from the console will be used simultaneously
to feed various circuits for the main high level loudspeaker assemblies, monitoring, foldback, recording feed, etc.
3.5. The sound is provided through specific throw line array loudspeakers aiming the throw at each portion of the
auditorium. The line array modules designed for shall be 3-way, to handle and reproduce the high, mid and low frequency
sound seamlessly.
3.6. To reproduce the ultra-low frequencies in recorded music and DVD projection sound, sub-woofers have been provided.
3.7. Several power amplifiers drive the complement of the main, sub-woofer, foldback and green-room loudspeakers.
3.8. All equipment will be housed in 36U, 15U & 12U equipment racks and line level inputs and outputs of all the equipment
would be brought on to jack strips for patching, testing and maintenance purposes.
3.9. A stage monitoring/ fold back speaker chain has been provided with the distribution of outlets as shown in drawing.
3.10. All microphone and loudspeaker cabling will run in PVC conduits. Cables will be as specified.
3.11. The contractor would be responsible for the installation, testing and commissioning of the entire system.

While offering specific equipment, the following shall be borne in mind:

4.1. The equipment and system shall be of modular design to facilitate both expansion and service, and shall be completely
solid state. The equipment shall be of simple and sturdy design, chosen with long term reliability in mind and corresponding
parts shall be made interchangeable wherever possible having flexibility of design.
4.2. The outgoing program from the control room shall be controlled by the operator. The main control consoles shall
therefore incorporate comprehensive visual and aural monitoring facilities, and shall be user friendly.
4.3. Input/ output connection for all components are required to be brought onto two rows jack fields (pre-wired) for ease
of maintenance. Permanently connected equipment will be ‘normalled’ through the jack and patch cords with plugs
provided for special inter-connection wherever necessary.
4.4. All terminations at any point of the system will be soldered on terminal strips.
4.5. All microphone wiring and line level wiring up to and including the mixing console would be screened and PVC jacketed
cable consisting of balanced two wire plus shield. All wiring to be balanced with respect to ground.
4.6. The entire sound reinforcement system shall be capable of being monitored on
the computer using single window OEM software on the PC.
5. Performance
A professional sound reinforcement system has been proposed. The performance of the system after installation must
meet the following specifications.
5.1. Maximum program (continuous average) level in the listening areas 102dB ± 3dB SPL.
5.2. The frequency response of the system should confirm to recommended house curve for theatre from 50Hz to 12 kHz.
The loudspeakers should be aimed and aligned for a better than +3dB uniformity of coverage, front to back and side to
side, in the range of 250Hz to 6 kHz.
5.3. The system to be equalized in 1/3 octaves using a real time analyzer so as to give maximum acoustic gain. The
system response must also be equalized to confirm to recommended house curve.
5.4. Hum, noise or distortion at maximum gain settings should not exceed 35dB SPL in the listening areas.
6. Scope work
6.1. The contract is for the supply of all necessary materials and new equipment, detailed design and preparation of all
necessary drawings, and the testing, installation, and commissioning of the sound and projection systems along with the
wiring of the equipment in the conduits.
The contract shall include the following:

6.2. All necessary materials & equipment, hardware & software and the installation, testing and commissioning of the
equipment as specified complete with all necessary electric wiring to connect the sources of power supply to the
equipment.
6.3. Spares as listed plus any additional spares recommended by the manufacturers for five years operation.
7.1. It is the intention of the specifications to specify the principal performance and requirements for the sound and
projection systems.
7.2. The tenderer shall fulfill the performance design criteria of providing high quality sound reinforcement system catering
to speech and music, providing an average continuous peak SPL of 102± 3dB throughout the premises of the Auditorium,
with a minimum RaSTI/ STI level of 0.6, as a clarity of speech index.
7.3. In addition to submitting his drawings for approval, the contractor shall, whenever called upon to do so, submit for
the approval of the Engineer his calculations justifying his various proposals together with such explanations,
substantiations, and other data that may be necessary. If required to do so by the Engineer, he shall amend the basis of
his calculations and shall resubmit them together with fresh proposals based on the revised calculations.
7.4. The tenderer shall be required to submit basic system drawings with control philosophy and system description along
with their offer.
7.5 The Contractor shall submit the sound system design along with EASE mappings to authenticate the performance of
the system provided.
7.6 Integration of the complete system shall be the responsibility of the tenderer. Tender shall supply all required
compatible items to make system complete for successful integration & operation.

All special fixtures, control devices, hardware, software, system accessories etc. not specifically mentioned but that are
usual for the safety and efficiency of the audio and video equipment shall be included in the supply without any extra cost
to the contract.

The work shall be carried out according to specifications. Any deviation from these specifications either on account of
manufacturing practices or for any other reason including the measures for additional efficiency and/or safety of the
equipment under clause 3.0 above shall be clearly stated in a covering letter explaining in detail each and every departure
the contractor proposes to make from the tender giving reasons thereof.
Unless specifically mentioned it will be assumed that the tenderer agrees to supply all equipment and complete the work
exactly as specified therein and as shown in the drawings in its entirety. All deviations shall be subject to the approval of
the engineer.
10. Installation of Equipment

The layout and installation of the equipment shall be planned and carried out conforming to the best engineering and
international practices. The successful tenderer shall furnish drawings showing complete layout of the equipment as also
layout showing the location of the consoles etc. The installation of the various equipment and wiring of these units shall
be such that these are easily accessible for maintenance and routine check-up.
11. Wiring of the Entire System
11.1. The wiring of the entire system shall be neat and conforming to good engineering practices. The successful tenderer
shall furnish wiring layout scheme (conforming to layout of conduits already laid) including specifications for wires and
cables he proposes to use for -
11.1.1. Audio wiring.

11.1.2. Wiring for loudspeakers
11.1.3. Power supply to the technical equipment.
11.1.4. Earthing system.

The tenderer shall supply a complete list with quantities of major items of equipment together with detailed descriptive
literature including photographs and performance characteristics pertaining to the equipment offered.
13. Training/Technical Data

The successful tenderer shall be required to impart training in the use and maintenance of equipment as also furnish the
following data:
13.1 Overall audio-video system design offered including jack/patch points.
13.2. Detailed shop drawings and wiring installation scheme for all equipment and entire system.
13.3. Detailed circuit diagrams of individual equipment
13.4. Factory test reports.
13.5. Manuals and instructions for installation, operation and maintenance of all equipment and the sound and projection
system. Minimum of four sets of such manuals and instructions are required for each equipment, to be furnished in bound
volumes.
13.6. A final drawing showing layout of the equipment with a soft copy of the same
13.7 Real time sound simulation mapping should be on standard software.

All equipment should be capable of performing satisfactorily in an ambient temperature of 45 deg C and 80% humidity.
15. Standards
The materials used in the equipment shall conform to and be supplied in accordance with the latest revision of relevant
IS, BS, DIN or IEC standards or equivalent current at the time of tender. All the work shall also conform to the
requirements of local codes and regulations. Tenderer should justify the particular standard chosen with reference to the
operating context.
16. Name Plates

Instruction plates, name plates and labels shall be provided before commissioning of all equipment requiring indication of
operation and should be such size as to be readable at operational levels. The language of all such plates shall be in
English. Plastic or screen printed labels shall not be acceptable.
AUDIO EQUIPMENTS
Line Array Speakers

Left, Centre and Right line array speaker (90°H & 10°V, 90°H & 20°V and 120°H & 40°V)
Frequency Response (+/- 3dB) 67 Hz to 16kHz or better
Nominal Dispersion 120 degrees or better for horizontal & total of 70 degree for vertical dispersion
Frequency Bandwidth (-10 dB) 55 Hz to 16kHz or better
Long term power handling LF: 450 Watt or better, HF: 80 Watt or better
Impedance 8 Ohm or better

Sensitivity (SPL / W @ 1 Mtr) LF: 93 dB or better, HF: 107 dB or better
Max SPL @ 1 Mtr (Cont.) 129 dB or better
Flyable subwoofers
Frequency Response (+/- 3dB) 40 Hz to 120 Hz or better
Nominal Dispersion Omni directional
Long Term Power handling 800 Watt or better
Impedance 4 / 8 Ohms
Transducers min 1 X 15" or better
Stage Monitor
Frequency Response (+/- 3dB) 70 Hz to 16kHz or better
Nominal Dispersion 75 H X 10 V or better
Long term power handling 200 Watt or better
Impedance 8 Ohm or better
Sensitivity (SPL / W @ 1 Mtr) 90 dB or better
Max SPL @ 1 Mtr (Cont.) 113 dB SPL or better
Transducers LF-min 2X5” or better, MF/HF-min 1.4” or better
Green room speaker

Frequency Range 130 Hz to 19 kHz or better
Transducers 1 X 4" or better
Sound/Light control, Projection and cry room speaker

Frequency Range 130 Hz to 19 kHz or better
Transducers 1 X 2.25" or better
Sensitivity (SPL / W @ 1 Mtr) 84 dB or better
Digital amplifier (Class D)

Number of Min Channel 8 Channels
Class of Amplifier Class D or equivalent
Cont. Power Per Channel 250W @ 4Ohm or better
(impedance) 250W @ 8Ohm or better
Power @ 70/100V min 500W (bridged 2 channel) or better
Voltage Gain 32 db or better
THD <0.4% or better
IMD <0.4% or better
Damping factor >1000 or better
Inbuilt DSP like Compressor, limiter, EQ’s, Crossover, delays, routers, matrix mixers, duckers,
etc.
Dual Channel amplifier for green room

Cont. power per channel 100 W @ 4 Ohms or better, 120 W @ 70/100 V or better
A/D and D/A Converter 24 Bit / 48 kHz
THD <0.5% or better.
Dual Channel amplifier for control room

Cont. power per channel 50 W @ 4 Ohms or better, 25 W @ 8 Ohms or better
Voltage gain 32 db or better
IMD <0.4% or better.
Digital sound processor

Number of channels Min 48 channels or better
A/D and D/A Converter 24 bit or better
Communication Port RS 232; GPIO
Sampling rate 48kHz or better
Signal to noise ratio 80 dB or better
THD <0.04% or better
Dynamic Range > 107 Db or better
Controlling and networking port Ethernet or equivalent
Inbuilt DSP Compressor, Limiter, EQ'S, Crossover, Delays, Routers, Matrix mixers, Duckers etc.
Digital mixing console

Number of channels Min 48 channels or better
4 Band Parametric EQ High pass filter or better
Aux/bus Sends 12 mono or better
Digital I/O Yes
Digital effects Yes
Stage Box Yes
Touch/LCD Panel Yes
Vocal handheld Microphone

Type of transducer Dynamic
Polar Pattern Supercardioid / Cardioid/ hypercardioid
Freq Response 50Hz to 15 kHz or better
Sensitivity 1.85mv or better
Nominal impedance <360 or better
On/Off switch Yes
Wireless handheld Microphone

RF Freq Range 606Hz to 865 MHz or better
Audio bandwidth 80Hz to 16 Khz or better
S/N ratio > 110 db or better
Wireless Lapel Microphone

Modulation type Frequency
RF Freq Range 518Hz to 865 MHz or better
Audio bandwidth 80Hz to 16 KHz or better
S/N ratio > 110 db or better
Preprogrammed selectable frequencies per band 12 or better
RF power 20mW or better
Instrument microphone
Freq Response 50Hz to 14 kHz or better
Sensitivity 1.8mv or better
Nominal impedance <360 or better
Gooseneck microphone
Gooseneck Length 15" or better
RFI Shielding Yes
S/N Ratio 65 db or better
Max SPL for 1% THD 107 db or better
Freq Response 50hz to 17hz or better
LED Indication Yes
DVD cum USB player

Playback format AAC, CD, CD-R/RW, DVD-Video, JPEG, LPCM, MP3, MPEG-1, Simple MPEG4, SVCD, Video CD, WMA
Instant replay Yes
DVD/CD input Yes
USB input Yes
Floor junction box

 4 point XLR microphone input
 1 Speaker point
Connectors
UL listed connectors for interconnection of equipments.

Microphone stand
 Light weight tripod aluminium stand with long arm, boom type and chrome plating.
 Light weight tripod aluminium stand with short arm, boom type and chrome plating.
Speaker cable
 PVC insulated copper Conductor, NCFR, LHC, LSZH Insulated Cores, 2 core 4.0 sq. mm speaker cable
 PVC insulated copper Conductor, NCFR, LHC, LSZH Insulated Cores, 2 core 2.5 sq. mm speaker cable
 2 core shielded PVC insulated MIC cable with ultra low capacitance 60(pf/m), outer jacket- PVC matt, working
temperature-20 degree to 70 degree, diameter- 6.5mm, flexible.
Equipment Rack
Equipment rack min 22U with front glass door, power distribution box, internal fans and lights, wheels etc complete with
standard accessories complete as required.
Projector (3-Chip DLP projector with Long Throw Lens)

Digital Projection 3-Chip DLP or better
Technology
Resolution 1920 x 1080 HD or better
Brightness 12,000 center lumens or better
Contrast 2500:1 or better
Illumination Dual 400W NSH or better
Lens Optional powered zoom/focus lenses
Standard inputs Analog BNC ,Dual-link DVI ,Dual SD/HD-SDI ,Video decoder ,Twin HDMI ,Composite Video
x 1 (BNC) ,S-Video x 1 (mini
DIN)
Scaling Horizontal and vertical scaling, all inputs
Control & Networking Ethernet , RS232, USB or equivalent
3D upgradable Yes
Optical System Motorized Horizontal & Vertical Lens
offset
Lens Able to produce image of 400" Diagonal from a
distance of 24m-46m for 16:9 Aspect Ratio or better
Diagonal Fixed Frame Screen

Aspect Ratio 16:9 HDTV
Frame 8” Frame or better
Screen Surface Black-Backed Matt White Front Projection Surface
Screen size 400” min

CHAPTER - 3
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES/BRANDS AND MANUFACTURES
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES OF EQUIPMENTS / MATERIAL

The following are the list of approved brands/makes of equipments required under this tender. Please note that wherever
there is a multiple choice of brands/makes approved, any one make as nominated by the Employers/Consultants will have
to be supplied by the Contractor without any extra cost to the employers. No deviation in this will be accepted by the
employers.
I/We hereby declare that I/We have read and understood the above instructions which have been issued as conditions of
the contract.
In case any of the makes for any of the materials is missed out in the following list, then the contractor shall inform the
Consultants about the same and obtain the approval. Thereafter, he can produce with the supply of the materials of said
approved make
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES/BRANDS AND MANUFACTURER FOR CIVIL, PLUBING AND MISCELLANEOUS
ITEMS
Cement and Steel
1) Cement for RCC works [43 grade (conforming to IS 8112) Ordinary Portland Cement]
a. The contractor shall procure 43 grade Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to IS 8112 as required in the
work from any reputed manufacturers of cement having production capacity not less than one million
tonnes per annum as approved by the Ministry of Industry, Government of India and holding license to use
ISI certification mark for their product.

2) Cement for Non- RCC Works: [ 43 grade Ordinary Portland Cement OR any other cement]
The contractor shall procure 43 grade ordinary Portland cement conforming to IS 8112 or any other cement
as required in the work from reputed manufacturers of cement having production capacity not less than one
million tonnes or more per annum as approved by the Ministry of Industry, Government of India and holding
license to use ISI certification mark for their product.
3) STEEL:
The contractor shall procure TMT bars of Fe 500 grade from primary steel producers or any other
producerswho are using iron ore as the basic raw material/input and having crude steel capacity of 2.0
million tonnes per annum and above.
In case of non-availability of steel from primary producers,GSIDC may permit secondary producers of
TMT reinforcement bars provided the secondary producers satisfy the following conditions:
(i) The secondary producers must have valid BIS licence to produce HSD bars conforming to IS 1786 : 2008.
In addition to BIS licence, the secondary producer must have valid licence from either of the firms Tempcore,
Thermex, Evcon Turbo & Turbo Quench to produce TMT Bars and shall conform to the specifications as laid
by Tempcore, Thermex, Evcon Turbo & Turbo Quench as the case may be.
(ii) The TMT bars produced from primary producers shall conform to manufacturer’s specifications.
(iii) TMT bars procured either from primary producers or secondary producers, the specifications shall meet
the provisions of IS 1786 : 2008 pertaining to Fe 415D or Fe 500D or Fe 550D grade of steel as specified in
the tender.
iv) MILD STEEL (Fe 250) :The contractor shall procure mild steel of Fe 250 grade from primary producers or
secondary producers having valid BIS licence
Sr. No. Item Approved Makes Remarks

(1) White Cement JK, Birla
(2) Structural Steel SAIL, Rastriya Ispat N L/VIZAG, TISCO/TATA,
JSW, Ispat, Essar, Jindal to riva
(3) RHS/SHS Closed Structural SAIL, Rastriya Ispat L/VIZAG, TISCO/TATA,
JSW, Ispat, Essar
(4) Hi tensile black bolts Guest Keen Williams (GKW), TVS (8.80 Grade)
(5) Welding Electrodes Ador, Oerlikon, Esab, Adaani
(6) Precast Cement Products Astra, Michael & Michael, Basant Batons,
Dynamics, Pageant, Mallikarjun
(7) Construction Chemicals Dr. Fixit (Pidilite), Mc-Bauchmie, Fosroc, BAL,
Huntsman, Sika, GE, Hilti, Fischer, Dow
Corning, MYKchomburg, Krishna Conchem,
AppleChemie,Sunanda, Chokshi,
(8) Anchor Fasteners Hilti, Fischer
(9) Wood Work (Marine Plywood, Greenply, Century Ply, Archid Ply, Anchor,
Flush Door, Block Board) National, Kenwood, Natural, Kitply, Orchid Ply,
Dura Ply, Truewood, Prestige, Sonear, Euro, JK,
Unitex
(10) FRP Doors Om Venture, EP Kamat Group, Tuflite, Omega
(11) Pre-laminated board Novapan, Acoboard, Archidlam, , Sonear,
Greenply, Associate, Royal Touch, , Eco Boards,
Anchor, Action Tesa
(12) Laminates/Flexy Ply/Veneer Merino, Greenlam, Century, Formica, Green Ply,
Archid, Decolam, Durian, National, Wilsonart,

Homapal, Sibu, Optus, Marinolar, Century Lam,
Mica, Merino, Anchor, Trijan, Kenwood, Natural,
Duro Ply, Jaleram, Kitply, Jacson, AICA
Sunimica
(13) Hardware Fittings Ebco, Hettich, Casa, hafele, Polo/Kroma,
Dorma, Ozone, Blum Drawer System, Grass,
Godrej, Zipco, Dorset, Saint Gobain, Yale, Kich,
Everite, Enox, Neki, GKW/ Nettle Fold,
Neterford, Pitroda, Renello, Ergo, Delco, Jaguar,
(14) Adhesives Fevicol (S.H.), Araldite (Huntsman)/ Ciba

Geigy, Aldrex, ICI
(15) Aluminium Section Jindal, Indal, Hindalco, India Gypsum,Dorma
Entramatic, Bhoruka
(16) Glass Saint Gobain, Modi Guard, Asahowi, Dow Coney,
Continental
(17) Special Effect Paint Oikos, Matrix, Jotun
(18) Melamine Polish Pidilite, ICI, Berger, Asian, Nerolac, Jottun
(19) Furniture ( Office and School Godrej, Featherlite, Amardeep, Space & Style,
Furniture)/Magazine Ravela, Wipro, BP Ergo, Durian, Methodex,
racks/Newspaper stand Delite, Amber, Infinity, Neat Storage, Infiniti
(20) Wood Preservatives Wood Guard, Wood Case, Tremsil
(21) Locks / Locker Units Vijayan, Golden Unit, Haffle, Hettich, Yale
(22) SS Plates, Tubes, Pipes & Jindal, TATA, SAIL, Salem
Rods/ SS Sheets
(23) Compactor Godrej, Amardeep, Trinette, Kompress India,
Methodex
(24) Wooden Flooring Ergo, Pergo, Wood Floor, Konotex, Armstrong,
Anchor
(25) Blinds Vista, Durian, Levolor, Mac, Marvel, Hunter
Douglas, Ferrari, Iris
(26) Textured Paints Asian, Berge, Spectrum, Nitco, Oikos,
Reinassance
(27) Frosting Film Birla 3M, Garware, Llumar
(28) White Writing Boards/Notice White Mork, Alkosign, Altop, Ark,
Boards/Newspaper Stand
(29) Carpet Tiles Unitex, Mark, Equivalent
(30) a Metal False Ceiling Armstrong, Saint Gobain, Hunter Douglas
(30) b Acoustical Panelling & False Anutone, Hilux, Gypsum India, Aerolite,
Ceiling (Mineral Envirotech, Armstrong, Duratex, Fibretex
Fibre/Gypsum/ Calcium
Silicate)
(31) Wall Clock Titan, Quartz, Opal
(32) Projector Screen Epson, Optoma
(33) Incinerator in Ladies Toilet E. R. Ventures, Cecon
(34) P.V.C. Edge Banding Rehen, Dolben of Germany

(35) Vinyl Flooring Armstrong, Ego, Pergo, Wonder Floor, Hanwha
(36) Galvalume/ Zincalume Sheets Tata, Bluescope, JSW
(37) Self tapping screws for roof Corrodex, ITW, Corroshield, Roofex
(38) PVC Sheets Finroof (Finolex), GE, Danpalon
(39) Mangalore Tiles Albuquerque, Sun, C T Pai & Co,ohm tiles,
Mangalore Tiles
(40) Aluminium Facade/ Aluminium Hunter Douglas, Alucobond, Durobond,
Composite Panels Durabuild
(41) Ceramic/Vitrified/Glazed Tiles Endura, Durato, Somany, Spartek, Kajaria,
/ Fully vitrified Tac Tile Johnson, Nitco, Regent, Asian, Varmora, Orient
Bell
(42) Precast Interlocking pavers Basant Betons, Ultra, Spectra, Exflor, Dynamix,
Pageant, SMG
(43) Glass Mosaic Italia, Bisazza, Palladio
(44) Wall Putty Birla Wall care putty, J.K.
(45) Cement Paint Super Snowcem, Nitcocem
(46) Paints Asian Paints, Nerolac, Berger, ICI, Sherwin
Williams, Goa Paints, Nitco, Shalimar, J&N,
Jottun, Akzonable, Setco, Spectrum, Oikos,
Reinassance
JCL, Jenson & Nicholson, Killick Nixon, Jotun
(47) Plumbing / Sanitary ware Hindware, Parryware, Cera, Jindal, Zenith, TATA,
Fittings/Fixtures zoloto, firtop, Airfield, Jaguar, Roca, Grohe,
Moen, Neco, Finolex, Astral, Supreme, Prince,
American Express, HansGrohe, TOTO
(48) Veneer Kenwood, Anchor, Century, Greenply, Durian,
Natural, Duroply, Trojan, Jaleram, Greenlam,
,National, Kitply, Archid,Jacson
(49) Aluminium Composite Panel Alucobond, Durobond, Durabuild
(50) Carpets Interface Carpets, India Carpets, Unitex, Mark,
Ege.
(51) Zinc Oxide Asian, Nerolac, Jottun
(52) Cooler cum Purifier Eureka, Aquaguard, Blue Star
(53) Mattress & Pillow Sleepeasy, Sleepwell, Duraflex, Kurlon, Restico
(54) Cavity Flooring Titan, United Installation, DG
(55) Artificial Leather Bhor, Baron, Stanley Leather, Spinney Beck
(56) Anti-Termite Treatment Pest Control India Ltd.. Pest-O-Call
(57) Auditorium Chairs Godrej, Wipro, Amardeep, Penworker &
equivalent
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES/BRANDS AND MANUFACTURER
List of Approved MAKES of Equipment/ Material
Preferred makes of equipment and materials are given below. Although the preferred makes are given, the Contractor
shall submit samples of all materials other than heavy equipment and obtain prior approval of the Architect/ Consultants

(whose decisions shall be binding) for the make of each item before ordering the same. This condition is also applicable
to all items of equipment and material for which makes are not given in this specification:
ELECTRICAL
Sr. Items Makes (ISI marked)

No.
1 PVC conduits and Precision / Avonplast / AKG / Modi / Polycab/ Anchor by Panasonic
accessories
2 Copper multi-strand wires Polycab / Finolex / Gloster / L&T / KEI / Skytone / Rallison / Indo Asian / HPL /
Terexel / RR KABEL/Great White/ Vishal/havells/Anchor/ Vinay/ KundanCab/
Flexolite/ C&S
3 Switches / Sockets / TV, MK(Blenze)/ SSK (Signature)/ Crabtree (Anthena/ Thames)/ Legrand
Telephone Socket, etc. (Mosaic/Arteor/Myrius)/Anchor-Panasonic
(modular)- Cat A (Woods/Volvo/Ave)/Schnieder(Opale/Zencelo)
4 Switches / Sockets / Fino/Anchor-Panasonic (Roma)/Legrand(Mylink)//CPL(Genius)/L&T

TV,Telephone Socket, etc. (Oris)/MK(Midas)/Schneider(Livia)/Havells(Coral/ Pearlz)/ Crabtree(Verona)/
(modular)- Cat B ABB(Cherion)/Havells(Oro)/RR Kabel/ Vinay(Corum)/Greatwhite(Myra)
5 Switches / Sockets / Greatwhite(Fiana)/IndoAsian(Glint)/Cona/Polycab (Selene)/ABB(Classic

TV,Telephone Socket, etc. Sleek)/Vinay(Cadilla)/ Anchor-Panasonic (Rider)
(modular)- Cat C
6 MCB / ELCB / RCCB / CAT A : Legrand / Hager / Siemens/Schneider/Merlin Gerin / L&T

ISOLATORS / MCCB
/DISTRIBUTION BOARDS CAT B : Standard / Indo Asian / Group Schneider / Merlin Gerin / HPL / C &
S/ ABB/Havells/ Anchor by Panasonic
7 SFU / Fuse Switch Unit - Schneider / Siemens / L & T / Merlin Gerin /GE
Cat A
SFU / Fuse Switch Unit - Crompton / Havells/ABB / Indoasian / HPL/ Cuttler Hammer / C & S /BCH
Cat B
8 Outdoor Boxes Clipsal / Henzel / Hunter / Sintex / National
9 HRC Fuses Schneider / Siemens / L & T / Merlin Gerin /GE/Crompton / Havells/ABB /
Indoasian / HPL/ Cuttler Hammer / C & S /BCH
Industrial Sockets Clipsal / Legrand / Crompton / Cuttler Hammer / C & S

10 Fan Regulator To match with the switch / sockets
11 HT/LT Cables Polycab / Asian / Gloster / Gemscab / Universal / CCI / NICCO / Finolex / KEI /
Terexel/ Indo asian / Vishal/ Havells
12 Cable Glands Dowells / Bracco / Siemens / Comet/Comex / Jainson/Polycab

13 Cable Jointing Raychem / CCI – Xycon / Cabseal / M Seal
14 Ceiling fans - Cat A Crompton(High Speed)/ Bajaj (Regal Gold)/ Havells(Fusion II)/Usha (Striker
Deco)/ Khaitan (Zeed/Flair/Aero/Cleo)
Ceiling fans - Cat B Crompton(Mount Breeze)/Bajaj(Ultima)/Havells(Velocity)/Usha

(Wind)/Anchor(Royal/Gold/Lugano)/Khaitan(High speed Decora/Magnate
Grand)/Orient/Polar/Almonard
Ceiling fans - Cat C Polycab/Surya/Ortem

15 Exhaust / Pedestal Fan Crompton / Bajaj / Anchor / Orient / Usha / Almonard / Khaitan
16 Luminaires Philips /Erco/ GE/Ligman / Keselac Schreder/ Lighting Science/ Disano/ Atlantis
(Conventional/LED) - CAT A Lighting/ Jaquar(as specified in BOQ)
Luminaires Crompton/ Wipro/Bajaj/Havells / Panasonic(as specified in BOQ)

(Conventional/LED) - CAT
B/ CAT C
17 Telephone Wire / Cables Finolex / Tata (Lucent) / ITL / Skytone / Gemscab / Delton / National / L&T /
Polycab/ Anchor
18 Cable Tray & Race Ways Slattco / Globe / Rico Steel / Indiana / Sadhana / Legrand
(Factory Fabricated)

19 Network cable Digisol / Schneider / Avaya/ Systemax / Dlink/ Finolex/ Legrand/KEI/Polycab/
Anchor
20 Transformer Crompton / Kirloskar / Voltamp / Bharat Bijlee / KTL / ABB / Urja( Upto 500KVA
only )/ GTB
21 DG Set (Assembled by Engine – Cummins / Perkins / Catterpillar / KOEL /MTU /Greaves cotton
authorized OEA / OEM) /Leyland / Mahindra Navistar / Doosan / Volvo Group/ Eicher by Ve Commercial
Alternator – Stamford / Jyothi / Crompton Greaves / KEC / Leroy Somer -

Trident / Meccalte
22 Capacitor Siemens / Asian / Khatau Junkar / L & T /ABB / Universal/Legrand

23 ACB Siemens / L & T / GE / ABB / Sneider/ C & S / Legrand
24 VCB / HT Switch with Siemens / ABB / Crompton / Areva / L&T /Megavin
cubicle / SF6
25 CT’s / PT’s AE / Indcoil / Kappa / Ricco / Pragati / Megavin

26 APFC Relay L & T / GEC / Emercon / Alstom
27 Contactor / Timer / Starter L & T / Cuttler Hammer / Sneider / Siemens / HPL – Mollar /C & S/Legrand
28 Trivector Meter / Energy AE / Rishab / C & S / Tecnic / Siemens / Sneider / L & T / Indoasian
Meter
29 EPABX Avaya / NEC / Tata Aria / Siemens / Alcatel
30 Telephone Instrument BPL / Tata / Siemens /Avaya / NEC/Panasonic
31 Ammeter / Voltmeter / AE / Rishab / IMP / Meco / ABB / HPL
Powerfactor meter /
Frequency meter
32 Lightning Pro. System Synergy / Indelec / Stormaster(LPI)

33 HT / LT panels Any panel manufacturer having CPRI approval for similar panels
34 GI pipes Zenith / Tata / Jindal/ Apollo
35 Rotary Switch / Selector Siemens / L & T / GE / Kaycee
Switch
36 Telephone Tag Box ITL
37 UPS / Inverter Dubas / Power Ware / Aplab / Vertiv / APC / Streamline /
Numeric/Renutron/Socomec/ Consul Neowatt
38 Batteries Exide / Amaron / Panasonic / Tata/Amaraja

39 RMU with Cubicle Siemens / Sneider / ABB / Crompton greeves / L&T
40 Changeover Switch HPL / Indo Asian./ C& S
41 Voltage Stabilizer Oricon / V- Guard / Everest/Servel
42 GI Poles Bajaj / Aster / KL Industries / Valmont
43 Compact substation Pai Kane/Shivam Combines/Suncontrols/Cahors
44 Split AC Units Daikin / Mitsubishi / Toshiba / Samsung /Voltas-Midea / Bluestar/ Hitachi/
Carrier/ LG

Lifts / Elevators
Sr. No. Items Makes (ISI marked)
1 Lifts / Elevators OTIS / Schindler / Mitsubishi / Kone / Thyssenkrupp/ Omega/
Johnson
Others
1 Solar Street Lights Gajanan / SAFETEK / Honeywell

2 Vacuum cleaners Eureka firbes/black and decker/panasonic
3 Water Coolers Blue Star / Zero B / Eureka
4 Purifiers Orange / Aquabreez / Zero B / KENT / Blue Star / Eureka /
Aquaguard
5 Solar Panels Honeywell / Tata BP / Solar

6 Mortuary chamber Bluestar, Weber, Spencer

HVAC Chiller system
Sr. Items Makes (ISI marked)

No.
1 AC Controllers Honeywell / Landis & Staefa / Bell Controls/

Sauter
2 Air Handling Units Nuetech / Voltas /

Caryaire/Citizen/HPS/Zeco/ bluestar
3 Air Separator A.C. Accessories./ K.D. Agencies/

Armstrong.
4 Chillers Screw type Voltas / York / Kirloskar / Daikin

Air/water Cooled McQuay/Blue Star/ Carrier/ Dunham-Bush/
Trane.
5 Dampers : Fire Dynacraft / Cosmos / Caryaire /Ravistar/

George Rao
6 Fan Coil Units Voltas / Bluestar / Caryaire / Carrier

/Media/Sinco
7 Fans : Axial / Centrifugal / Kruger/GEC/ NADI / Nikotra/

Propeller Fans Nuaire/Oestberg
8 Flow Meter Forbes Marshall / Krone / Danfoss/ E & H/

Eureka
9 Flow Switch Procicon / Switzer / Danfoss

10 GI Sheets Jindal / TATA/ Nippon
11 Grilles / Diffusers Cosmos / Dynacraft /Airmaster/ Air
Product/ Ravistar
12 Insulation : Elastomeric Armaflex

Nitrile Rubber foamed
tubes
13 Insulation : Resin bonded UP Twiga/ Kimmco/ Owens Corning

glasswool
14 Insulation : Expanded Beardshell/ Modifoam.

polysterene
15 Insulation : Duct Thermal Armflex/ Eurobatex/ Kflex/ Vidoflex

Insulation
16 Insulation : PUF Proffessional/ Lloyd

17 Pipes and fittings: MS, Zenith/ Jindal/ TATA/HSL/Kalinga
ERW, GI
18 Pressure Differential Honeywell/ Johnson/ Siemens/ Switzer

switches
19 Pressure Gauge (Bourdon Fiebig / H-Guru /Dwyer/ FGB

type)
20 Motors and Pumps (End Kirloskar Brothers / KSB / Mather & Platt /
Suction Pumps) Grundfos/ ABB/ Siemens / CG
21 Roof Extractors GEC / NADI / Kruger / Nicotra

22 Strainers Jaypee / Grandprix / Leader/ Emerald/
Trishul
23 Thermostats, Solenoid Danfoss/ Honeywell / Johnson / Siemens /

Valves and Switches Bell controls

24 Valves : Ball Valves, Audco / Leader/ Rapidflow / Advance/
Balancing Valves, Kirloskar/ Zoloto
Butterfly, Non Return
Valve
25 Valves : 2 way / 3way/ Danfoss/ Honeywell / Johnson / Siemens /

On-Off Modulating Valve Bell controls / Anergy
Motorized
26 Variable Frequency Drives ABB / Siemens / Danfoss / Schneider
27 Cooling Tower Mihir / Paharpur
HVAC VRF System
Sr. No. Details of Materials / Manufacturer's Name

Equipment
1 Variable Refrigerant Flow Daikin / Mitsubishi / Toshiba / Samsung /Voltas-

System Midea / Bluestar Gree/ Hitachi/ Carrier/ LG
2 Chillers Screw type Air/water Voltas / York / Kirloskar / Daikin McQuay/Blue Star/
Cooled Carrier/ Dunham-Bush/ Trane.
3 Air Cooled Condensing Unit Blue Star / Carrier / Voltas / Daikin / Mitsubishi
4 Air Handling Unit Blue Star / Carryaire / HPS / Voltas / Zeco / Citizen
4 Fans : Axial / Centrifugal / Oesterberg / Comfrei / Nikotra / Kruger

Propeller Fans / Roof
extractors
5 GI Sheets TATA / Jindal

6 Grills / Diffuser Air Master / Air Products / Carryaire / Airmech /
Dynacraft / Cosmos /Ravistar
7 Swirl Diffuser & Jet Nozzles Air Master / Air Products / Carryaire / Airmech /
Dynacraft
8 Fire Damper Carryaire / Ravistar / George Rao / Dynacraft /

Cosmos
9 Volume Control Damper Air Master / Carryaire / George Rao / HPS / Airmech
10 Damper Actuator Siemens / Honeywell

11 Anchor Fasteners Fischer / Hilti
12 Filters Airtech / Dyna / Pyramid
13 Insulation
a Fiberglass (Foil Faced)/ Resin Owens Corning / Kimco / UP TWIGA
bonded glasswool
b EPS Breadsell / Modifoam / Cooline

c Nitrile Rubber Armaflex / Vidoflex / Eurobatex/ Kflex
d Protective Coating over UP TWIGA / Lloyds / Owens
Closed Cell Elastomeric -
Fiberglass Woven Cloth
e UP Protection over Nitrile Amicol / Polybond

Rubber
f Fire Sealants Birla 3M / Hilti / Promat India

14 Controls: Dial Thermometer H Guru / Teddington / Flebig
Capillary Type
15 Vibration Isolator Flexionics (USA) / Kanwal / Resistoflex

16 Self Adhesive Sealing Gasket Aeroflex / Equi
for Ducts
17 Sound Attenuators Carryaire / Trox

18 Flexible Duct Connector Mapro / Resistoflex
19 Heavy Duty Pipe Support Hira Arosio
Clamps
20 Copper Pipes / Fittings Mandev Tubes / Shrishyam / Rajco

21 Strainers Jaypee / Grandprix / Leader/ Emerald/ Trishul
22 Thermostats, Solenoid Valves Danfoss/ Honeywell / Johnson / Siemens / Bell

and Switches controls
23 Valves : Ball Valves, Audco / Leader/ Rapidflow / Advance/ Kirloskar/

Balancing Valves, Butterfly, Zoloto
Non Return Valve
24 Valves : 2 way / 3way/ On- Danfoss/ Honeywell / Johnson / Siemens / Bell

Off Modulating Valve controls / Anergy
Motorized
25 Variable Frequency Drives ABB / Siemens / Danfoss / Schneider
26 Cooling Tower Mihir / Paharpur

27 AC Controllers/ BMS Honeywell / Landis & Staefa / Bell Controls/ Sauter /
Siemens
28 Air Separator A.C. Accessories./ K.D. Agencies/ Armstrong.
29 Flow Meter Forbes Marshall / Krone / Danfoss/ E & H/ Eureka
30 Flow Switch Procicon / Switzer / Danfoss

31 Fan Coil Units Voltas / Bluestar / Caryaire / Carrier /Media/Sinco
32 Pipes and fittings: MS, ERW, Zenith/ Jindal/ TATA

GI
33 Pressure Differential switches Honeywell/ Johnson/ Siemens/ Switzer
34 Pressure Gauge (Bourdon Fiebig / H-Guru /Dwyer/ FGB

type)
35 Motors and Pumps (End Kirloskar Brothers / KSB / Mather & Platt /
Suction Pumps) Grundfos/ ABB/ Siemens / CG

Fire Alarm and Fire Fighting
Sr.No. Items Makes (ISI marked)

1 Fire Pumps KBL / M&P / Grundfos / Crompton / ITT /
Becon Weir
2 Diesel Engine Kirloskar Oil Engines Limited / Greaves Cotton

/ Ashok Leyland / M&P / Cummins
3 G.I. / M.S. Pipes Jindal / Tata / Zenith

4 Pipe Fittings R Brand / Unique / Zolotto
5 Valves Zolotto / Audco / Leader / Intervalve / C&R /
Castle / Danfoss / H Sarkar / Kartar/ KBL
6 M. S. Flanges Hawa / Unique / R Brand

7 Foot Valve with Strainer Kirloskar / Arko / Telflow / Grandprix / H
Sarker / Leader / Audco
8 Strainers Arko / Telflow / Grandprix / H Sarker /

Greaves
9 Flow Meter Forbes / Marshall / Eureka

10 Pressure Switch System Sensor / Indfoss / Danfoss / IFM /
Switzer
11 Pressure Gauge H Guru / Fiebig / Pricol / Bells

12 Anticorrosive Material IWL / Rustech / IPL / Pypkote
13 Hydrant Valves Winco / Shah Bhogilal / Newage / Safeguard /

Nitin / Minimax
14 Branch Pipe with Nozzle Winco / Shah Bhogilal / Newage / Safeguard/

Minimax/ Essel
15 Fire Hoses Dunlop / Safeguard / Rubber Hose / CRC /

Newage / Nitin / Minimax
16 Hose Couplings Shah Bhogilal / Newage / Minimax

17 Hose Reel Safex / Newage / Minimax / Safeguard /
Fyreguard / Eversafe / Nitin
18 Hose Boxes Fyreguard / Safeguard / Newage / Eversafe /

Minimax / Nitin
19 Fire Extinguishers Safex / Safeguard / Fireguard / Zenith / Firex

/ Minimax / Kanex (Confirming to ISI)
20 Sprinklers Tyco / Viking / Monsher / HD / Spray Safe /

Reliable / Automatic Sprinkler USA
21 Sprinkler Alar Valve Tyco / Viking / Monsher / HD / Spray Safe /

Reliable / Fire Protect Co.
22 Flow Switch Potter / System Sensor / Levcon / Switzer /

Honeywell
23 Paints Asian / Berger / J&N / Jotun

24 Air Release Valve Shah Bhogilal / Hawa
25 Welding Electrodes ESAB / ADVANI
26 Rossette Plates Maths / HD Fire / Tyco
27 Rubber Gaskets Champion / Sona / Steelman
28 Hanger Supports Hitech / Chilley

29 Anchor Fastner Shakti / Hilti
30 Siemess Connection Newage / Shah Bhogilal / Minimax
31 Electric Motor KEC / CG / ABB / Siemens
32 LED Indication Lamps Binay / Vaishno / Teknic/ Schneider
33 Terminal Blocks ELMEX / WAGO
34 Overload Relay L&T / Siemens / Schneider
35 Single Phase Preventors Minilec /AE
36 Engine Control Selector SALZER / KAYCEE / L&T
37 Battery Charging SALZER / L&T / KAYCEE

Selector
38 Battery Charger KAYBEE / CHABBI

39 SIREN / Hooter Kheraj / Electronic Device / Proton
40 Smoke / Heat / Beam/ Morley / Honeywell / Edwards / Notifier /
LPG / Duct / High Simplex / Apollo / GST / Bosch
Sensitivity Detectors
41 Fire Alarm Control Panel Morley / Honeywell / Edwards / GST / Apollo /

/ Repeater Panel Notifier / Siemens / Simplex / System Sensor/
Bosch
42 Hooters / Sounder / Fault Morley / Honeywell / Edwards/ Siemens /

Isolators Apollo / GST / Notifier / System Sensor /
Bosch
43 Manual Call Points / Morley / Honeywell / Edwards / GST / Notifier

Response Indicator / System Sensor / Apollo / Bosch
44 Addressable Modules Morley / Honeywell / Edwards / GST

45 Level switch for water Pune Techtrol / Johnson controls
tank
46 Wrapping and coating Rustech / Neotape
47 Pressurization fans Nutech/ System Air/ United air

48 Screened cable Udey / Kei / Delton / Finolex

CCTV & Networking
Sr. No. ITEM APPROVED BRANDS
1 Wireless N Selectable Dlink / Cisco / HP Procurve / Entrasys

Dualband Access Point with / Digisol
PoE
2 Cat - 6 UTP Cable Digisol/Dlink / AMP / Schneider /
Systimax/ Anchor by Panasonic
3 POE/ Networking Sony / Bosch / Dlink / DigiSol
Switches
4 Storage box Sony / Bosch / Dlink / DigiSol
5 IP based camera Sony / Bosch / Dlink / DigiSol/
Honeywell/ CP Plus
6 EPABX Alcatel/ Siemens / Avaya / NEC /LG
Aria
7 Operator console Alcatel / Siemens / Intelicon / Avaya
/ NEC
8 sw Alcatel / Siemens / Avaya / NEC /BPL
/Tata
9 Analog Phones Alcatel / Siemens / Avaya / NEC /BPL
/Tata
10 LED Projector EPSON / LG /SANYO / PANASONIC
/NEC /TOSHIBA/ HITACHI
11 HD Video Conferencing POLYCOM / TANDBERG
Setup
12 Plasma TV/ Monitor SAMSUNG / SONY / PANASONIC /LG
13 Projector EPSON / LG /SANYO / PANASONIC
/NEC /TOSHIBA/ HITACHI
14 Electronic Ceiling lift Draper ,Dalite , Chief
15 Motorized Projector Screen Draper ,Dalite , Chief
16 Table Top Microphone AKG / SHURE / Schenizer / Revolabs
17 Wireless Lapel Mic. AKG / SHURE / Schenizer / Revolabs
18 Wireless Hand held mic AKG / SHURE / Schenizer / Revolabs
19 AEC Signal Processor BSS / Nion / Yamaha / Shure
20 Two zone Amplifier Crown / Yamaha / QSE
21 Ceiling Speakers BOSCH / JBL / Extron / Tannoy
22 In Wall Speakers BOSCH / JBL / Extron / Tannoy
23 PRI Module for VC POLYCOM / TANDBERG
24 DVD recorder Panasonic, SONY
25 Surface Access Enclosure Extron , Crestron, AMX
26 Architectural Adapter Extron , Crestron, AMX
Plates
27 Video and RGB Scalar with Extron , Crestron, AMX
Audio
28 Matrix Switchers for RGB Extron , Crestron, AMX
and Stereo Audio
29 Lighting Automation Crestron , Dynalite
Processor and Power
Supply
30 Fluorescent Dimmer Crestron , Dynalite
31 Wireless Access Point DLINK /CISCO / Digisol
32 Touchpanel Media Centre Crestron , Dynalite
33 Relay Module MILESTONE / Creston
34 VGA Cable EXTRON / KRAMER

35 Composite Video cable EXTRON / KRAMER
36 S-video cable EXTRON / KRAMER
37 Speaker Cable EXTRON / KRAMER
38 Serial Control/Audio Cables EXTRON / KRAMER
39 VGA, RCA, Audio, XLR, etc Reputed Make
connectors,
40 AV Equipment Rack Valrack / Knurr / APC

41 TV Sony / Panasonic / LG / Samsung /
Philips
42 DVD players Sony / Panasonic / LG / Samsung /
Philips

AUDIO VISUAL
S.No. ITEM DESCRIPTION Makes
1 MICROPHONES AND ACCESSORIES
Shure / Sennheiser / Electrovoice
a Vocal Microphone:
/AKG
b Instrument Microphone : Shure / Sennheiser / Electrovoice
Shure Beta / Sennheiser /

c Microphone General:
Electrovoice
d Boundary microphone: Electrovoice / Shure / Sennheiser
e Gooseneck microphone Shure / Sennheiser / Electrovoice
f Shot gun Microphones : Shure / Sennheiser / AKG
g UHF Handheld Wireless Microphone set: Shure / Sennheiser / Electrovoice
h UHF Lapel Wireless Microphone set: Shure / Sennheiser / Electrovoice
2 MICROPHONE CABLES
a Snake cable: Sommer / Belden / Monster/Krammer
3 MICROPHONE STANDS:
a Floor Stand AKG / Shure
b Table stand AKG / Shure
4 MICROPHONE CONNECTOR BOXES ON STAGE:
As per original equipment

a Stage connector box
manufacturer
As per original equipment

c connector box
manufacturer
5 SOUND PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
a CD Player: Denon/Pioneer/ Marantz/ Tascam
b Digital Signal Processer Bose/Electrovoice / DBX / Dynacord

Bose/Midas Venice / Identical
c live audio mixer
Soundcraft
d mixer Bose/Dynacord / Mackie
e Digital Processor: Bose/Shure / FBX
f Digital effect processor: Bose/ Yamaha/ Electronics/ Lexicon
6 Power Amplifiers
Bose/Electrovoice / Labgrupen / d&b
a Remote monitorable power amplifier
audiotechnik /Bose
Bose/Electrovoice / QSC / d&b

b Dual channel power amplifier
audiotechnik /Bose
7 SPEAKER SYSTEM
Bose/Electrovoice / JBL / d&b
a Compact Line array Element
audiotechnik /Bose
Bose/Electrovoice / JBL /d&b

b Stage foldback Monitor Speaker
audiotechnik MAX monitor/Bose

c Green Room/Surround/ Balcony fill Speaker
audiotechnik /Bose

d Subwoofer
audiotechnik /Bose

e Flying tripal 12" Arrayable cardiod Subwoofer
audiotechnik /Bose
8 HARDWARES
OE manufactured suspension system for line array
a As per Speaker manufacturer
mounting
Connectors, terminal strips in junction boxes, patch

b panel, patch Cords, etc (LOT) required for main As per Speaker manufacturer
auditorium
Connectors, terminal strips in junction boxes, patch

c As per Speaker manufacturer
panel, patch Cords, etc (LOT) for small auditorium
9 WIRING SYSTEM
a Microphone cable : Sommer / Belden
b Loudspeaker cable : Finolex / Polycab
c Equipment Rack Valrack/ APC/ Kanurr
10 DIGITAL CINEMA PROJECTION
a Digital Projector: Barco / Christie / NEC
b Dolby Digital screen server Dolby / Doremi
Perforated Screen for cinema with Fixed frame with
c Custom
imported screen material.
Dolby Digital Cinema Processor

d Dolby Surround processor
CP 750
e Cables & connectors for Cinema system Sommer / Belden
Stage Lighting, Drapery & Drops

Sl . No. Details Of Materials Manufacture’s Name
i) Mayur
ii) Rayan
1 Velvet Cloth iii) Mosse

iv) Raymonds
v) Omphile
i) Mayur
ii) Rayan
2 Glazed Cotton Cloth iii) Mosse

iv) Raymonds
v) Omphile
i) Showtex
ii) JC Joel
3 Cyclorama Screen iii) Omphile

iv) Raymonds
4 DMX Point Wiring Polycab / Finolex / Gloster / L&T / KEI / Skytone / Rallison / Indo
Asian / HPL / Terexel / RR KABEL/Great White/
Vishal/havells/Anchor/ Vinay/ KundanCab/ Flexolite/ C&S
5 Light Point Wiring

Polycab / Finolex / Gloster / L&T / KEI / Skytone / Rallison / Indo
Asian / HPL / Terexel / RR KABEL/Great White/
Vishal/havells/Anchor/ Vinay/ KundanCab/ Flexolite/ C&S
i) Desisti
ii) ARRI
iii) Canara lighting v ) Spotlight
vi ) ETC
6 Stage Lighting Fixtures vii) Robe
vii) Clay Paky
viii) selecon
i) Avolites
ii) liteputer
7 Dimmer, Controller & ii) Zero 88
Splitter iii) ADB
i) Waagner Biro
ii) Stage lighting
8 Fixed Light bars iii) Stage technologies

iv) Canara Lighting
i) Stage lighting
9 Motorised Light bars ii) Stage technologies

iii) Canara Lighting
i) Waagner Biro

10 Motorised Curtain track ii) Stage technologies
system
iii) Canara Lighting
i) Canara Lighting
11 Side ladders & Wings ii) Stage technologies

iii) Waagner Biro
i) Waagner Biro
12 Cable trays & Internal ii) Stage technologies

earthing system
iv) Canara Lighting

v) Slattco / Globe / Rico Steel /
Indiana / Sadhana / Legrand
i) Osram
13 Lamps ii) GE
iii) Philips
i) Canara Lighting
ii) L&T
14 Lighting Junction boxes iii) Havels

iv) ABB
i) Canara Lighting
ii) ABB
15 DMX Junction boxes iii) SCHNEIDER

iv) L&T
i) Canara Lighting
ii) ABB
16 PDCP/MCBP/MCCP/RCP iii) SCHNEIDER
iv) L&T
v) Havels
NOTES: -
1. Make of any other item left out shall be approved by Consultant before procurement.
2. Make of the accessories shall also be approved by Consultant.
List of Material Installed/Procured on site:-

ELECTRICAL
Sr. No. Items
1 Transformer
2 DG
3 Light Fixtures
4 HT/LT-Cables
5 Metering Cubical
6 630 Amp. VCB
7 LT Panels
8 DB/MCB/MCCB
9 UPS
HVAC
1. Chiller – 90TR x 2Nos.

2. Chilled water Pumps – 270 USGPM x 3 Nos
3. Pressurization unit with expansion tank – 1 Nos.
4. Chilled water piping.
5. Air handling Unit of following capacity :
AHU 1 - 13000 CFM (44 tons) unit with Mixing box and Thermal break Set 1
AHU 4 - 8000 CFM (23 tons) unit Set 1
6. Variable refrigerant flow Outdoor unit. – 36HP x 2 Nos.
7. Electrical Works:
a. Motor control central panel.
b. AHU panel with star Delta.
c. AHU panel with DOL starter.
d. Ventilation Fan control panel.
HVAC Item supplied on site:
8. Variable refrigerant flow indoor unit –
Unit of capacity not less than 1.5 ton No 1

Unit of capacity not less than 2 ton No 6
9. Cassette type DX split type Air-conditioning :
Cassette type Machines of capacity not less than 1.5 No 1

ton

Cassette type Machines of capacity not less than 2 ton No 6
Cassette type Machines of capacity not less than 3 ton No 3

NIT196 Volume II

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NIT196 Volume II

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GOA STATE INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT

Tel :(0832)-6645769 to 6645773, Fax:(0832)-2226256

Email – email@gsidcltd.com Website – http://www.gsidcltd.com

“CONSTRUCTION OF KALABHAVAN AT SANCOALE,-BALANCE WORK & ANCILLIARY WORKS”

PROJECT MANAGEMENT CONSULTANT

CHAPTER NO. 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER NO. 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section A - Dismantling and Demolition work

Section B – Site Clearing and Grubbing

Section C – Earthwork & Metal packing and Subsurface Drainage

Section D – Concrete: Plain & Reinforced

Section E – Form Work

Section G – Structural Steel work

Section H – Masonry Works

Section I – Plastering & Pointing works

Section J – White washing, colour washing, Distempering, Painting

Section L – Carpentry, Joinery, Aluminium Doors & Windows

Section M – Roof, side cladding.

Section N – Water proofing

Section O – Plumbing, Drainage, Water supply (Sanitation)

Section Q -Electrical works

Section R - Fire fighting works

Section S- HVAC works

Section T – Theater & Stage & Stage Equipment.

Section U- CCTV Surveillance System

Section V- Audio Video System

CHAPTER NO 3 LIST OF APPROVED MAKES /BRANDS AND MANUFACTURERS

BIDDER Page 2 of 305 EMPLOYER

CHAPTER 1 : GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cum/Cu.M - Cubic Meters

BIDDER Page 3 of 305 EMPLOYER

1.2 Reference to the Standard Codes of Practice :

1.3 Contractor to provide :

BIDDER Page 4 of 305 EMPLOYER

3 Balance, capacity up to 10 kg, reading to 5 gm.

5 Glass measuring flasks of ½, 1, and 2 litre capacity.

6 Flask for determining moisture content of sand.

7 Slump cone with rod for slump test.

BIDDER Page 5 of 305 EMPLOYER

1.5 Setting out of Works :

2 Sampling and Testing :

1.7 Storing of Materials at site :

1 Water from approved source :

BIDDER Page 7 of 305 EMPLOYER

1.10 Loading Tests :

DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION WORK

BIDDER Page 8 of 305 EMPLOYER

Extent and Methods of Demolition:

BIDDER Page 9 of 305 EMPLOYER

F. Cutting and Drilling:

BIDDER Page 11 of 305 EMPLOYER

BIDDER Page 13 of 305 EMPLOYER

SITE CLEARING AND GRUBBING

1 Uprooting and leveling

BIDDER Page 14 of 305 EMPLOYER

EARTHWORK , METAL PACKING , SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE & EARTHWORK IN FILLING

BIDDER Page 15 of 305 EMPLOYER

Top layer of filling 98% modified Proctor Dry density at OMC

A.12. Backfilling for subsurface drains (Filter drains) :

Sieve Percent by weight passing the sieve

The filter material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 200mm

A.13. Metal Packing :